Are you sure?
This action might not be possible to undo. Are you sure you want to continue?
Subscribers to this printed periodical are entitled to free online access. If you do not yet have online access via your
institution’s network, contact your librarian or, if you subscribe personally, send an email to SourceOECD@oecd.org.
H
a
n
d
b
o
o
k
o
n
C
o
n
s
t
r
u
c
t
i
n
g
C
o
m
p
o
s
i
t
e
I
n
d
i
c
a
t
o
r
s
M
E
T
H
O
D
O
L
O
G
Y
A
N
D
U
S
E
R
G
U
I
D
E
ISBN 9789264043459
30 2008 25 1 P
:HSTCQE=UYXYZ^:
Handbook on Constructing Composite Indicators
METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE
This Handbook is a guide for constructing and using composite indicators for policy makers,
academics, the media and other interested parties. While there are several types of composite
indicators, this Handbook is concerned with those which compare and rank country performance in
areas such as industrial competitiveness, sustainable development, globalisation and innovation. The
Handbook aims to contribute to a better understanding of the complexity of composite indicators and
to an improvement of the techniques currently used to build them. In particular, it contains a set of
technical guidelines that can help constructors of composite indicators to improve the quality of their
outputs.
Handbook
on Constructing
Composite
Indicators
METHODOLOGY
AND USER GUIDE
AVAILABLE ON LINE
Handbook
on Constructing
Composite Indicators
METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE
001002999eng.fm Page 1 Tuesday, August 19, 2008 7:41 AM
ORGANISATION FOR ECONOMIC COOPERATION
AND DEVELOPMENT
The OECD is a unique forum where the governments of 30 democracies work together to
address the economic, social and environmental challenges of globalisation. The OECD is also at
the forefront of efforts to understand and to help governments respond to new developments and
concerns, such as corporate governance, the information economy and the challenges of an
ageing population. The Organisation provides a setting where governments can compare policy
experiences, seek answers to common problems, identify good practice and work to coordinate
domestic and international policies.
The OECD member countries are: Australia, Austria, Belgium, Canada, the Czech Republic,
Denmark, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Japan, Korea,
Luxembourg, Mexico, the Netherlands, New Zealand, Norway, Poland, Portugal, the Slovak Republic,
Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Turkey, the United Kingdom and the United States. The Commission of
the European Communities takes part in the work of the OECD.
OECD Publishing disseminates widely the results of the Organisation’s statistics gathering and
research on economic, social and environmental issues, as well as the conventions, guidelines and
standards agreed by its members.
Corrigenda to OECD publications may be found on line at: www.oecd.org/publishing/corrigenda.
© OECD 2008
You can copy, download or print OECD content for your own use, and you can include excerpts from OECD publications, databases and multimedia
products in your own documents, presentations, blogs, websites and teaching materials, provided that suitable acknowledgment of OECD as source
and copyright owner is given. All requests for public or commercial use and translation rights should be submitted to rights@oecd.org. Requests for
permission to photocopy portions of this material for public or commercial use shall be addressed directly to the Copyright Clearance Center (CCC)
at info@copyright.com or the Centre français d'exploitation du droit de copie (CFC) contact@cfcopies.com.
This work is published on the responsibility of the SecretaryGeneral of the OECD. The
opinions expressed and arguments employed herein do not necessarily reflect the official views of
the Organisation or of the governments of its member countries or of the European Commission.
Neither the European Commission nor any person acting on behalf of the Commission is
responsible for the use which might be made of this publication.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 3
FOREWORD
This Handbook aims to provide a guide to the construction and use of composite indicators,
for policymakers, academics, the media and other interested parties. While there are several types of
composite indicators, this Handbook is concerned with those which compare and rank country
performance in areas such as industrial competitiveness, sustainable development, globalization and
innovation. The Handbook aims to contribute to a better understanding of the complexity of composite
indicators and to an improvement in the techniques currently used to build them. In particular, it
contains a set of technical guidelines that can help constructors of composite indicators to improve the
quality of their outputs.
It has been jointly prepared by the OECD (the Statistics Directorate and the Directorate for
Science, Technology and Industry) and the Econometrics and Applied Statistics Unit of the Joint
Research Centre (JRC) of the European Commission in Ispra, Italy. Primary authors from the JRC are
Michela Nardo, Michaela Saisana, Andrea Saltelli and Stefano Tarantola. Primary authors from the
OECD are Anders Hoffmann and Enrico Giovannini. Editorial assistance was provided by Candice
Stevens, Gunseli Baygan, Karsten Olsen and Sarah Moore.
Many people contributed to improve this handbook with their valuable comments and
suggestions. The authors wish to thank especially Jochen Jesinghaus from the European Commission,
DG Joint Research Centre; Tanja Srebotnjak from the Yale Center for Environmental Law and Policy;
Laurens Cherchye and Tom Van Puyenbroeck from the Catholic University of Leuven; Pascal Rivière
from INSEE ; Tom Griffin, Senior Statistical Adviser to the UNDP Human Development Report; and
Ari LATVALA from the European Commission, DG Enterprise and Industry.
A special thank goes to Giuseppe Munda (Universitat Autònoma de Barcelona and European
Commission, DG Joint Research Centre) who supplied all the material for the chapter on aggregation
methods and the box on measurement scales and to Eurostat (Unit B5'Methodology and research',
DDG02 ' Statistical governance, quality and evaluation' and other members of the Task Force on
Composite Indicators) for the useful comments and the improvements they suggested. We are also
grateful to the Statistical Offices of the OECD Committee on Statistics whose comments contributed
to enhance the quality of this handbook.
Further information on the topics treated in this handbook and on other issues related to
composite indicators can be found in the web page: http://compositeindicators.jrc.ec.europa.eu/
The research was partly funded by the European Commission, Research Directorate, under
the project KEI (Knowledge Economy Indicators), Contract FP6 No. 502529. In the OECD context,
the work has benefited from a grant from the Danish Government. The views expressed are those of
the authors and should not be regarded as stating an official position of either the European
Commission or the OECD.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 5
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................... 13
Pros and cons of composite indicators ..................................................................................... 13
Aim of the Handbook ............................................................................................................... 14
What’s next .............................................................................................................................. 17
PART I. CONSTRUCTING A COMPOSITE INDICATOR ..................................................... 19
1. Steps for constructing a composite indicator .................................................................. 19
1.1 Developing a theoretical framework ............................................................................... 22
1.2 Selecting variables .......................................................................................................... 23
1.3 Imputation of missing data .............................................................................................. 24
1.4 Multivariate analysis ....................................................................................................... 25
1.5 Normalisation of data ...................................................................................................... 27
1.6 Weighting and aggregation ............................................................................................. 31
1.7 Robustness and sensitivity .............................................................................................. 34
1.8 Back to the details ........................................................................................................... 35
1.9 Links to other variables ................................................................................................... 39
1. 10 Presentation and dissemination ....................................................................................... 40
2. A quality framework for composite indicators ................................................................ 44
2.1 Quality profile for composite indicators .......................................................................... 44
2.2 Quality dimensions for basic data .................................................................................... 46
2.3 Quality dimensions for procedures to
build and disseminate composite indicators .................................................................... 48
PART 2. A TOOLBOX FOR CONSTRUCTORS ...................................................................... 51
Step 3. Imputation of missing data ........................................................................................... 55
3.1 Single imputation ............................................................................................................. 55
3.2 Unconditional mean imputation ....................................................................................... 56
3.3 Regression imputation ...................................................................................................... 56
3.4 Expected maximisation imputation .................................................................................. 57
3.5 Multiple imputation .......................................................................................................... 58
Step 4. Multivariate analysis .................................................................................................... 63
4.1 Principal components analysis ......................................................................................... 63
4.2 Factor analysis .................................................................................................................. 69
4.3 Cronbach Coefficient Alpha ............................................................................................ 72
4.4 Cluster analysis ................................................................................................................ 73
4.5 Other methods for multivariate analysis .......................................................................... 79
6 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
Step 5. Normalisation ............................................................................................................... 83
5.1 Scale transformation prior to normalisation ..................................................................... 83
5.2 Standardisation (or zscores) ............................................................................................ 84
5.3 MinMax .......................................................................................................................... 85
5.4 Distance to a reference ..................................................................................................... 85
5.5 Indicators above or below the mean ................................................................................. 86
5.6 Methods for cyclical indicators ........................................................................................ 86
5.7 Percentage of annual differences over consecutive years ................................................ 86
Step 6. Weighting and aggregation .......................................................................................... 89
Weighting methods .......................................................................................................... 89
6.1 Weights based on principal components analysis or factor analysis ................................ 89
6.2 Data envelopment analysis (DEA) ................................................................................... 91
6.3 Benefit of the doubt approach (BOD) .............................................................................. 92
6.4 Unobserved components model (UCM) .......................................................................... 94
6.5 Budget allocation process (BAP) ..................................................................................... 96
6.6 Public opinion .................................................................................................................. 96
6.7 Analytic hierarchy process (AHP) ................................................................................... 96
6.8 Conjoint analysis (CA) ..................................................................................................... 98
6.9 Performance of the different weighting methods ............................................................. 99
Aggregation methods ..................................................................................................... 102
6.10 Additive aggregation methods ....................................................................................... 102
6.11 Geometric aggregation ................................................................................................... 103
6.12 On the aggregation rules issue:
lessons learned from social choice and multicriteria decision analysis ........................ 104
6.13 Noncompensatory multicriteria approach (MCA) ....................................................... 112
6.14 Performance of the different aggregation methods ........................................................ 115
Step 7. Uncertainty and sensitivity analysis ........................................................................... 117
7.1 General framework........................................................................................................ 118
7.2 Uncertainty analysis (UA)............................................................................................. 118
7.3 Sensitivity analysis using variancebased techniques ................................................... 121
7.3.1 Analysis 1 ...................................................................................................................... 124
7.3.2 Analysis 2 ...................................................................................................................... 129
Step 8. Back to the details ...................................................................................................... 132
CONCLUDING REMARKS..................................................................................................... 137
REFERENCES .......................................................................................................................... 141
APPENDIX: TECHNOLOGY ACHIEVEMENT INDEX ....................................................... 151
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 7
TABLES
Table 1. Checklist for building a composite indicator ....................................................... 20
Table 2. Strengths and weaknesses of multivariate analysis ............................................. 26
Table 3. Normalisation methods ........................................................................................ 30
Table 4. Compatibility between aggregation and weighting methods ............................... 31
Table 5. Quality dimensions of composite indicators ........................................................ 49
Table 6. Correlation matrix for individual TAI indicators................................................. 64
Table 7. Eigenvalues of individual TAI indicators ............................................................ 65
Table 8. Component loadings for individual TAI indicators ............................................. 69
Table 9. Rotated factor loadings for individual TAI indicators (method 1) ...................... 71
Table 10. Rotated factor loadings for individual TAI indicators (method 2) ...................... 71
Table 11. Cronbach coefficient alpha results for individual TAI indicators ....................... 73
Table 12. Distance measures for individual TAI indicators between
two objects and over dimensions ........................................................................ 75
Table 13. Kmeans for clustering TAI countries ................................................................. 78
Table 14. Normalisation based on interval scales ................................................................ 83
Table 15. Examples of normalisation techniques using TAI data ....................................... 87
Table 16. Eigenvalues of TAI data set ................................................................................. 90
Table 17. Factor loadings of TAI based on principal components ...................................... 90
Table 18. Weights for the TAI indicators based on maximum likelihood (ML)
or principal components (PC) method
for the extraction of the common factors ............................................................. 91
Table 19. Benefit of the doubt (BOD) approach applied to TAI ......................................... 94
Table 20. Comparison matrix of eight individual TAI indicators........................................ 97
Table 21. Comparison matrix of three individual TAI indicators........................................ 97
Table 22. TAI weights based on different methods ........................................................... 100
Table 23. TAI country rankings based on different weighting methods ........................... 100
Table 24. Advantages and disadvantages of different weighting methods ........................ 101
Table 25. 21 indicators and 4 countries ............................................................................. 106
Table 26. A frequency matrix for the application of Borda's rule ..................................... 107
Table 27. Outranking matrix derived from the Concordet approach ................................. 107
Table 28. An original Concordet example ......................................................................... 108
Table 29. An original Concordet example ......................................................................... 108
Table 30. Outranking matrix derived from Table 27 ......................................................... 108
Table 31. Fishburn example on Borda rule ........................................................................ 109
8 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
Table 32. Frequency matrix derived from Table 31 .......................................................... 109
Table 33. Frequency matrix derived from Table 31 without country d ............................. 110
Table 34. An unsolvable ranking problem ......................................................................... 112
Table 35. Impact matrix for TAI (five countries) .............................................................. 113
Table 36. Outranking impact matrix for TAI (five countries) ........................................... 114
Table 37. Permutations obtained from the outranking matrix
for TAI and associated score ............................................................................. 114
Table 38. TAI country rankings by different aggregation methods ................................... 116
Table 39. Sobol' sensitivity measures of first order and total effects on TAI results ........ 128
Table 40. Sobol' sensitivity measures and average shift in TAI rankings ......................... 130
Table 41. Impact of eliminating two indicators from the TAI example ............................ 134
Table 42. Path analysis results for TAI:
total effect impact of the indicators on the TAI scores ...................................... 135
Table A.1 List of individual indicators of the Technology Achievement Index .................. 151
Table A.2 Raw data for the individual indicators
of the Technology Achievement Index ................................................................ 152
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 9
FIGURES
Figure 1. Example of bar chart decomposition presentation ............................................... 36
Figure 2. Example of leader/laggard decomposition presentation ...................................... 37
Figure 3. Example of spider diagram decomposition presentation ..................................... 37
Figure 4. Example of colour decomposition presentation ................................................... 38
Figure 5. Link between TAI and GDP per capita, 2000 ..................................................... 39
Figure 6. Example of tabular presentation of composite indicator ..................................... 41
Figure 7. Example of bar chart presentation of composite indicator .................................. 42
Figure 8. Example of line chart presentation of composite indicator ................................. 42
Figure 9. Example of trend diagram composite indicator ................................................... 43
Figure 10. Logic of multiple imputation ............................................................................... 59
Figure 11. Markov Chain Monte Carlo imputation method .................................................. 60
Figure 12. Eigenvalues for individual TAI numbers ............................................................. 68
Figure 13. Country clusters for individual TAI indicators .................................................... 76
Figure 14. Linkage distance vs fusion step in TAI's hierarchical cluster .............................. 77
Figure 15. Means plot for TAI clusters ................................................................................. 78
Figure 16. Data envelopment analysis (DEA) performance frontier .................................... 92
Figure 17. Analytical hierarchy process (AHP) weighting of the TAI indicators................. 98
Figure 18. Uncertainty analysis of TAI country rankings ................................................... 125
Figure 19. Sobol' sensitivity measures of firstorder TAI results ....................................... 126
Figure 20. Sobol' sensitivity measures of TAI total effect indices ...................................... 127
Figure 21. Netherlands' ranking by aggregation and weighting systems ............................ 127
Figure 22. Uncertainty analysis for TAI output variable .................................................... 128
Figure 23. Average shift in TAI country rankings by
aggregation and weighting combinations .......................................................... 129
Figure 24. Uncertainty analysis of TAI country rankings ................................................... 130
Figure 25. Simple example of path analysis ....................................................................... 133
Figure 26. Standardised regression coefficients for the TAI............................................... 133
10 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
BOXES
Box 1. Pros and Cons of Composite Indicators ....................................................................... 13
Box 2. Technology Achievement Index (TAI) ........................................................................ 17
Box 3. Measurement scales ...................................................................................................... 53
Box 4. Rules of thumb in choosing the imputation method ..................................................... 62
Box 5. Assumptions in principal component analysis ............................................................. 66
Box 6. A sample of "stopping rules" ........................................................................................ 70
Box 7. Measures of association ................................................................................................ 81
Box 8. Time distance ............................................................................................................... 88
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 11
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
AHP Analytic Hierarchy Processes
BAP Budget Allocation Process
BOD Benefit of the Doubt
CA Conjoint Analysis
CCA Canonical Correlation Analysis
CI Composite Indicator
CKYL CondorcetKemenyYoungLevenglick
CLA Cluster Analysis
DEA Data Envelopment Analysis
DFA Discriminant Function Analysis
DQAF Data Quality Framework
EC European Commission
EM Expected Maximisation
EU European Union
EW Equal weighting
FA Factor Analysis
GCI Growth Competitiveness Index
GDP Gross Domestic Product
GME Geometric aggregation
HDI Human Development Index
ICT Information and Communication Technologies
IMF International Monetary Fund
INSEE National Institute for Statistics and Economic Studies (France)
JRC Joint Research Centre
KMO KaiserMeyerOlkin
LIN Linear aggregation
MAR Missing At Random [in the context of imputation methods]
12 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
MCA MultiCriteria Approach
MCAR Missing Completely At Random [in the context of imputation methods]
MCMC Markov Chain Monte Carlo
MCTAI Monte Carlo version of the Technology Achievement Index
MI Multiple Imputation
ML Maximum Likelihood
MSE Mean Square Error
NCMC Noncompensatory multicriteria analysis
NMAR Not Missing At Random [in the context of imputation methods]
OECD Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development
PC Principal Component
PCA Principal Components Analysis
PISA Programme for International Student Assessment (OECD)
R&D Research and Development
RMS Residual Mean Square
SEM Structural Equation Modelling
SII Summary Innovation Index
TAI Technology Achievement Index
UCM Unobserved Components Model
UN United Nations
UNDP United Nations Development Program
VIF Varianceinflation factor
WEF World Economic Forum
WHO World Health Organisation
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 13
INTRODUCTION
Composite indicators (CIs) which compare country performance are increasingly recognised as a
useful tool in policy analysis and public communication. The number of CIs in existence around the
world is growing year after year (for a recent review see Bandura, 2006, which cites more than 160
composite indicators). Such composite indicators provide simple comparisons of countries that can be
used to illustrate complex and sometimes elusive issues in wideranging fields, e.g., environment,
economy, society or technological development.
It often seems easier for the general public to interpret composite indicators than to identify
common trends across many separate indicators, and they have also proven useful in benchmarking
country performance (Saltelli, 2007). However, composite indicators can send misleading policy
messages if they are poorly constructed or misinterpreted. Their “big picture” results may invite users
(especially policymakers) to draw simplistic analytical or policy conclusions. In fact, composite
indicators must be seen as a means of initiating discussion and stimulating public interest. Their
relevance should be gauged with respect to constituencies affected by the composite index.
Pros and cons of composite indicators
In general terms, an indicator is a quantitative or a qualitative measure derived from a series of
observed facts that can reveal relative positions (e.g. of a country) in a given area. When evaluated at
regular intervals, an indicator can point out the direction of change across different units and through
time. In the context of policy analysis (see Brand et al., 2007, for a case study on alcohol control policies
in the OECD countries), indicators are useful in identifying trends and drawing attention to particular
issues. They can also be helpful in setting policy priorities and in benchmarking or monitoring
performance. A composite indicator is formed when individual indicators are compiled into a single
index on the basis of an underlying model. The composite indicator should ideally measure multi
dimensional concepts which cannot be captured by a single indicator, e.g. competitiveness,
industrialisation, sustainability, single market integration, knowledgebased society, etc. The main pros
and cons of using composite indicators are the following (Box 1) (adapted from Saisana &
Tarantola, 2002):
Box 1. Pros and Cons of Composite Indicators
Pros: Cons:
• Can summarise complex, multidimensional
realities with a view to supporting decision
makers.
• Are easier to interpret than a battery of many
separate indicators.
• Can assess progress of countries over time.
• Reduce the visible size of a set of indicators
without dropping the underlying information
base.
• May send misleading policy messages if
poorly constructed or misinterpreted.
• May invite simplistic policy conclusions.
• May be misused, e.g. to support a desired
policy, if the construction process is not
transparent and/or lacks sound statistical or
conceptual principles.
• The selection of indicators and weights could
be the subject of political dispute.
14 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
Box 1. Pros and Cons of Composite Indicators
Pros: Cons:
• Thus make it possible to include more
information within the existing size limit.
• Place issues of country performance and
progress at the centre of the policy arena.
• Facilitate communication with general public
(i.e. citizens, media, etc.) and promote
accountability.
• Help to construct/underpin narratives for lay
and literate audiences.
• Enable users to compare complex
dimensions effectively.
• May disguise serious failings in some
dimensions and increase the difficulty of
identifying proper remedial action, if the
construction process is not transparent.
• May lead to inappropriate policies if
dimensions of performance that are difficult to
measure are ignored.
Composite indicators are much like mathematical or computational models. As such, their
construction owes more to the craftsmanship of the modeller than to universally accepted scientific rules
for encoding. With regard to models, the justification for a composite indicator lies in its fitness for the
intended purpose and in peer acceptance (Rosen, 1991). On the dispute over whether composite
indicators are good or bad per se, it has been noted:
The aggregators believe there are two major reasons that there is value in combining indicators in
some manner to produce a bottom line. They believe that such a summary statistic can indeed
capture reality and is meaningful, and that stressing the bottom line is extremely useful in garnering
media interest and hence the attention of policy makers. The second school, the nonaggregators,
believe one should stop once an appropriate set of indicators has been created and not go the further
step of producing a composite index. Their key objection to aggregation is what they see as the
arbitrary nature of the weighting process by which the variables are combined. (Sharpe, 2004)
According to other commentators:
[…] it is hard to imagine that debate on the use of composite indicators will ever be settled […]
official statisticians may tend to resent composite indicators, whereby a lot of work in data
collection and editing is “wasted” or “hidden” behind a single number of dubious significance. On
the other hand, the temptation of stakeholders and practitioners to summarise complex and
sometime elusive processes (e.g. sustainability, single market policy, etc.) into a single figure to
benchmark country performance for policy consumption seems likewise irresistible. (Saisana et
al., 2005a)
Aim of the Handbook
This Handbook does not aim to resolve the debate, but only to contribute to a better understanding
of the complexity of composite indicators and to an improvement in the techniques currently used to
build them. In particular, it contains a set of technical guidelines that can help builders of composite
indicators to improve the quality of their outputs.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 15
The proposal to develop a Handbook was launched at the end of a workshop on composite
indicators jointly organised by the JRC and OECD in the spring of 2003 which demonstrated:
• The growing interest in composite indicators in academic circles, the media and among policy
makers;
• The existence of a wide range of methodological approaches to composite indicators, and;
• The need, clearly expressed by participants at the workshop, to have international guidelines in
this domain.
Therefore, the JRC and OECD launched a project, open to other institutions, to develop the present
Handbook. Key elements of the Handbook were presented at a second workshop, held in Paris in
February 2004, while its aims and outline were presented to the OECD Committee on Statistics in June
2004. This version of the Handbook is a revision of the document published in 2005 in the OECD’s
statistics working paper series and contains an update of current research in the field.
The main aim of the Handbook is to provide builders of composite indicators with a set of
recommendations on how to design, develop and disseminate a composite indicator. In fact,
methodological issues need to be addressed transparently prior to the construction and use of composite
indicators in order to avoid data manipulation and misrepresentation. In particular, to guide constructors
and users by highlighting the technical problems and common pitfalls to be avoided, the first part of the
Handbook discusses the following steps in the construction of composite indicators:
• Theoretical framework. A theoretical framework should be developed to provide the basis for
the selection and combination of single indicators into a meaningful composite indicator under
a fitnessforpurpose principle.
• Data selection. Indicators should be selected on the basis of their analytical soundness,
measurability, country coverage, relevance to the phenomenon being measured and relationship
to each other. The use of proxy variables should be considered when data are scarce.
• Imputation of missing data. Consideration should be given to different approaches for imputing
missing values. Extreme values should be examined as they can become unintended
benchmarks.
• Multivariate analysis. An exploratory analysis should investigate the overall structure of the
indicators, assess the suitability of the data set and explain the methodological choices, e.g.
weighting, aggregation.
• Normalisation. Indicators should be normalised to render them comparable. Attention needs to
be paid to extreme values as they may influence subsequent steps in the process of building a
composite indicator. Skewed data should also be identified and accounted for.
• Weighting and aggregation. Indicators should be aggregated and weighted according to the
underlying theoretical framework. Correlation and compensability issues among indicators
need to considered and either be corrected for or treated as features of the phenomenon that
need to retained in the analysis.
16 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
• Robustness and sensitivity. Analysis should be undertaken to assess the robustness of the
composite indicator in terms of, e.g., the mechanism for including or excluding single
indicators, the normalisation scheme, the imputation of missing data, the choice of weights and
the aggregation method.
• Back to the real data. Composite indicators should be transparent and fit to be decomposed into
their underlying indicators or values.
• Links to other variables. Attempts should be made to correlate the composite indicator with
other published indicators, as well as to identify linkages through regressions.
• Presentation and Visualisation. Composite indicators can be visualised or presented in a
number of different ways, which can influence their interpretation.
The first part of the Handbook also offers a thorough discussion on the quality framework for
composite indicators, in which the relationships between methodologies used to construct and
disseminate composite indicators and different quality dimensions are sketched.
The second part of the Handbook, the “Toolbox for Constructors”, presents and discusses in more
detail popular methodologies already in use in the composite indicator community.
For explanatory purposes, a concrete example (the Technology Achievement Index  TAI) is used to
illustrate the various steps in the construction of a composite indicator and to highlight problems that
may arise. The TAI is a composite indicator developed by the United Nations for the Human
Development Report (UN, 2001; FukudaParr, 2003). It is composed of a relatively small number of
individual indicators, which renders it suitable for the didactic purposes of this Handbook (Box 2).
Moreover, the TAI is well documented by its developers and the underlying data are freely available on
the Internet. For the sake of simplicity, only the first 23 of the 72 original countries measured by the TAI
are considered here. Further details are given in the Appendix. A warning: the TAI (like any other
composite indicator mentioned in this Handbook) is not intended to be an example of “good practice” but
rather a flexible explanatory tool, which serves to clarify some of the issues treated.
The following notation is employed throughout the Handbook (more formal definitions are given in
the Second Part: Toolbox for Constructors):
t
c , q
x : raw value of individual indicator q for country c at time t, with q=1,…,Q and c=1,…,M.
t
c , q
I : normalised value of individual indicator q for country c at time t.
q , r
w : weight associated to individual indicator q, with r=1,…,R denoting the weighting method.
t
c
CI : value of the composite indicator for country c at time t.
For reasons of clarity, the time suffix is normally omitted and is present only in certain sections.
When no time indication is present, the reader should consider that all variables have the same time
dimension.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 17
Box 2. Technology Achievement Index (TAI)
The TAI focuses on four dimensions of technological capacity (data given) in Table A.1
Creation of technology. Two individual indicators are used to capture the level of innovation in a society:
(i) the number of patents granted per capita (to reflect the current level of innovative activities), and (ii) receipts from
royalty and license fees from abroad per capita (to reflect the stock of successful innovations that are still useful and
hence have market value).
Diffusion of recent innovations. Diffusion is measured by two individual indicators: (i) diffusion of the Internet
(indispensable to participation), and (ii) exports of high and mediumtechnology products as a share of all exports.
Diffusion of old innovations. Two individual indicators are included: telephones and electricity. These are
needed to use newer technologies and have wideranging applications. Both indicators are expressed as logarithms,
as they are important at the earlier stages of technological advance, but not at the most advanced stages.
Expressing the measure in logarithms ensures that as the level increases, it contributes less to technology
achievement.
Human skills. Two individual indicators are used to reflect the human skills needed to create and absorb
innovations: (i) mean years of schooling and (ii) gross enrolment ratio of tertiary students in science, mathematics
and engineering.
What’s next
The literature on composite indicators is vast and almost every month new proposals are published
on specific methodological aspects potentially relevant for the development of composite indicators. In
this Handbook, taking into account its potential audience, we have preferred to make reference to
relatively well established methodologies and procedures, avoiding the inclusion of some interesting, but
still experimental, approaches. However, the Handbook should be seen as a “live” product, with
successive editions being issued as long as new developments are taking place. On the other hand, this
version of the Handbook does not cover the “composite leading indicators” normally used to identify
cyclical movements of economic activity. Although the OECD has a longstanding tradition and much
experience in this field, we have preferred to exclude them, because they are based on statistical and
econometric approaches quite different from those relevant for other types of composite indicators.
The quality of a composite indicator as well as the soundness of the messages it conveys depend not
only on the methodology used in its construction but primarily on the quality of the framework and the
data used. A composite based on a weak theoretical background or on soft data containing large
measurement errors can lead to disputable policy messages, in spite of the use of stateoftheart
methodology in its construction.
1
This Handbook has nothing to say about specific theoretical
frameworks: our opinion is that the peer community is ultimately the legitimate forum to judge the
soundness of the framework and fitness for purpose of the derived composite. Our aim is much less
ambitious, namely to propose a set of statistical approaches and common practices which can assure the
technical quality of a composite. Whichever framework is used, transparency must be the guiding
principle of the entire exercise.
During the process of revision of this handbook we received many useful suggestions about
arguments or issues to add (or to treat in more detail). These will be the subject of future work. In
particular the following aspects should receive more attention in future versions of this handbook:
18 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
• Time dimension and longitudinal datasets
• Criteria for deciding whether an indicator is appropriate
• More on normalization methods and on their relationship with measurement issues.
• Relationship between the practice of CI and the traditional measurement theory developed in
psychometrics and in particular the relationship between effect and cause indicators and the
statistical tools proposed in the various chapters.
• More detailed discussion and application of structural equation modelling and Bayesian
analysis for composite indicator development.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 19
PART I. CONSTRUCTING A COMPOSITE INDICATOR
1. STEPS FOR CONSTRUCTING A COMPOSITE INDICATOR
This Handbook presents its recommendations following an “ideal sequence” of ten steps, from the
development of a theoretical framework to the presentation and dissemination of a composite indicator.
Each step is extremely important, but coherence in the whole process is equally vital. Choices made in
one step can have important implications for others: therefore, the composite indicator builder has not
only to make the most appropriate methodological choices in each step, but also to identify whether they
fit together well.
Composite indicator developers have to face a justifiable degree of scepticism from statisticians,
economists and other groups of users. This scepticism is partially due to the lack of transparency of some
existing indicators, especially as far as methodologies and basic data are concerned. To avoid these risks,
the Handbook puts special emphasis on documentation and metadata. In particular, the Handbook
recommends the preparation of relevant documentation at the end of each phase, both to ensure the
coherence of the whole process and to prepare in advance the methodological notes that will be
disseminated together with the numeric results.
Part 1 of the Handbook provides an overview of the individual steps in the construction of
composite indicators and discusses the quality framework for composite indicators.
Table 1 provides a stylised ‘checklist’ to be followed in the construction of a composite indicator,
which is discussed in more detail in the next sections. Detailed information about the methodological
tools to be used in each step is presented in the Part II of the Handbook.
20 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
Table 1. Checklist for building a composite indicator
Step Why it is needed
1. Theoretical framework
Provides the basis for the selection and combination of variables
into a meaningful composite indicator under a fitnessforpurpose
principle (involvement of experts and stakeholders is envisaged at
this step).
• To get a clear understanding and
definition of the multidimensional
phenomenon to be measured.
• To structure the various subgroups
of the phenomenon (if needed).
• To compile a list of selection criteria
for the underlying variables, e.g.,
input, output, process.
2. Data selection
Should be based on the analytical soundness, measurability,
country coverage, and relevance of the indicators to the
phenomenon being measured and relationship to each other. The
use of proxy variables should be considered when data are scarce
(involvement of experts and stakeholders is envisaged at this step).
• To check the quality of the available
indicators.
• To discuss the strengths and
weaknesses of each selected
indicator.
• To create a summary table on data
characteristics, e.g., availability
(across country, time), source, type
(hard, soft or input, output, process).
3. Imputation of missing data
Is needed in order to provide a complete dataset (e.g. by means of
single or multiple imputation).
• To estimate missing values.
• To provide a measure of the
reliability of each imputed value, so
as to assess the impact of the
imputation on the composite
indicator results.
• To discuss the presence of outliers
in the dataset.
4. Multivariate analysis
Should be used to study the overall structure of the dataset, assess
its suitability, and guide subsequent methodological choices
(e.g., weighting, aggregation).
• To check the underlying structure of
the data along the two main
dimensions, namely individual
indicators and countries (by means
of suitable multivariate methods,
e.g., principal components analysis,
cluster analysis).
• To identify groups of indicators or
groups of countries that are
statistically “similar” and provide an
interpretation of the results.
• To compare the statistically
determined structure of the data set
to the theoretical framework and
discuss possible differences.
5. Normalisation
Should be carried out to render the variables comparable.
• To select suitable normalisation
procedure(s) that respect both the
theoretical framework and the data
properties.
• To discuss the presence of outliers
in the dataset as they may become
unintended benchmarks.
• To make scale adjustments, if
necessary.
• To transform highly skewed
indicators, if necessary.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 21
Step Why it is needed
6. Weighting and aggregation
Should be done along the lines of the underlying theoretical
framework.
• To select appropriate weighting and
aggregation procedure(s) that
respect both the theoretical
framework and the data properties.
• To discuss whether correlation
issues among indicators should be
accounted for.
• To discuss whether compensability
among indicators should be allowed.
7. Uncertainty and sensitivity analysis
Should be undertaken to assess the robustness of the composite
indicator in terms of e.g., the mechanism for including or excluding
an indicator, the normalisation scheme, the imputation of missing
data, the choice of weights, the aggregation method.
• To consider a multimodelling
approach to build the composite
indicator, and if available, alternative
conceptual scenarios for the
selection of the underlying indicators.
• To identify all possible sources of
uncertainty in the development of the
composite indicator and accompany
the composite scores and ranks with
uncertainty bounds.
• To conduct sensitivity analysis of the
inference (assumptions) and
determine what sources of
uncertainty are more influential in the
scores and/or ranks.
8. Back to the data
Is needed to reveal the main drivers for an overall good or bad
performance. Transparency is primordial to good analysis and
policymaking.
• To profile country performance at the
indicator level so as to reveal what is
driving the composite indicator
results.
• To check for correlation and
causality (if possible).
• to identify if the composite indicator
results are overly dominated by few
indicators and to explain the relative
importance of the subcomponents
of the composite indicator.
9. Links to other indicators
Should be made to correlate the composite indicator (or its
dimensions) with existing (simple or composite) indicators as well as
to identify linkages through regressions.
• To correlate the composite indicator
with other relevant measures, taking
into consideration the results of
sensitivity analysis.
• To develop datadriven narratives
based on the results.
10. Visualisation of the results
Should receive proper attention, given that the visualisation can
influence (or help to enhance) interpretability
• To identify a coherent set of
presentational tools for the targeted
audience.
• To select the visualisation technique
which communicates the most
information.
• To present the composite indicator
results in a clear and accurate
manner.
22 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
1.1. Developing a theoretical framework
What is badly defined is likely to be badly measured
A sound theoretical framework is the starting point in constructing composite indicators. The
framework should clearly define the phenomenon to be measured and its subcomponents, selecting
individual indicators and weights that reflect their relative importance and the dimensions of the overall
composite. This process should ideally be based on what is desirable to measure and not on which
indicators are available.
For example, gross domestic product (GDP) measures the total value of goods and services
produced in a given country, where the weights are estimated based on economic theory and reflect the
relative price of goods and services. The theoretical and statistical frameworks to measure GDP have
been developed over the last 50 years and a revision of the 1993 System of National Accounts is
currently being undertaken by the major international organisations. However, not all multidimensional
concepts have such solid theoretical and empirical underpinnings. Composite indicators in newly
emerging policy areas, e.g. competitiveness, sustainable development, ebusiness readiness, etc., might
be very subjective, since the economic research in these fields is still being developed. Transparency is
thus essential in constructing credible indicators. This entails:
• Defining the concept. The definition should give the reader a clear sense of what is being
measured by the composite indicator. It should refer to the theoretical framework, linking
various subgroups and the underlying indicators. For example, the Growth Competitiveness
Index (GCI) developed by the World Economic Forum is founded on the idea “that the process
of economic growth can be analysed within three important broad categories: the
macroeconomic environment, the quality of public institutions, and technology.” The GCI has,
therefore, a clear link between the framework (whatever this is) and the structure of the
composite indicator. Some complex concepts, however, are difficult to define and measure
precisely or may be subject to controversy among stakeholders. Ultimately, the users of
composite indicators should assess their quality and relevance.
• Determining subgroups. Multidimensional concepts can be divided into several subgroups.
These subgroups need not be (statistically) independent of each other, and existing linkages
should be described theoretically or empirically to the greatest extent possible. The Technology
Achievement Index, for example, is conceptually divided into four groups of technological
capacity: creation of technology, diffusion of recent innovations, diffusion of old innovations
and human skills. Such a nested structure improves the user’s understanding of the driving
forces behind the composite indicator. It may also make it easier to determine the relative
weights across different factors. This step, as well as the next, should involve experts and
stakeholders as much as possible, in order to take into account multiple viewpoints and to
increase the robustness of the conceptual framework and set of indicators.
• Identifying the selection criteria for the underlying indicators. The selection criteria should
work as a guide to whether an indicator should be included or not in the overall composite
index. It should be as precise as possible and should describe the phenomenon being measured,
i.e. input, output or process. Too often composite indicators include both input and output
measures. For example, an Innovation Index could combine R&D expenditures (inputs) and the
number of new products and services (outputs) in order to measure the scope of innovative
activity in a given country. However, only the latter set of output indicators should be included
(or expressed in terms of output per unit of input) if the index is intended to measure innovation
performance.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 23
By the end of Step 1 the constructor should have:
• A clear understanding and definition of the multidimensional phenomenon to be measured.
• A nested structure of the various subgroups of the phenomenon if needed.
• A list of selection criteria for the underlying variables, e.g. input, output, process.
• Clear documentation of the above.
1.2. Selecting variables
A composite indicator is above all the sum of its parts
The strengths and weaknesses of composite indicators largely derive from the quality of the
underlying variables. Ideally, variables should be selected on the basis of their relevance, analytical
soundness, timeliness, accessibility, etc. Criteria for assuring the quality of the basic data set for
composite indicators are discussed in detail in Section 2: “Quality Framework for Composite Indicators”.
While the choice of indicators must be guided by the theoretical framework for the composite, the data
selection process can be quite subjective as there may be no single definitive set of indicators. A lack of
relevant data may also limit the developer’s ability to build sound composite indicators. Given a scarcity
of internationally comparable quantitative (hard) data, composite indicators often include qualitative
(soft) data from surveys or policy reviews.
Proxy measures can be used when the desired data are unavailable or when crosscountry
comparability is limited. For example, data on the number of employees that use computers might not be
available. Instead, the number of employees who have access to computers could be used as a proxy. As
in the case of soft data, caution must be taken in the utilisation of proxy indicators. To the extent that data
permit, the accuracy of proxy measures should be checked through correlation and sensitivity analysis.
The builder should also pay close attention to whether the indicator in question is dependent on GDP or
other sizerelated factors. To have an objective comparison across small and large countries, scaling of
variables by an appropriate size measure, e.g. population, income, trade volume, and populated land area,
etc. is required. Finally, the type of variables selected – input, output or process indicators – must match
the definition of the intended composite indicator.
The quality and accuracy of composite indicators should evolve in parallel with improvements in
data collection and indicator development. The current trend towards constructing composite indicators
of country performance in a range of policy areas may provide further impetus to improving data
collection, identifying new data sources and enhancing the international comparability of statistics. On
the other hand we do not marry the idea that using what is available is necessarily enough. Poor data will
produce poor results in a “garbagein, garbageout logic. From a pragmatic point of view, however,
compromises need to be done when constructing a composite. What we deem essential is the
transparency of these compromises.
24 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
By the end of Step 2 the constructor should have:
• Checked the quality of the available indicators.
• Discussed the strengths and weaknesses of each selected indicator.
• Created a summary table on data characteristics, e.g. availability (across country, time), source, type (hard, soft
or input, output, process).
1.3. Imputation of missing data
The idea of imputation could be both seductive and dangerous
Missing data often hinder the development of robust composite indicators. Data can be missing in a
random or nonrandom fashion. The missing patterns could be:
Missing completely at random (MCAR). Missing values do not depend on the variable of interest or
on any other observed variable in the data set. For example, the missing values in variable income would
be of the MCAR type if (i) people who do not report their income have, on average, the same income as
people who do report income; and if (ii) each of the other variables in the data set would have to be the
same, on average, for the people who did not report their income and the people who did report their
income.
Missing at random (MAR). Missing values do not depend on the variable of interest, but are
conditional on other variables in the data set. For example, the missing values in income would be MAR
if the probability of missing data on income depends on marital status but, within each category of
marital status, the probability of missing income is unrelated to the value of income. Missing by design,
e.g. if survey question 1 is answered yes, then survey question 2 is not to be answered, are also MAR as
missingness depends on the covariates.
Not missing at random (NMAR). Missing values depend on the values themselves. For example,
high income households are less likely to report their income.
Unfortunately, there is no statistical test for NMAR and often no basis on which to judge whether
data are missing at random or systematically, while most of the methods that impute missing values
require a missing at random mechanism, i.e. MCAR or MAR. When there are reasons to assume a non
random missing pattern (NMAR), the pattern must be explicitly modelled and included in the analysis.
This could be very difficult and could imply ad hoc assumptions that are likely to influence the result of
the entire exercise.
There are three general methods for dealing with missing data: (i) case deletion, (ii) single
imputation or (iii) multiple imputation. The first, also called complete case analysis, simply omits the
missing records from the analysis. However, this approach ignores possible systematic differences
between complete and incomplete samples and produces unbiased estimates only if deleted records are a
random subsample of the original sample (MCAR assumption). Furthermore, standard errors will
generally be larger in a reduced sample, given that less information is used. As a rule of thumb, if a
variable has more than 5% missing values, cases are not deleted (Little & Rubin, 2002).
The other two approaches consider the missing data as part of the analysis and try to impute values
through either single imputation, e.g. mean/median/mode substitution, regression imputation, hotand
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 25
colddeck imputation, expectationmaximisation imputation, or multiple imputation, e.g. Markov Chain
Monte Carlo algorithm. Data imputation could lead to the minimisation of bias and the use of ‘expensive
to collect’ data that would otherwise be discarded by case deletion. However, it can also allow data to
influence the type of imputation. In the words of Dempster & Rubin (1983):
The idea of imputation is both seductive and dangerous. It is seductive because it can lull the user
into the pleasurable state of believing that the data are complete after all, and it is dangerous because
it lumps together situations where the problem is sufficiently minor that it can be legitimately
handled in this way and situations where standard estimators applied to real and imputed data have
substantial bias.
The uncertainty in the imputed data should be reflected by variance estimates. This makes it
possible to take into account the effects of imputation in the course of the analysis. However, single
imputation is known to underestimate the variance, because it partially reflects the imputation
uncertainty. The multiple imputation method, which provides several values for each missing value, can
more effectively represent the uncertainty due to imputation.
No imputation model is free of assumptions and the imputation results should hence be thoroughly
checked for their statistical properties, such as distributional characteristics, as well as heuristically for
their meaningfulness, e.g. whether negative imputed values are possible.
By the end of Step 3 the constructor should have:
• A complete data set without missing values.
• A measure of the reliability of each imputed value so as to explore the impact of imputation on the composite
indicator.
• Discussed the presence of outliers in the dataset
• Documented and explained the selected imputation procedures and the results.
1.4. Multivariate analysis
Analysing the underlying structure of the data is still an art
Over the last few decades, there has been an increase in the number of composite indicators being
developed by various national and international agencies. Unfortunately, individual indicators are
sometimes selected in an arbitrary manner with little attention paid to the interrelationships between
them. This can lead to indices which overwhelm, confuse and mislead decisionmakers and the general
public. Some analysts characterise this environment as “indicator rich but information poor”. The
underlying nature of the data needs to be carefully analysed before the construction of a composite
indicator. This preliminary step is helpful in assessing the suitability of the data set and will provide an
understanding of the implications of the methodological choices, e.g. weighting and aggregation, during
the construction phase of the composite indicator. Information can be grouped and analysed along at least
two dimensions of the data set: individual indicators and countries.
• Grouping information on individual indicators. The analyst must first decide whether the
nested structure of the composite indicator is well defined (see Step 1) and whether the set of
26 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
available individual indicators is sufficient or appropriate to describe the phenomenon (see
Step 2). This decision can be based on expert opinion and the statistical structure of the data set.
Different analytical approaches, such as principal components analysis, can be used to explore
whether the dimensions of the phenomenon are statistically wellbalanced in the composite
indicator. If not, a revision of the individual indicators might be necessary.
The goal of principal components analysis (PCA) is to reveal how different variables change in
relation to each other and how they are associated. This is achieved by transforming correlated
variables into a new set of uncorrelated variables using a covariance matrix or its standardised
form – the correlation matrix. Factor analysis (FA) is similar to PCA, but is based on a
particular statistical model. An alternative way to investigate the degree of correlation among a
set of variables is to use the Cronbach coefficient alpha (calpha), which is the most common
estimate of internal consistency of items in a model or survey. These multivariate analysis
techniques are useful for gaining insight into the structure of the data set of the composite.
However, it is important to avoid carrying out multivariate analysis if the sample is small
compared to the number of indicators, since results will not have known statistical properties.
• Grouping information on countries. Cluster analysis is another tool for classifying large
amounts of information into manageable sets. It has been applied to a wide variety of research
problems and fields, from medicine to psychiatry and archaeology. Cluster analysis is also used
in the development of composite indicators to group information on countries based on their
similarity on different individual indicators. Cluster analysis serves as: (i) a purely statistical
method of aggregation of the indicators, ii) a diagnostic tool for exploring the impact of the
methodological choices made during the construction phase of the composite indicator, (iii) a
method of disseminating information on the composite indicator without losing that on the
dimensions of the individual indicators, and (iv) a method for selecting groups of countries for
the imputation of missing data with a view to decreasing the variance of the imputed values.
When the number of variables is large or when is it believed that some of them do not contribute to
identifying the clustering structure in the data set, continuous and discrete models can be applied
sequentially. Researchers frequently carry out a PCA and then apply a clustering algorithm on the object
scores on the first few components, called “tandem analysis”. However, caution is required, as PCA or
FA may identify dimensions that do not necessarily help to reveal the clustering structure in the data and
may actually mask the taxonomic information (Table 2).
Table 2. Strengths and weaknesses of multivariate analysis
Strengths Weaknesses
Principal
Components/
Factor Analysis
Can summarise a set of individual
indicators while preserving the
maximum possible proportion of the
total variation in the original data set.
Largest factor loadings are assigned
to the individual indicators that have
the largest variation across countries,
a desirable property for crosscountry
comparisons, as individual indicators
that are similar across countries are of
little interest and cannot possibly
explain differences in performance.
Correlations do not necessarily represent the
real influence of the individual indicators on the
phenomenon being measured.
Sensitive to modifications in the basic data: data
revisions and updates, e.g. new countries.
Sensitive to the presence of outliers, which may
introduce a spurious variability in the data.
Sensitive to smallsample problems, which are
particularly relevant when the focus is on a
limited set of countries.
Minimisation of the contribution of individual
indicators which do not move with other
individual indicators.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 27
Strengths Weaknesses
Cronbach
Coefficient Alpha
Measures the internal consistency in
the set of individual indicators,
i.e. how well they describe a uni
dimensional construct. Thus it is
useful to cluster similar objects.
Correlations do not necessarily represent the
real influence of the individual indicators on the
phenomenon expressed by the composite
indicator.
Meaningful only when the composite indicator is
computed as a ‘scale’ (i.e. as the sum of the
individual indicators).
Cluster Analysis Offers a different way to group
countries; gives some insight into the
structure of the data set.
Purely a descriptive tool; may not be transparent
if the methodological choices made during the
analysis are not motivated and clearly
explained.
Various alternative methods combining cluster analysis and the search for a lowdimensional
representation have been proposed, focusing on multidimensional scaling or unfolding analysis.
Factorial kmeans analysis combines kmeans cluster analysis with aspects of FA and PCA. A discrete
clustering model together with a continuous factorial model are fitted simultaneously to twoway data to
identify the best partition of the objects, described by the best orthogonal linear combinations of the
variables (factors) according to the leastsquares criterion. This has a wide range of applications since it
achieves a double objective: data reduction and synthesis, simultaneously in the direction of objects and
variables. Originally applied to shortterm macroeconomic data, factorial kmeans analysis has a fast
alternating leastsquares algorithm that extends its application to large data sets. This methodology can
be recommended as an alternative to the widelyused tandem analysis.
By the end of Step 4 the constructor should have:
• Checked the underlying structure of the data along various dimensions, i.e. individual indicators, countries.
• Applied the suitable multivariate methodology, e.g. PCA, FA, cluster analysis.
• Identified subgroups of indicators or groups of countries that are statistically “similar”.
• Analysed the structure of the data set and compared this to the theoretical framework.
• Documented the results of the multivariate analysis and the interpretation of the components and factors.
1.5. Normalisation of data
Avoid adding up apples and oranges
Normalisation is required prior to any data aggregation as the indicators in a data set often have
different measurement units. A number of normalisation methods exist (Table 3) (Freudenberg, 2003;
Jacobs et al., 2004):
1. Ranking is the simplest normalisation technique. This method is not affected by outliers and
allows the performance of countries to be followed over time in terms of relative positions
(rankings). Country performance in absolute terms however cannot be evaluated as information
on levels is lost. Some examples that use ranking include: the Information and Communications
Technology Index (Fagerberg, 2001) and the Medicare Study on Healthcare Performance
across the United States (Jencks et al., 2003).
28 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
2. Standardisation (or zscores) converts indicators to a common scale with a mean of zero and
standard deviation of one. Indicators with extreme values thus have a greater effect on the
composite indicator. This might not be desirable if the intention is to reward exceptional
behaviour, i.e., if an extremely good result on a few indicators is thought to be better than a lot
of average scores. This effect can be corrected in the aggregation methodology, e.g. by
excluding the best and worst individual indicator scores from inclusion in the index or by
assigning differential weights based on the “desirability” of the individual indicator scores.
3. MinMax normalises indicators to have an identical range [0, 1] by subtracting the minimum
value and dividing by the range of the indicator values.
2
However, extreme values/or outliers
could distort the transformed indicator. On the other hand, MinMax normalisation could widen
the range of indicators lying within a small interval, increasing the effect on the composite
indicator more than the zscore transformation.
4. Distance to a reference measures the relative position of a given indicator visàvis a reference
point. This could be a target to be reached in a given time frame. For example, the Kyoto
Protocol has established an 8% reduction target for CO2 emissions by 2010 for European
Union members. The reference could also be an external benchmark country. For example, the
United States and Japan are often used as benchmarks for the composite indicators built in the
framework of the EU Lisbon agenda. Alternatively, the reference country could be the average
country of the group and would be assigned a value of 1, while other countries would receive
scores depending on their distance from the average. Hence, standardised indicators that are
higher than 1 indicate countries with aboveaverage performance. The reference country could
also be the group leader, in which the leading country receives 1 and the others are given
percentage points away from the leader. This approach, however, is based on extreme values
which could be unreliable outliers.
5. Categorical scale assigns a score for each indicator. Categories can be numerical, such as one,
two or three stars, or qualitative, such as ‘fully achieved’, ‘partly achieved’ or ‘not achieved’.
Often, the scores are based on the percentiles of the distribution of the indicator across
countries. For example, the top 5% receive a score of 100, the units between the 85th and 95th
percentiles receive 80 points, the values between the 65th and the 85th percentiles receive 60
points, all the way to 0 points, thereby rewarding the best performing countries and penalising
the worst. Since the same percentile transformation is used for different years, any change in
the definition of the indicator over time will not affect the transformed variable. However, it is
difficult to follow increases over time. Categorical scales exclude large amounts of information
about the variance of the transformed indicators. Besides, when there is little variation within
the original scores, the percentile bands force the categorisation on the data, irrespective of the
underlying distribution. A possible solution is to adjust the percentile brackets across the
individual indicators in order to obtain transformed categorical variables with almost normal
distributions.
6. Indicators above or below the mean are transformed such that values around the mean receive
0, whereas those above/below a certain threshold receive 1 and 1 respectively, e.g. the
Summary Innovation Index (EC, 2001a). This normalisation method is simple and is not
affected by outliers. However, the arbitrariness of the threshold level and the omission of
absolute level information are often criticised. For example, if the value of a given indicator for
country A is 3 times (300%) above the mean, and the value for country B is 25% above the
mean, both countries would be counted as ‘above average’ with a threshold of 20% around the
mean.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 29
7. Methods for cyclical indicators. The results of business tendency surveys are usually combined
into composite indicators to reduce the risk of false signals, and to better forecast cycles in
economic activities (Nilsson, 2000). See, for example, the OECD composite leading indicators,
and the EU economic sentiment indicators (EC, 2004a). This method implicitly gives less
weight to the more irregular series in the cyclical movement of the composite indicator, unless
some prior ad hoc smoothing is performed.
8. The latter is a special case of balance of opinions, in which managers of firms from different
sectors and of varying sizes are asked to express their opinion on their firm’s performance.
9. Percentage of annual differences over consecutive years represents the percentage growth with
respect to the previous year instead of the absolute level. The transformation can be used only
when the indicators are available for a number of years, e.g. Internal Market Index (EC, 2001b;
Tarantola et al., 2002; Tarantola et al., 2004).
30 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
Table 3. Normalisation methods
Method Equation
1. Ranking
) (
t
qc
t
qc
x Rank I =
2. Standardisation (or zscores)
t
c qc
t
c qc
t
qc t
qc
x x
I
=
=
÷
=
o
3. MinMax
) ( min ) ( max
) ( min
0 0
0
t
q c
t
q c
t
q c
t
qc t
qc
x x
x x
I
÷
÷
= .
4. Distance to a reference country
0
t
c qc
t
qc t
qc
x
x
I
=
= or
0
0
t
c qc
t
c qc
t
qc t
qc
x
x x
I
=
=
÷
=
5. Categorical scales Example:
¦
¦
¦
¦
¹
¦
¦
¦
¦
´
¦
s
< s
< s
< s
< s
<
=
t
qc
t
qc
t
qc
t
qc
t
qc
t
qc
t
qc
x P
P x P
P x P
P x P
P x P
P x
I
95
95 85
85 65
65 25
25 15
15
if 100
if 80
if 60
if 40
if 20
if 0
6. Indicators above or below the mean
) 1 ( if
) 1 ( ) 1 ( if
) 1 ( if
1
0
1
p w
p w p
p w
I
t
qc
÷ <
+ s s ÷
+ >
¦
¹
¦
´
¦
÷
=
where
0
t
c qc
t
qc
x x w
=
=
7. Cyclical indicators (OECD)
( )
( ) ( )
t
qc t
t
qc t
t
qc t
t
qc t
qc
x E x E
x E x
I
÷
÷
=
8. Balance of opinions (EC)
( )
¯
÷
÷ =
e
N
e
t
qc
t
qc e
e
t
qc
x x
N
I
1
sgn
100
9. Percentage of annual differences over
consecutive years
t
qc
t
qc
t
qc t
qc
x
x x
I
1 ÷
÷
=
Note:
t
qc
x is the value of indicator q for country c at time t. c is the reference country. The operator sgn gives the sign of the
argument (i.e. +1 if the argument is positive, 1 if the argument is negative).
e
N is the total number of experts surveyed.
i
P is
the ith percentile of the distribution of the indicator
t
qc
x and p an arbitrary threshold around the mean.
The selection of a suitable method, however, is not trivial and deserves special attention to eventual
scale adjustments (Ebert & Welsh, 2004) or transformation or highly skewed indicators. The
normalisation method should take into account the data properties, as well as the objectives of the
composite indicator. Robustness tests might be needed to assess their impact on the outcomes.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 31
By the end of Step 5 the constructor should have:
• Selected the appropriate normalisation procedure(s) with reference to the theoretical framework and to the
properties of the data.
• Made scale adjustments, if necessary.
• Transformed highly skewed indicators, if necessary.
• Documented and explained the selected normalisation procedure and the results.
1.6. Weighting and aggregation
The relative importance of the indicators is a source of contention
When used in a benchmarking framework, weights can have a significant effect on the overall
composite indicator and the country rankings. A number of weighting techniques exist (Table 4). Some
are derived from statistical models, such as factor analysis, data envelopment analysis and unobserved
components models (UCM), or from participatory methods like budget allocation processes (BAP),
analytic hierarchy processes (AHP) and conjoint analysis (CA). Unobserved component and conjoint
analysis approaches are explained in the “Toolbox for Constructors”. Regardless of which method is
used, weights are essentially value judgements. While some analysts might choose weights based only on
statistical methods, others might reward (or punish) components that are deemed more (or less)
influential, depending on expert opinion, to better reflect policy priorities or theoretical factors.
Most composite indicators rely on equal weighting (EW), i.e. all variables are given the same
weight. This essentially implies that all variables are “worth” the same in the composite, but it could also
disguise the absence of a statistical or an empirical basis, e.g. when there is insufficient knowledge of
causal relationships or a lack of consensus on the alternative. In any case, equal weighting does not mean
“no weights”, but implicitly implies that the weights are equal. Moreover, if variables are grouped into
dimensions and those are further aggregated into the composite, then applying equal weighting to the
variables may imply an unequal weighting of the dimension (the dimensions grouping the larger number
of variables will have higher weight). This could result in an unbalanced structure in the composite
index.
Table 4. Compatibility between aggregation and weighting methods
Weighting methods Aggregation methods
Linear
4
Geometric
4
Multicriteria
EW Yes Yes Yes
PCA/FA Yes Yes Yes
BOD Yes
1
No
2
No
2
UCM Yes No
2
No
2
BAP Yes Yes Yes
AHP Yes Yes No
3
CA Yes Yes No
3
1. Normalized with the MinMax method.
2. BOD requires additive aggregation, similar arguments apply to UCM.
3. At least with the multicriteria methods requiring weights as importance coefficients.
4. With both linear and geometric aggregations weights are tradeoffs and not “importance” coefficients.
32 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
Weights may also be chosen to reflect the statistical quality of the data. Higher weights could be
assigned to statistically reliable data with broad coverage. However, this method could be biased towards
the readily available indicators, penalising the information that is statistically more problematic to
identify and measure.
When using equal weights, it may happen that – by combining variables with a high degree of
correlation – an element of double counting may be introduced into the index: if two collinear indicators
are included in the composite index with a weight of
1
w and
2
w , the unique dimension that the two
indicators measure would have weight (
2 1
w w + ) in the composite. The response has often been to test
indicators for statistical correlation – for example using the Pearson correlation coefficient (Manly, 1994;
see Box 7) – and to choose only indicators which exhibit a low degree of correlation or to adjust weights
correspondingly, e.g. giving less weight to correlated indicators. Furthermore, minimizing the number of
variables in the index may be desirable on other grounds, such as transparency and parsimony.
Note that there will almost always be some positive correlation between different measures of the
same aggregate. Thus, a rule of thumb should be introduced to define a threshold beyond which the
correlation is a symptom of double counting. On the other hand, relating correlation analysis to
weighting could be dangerous when motivated by apparent redundancy. For example, in the CI of
eBusiness Readiness the indicator
1
I “Percentage of firms using Internet” and indicator
2
I “Percentage
of enterprises that have a website” display a correlation of 0.88 in 2003: given the high correlation, is it
permissible to give less weight to the pair (
2 1
, I I ) or should the two indicators be considered to measure
different aspects of innovation and adoption of communication technologies and therefore bear equal
weight in the construction of the composite? If weights should ideally reflect the contribution of each
indicator to the composite, double counting should not only be determined by statistical analysis but also
by the analysis of the indicator itself visàvis the rest of indicators and the phenomenon they all aim to
capture.
The existing literature offers a quite rich menu of alternative weighting methods all having pros and
cons. Statistical models such as principal components analysis (PCA) or factor analysis (FA) could be
used to group individual indicators according to their degree of correlation. Weights, however, cannot be
estimated with these methods if no correlation exists between indicators. Other statistical methods, such
as the “benefit of the doubt” (BOD) approach, are extremely parsimonious about weighting assumptions
as they allow the data to decide on the weights and are sensitive to national priorities. However, with
BOD weights are country specific and have a number of estimation problems.
Alternatively, participatory methods that incorporate various stakeholders – experts, citizens and
politicians – can be used to assign weights. This approach is feasible when there is a welldefined basis
for a national policy (Munda, 2005a, 2007). For international comparisons, such references are often not
available, or deliver contradictory results. In the budget allocation approach, experts are given a “budget”
of N points, to be distributed over a number of individual indicators, “paying” more for those indicators
whose importance they want to stress (Jesinghaus, in Moldan et al., 1997). The budget allocation is
optimal for a maximum of 1012 indicators. If too many indicators are involved, this method can induce
serious cognitive stress in the experts who are asked to allocate the budget. Public opinion polls have
been extensively used over the years as they are easy and inexpensive to carry out (Parker, 1991).
Aggregation methods also vary. While the linear aggregation method is useful when all individual
indicators have the same measurement unit, provided that some mathematical properties are respected.
Geometric aggregations are better suited if the modeller wants some degree of non compensability
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 33
between individual indicators or dimensions. Furthermore, linear aggregations reward baseindicators
proportionally to the weights, while geometric aggregations reward those countries with higher scores.
In both linear and geometric aggregations, weights express tradeoffs between indicators. A deficit
in one dimension can thus be offset (compensated) by a surplus in another. This implies an inconsistency
between how weights are conceived (usually measuring the importance of the associated variable) and
the actual meaning when geometric or linear aggregations are used. In a linear aggregation, the
compensability is constant, while with geometric aggregations compensability is lower for the composite
indicators with low values. In terms of policy, if compensability is admitted (as in the case of pure
economic indicators), a country with low scores on one indicator will need a much higher score on the
others to improve its situation when geometric aggregation is used. Thus, in benchmarking exercises,
countries with low scores prefer a linear rather than a geometric aggregation. On the other hand, the
marginal utility from an increase in low absolute score would be much higher than in a high absolute
score under geometric aggregation. Consequently, a country would have a greater incentive to address
those sectors/activities/alternatives with low scores if the aggregation were geometric rather than linear,
as this would give it a better chance of improving its position in the ranking (Munda & Nardo, 2005).
To ensure that weights remain a measure of importance, other aggregation methods should be used,
in particular methods that do not allow compensability. Moreover, if different goals are equally
legitimate and important, a noncompensatory logic might be necessary. This is usually the case when
highly different dimensions are aggregated in the composite, as in the case of environmental indices that
include physical, social and economic data. If the analyst decides that an increase in economic
performance cannot compensate for a loss in social cohesion or a worsening in environmental
sustainability, then neither the linear nor the geometric aggregation is suitable. A noncompensatory
multicriteria approach (MCA) could assure noncompensability by finding a compromise between two
or more legitimate goals. In its basic form this approach does not reward outliers, as it retains only
ordinal information, i.e. those countries having a greater advantage (disadvantage) in individual
indicators. This method, however, could be computationally costly when the number of countries is high,
as the number of permutations to calculate increases exponentially (Munda & Nardo, 2007).
With regard to the time element, keeping weights unchanged across time might be justified if the
researcher is willing to analyse the evolution of a certain number of variables, as in the case of the
evolution of the EC Internal Market Index from 1992 to 2002. Weights do not change with MCA, being
associated to the intrinsic value of the indicators used to explain the phenomenon. If, instead, the
objective of the analysis is that of defining best practice or of setting priorities, then weights should
necessarily change over time.
The absence of an “objective” way to determine weights and aggregation methods does not
necessarily lead to rejection of the validity of composite indicators, as long as the entire process is
transparent. The modeller’s objectives must be clearly stated at the outset, and the chosen model must be
tested to see to what extent it fulfils the modeller’s goal.
34 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
By the end of Step 6 the constructor should have:
• Selected the appropriate weighting and aggregation procedure(s) with reference to the theoretical framework.
• Considered the possibility of using alternative methods (multimodelling principle).
• Discussed whether correlation issues among indicators should be accounted for
• Discussed whether compensability among indicators should be allowed
• Documented and explained the weighting and aggregation procedures selected.
1.7. Robustness and sensitivity
Sensitivity analysis can be used to assess the robustness of composite indicators
Several judgements have to be made when constructing composite indicators, e.g. on the selection
of indicators, data normalisation, weights and aggregation methods, etc. The robustness of the composite
indicators and the underlying policy messages may thus be contested. A combination of uncertainty and
sensitivity analysis can help gauge the robustness of the composite indicator and improve transparency.
Uncertainty analysis focuses on how uncertainty in the input factors propagates through the
structure of the composite indicator and affects the composite indicator values. Sensitivity analysis
assesses the contribution of the individual source of uncertainty to the output variance. While uncertainty
analysis is used more often than sensitivity analysis and is almost always treated separately, the iterative
use of uncertainty and sensitivity analysis during the development of a composite indicator could
improve its structure (Saisana et al., 2005a; Tarantola et al., 2000; Gall, 2007). Ideally, all potential
sources of uncertainty should be addressed: selection of individual indicators, data quality, normalisation,
weighting, aggregation method, etc. The approach taken to assess uncertainties could include the
following steps:
1. Inclusion and exclusion of individual indicators.
2. Modelling data error based on the available information on variance estimation.
3. Using alternative editing schemes, e.g. single or multiple imputation.
4. Using alternative data normalisation schemes, such as MniMax, standardisation, use of
rankings.
5. Using different weighting schemes, e.g. methods from the participatory family (budget
allocation, analytic hierarchy process) and endogenous weighting (benefit of the doubt).
6. Using different aggregation systems, e.g. linear, geometric mean of unscaled variables, and
multicriteria ordering.
7. Using different plausible values for the weights.
The consideration of the uncertainty inherent in the development of a composite indicator is
mentioned in very few studies. The Human Development Index produced annually since 1990 by the
United Nations Development Programme has encouraged improvement of the indicators used in its
formulation: “No index can be better than the data it uses. But this is an argument for improving the
data, not abandoning the index.” (UN, 1992). The results of the robustness analysis are generally
reported as country rankings with their related uncertainty bounds, which are due to the uncertainties at
play. This makes it possible to communicate to the user the plausible range of the composite indicator
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 35
values for each country. The sensitivity analysis results are generally shown in terms of the sensitivity
measure for each input source of uncertainty. These sensitivity measures represent how much the
uncertainty in the composite indicator for a country would be reduced if that particular input source of
uncertainty were removed. The results of a sensitivity analysis are often also shown as scatter plots with
the values of the composite indicator for a country on the vertical axis and each input source of
uncertainty on the horizontal axis. Scatter plots help to reveal patterns in the inputoutput relationships.
Is the assessment of robustness enough for guaranteeing a sensible composite? Certainly not. We
already claimed that a sound theoretical framework is the primary ingredient. Nevertheless the statistical
analysis could (and should) help in thinking about the framework used. This is a sort of “backward
thinking” that should enable the modeller to answer questions like: “does the theoretical derived model
provide a good fit to the data? What the lack of fit tells about the conceptual definition of the composite
of the indicators chosen for it? What concept would the available indicators good measure of? Is that
concept useful? Proving an answer to these questions assures the robustness and coherence of the index
given that, in our experience, getting the theoretical model correct is the main challenge of a composite.
By the end of Step 7 the constructor should have:
• Identified the sources of uncertainty in the development of the composite indicator.
• Assessed the impact of the uncertainties/assumptions on the final result.
• Conducted sensitivity analysis of the inference, e.g. to show what sources of uncertainty are more influential in
determining the relative ranking of two entities.
• Documented and explained the sensitivity analyses and the results.
1.8. Back to the details
Deconstructing composite indicators can help extend the analysis
Composite indicators provide a starting point for analysis. While they can be used as summary
indicators to guide policy and data work, they can also be decomposed such that the contribution of sub
components and individual indicators can be identified and the analysis of country performance
extended.
For example, the TAI index has four subcomponents, which contribute differently to the
aggregated composite indicator and country rankings (Figure 1). This shows that a country like Finland is
very strong in human skills and diffusion of recent innovations, while Japan is strong in technology
creation but weaker in human skills. The decomposition of the composite indicator can thus shed light on
the overall performance of a given country. Tools like path analysis, Bayesian networks and structural
equation modelling could help to further illuminate the relationship between the composite and its
components.
To profile national innovation performance, each subcomponent of the index has been further
disaggregated. The individual indicators are then used to show strengths and weaknesses. There is no
optimal way of presenting individual indicators and country profiles can be presented variously. The
following discusses three examples: (i) leaders and laggards, (ii) spider diagrams and (iii) traffic light
presentations.
36 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
Figure 1. Example of bar chart decomposition presentation
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
Finland United States Sweden Japan Rep. of Korea Netherlands United
Kingdom
Canada Australia
Human skills
Diffusion of old innovation
Diffusion of recent innovation
Technology creation
Note: Contribution of components to overall Technology Achievement Index (TAI) composite indicator. The figure is constructed by
showing the standardised value of the subcomponents multiplied by their individual weights. The sum of these four components
equals the overall TAI index.
In the first example, performance on each indicator can be compared to the leader, the laggard and
the average performance (Figure 2). Finland’s top ranking is primarily based on having the highest
values for the indicators relating to the Internet and university, while the country’s only weakness relates
to the patents indicator.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 37
Figure 2. Example of leader/laggard decomposition presentation
Note: Technology Achievement Index (TAI). Finland (the dot) is used as an example. The figure is based on the standardised
indicators (using distance to the mean). The grey area shows the range of values for that particular indicator. The average of all
countries is illustrated by the 100line.
Figure 3. Example of spider diagram decomposition presentation
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
TAI
Patents
Royalties
Internet
Tech exports Telephones
Electricity
Schooling
University
Top 3 (average)
Finland
United States
Note: Technology Achievement Index (TAI). Finland is compared to the top three TAI performers and to the United States. The best
performing country for each indicator takes the value 100, and the worst, 0.
25
25
75
125
175
225
275
325
375
425
475
525
575
625
675
725
775
825
875
925
TAI
Patents
Royalties
Internet
Tech exports
Telephones
Electricity Schooling University
Performance range Finland
38 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
Figure 4. Example of colour decomposition presentation
score
Well below
average
(under 20)
Below
average
(2040)
Average
(4060)
Above
average
(6080)
Well above
average
(over 80)
Finland
TAI 74 X
Patents 19 X
Royalties 46 X
Internet 86 X
Tech exports 63 X
Telephones 100 X
Electricity 100 X
Schooling 82 X
University 100 X
Japan
TAI 70 X
Patents 100 X
Royalties 24 X
Internet 21 X
Tech exports 100 X
Telephones 100 X
Electricity 100 X
Schooling 78 X
University 36 X
Note: Technology Achievement Index (TAI). There are several ways to assign colours. In the chosen format five shades of grey are
used but the number of shades (or colours) can be reduced or increased as appropriate.
Another way of illustrating country performance is to use spider diagrams or radar charts (Figure 3).
Here Finland is compared to the three best countries on each indicator and to one other country, here the
United States.
Finally, one can use a colour decomposition presentation, where each indicator takes the colour
white, light grey, grey, dark grey, or black according to the relative performance of the country. This
approach is useful when many indicators are used in the composite. For example, Figure 4 shows that
Finland has one indicator in white (patents) where performance is relatively low, one indicator in grey
(royalties), one indicator in dark grey (tech exports) and five indicators in black where performance is
the highest. Upon these considerations it is clear why the overall TAI performance of Finland is in the
dark grey zone where scores are above the average (range 6080).
By the end of Step 8 the constructor should have:
• Decomposed the composite indicator into its individual parts and tested for correlation and causality (if
possible).
• Profiled country performance at the indicator level to reveal what is driving the composite indicator results, and
in particular whether the composite indicator is overly dominated by a small number of indicators.
• Documented and explained the relative importance of the subcomponents of the composite indicator.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 39
1.9. Links to other variables
Composite indicators can be linked to other variables and measures
Composite indicators often measure concepts that are linked to wellknown and measurable
phenomena, e.g. productivity growth, entry of new firms. These links can be used to test the explanatory
power of a composite. Simple crossplots are often the best way to illustrate such links. An indicator
measuring the environment for business startups, for example, could be linked to entry rates of new
firms, where good performance on the composite indicator of business environment would be expected
to yield higher entry rates.
For example, the Technology Achievement Index helps to assess the position of a country relative to
others concerning technology achievements. Higher technology achievement should lead to higher
wealth, that is, countries with a high TAI would be expected to have high GDP per capita. Correlating
TAI with GDP per capita shows this link (Figure 5). Most countries are close to the trend line. Only
Norway and Korea are clear outliers. Norway is an outlier due to revenues from oil reserves, while Korea
has long prioritised technology development as an industrial strategy to catch up with highincome
countries.
Figure 5. Link between TAI and GDP per capita, 2000
Finland
United States
Sweden
Japan
Korea
Netherlands
United Kingdom
Canada
Australia
Germany
Norway
Ireland
Belgium
New Zealand
Austria
France
Spain
Italy
Czech Republic
Hungary
Slovakia
Greece
Portugal
Poland
Mexico
0
5000
10000
15000
20000
25000
30000
35000
40000
0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8
G
D
P
(
P
P
P
)
p
e
r
c
a
p
i
t
a
,
2
0
0
0
TAI
Note: The correlation is significantly different from zero at the 1% level and r² between GDP (PPP, $) and TAI (unitless) equals
0.47. Only OECD countries are included in the correlation, as correlation with very heterogeneous groups tends to be misleading.
40 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
One remark is worthwhile at this point. Correlation analysis should not be mistaken with causality
analysis. Correlation simply indicates that the variation in the two data sets is similar. A change in the
indicator does not necessarily lead to a change in the composite indicator and vice versa. Countries with
high GDP might invest more in technology or more technology might lead to higher GDP. The causality
remains unclear in the correlation analysis. More detailed econometric analyses can be used to determine
causality, e.g. the Granger causality test. However, Granger causality tests require time series for all
variables, which are often not available.
The impact of the weights (or normalisation method, or other) on the degree of correlation between
a composite indicator and another variable of interest can be evaluated in a Monte Carlo framework. At
each simulation, a weight can, for example, be allowed to vary between 0 and 1 and the simulated
weights for all the indicators are then divided by the overall sum of the weights (unity sum property).
This simulation is repeated 10 000 times and the composite indicator scores for each country (or unit of
reference in general) are calculated 10 000 times. The correlation coefficient can thus be calculated for
each simulation and the highest, median and lowest possible correlation determined. Alternatively, the
correlation between the composite indicator and the measurable phenomenon can be maximised or
minimised by choosing a proper set of weights.
It should be noted that composite indicators often include some of the indicators with which they are
being correlated, leading to double counting. For example, most composite indicators of sustainable
development include some measure of GDP as a subcomponent. In such cases, the GDP measure should
be removed from the composite indicator before running any correlation.
By the end of Step 9 the constructor should have:
• Correlated the composite indicator with related measurable phenomena,
• Tested the links with variations of the composite indicator as determined through sensitivity analysis.
• Developed datadriven narratives on the results
• Documented and explained the correlations and the results.
1. 10. Presentation and dissemination
A welldesigned graph can speak louder than words
The way composite indicators are presented is not a trivial issue. Composite indicators must be able
to communicate a story to decisionmakers and other endusers quickly and accurately. Tables, albeit
providing the complete information, can sometimes obscure sensitive issues immediately visible with a
graphical representation. Therefore presenter needs to decide, in each situation, whether to include a
table a graphic or both. Our examples show three situations where indicator information is
communicated graphically. There are plenty of other possibilities. In all situations graphics need to be
designed carefully for clarity and aesthetics. In all situations we need to have words, numbers and
graphics working together (see Trufte, 2001).
A tabular format is the simplest presentation, in which the composite indicator is presented for each
country as a table of values. Usually countries are displayed in descending rank order. Rankings can be
used to track changes in country performance over time as, for example, the Growth Competitiveness
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 41
Index, which shows the rankings of countries for two consecutive years (Figure 6). While tables are a
comprehensive approach to displaying results, they may be too detailed and not visually appealing.
However, they can be adapted to show targeted information for sets of countries grouped by geographic
location, GDP, etc.
Composite indicators can be expressed via a simple bar chart (Figure 7). The countries are on the
vertical axis and the values of the composite on the horizontal. The top bar indicates the average
performance of all countries and enables the reader to identify how a country is performing visàvis the
average. The underlying individual indicators can also be displayed on a bar chart. The use of colours
can make the graph more visually appealing and highlight the countries performing well or not so well,
growing or not growing, etc.
3
The top bar can be thought of as a target to be reached by countries.
Figure 6. Example of tabular presentation of composite indicator
Source: WEF, 2004 www.weforum.org/gcr
42 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
Figure 7. Example of bar chart presentation of composite indicator
Source: (U.K Government, 2004)
Figure 8. Example of line chart presentation of composite indicator
Note: EU price level index. Comparative price levels of final consumption by private households including indirect taxes
(EU27=100). JRC elaboration, data source: Eurostat, 2007. http:// ec.europa.eu/eurostat
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006
P
r
i
c
e
l
e
v
e
l
Belgium Denmark Greece France
EU27
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 43
Figure 9. Example of trend diagram composite indicator
Note: 2003 SII1 stands for 2003 EU Summary Innovation Index
Source: The European Innovation Scoreboard 2003, at
ftp://ftp.cordis.europa.eu/pub/focus/docs/innovation_scoreboard_2003_en.pdf For the definition of SII1 see ibid., p. 9.
Line charts can be used to illustrate the changes of a composite (or its dimensions/components)
across time. The values for different countries (or different indicators) are shown by different colours and
or symbols. The indicators can be displayed using, for example, a) absolute levels, b) absolute growth
rates, e.g. in percentage points with respect to the previous year or a number of past years, c) indexed
levels and d) indexed growth rates. When indexed, the values of the indicator are linearly transformed so
that their indexed value for a given year is 100 (or another integer). The price level index shows values
such that EU27=100 for each year, with more expensive countries having values greater than 100 and
less expensive countries below 100 (Figure 8).
Trends in country performance as revealed through a composite indicator can be presented through
trend diagrams. When a composite indicator is available for a set of countries for at least two different
time points, changes or growth rates can be depicted. The EU Summary Innovation Index is used to track
relative performance of European countries on innovation indicators (Figure 9). Country trends are
reported on the Xaxis and levels are given on the Yaxis (although levels in the abscissa and % changes
in the yaxis constitute the usual practice). In this picture, the horizontal axis gives the EU average value
and the vertical axis shows the EU trend. The two axes divide the area into four quadrants. Countries in
the upper quadrant are “moving ahead”, because both their value and their trend are above the EU
average. Countries in the bottom left quadrant are “falling further behind” because they are below the EU
average for both variables.
By the end of Step 10 the constructor should have:
• Identified a coherent set of presentational tools for the target audience.
• Selected the visualisation technique which communicates the most information.
• Visualised the results of the composite indicator in a clear and accurate manner.
44 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
2. A QUALITY FRAMEWORK FOR COMPOSITE INDICATORS
2.1. Quality profile for composite indicators
The development of a quality framework for composite indicators is not an easy task. In fact, the
overall quality of the composite indicator depends on several aspects, related both to the quality of
elementary data used to build the indicator and the soundness of the procedures used in its construction.
Quality is usually defined as “fitness for use” in terms of user needs. As far as statistics are concerned,
this definition is broader than has been used in the past when quality was equated with accuracy. It is
now generally recognised that there are other important dimensions. Even if data are accurate, they
cannot be said to be of good quality if they are produced too late to be useful, cannot be easily accessed,
or appear to conflict with other data. Thus, quality is a multifaceted concept. The most important quality
characteristics depend on user perspectives, needs and priorities, which vary across usergroups.
Several organisations (e.g., Eurostat, International Monetary Fund, Statistics Canada, Statistics
Sweden) have been working towards the identification of various dimensions of quality for statistical
products. Particularly important are the frameworks developed by Eurostat and the International
Monetary Fund (IMF). With the adoption of the European Statistics Code of Practice in 2005, the
Eurostat quality framework is now quite similar to the IMF’s “Data Quality Framework (DQAF)”, in the
sense that both frameworks provide a comprehensive approach to quality, through coverage of
governance, statistical processes and observable features of the outputs. The IMF developed the DQAF
to assess the overall quality of statistics produced by its member countries, addressing a broad range of
questions which are captured through (i) the prerequisites of quality and (ii) five quality dimensions.
With regard to the prerequisites of quality, the DQAF assesses how the quality of statistics is
affected by the legal and institutional environment and the available resources, and also whether there is
an awareness of quality in the management of statistical activities. An evaluation of the way in which
national statistical offices (or systems) perform their tasks is carried out by means of a detailed
questionnaire to identify the degree of scientific independence of statistical agencies, the autonomy given
to statistical agencies, etc.
The five quality dimensions used by the IMF are the following:
1. Assurance of integrity: What are the features that support firm adherence to objectivity in
the production of statistics, so as to maintain users’ confidence?
2. Methodological soundness: How do the current practices relate to the internationally agreed
methodological practices for specific statistical activities?
3. Accuracy and reliability: Are the source data, statistical techniques, etc., adequate to
portray the reality to be captured?
4. Serviceability: How are users’ needs met in terms of timeliness of the statistical products,
their frequency, consistency, and their revision cycle?
5. Accessibility: Are effective data and metadata easily available to data users and is there
assistance to users?
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 45
Given the institutional setup of the European Statistical System, the main aim of the Eurostat
quality approach is to ensure that certain standards are met in various aspects of statistical production
processes carried out by national statistical agencies and by Eurostat itself. In addition, it largely aims to
use quantifiable measures, such as measurement errors or days (or months) of publication delay after the
reference period.
The European Statistics Code of Practice (Principles 1115) focuses on statistical outputs as viewed
by users. Six quality dimensions are considered:
1. Relevance refers to the degree to which statistics meet current and potential needs of the
users;
2. Accuracy refers to the closeness of computations or estimates to the exact or true values;
3. Timeliness and Punctuality. “Timeliness” refers to the length of time between the
availability of the information and the event or phenomenon it describes. “Punctuality”
refers to the time lag between the target delivery date and the actual date of the release of
the data;
4. Accessibility and Clarity. “Accessibility” refers to the physical conditions in which users
can access statistics: distribution channels, ordering procedures, time required for delivery,
pricing policy, marketing conditions (copyright, etc.), availability of micro or macro data,
media (paper, CDROM, Internet, etc). “Clarity” refers to the statistics’ information
environment: appropriate metadata provided with the statistics (textual information,
explanations, documentation, etc); graphs, maps, and other illustrations; availability of
information on the statistics’ quality (possible limitation in use);
5. Comparability refers to the measurement of the impact of differences in applied statistical
concepts and measurement tools and procedures when statistics are compared between
geographical areas, nongeographical domains or over time;
6. Coherence refers to the adequacy of the data to be reliably combined in different ways and
for various uses.
In 2003 the OECD published the first version of its “Quality Framework and Guidelines for OECD
Statistics” (OECD, 2003). It relies heavily on the results achieved by the international statistical
community, adapting them to the OECD context. In fact, for an international organisation, the quality of
statistics disseminated depends on two aspects: (i) the quality of national statistics received, and (ii) the
quality of internal processes for collection, processing, analysis and dissemination of data and metadata.
From this point of view, there are some similarities between what the OECD has done in the
development of its own quality framework and the characteristics of composite indicators, whose overall
quality depends on two aspects: (i) the quality of basic data, and (ii) the quality of procedures used to
build and disseminate the composite indicator.
Both elements are equally important: the application of the most advanced approaches to the
development of composite indicators based on inaccurate or incoherent data would not produce good
quality results, but the quality of a composite indicator will be largely determined by the appropriateness
of the indicators used. If they do not fit with the theoretical concept being measured, then the quality of
the composite indicator will be weak, regardless of the quality of the basic indicators. Finally, composite
indicators disseminated without appropriate metadata could easily be misinterpreted. Therefore the
46 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
quality framework for composite indicators must consider all these aspects. In the following section each
is considered separately
2.2. Quality dimensions for basic data
The selection of basic data should maximise the overall quality of the final result. In particular, in
selecting the data the following dimensions (drawing on the IMF, Eurostat and OECD) are to be
considered:
Relevance
The relevance of data is a qualitative assessment of the value contributed by these data. Value is
characterised by the degree to which statistics meet current and potential needs of the users. It depends
upon both the coverage of the required topics and the use of appropriate concepts.
In the context of composite indicators, relevance has to be evaluated considering the overall purpose of the
indicator. Careful evaluation and selection of basic data have to be carried out to ensure that the right range of
domains is covered in a balanced way. Given the actual availability of data, ”proxy” series are often used, but in this
case some evidence of their relationships with “target” series should be produced whenever possible.
Accuracy
The accuracy of basic data is the degree to which they correctly estimate or describe the quantities
or characteristics that they are designed to measure. Accuracy refers to the closeness between the values
provided and the (unknown) true values. Accuracy has many attributes, and in practical terms it has no
single aggregate or overall measure. Of necessity, these attributes are typically measured or described in
terms of the error, or the potential significance of error, introduced through individual major sources of
error.
In the case of sample surveybased estimates, the major sources of error include coverage, sampling,
nonresponse, response, processing, and problems in dissemination. For derived estimates, such as for
national accounts or balance of payments, sources of error arise from the surveys and censuses that
provide source data; from the fact that source data do not fully meet the requirements of the accounts in
terms of coverage, timing, and valuation and that the techniques used to compensate can only partially
succeed; from seasonal adjustment; and from separation of price and quantity in the preparation of
volume measures.
An aspect of accuracy is the closeness of the initially released value(s) to the subsequent value(s) of
estimates. In light of the policy and media attention given to first estimates, a key point of interest is how
close a preliminary value is to subsequent estimates. In this context it useful to consider the sources of
revision, which include (i) replacement of preliminary source data with later data, (ii) replacement of
judgemental projections with source data, (iii) changes in definitions or estimating procedures, and (iv)
updating of the base year for constantprice estimates. Smaller and fewer revisions is an aim; however,
the absence of revisions does not necessarily mean that the data are accurate.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 47
In the context of composite indicators, accuracy of basic data is extremely important. Here the issue of credibility of
the source becomes crucial. The credibility of data products refers to confidence that users place in those products
based simply on their image of the data producer, i.e., the brand image. One important aspect is trust in the
objectivity of the data. This implies that the data are perceived to be produced professionally in accordance with
appropriate statistical standards and policies and that practices are transparent (for example, data are not
manipulated, nor their release timed in response to political pressure). Other things being equal, data produced by
“official sources” (e.g. national statistical offices or other public bodies working under national statistical regulations
or codes of conduct) should be preferred to other sources.
Timeliness
The timeliness of data products reflects the length of time between their availability and the event or
phenomenon they describe, but considered in the context of the time period that permits the information
to be of value and to be acted upon. The concept applies equally to shortterm or structural data; the only
difference is the timeframe. Closely related to the dimension of timeliness, the punctuality of data
products is also very important, both for national and international data providers. Punctuality implies the
existence of a publication schedule and reflects the degree to which data are released in accordance with
it.
In the context of composite indicators, timeliness is especially important to minimise the need for the estimation of
missing data or for revisions of previously published data. As individual basic data sources establish their optimal
tradeoff between accuracy and timeliness, taking into account institutional, organisational and resource constraints,
data covering different domains are often released at different points of time. Therefore special attention must be
paid to the overall coherence of the vintages of data used to build composite indicators (see also coherence).
Accessibility
The accessibility of data products reflects how readily the data can be located and accessed from
original sources, i.e. the conditions in which users can access statistics (such as distribution channels,
pricing policy, copyright, etc.). The range of different users leads to considerations such as multiple
dissemination formats and selective presentation of metadata. Thus, accessibility includes the suitability
of the form in which the data are available, the media of dissemination, and the availability of metadata
and user support services. It also includes the affordability of the data to users in relation to its value to
them and whether the user has a reasonable opportunity to know that the data are available and how to
access them.
In the context of composite indicators, accessibility of basic data can affect the overall cost of production and
updating of the indicator over time. It can also influence the credibility of the composite indicator if poor accessibility
of basic data makes it difficult for third parties to replicate the results of the composite indicators. In this respect,
given improvements in electronic access to databases released by various sources, the issue of coherence across
data sets can become relevant. Therefore, the selection of the source should not always give preference to the most
accessible source, but should also take other quality dimensions into account.
Interpretability
The interpretability of data products reflects the ease with which the user may understand and
properly use and analyse the data. The adequacy of the definitions of concepts, target populations,
variables and terminology underlying the data and of the information describing the limitations of the
data, if any, largely determines the degree of interpretability. The range of different users leads to
considerations such as the presentation of metadata in layers of increasing detail. Definitional and
procedural metadata assist in interpretability; thus, the coherence of these metadata is an aspect of
interpretability.
48 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
In the context of composite indicators, the wide range of data used to build them and the difficulties due to the
aggregation procedure require the full interpretability of basic data. The availability of definitions and classifications
used to produce basic data is essential to assess the comparability of data over time and across countries (see
coherence): for example, series breaks need to be assessed when composite indicators are built to compare
performances over time. Therefore the availability of adequate metadata is an important element in the assessment
of the overall quality of basic data.
Coherence
The coherence of data products reflects the degree to which they are logically connected and
mutually consistent, i.e. the adequacy of the data to be reliably combined in different ways and for
various uses. Coherence implies that the same term should not be used without explanation for different
concepts or data items; that different terms should not be used for the same concept or data item without
explanation; and that variations in methodology that might affect data values should not be made without
explanation. Coherence in its loosest sense implies the data are “at least reconcilable”. For example, if
two data series purporting to cover the same phenomena differ, the differences in time of recording,
valuation, and coverage should be identified so that the series can be reconciled.
In the context of composite indicators, two aspects of coherence are especially important: coherence over time and
across countries. Coherence over time implies that the data are based on common concepts, definitions and
methodology over time, or that any differences are explained and can be allowed for. Incoherence over time refers to
breaks in a series resulting from changes in concepts, definitions, or methodology. Coherence across countries
implies that from country to country the data are based on common concepts, definitions, classifications and
methodology, or that any differences are explained and can be allowed for.
2.3. Quality dimensions for procedures to build and disseminate composite indicators
Each phase of the composite indicator building process is important and has to be carried out with
quality concerns in mind. For example, the design of the theoretical framework can affect the relevance
of the indicator; the multivariate analysis is important to increase its reliability; the imputation of missing
data, as well as the normalisation and the aggregation, can affect its accuracy, etc. In the following
matrix, the most important links between each phase of the building process and quality dimensions are
identified, using the seven dimensions of the OECD Quality Framework (Table 5).
The proper definition of the theoretical framework affects not only the relevance of the composite
indicator, but also its credibility and interpretability. The relevance of a composite indicator is usually
evaluated on the basis of analytical and policy needs, but also takes into account its theoretical
foundation. From this point of view, several composite indicators are quite weak and such weakness is
often offered as a criticism of the general idea of composite indicators.
The imputation of missing data affects the accuracy of the composite indicator and its credibility.
Furthermore, too much use of imputation techniques can undermine the overall quality of the indicator
and its relevance, even if it can improve the dimension of timeliness. The normalisation phase is crucial
both for the accuracy and the coherence of final results. An inappropriate normalisation procedure can
give rise to unreliable or biased results. On the other hand, the interpretability of the composite indicator
relies heavily on the correctness of the approach followed in the normalisation phase.
The quality of basic data chosen to build the composite indicator strongly affects its accuracy and
credibility. Timeliness can also be greatly influenced by the choice of appropriate data. The use of
multivariate analysis to identify the data structure can increase both the accuracy and the interpretability
of final results. This step is also very important to identify redundancies among selected phenomena and
to evaluate possible gaps in basic data.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 49
One of the key issues in the construction of composite indicators is the choice of the weighting and
aggregation model. Almost all quality dimensions are affected by this choice, especially accuracy,
coherence and interpretability. This is also one of the most criticised characteristics of composite
indicators: therefore, the indicator developer has to pay special attention to avoid internal contradictions
and mistakes when dealing with weighting and aggregating individual indicators.
To minimise the risks of producing meaningless composite indicators, sensitivity and robustness
analysis are required. Analysis of this type can improve the accuracy, credibility and interpretability of
the final results. Given public and media interest in country rankings, sensitivity checks can help
distinguish between significant and insignificant differences, thereby minimising the risk of
misinterpretation and misuse.
A comparison between the composite indicator and other well known and “classical” measures of
relevant phenomena can be very useful to evaluate the capacity of the former to produce meaningful and
relevant results. Therefore, relevance and interpretability of the results can be strongly reinforced by such
comparison. In addition, the credibility of the indicator can benefit from its capacity to produce results
which are highly correlated with the reference data.
The presentation of composite indicators and their visualisation affects both relevance and
interpretability of the results. Given the complexity of composite indicators, neither the general public
(media, citizens, etc.) nor policymakers generally read methodological notes and “caveats”. Therefore,
their comprehension of the results will be largely based on the “messages” transmitted through summary
tables or charts.
As highlighted in this Handbook, composite indicators provide a starting point for analysis, which
has then to be deepened by going back to the detail. Therefore, this analytical phase can affect the
relevance of the indicator and also its interpretability. Moreover, if the way in which the indicator is built
or disseminated does not allow users and analysts to go into the details, the overall credibility of the
exercise can be impaired.
Finally, the dissemination phase is crucial to assure the relevance of the indicator, its credibility,
accessibility and interpretability. Too often statisticians do not pay enough attention to this fundamental
phase, thus limiting the audience for their products and their overall impact. The OECD has recently
developed the “Data and Metadata Reporting and Presentation Handbook” (OECD, 2007), which
describes practices useful to improve the dissemination of statistical products.
Table 5. Quality dimensions of composite indicators
CONSTRUCTION QUALITY DIMENSIONS
PHASE
Relevance Accuracy Credibility Timeliness Accessibility Interpretability Coherence
Theoretical
framework
9 9 9
Data
selection
9 9 9
Imputation of
missing data
9 9 9 9
Multivariate
analysis
9 9 9
Normalisation 9 9 9
Weighting and
aggregation
9 9 9 9 9
Back to the data 9 9 9
Robustness and
sensitivity
9 9 9
Links to other
variables
9 9 9 9
Visualisation 9 9
Dissemination 9 9 9 9
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 51
PART 2. A TOOLBOX FOR CONSTRUCTORS
A number of statistical methods are discussed in detail below to provide constructors with the
necessary tools for building sound composite indicators, focusing on the practical implementation of the
steps 3 to 8 outlined above. The problem of missing data is discussed first. The need for multivariate
analysis prior to the aggregation of the individual indicators is stressed. The techniques used to
standardise indicators of disparate natures into a common unit are also presented. Different
methodologies for weighting and aggregating indicators into a composite are explored, as well as the
need to test the robustness of the composite indicator using uncertainty and sensitivity analysis. The
example of the Technology Achievement Index (TAI) (see Appendix) is used as a baseline case to
illustrate differences across various methods and to highlight potential pitfalls.
For the sake of clarity, some basic definitions are given at the outset. These definitions have been
adapted to the context of composite indicators, drawing on concepts from multicriteria decision theory
and complex system theory (see Munda & Nardo, 2007).
Dimension: is the highest hierarchical level of analysis and indicates the scope of objectives,
individual indicators and variables. For example, a sustainability composite indicator can include
economic, social, environmental and institutional dimensions.
Objective: indicates the desired direction of change. For example, within the economic dimension
GDP has to be maximised; within the social dimension social exclusion has to be minimised; within the
environmental dimension CO2 emissions have to be minimised. This is not always obvious: international
mobility of researchers for example, could be minimized when the hierarchical level is the country and
the scope of the analysis is, for example, measuring brain drain. But this could also be maximized when
the hierarchical level is constituted by OECD countries and peer learning is under analysis.
Individual indicator: is the basis for evaluation in relation to a given objective (any objective may
imply a number of different individual indicators). It is a function that associates each single country
with a variable indicating its desirability according to expected consequences related to the same
objective, e.g. GDP, saving rate and inflation rate within the objective “growth maximisation”.
Variable: is a constructed measure stemming from a process that represents, at a given point in
space and time, a shared perception of a realworld state of affairs consistent with a given individual
indicator. For example, in comparing two countries within the economic dimension, one objective could
be “maximisation of economic growth”; the individual indicator might be R&D performance, the
indicator score or variable could be “number of patents per million of inhabitants”. Another example: an
objective connected with the social dimension might be “maximisation of residential attractiveness”. A
possible individual indicator could then be “residential density”. The variable providing the individual
indicator score might be the ratio of persons per hectare.
A composite indicator or synthetic index is an aggregate of all dimensions, objectives, individual
indicators and variables used. This implies that what formally defines a composite indicator is the set of
properties underlying its aggregation convention.
4
52 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
Given a set of Q individual indicators for country c at time t:
t
c
X ={
t
c q
x
,
}, q=1,2,..., Q, and a finite
set:
C={
i
c }, i=1, 2,..., M of countries, let us assume that the variable (i.e. the individual indicator score)
of each country
i
c with respect to an individual indicator
t
c q
x
,
is based on an ordinal, interval or ratio
scale of measurement (Box 3). For simplicity of explanation, we assume that a higher value of a variable
is preferred to a lower one (i.e. the higher, the better), that is:
¦
¹
¦
´
¦
= ·
> ·
) ( ) (
) ( ) (
k
t
q j
t
q k j
k
t
q j
t
q k j
c x c x Ic c
c x c x Pc c
where P and I indicate a preference and an indifference relation respectively, both fulfilling the
transitive property.
5
Let us also assume the existence of a set of indicator weights (calculated according to the weighting
method r
r
W ={
q r
w
,
}, q=1,2,...,Q, with
¯
=
q
q r
w 1
,
, derived as importance coefficients.
6
The
mathematical problem is then how to use this available information to rank in a complete preorder
(i.e. without any incomparability relation) all the countries from the best to the worst. In doing so the
following operational properties are desirable:
• The sources of uncertainty and imprecise assessment should be reduced as much as possible.
• The manipulation rules should be as objective and simple as possible, that is, all ad hoc
parameters should be avoided.
An additional property could be the guarantee that weights are used with the meaning of
“importance of the associated individual indicator”. Arrow’s impossibility theorem (Arrow, 1963) clearly
shows that no perfect aggregation convention can exist (see the section on aggregation and weighting). It
is therefore essential to check not only which properties are respected by a given ranking procedure, but
also whether any essential property for the problem being tackled has been lost.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 53
Box 3. Measurement scales
7
Let us start by clarifying what a measurement scale is. The process of grouping individual observations into
qualitative classes is measurement at its most primitive level. Sometimes this is called categorical or nominal scaling
(e.g. classification according to gender, marital status, profession, etc.). The set of equivalence classes itself is
called a nominal scale. The word measurement is usually reserved for the situation in which a number is assigned to
each observation; this number reflects a magnitude of some quantitative property (how to assign this number
constitutes the socalled representation problem).
There are at least three kinds of numerical measurement that can be distinguished (Roberts, 1979;
Vansnick, 1990): these are called ordinal scale (e.g. restaurant ratings, preference for seaside resorts, etc.), interval
scale (e.g. temperature) and ratio scale (e.g. weight, height, age, etc.). Often, information measured on a nominal or
ordinal scale is called qualitative information, while that measured on an interval or ratio scale is called quantitative.
Imagine a set of objects O, and suppose that there is some property that all objects in the set possess, such as
value, weight, length, intelligence or motivation. Furthermore, let us suppose that each object o has a certain amount
or degree of that property. In principle it is possible to assign a number t(o), to any object oeO, standing for the
amount that o actually "has" of that characteristic. Ideally, to measure an object o, we would like to determine this
number t(o) directly. However, this is not always possible; therefore it is necessary to find a procedure for pairing
each object with another number, m(o), which can be called its numerical measurement. The measurement
procedure used constitutes a function rule R O m ÷ : , instructing how to give an object o its m(o) value in a
systematic way. Measurement operations or procedures differ in the information that the numerical measurements
themselves provide about the true magnitudes.
Let us suppose that there is a measurement rule for assigning a number m(o) to each object O o e , and
suppose that the following statements are true for any pair of objects
1
o and O o e
2
,
1 2 1 2
1 2 1 2
( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
m o m o only if t o t o
m o m o only if t o t o
= =
¦
´
> >
¹
(a)
In other words, by this rule it is possible to say that if two measurements are unequal, and if one
measurement is larger than another, then one magnitude exceeds another. Any measurement procedure for which
equation (a) applies is an example of ordinal scaling, or measurement at the ordinal level.
A fundamental point in measurement theory is that of the uniqueness of scale, i.e. which admissable
transformations of scale allow for the truth or falsity of the statement involving numerical scales to remain unchanged
(problem of meaningfulness). In the case of an ordinal scale, it is unique up to a strictly monotone increasing
transformation (with infinite degrees of liberty). Other measurement procedures associate objects oeO with a real
number m(o), where much stronger statements can be made about the true magnitudes from the numerical
measurements. Suppose that the statement of equation (b) is true:
1 2 1 2
1 2 1 2
( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
( ) ( ) ,
m o m o only if t o t o
m o m o only if t o t o
t o x iff m o ax b where a R
+
= =
¦
¦
> >
´
¦
= = + e
¹
(b)
where iff stands for “if and only if”. That is, the numerical measurement m(o) is some affine function of the
true magnitude x. When equation (b) applies, the measurement operation is called interval scaling, or measurement
at the intervalscale level. An interval scale is unique up to a positive affine transformation (with two degrees of
freedom).
54 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
When measurement is at the interval scale level, any of the ordinary operations of arithmetic can be
applied to the differences between numerical measurements, and the results can be interpreted as statements about
magnitudes of the underlying property. The important part is the interpretation of a numerical result as a quantitative
statement about the property shown by the objects. This is not possible for ordinalscale numbers but can be done
for differences between intervalscale numbers. Interval scaling is the best that can be done in most scientific work,
and even this level of measurement is all too rare in social sciences. However, especially in the physical sciences, it
is sometimes possible to find measurement operations making the statement of equation (c) true:
1 2 1 2
1 2 1 2
( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
( ) ( ) ,
m o m o only if t o t o
m o m o only if t o t o
t o x iff m o ax where a R
+
= =
¦
¦
> >
´
¦
= = e
¹
(c)
When the measurement operation defines a function such that the statement contained in equation (c) is
true, then measurement is said to be at the ratioscale level. For such scales, ratios of numerical measurements are
unique and can be interpreted directly as ratios of magnitudes of objects. A ratio scale is unique up to a linear
transformation; in this case, the ratio between differences is unique (with only one degree of liberty).
Of course, the fewer the admissible transformations of a scale, the more meaningful the statements
involving that scale. From this point of view, it is better to have a ratio scale than an interval scale, and it is better to
have an interval scale than an ordinal scale.
The table below presents in a comparative manner the main characteristics of the measurement scales.
Type of Scale
Characteristics
Allows
classification
Allows
ordering
Equal
intervals
Unique
origin
Nominal Yes No No No
Ordinal Yes Yes No No
Interval Yes Yes Yes No
Ratio Yes Yes Yes Yes
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 55
STEP 3. IMPUTATION OF MISSING DATA
The literature on the analysis of missing data is extensive and in rapid development. This section
covers the main methods. More comprehensive surveys can be found in Little & Rubin (2002), Little
(1997) and Little & Schenker (1994).
3.1. Single imputation
Imputations are means or draws from a predictive distribution of missing values. The predictive
distribution must be generated by employing the observed data either through implicit or explicit
modelling:
Implicit modelling. The focus is on an algorithm, with implicit underlying assumptions which need
to be verified in terms of whether they are reasonable and fit for the issue under consideration. The
danger of this type of modelling of missing data is the tendency to consider the resulting data set as
complete, forgetting that an imputation has been carried out. Implicit modelling includes:
• Hot deck imputation. Filling in blanks cells with individual data, drawn from “similar”
responding units. For example, missing values for individual income may be replaced with the
income of another respondent with similar characteristics, e.g. age, sex, race, place of
residence, family relationships, job, etc.
• Substitution. Replacing nonresponding units with unselected units in the sample. For
example, if a household cannot be contacted, then a previously nonselected household in the
same housing block is selected.
• Cold deck imputation. Replacing the missing value with a value from an external source,
e.g. from a previous realisation of the same survey.
Explicit modelling. The predictive distribution is based on a formal statistical model where the
assumptions are made explicitly, as in the following:
• Unconditional mean/median/mode imputation. The sample mean (median, mode) of the
recorded values for the given individual indicator replaces the missing values.
• Regression imputation. Missing values are substituted by the predicted values obtained from
regression. The dependent variable of the regression is the individual indicator hosting the
missing value, and the regressor(s) is (are) the individual indicator(s), showing a strong
relationship with the dependent variable, i.e. usually a high degree of correlation.
• Expectation Maximisation (EM) imputation. This model focuses on the interdependence
between model parameters and the missing values. The missing values are substituted by
estimates obtained through an iterative process. First, the missing values are predicted based on
initial estimates of the model parameter values. These predictions are then used to update the
parameter values, and the process is repeated. The sequence of parameters converges to
maximumlikelihood estimates, and the time to convergence depends on the proportion of
missing data and the flatness of the likelihood function.
56 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
If simplicity is its main appeal, an important limitation of the single imputation method is its
systematic underestimation of the variance of the estimates (with some exceptions for the EM method,
where the bias depends on the algorithm used to estimate the variance). Therefore, this method does not
fully assess the implications of imputation or the robustness of the composite index derived from the
imputed data set.
3.2. Unconditional mean imputation
Let X
q
be the random variable associated with the individual indicator q, with q=1,…,Q, and x
q,c
the
observed value of X
q
for country c, with c=1,..,M. Let
q
m be the number of recorded or nonmissing
values on X
q
, and M
q
m the number of missing values. The unconditional mean is then given by:
¯
=
recorded
c , q
q
q
x
m
1
x
(1)
Similarly, the median
8
and the mode
9
of the distribution could be calculated on the available sample
and to substitute missing values.
10
By “filling in” blank spaces with the sample mean, the imputed value
becomes a biased estimator of the population mean, even in the case of MCAR mechanisms, and the
sample variance underestimates true variance, thus underestimating the uncertainty in the composite due
to the imputation.
3.3. Regression imputation
Suppose a set of h1<Q fully observed individual indicators (x
1
,…,x
h1
) and an individual indicator
x
h
observed for r countries, but missing for the remaining Mr countries. Regression imputation
computes the regression of x
h
on (x
1
,…,x
h1
) using r complete observations, and imputes the missing
values as a prediction from the regression:
11
¯
÷
=
÷ = + =
1 h
1 j
ij j 0 ih
r M ,.., 1 i x
ˆ ˆ
x ˆ þ þ
(2)
In general, the strategy to define the ‘best’ regression is a twostep procedure. First, all different
subsets of predictors are adopted in a multiple regression manner. Then the best subset(s) is determined
using the following criteria:
12
• the value of the explanation rate R
2
;
• the value of the residual mean square RMS;
• the value of Mallows’
k
C ;
• stepwise regression.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 57
A variation of the regression approach is the stochastic regression approach, which imputes a
conditional draw instead of the conditional mean:
¯
÷
=
÷ = + + =
1 h
1 j
i ij j 0 ih
r M ,.., 1 i x
ˆ ˆ
x ˆ c þ þ
(3)
where,
i
c is a random variable ) ˆ , 0 ( N
2
o and
2
ˆ o is the residual variance from the regression of x
h
on (x
1
,…,x
h1
), based on the r complete cases.
A key problem in both approaches is again the underestimation of the standard errors, although
stochastic regression lessens the distortions. Hence, the inference based on the entire data set, including
the imputed data, does not fully count for imputation uncertainty. The result is that pvalues of tests are
too small and confidence intervals too narrow. Replication methods and multiple imputation could
correct the loss of precision of simple imputation.
In the case that the variable with missing observations is categorical, regression imputation is still
possible but adjustment is required, using, for example, rounding of the predictions or a logistic, ordinal
or multinomial logistic regression model. For nominal variables, frequency statistics such as the mode or
hot and colddeck imputation methods might be more appropriate.
3.4. Expected maximisation imputation
Suppose that X denotes the matrix of data. In the likelihoodbased estimation, the data is assumed to
be generated by a model, described by a probability or density function )  ( u X f , where u is the
unknown parameter vector lying in the parameter space
u
O (e.g. the real line for means, the positive real
line for variances and the interval [0,1] for probabilities). The probability function captures the
relationship between the dataset and the parameter of the model, and describes the probability of
observing a data set for a given
u
O u e . Since u is unknown, while the dataset is known, it makes sense
to reverse the argument, and look for the probability, or the likelihood, of observing a certain u , given X.
Therefore, given X, the likelihood function )  ( X L u is any function of
u
O u e proportional to
)  ( u X f :
)  ( ) ( )  ( u u X f X k X L =
(4)
where 0 ) ( > X k is a function of X and not of u . The loglikelihood is then the natural logarithm of
the likelihood function. For M independent and identically distributed observations
T
M
x x X ) ,..., (
1
=
from a normal population with mean u and variance
2
o , the joint density is


.

\
 ÷
÷ =
¯
=
÷
M
c
c
M
x
X f
1
2
2
2 / 2 2
) (
2
1
exp ) 2 ( ) ,  (
o
u
to o u (5)
58 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
For a given sample X the loglikelihood is (ignoring additive constants of function ) ( f ) a function
of ) , (
2
o u :
¯
=
÷
÷ ÷ =
= =
M
c
c
x M
X k
X f X k X L X l
1
2
2
2
2 2 2
) (
2
1
ln
2
) ( ln
)] ,  ( ) ( ln[ )]  , ( ln[ )  , (
o
u
o
o u o u o u
(6)
Maximising the likelihood function corresponds to the question of which value of
u
O u e is best
supported by a given sampling realisation X. This implies solving the likelihood equation:
0
)  ( ln
)  ( =
c
c
÷
u
u
u
obs
obs l
X L
X D
(7)
When a closedform solution of equation (7) cannot be found, iterative methods can be applied. The
Expected maximisation (EM) algorithm is one of these iterative methods.
13
The issue is that X contains
both observable and missing values, i.e. ) X , X ( X
mis obs
= . Thus both the unknown parameters and the
unknown observations of the model have to be found.
Assuming that missing data are MAR or MCAR
14
, the EM consists of two components: the
expectation (E) and maximisation (M) steps. Each step is completed once within each algorithm cycle.
Cycles are repeated until a suitable convergence criterion is satisfied. The procedure is as follows. First
(M), the parameter vector u is estimated by applying maximum likelihood as if there were no missing
data, and second (E), the expected values of the missing variables are calculated, given the estimate of u
obtained in the Mstep. This procedure is repeated until convergence (absence of changes in estimates
and in the variancecovariance matrix). Effectively, this process maximises the expectation of the
complete data loglikelihood in each cycle, conditional on the observed data and parameter vector. To
start the process, however, an initial estimate of the missing data is needed. This is obtained by running
the first Mstep on the nonmissing observations only and then predicting the missing variables by using
the estimate on u .
The advantage of the EM is its broadness. It can be used for a broad range of problems,
e.g. variance component estimation or factor analysis. An EM algorithm is also often easy to construct
conceptually and practically. Besides, each step has a statistical interpretation and convergence is
reliable. The main drawback, however, is that convergence may be very slow when a large proportion of
information is missing (if there were no missing information, convergence would be immediate). The
user should also be careful that the maximum found is indeed a global maximum and not local. To test
this, different initial starting values for u can be used.
3.5. Multiple imputation
Multiple imputation (MI) is a general approach that does not require a specification of
parameterised likelihood for all data (Figure 10). The imputation of missing data is performed with a
random process that reflects uncertainty. Imputation is done N times, to create N “complete” datasets.
The parameters of interest are estimated on each data set, together with their standard errors. Average
(mean or median) estimates are combined using the N sets and betweenand withinimputation variance
is calculated.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 59
Figure 10. Logic of multiple imputation
Data set
with missing
values
Set 1
Set 2
Set N
Result 1
Result 2
Result N
Combine
results
Any “proper” imputation method can be used in multiple imputation. For example, regression
imputation could be used repeatedly, drawing N values of the regression parameters using the variance
matrix of estimated coefficients. However, one of the most general models is the Markov Chain Monte
Carlo (MCMC) method. MCMC is a sequence of random variables in which the distribution of the actual
element depends on the value of the previous one. It assumes that data are drawn from a multivariate
normal distribution and requires MAR or MCAR assumptions.
The theory of MCMC is most easily understood using Bayesian methodology (Figure 11). The
observed data are denoted Xobs, and the complete data set, X=(Xobs, Xmis), where X
mis
is to be filled in
via multiple imputation. If the distribution of X
mis
, with parameter vector u , were known, then X
mis
could
be imputed by drawing from the conditional distribution f(X
mis
X
obs
, u ). However, since u is unknown, it
shall be estimated from the data, yielding u
ˆ
, and using the distribution f(X
mis
X
obs
u
ˆ
). Since u
ˆ
is itself a
random variable, we must also take its variability into account in drawing imputations.
The missingdata generating process may also depend on additional parameters m mm m, but if m mm m and u uu u are
independent, the process is called ignorable and the analyst may concentrate on modelling the missing
data given the observed data and u uu u. If the two processes are not independent, then a nonignorable
missingdata generating process pertains, which cannot be solved adequately without making
assumptions on the functional form of the interdependency.
60 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
Figure 11. Markov Chain Monte Carlo imputation method
Source: Rearranged from Chantala & Suchindran (2003)
In Bayesian terms, u is a random variable, the distribution of which depends on the data. The first
step in its estimation is to obtain the posterior distribution of u from the data. Usually this posterior is
approximated by a normal distribution. After formulating the posterior distribution of u , the following
imputation algorithm can be used:
• Draw
*
u
from the posterior distribution of
u
, f(
u
Y, X
obs
), where Y denotes exogenous
variables that may influence
u
.
• Draw X
mis
from f(X
mis
Y, X
obs
,
*
u
)
• Use the completed data X and the model to estimate the parameter of interest (e.g. the mean)
*
þ
and its variance V(
*
þ
) (withinimputation variance).
These steps are repeated independently N times, resulting in
*
n
þ , V(
*
n
þ ), n=1,…,N. Finally, the N
imputations are combined. A possible combination is the mean of all individual estimates (but the
median can also be used):
¯
=
=
N
1 n
*
n
*
N
1
þ þ
(8)
MCMC method
Choose starting values: compute mean vector
and covariance matrix from the data that does
not have missing values. Use to estimate
Prior distribution.
Imputation step: simulate values for missing
data items by randomly selecting a value
from the available distribution of values
Posterior step: recompute mean vector and
covariance matrix with the imputed estimates
from the Imputation step.
This is the posterior distribution
Required iterations done?
(need enough iterations so distribution
is stationary, i.e. mean vector and cov.
matrix are unchanged as we iterate)
Use imputation from final iteration
to form a data set without
missing values
need more iterations
enough iterations
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 61
This combination will be the value that fills in the blank space in the data set. The total variance is
obtained as a weighted sum of the withinimputation variance and the betweenimputation variance:
B
N
1 N
V V
*
+
+ =
(9)
where the mean of the withinimputation variances is
( )
¯
=
=
N
1 n
*
n
V
N
1
V þ
(10)
and the betweenimputation variance is given by
( )( )
¯
=
'
÷ ÷
÷
=
N
1 n
* *
n
* *
n
1 N
1
B þ þ þ þ
(11)
Confidence intervals are obtained by taking the overall estimate plus or minus a multiple of standard
error, where that number is a quantile of Student’s tdistribution with degrees of freedom:
2
r
1
1 ) 1 N ( df

.

\

+ ÷ =
(12)
where r is the betweentowithin ratio.
V
B
N
1
1 r

.

\

+ =
(13)
Based on these variances, approximate 95% confidence intervals can be calculated.
The Multiple Imputation method imputes several values (N) for each missing value (from the
predictive distribution of the missing data), to represent the uncertainty about which values to impute.
The N versions of completed data sets are analysed by standard complete data methods and the results
combined using simple rules to yield single combined estimates (e.g. MSE, regression coefficients),
standard errors and pvalues, which formally incorporate missing data uncertainty. The pooling of the
results of the analyses performed on the multiple imputed data sets implies that the resulting point
estimates are averaged over the N completed sample points, and the resulting standard errors and p
values are adjusted according to the variance of the corresponding N completed sample point estimates.
Thus, the “betweenimputation variance” provides a measure of the extra inferential uncertainty due to
missing data which is not reflected in single imputation).
62 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
Box 4. Rules of thumb in choosing the imputation method
The main question a modeler has to face when dealing with imputation is which method he/she has to use to fill
in empty data spaces. To the best of our knowledge there is no definitive answer to this question but a number of
rules of thumb (and lot of common sense). The choice principally depends on the dataset available (e.g. data
expressed on a continuous scale or ordinal data where methods like MCMC cannot be used), the number of missing
data as compared to the dimension of the dataset (few missing data in a large dataset do not probably require
sophisticated imputation methods), and the identity of the country and the indicator for which the data is missing.
Therefore there is not "a" method we advise to use but the method should be fitted to the characteristics of the
missing information.
A useful (but time consuming) exercise is the application of the “in sample/out of sample” logic in order to find
the suitable imputation method. This consists in taking the complete part of the dataset, eliminate some of the data
(for the same countries and in the same proportion of the complete dataset), use several imputation methods and
evaluate the performance of each of them. The goodness of imputation can be checked using several instruments:
the correlation coefficient (R) and its square, the coefficient of determination (
2
R
)
[ ]
2
1 2
) )( (
1
÷ ÷
=
¯
=
O P
N
i
i i
O O P P
N
R
o o
With
N
the number of imputations,
i
O
the observed data point (the one that has been excluded to do the
imputation),
i
P
the imputed data point and
) (P O
the average of the observed (imputed) data,
) (
P O
o o
the
standard deviation of the observed (imputed) data. As noticed by Willmott et al. (1985) the value of
2
R
could be
unrelated to the sizes of the difference between the predicted and the observed values. To solve the problem
Willmott (1982) developed an index of agreement:
[ ]
2
1
1
) (
) (
1
÷ + ÷
÷
÷ =
¯
¯
=
=
N
i
k
i i
N
i
k
i i
O O O P
O P
d with k equal to 1 or 2.
Another measure of the average error of the model is the root mean square error and the mean absolute error:
¯
¯
=
=
÷ =

.

\

÷ =
N
i
i i
N
i
i i
O P
N
MAE
O P
N
RMSE
1
2 / 1
1
2
1
) (
1
Finally a complementary measure of accuracy of imputation is the use of bootstrapping methods to generate
samples of imputed values. For each sample the performance analysis is performed. Standard errors are then
calculated as a standard deviation of the performance analysis.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 63
STEP 4. MULTIVARIATE ANALYSIS
Multivariate data analysis techniques which have found use in the construction or analysis of
composite indicators are described in this section. For further details refer to, e.g., Hair et al., (2006). The
majority of methods in this section are thought for data expressed in an interval or ratio scale, although
some of the methods have been used with ordinal data (for example principal components and factor
analysis, see Vermunt & Magidson 2005).
4.1. Principal components analysis
The objective is to explain the variance of the observed data through a few linear combinations of
the original data.
15
Even though there are Q variables,
Q 2 1
x ,... x , x , much of the data’s variation can
often be accounted for by a small number of variables – principal components, or linear relations of the
original data,
Q 2 1
Z ,... Z , Z , that are uncorrelated. At this point there are still Q principal components,
i.e., as many as there are variables. The next step is to select the first, e.g., P<Q principal components
that preserve a “high” amount of the cumulative variance of the original data.
Q QQ 2 2 Q 1 1 Q Q
Q Q 2 2 22 1 21 2
Q Q 1 2 12 1 11 1
x a ... x a x a Z
...
x a ... x a x a Z
x a ... x a x a Z
+ + + =
+ + + =
+ + + =
(14)
A lack of correlation in the principal components is a useful property. It indicates that the principal
components are measuring different “statistical dimensions” in the data. When the objective of the
analysis is to present a huge data set using a few variables, some degree of economy can be achieved by
applying Principal Components Analysis (PCA) if the variation in the Qoriginal x variables can be
accounted for by a small number of Z variables. It must be stressed that PCA cannot always reduce a
large number of original variables to a small number of transformed variables. Indeed, if the original
variables are uncorrelated, then the analysis is of no value. On the other hand, a significant reduction can
be obtained when the original variables are highly correlated – positively or negatively.
The weights
ij
a (also called component or factor loadings) applied to the variables
j
x in equation
(14) are chosen so that the principal components
i
Z satisfy the following conditions:
(i) they are uncorrelated (orthogonal);
(ii) the first principal component accounts for the maximum possible proportion of the
variance of the set of x s, the second principal component accounts for the maximum of
the remaining variance, and so on until the last of the principal components absorbs all
the remaining variance not accounted for by the preceding components, and
16
Q i a a a
iQ i i
,..., 2 , 1 , 1 ...
2 2
2
2
1
= = + + +
64 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
where
ij
a are the factor loadings,
Q 2 1
x ,... x , x are the variables (indicators), and Q the number of
variables.
PCA involves finding the eigenvalues Ȝ
j
, j=1,…,Q, of the sample covariance matrix CM,
=
...
...
...
...
QQ 2 Q 1 Q
Q 2 22 21
Q 1 12 11
cm cm cm
cm cm cm
cm cm cm
CM
(15)
where the diagonal element
ii
cm is the variance of
i
x and
ij
cm is the covariance of variables
i
x and
j
x . The eigenvalues of the matrix CM are the variances of the principal components and can be
found by solving the characteristic equation 0 = ÷ I CM ì , where I is the identity matrix with the same
order as CM and Ȝ is the vector of eigenvalues. This is possible, however, only if Q is small. If there are
too many variables, solving for Ȝ is nontrivial and other methods exist (see e.g. Gentle et al., 2004;
Golub & van der Vorst, 2000).
17
There are Qeigenvalues, some of which may be negligible. Negative
eigenvalues are not possible for a covariance matrix. An important property of the eigenvalues is that
they add up to the sum of the diagonal elements of CM. That is, the sum of the variances of the principal
components is equal to the sum of the variances of the original variables:
Ȝ
1
+ Ȝ
2
+ ... + Ȝ
Q
= cm
11
+ cm
22
+ ... + cm
QQ
(16)
In order to prevent one variable having an undue influence on the principal components, it is
common to standardise the variables – x s – to have zero means and unit variances at the start of the
analysis. The covariance matrix CM then takes the form of the correlation matrix (Table 6). In the TAI
example, the highest correlation is found between the individual indicators electricity and Internet, with a
coefficient of 0.84.
Table 6. Correlation matrix for individual TAI indicators
P
A
T
E
N
T
S
R
O
Y
A
L
T
I
E
S
I
N
T
E
R
N
E
T
E
X
P
O
R
T
S
T
E
L
E
P
H
O
N
E
E
L
E
C
T
R
I
C
I
T
Y
S
C
H
O
O
L
I
N
G
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
Y
PATENTS 1.00 0.13 0.09 0.45 0.28 0.03 0.22 0.08
ROYALTIES 1.00 0.46 0.25 0.56 0.32 0.30 0.06
INTERNET 1.00 0.45 0.56 0.84 0.63 0.27
EXPORTS 1.00 0.00 0.36 0.35 0.03
TELEPHONE 1.00 0.64 0.30 0.33
ELECTRICITY 1.00 0.65 0.26
SCHOOLING 1.00 0.08
UNIVERSITY 1.00
Note: n=23. Marked correlations are statistically significant at p < 0.05.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 65
Table 7 gives the eigenvalues of the correlation matrix of the eight individual indicators
(standardised values) that compose TAI. Note that the sum of the eigenvalues is equal to the number of
individual indicators ( 8 = Q ). Figure 12 (left graph) is a graphical presentation of the eigenvalues in
descending order. Given that the correlation matrix rather than the covariance matrix is used in the PCA,
all eight individual indicators are assigned equal weights in forming the principal components
(Chatfield & Collins, 1980). The first principal component explains the maximum variance in all the
individual indicators (eigenvalue of 3.3). The second principal component explains the maximum amount
of the remaining variance, with a variance of 1.7. The third and fourth principal components have an
eigenvalue close to 1. The last four principal components explain the remaining 12.8% of the variance in
the data set.
Table 7. Eigenvalues of individual TAI indicators
PC Eigenvalue % of variance Cumulative %
1
3.3 41.9 41.9
2
1.7 21.8 63.7
3
1.0 12.3 76.0
4
0.9 11.1 87.2
5
0.5 6.0 93.2
6
0.3 3.7 96.9
7
0.2 2.2 99.1
8
0.1 0.9 100.0
A drawback of the conventional PCA is that it does not allow for inference on the properties of the
general population. Traditionally, drawing such inferences requires certain distributional assumptions to
be made regarding the population characteristics, which PCA techniques are not based on. There are
several assumptions made in the application of PCA/FA which are discussed in Box 5.
These assumptions are referred to in almost all textbooks, yet are often neglected in the
development of composite indicators.
Furthermore, in a traditional PCA framework there is no estimation of the statistical precision of the
results, which is essential for relatively small sample sizes, as in the present example of the TAI. The
bootstrap method has therefore been utilised in conjunction with PCA to make inferences about the
population (Efron & Tibshirani, 1991, 1993). Bootstrap refers to the process of randomly resampling the
original data set to generate new data sets. Estimates of the relevant statistics are made for each bootstrap
sample. A very large number of bootstrap samples will give satisfactory results but the computation may
be cumbersome. Various values have been suggested, ranging from 25 (Efron & Tibshirani, 1991) to as
high as 1000 (Efron, 1987).
66 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
Box 5. Assumptions in principal component analysis
Sufficient number of cases. The question of how many cases (or countries) are necessary to perform
PCA/FA has no scientific answer and methodologists’ opinions differ. Alternative arbitrary rules of thumb in
descending order of popularity include the following:
Rule of 10. There should be at least 10 cases for each variable.
3:1 ratio. The casestovariables ratio should be no lower than 3.
5:1 ratio. The casestovariables ratio should be no lower than 5 (Bryant & Yarnold, 1995; Nunnaly, 1978,
Gorsuch, 1983).
Rule of 100: The number of cases should be the larger of “5 × number of variables” and 100 (Hatcher, 1994).
Rule of 150: Hutcheson & Sofroniou (1999) recommend at least 150  300 cases (closer to 150 when there are
a few highly correlated variables).
Rule of 200. There should be at least 200 cases, regardless of the casestovariables ratio (Gorsuch, 1983).
Significance rule. There should be 51 more cases than the number of variables, to support chisquare testing
(Lawley & Maxwell, 1971)
These rules are not mutually exclusive. Bryant & Yarnold (1995), for instance, endorse both the casesto
variables ratio and the Rule of 200. In the TAI example, there are 23:8 casestovariables, therefore the first and (to
a large extent) the second rule are satisfied.
No bias in selecting individual indicators. The exclusion of relevant individual indicators and the inclusion of
irrelevant individual indicators in the correlation matrix being factored will affect, often substantially, the factors which
are uncovered. Although social scientists may be attracted to factor analysis as a way of exploring data whose
structure is unknown, knowing the factorial structure in advance helps select the individual indicators to be included
and yields the best analysis of factors. This dilemma creates a chickenandegg problem. Note that this is not just a
matter of including all relevant individual indicators. Also, if individual indicators are deleted arbitrarily in order to
obtain a "cleaner" factorial solution, erroneous conclusions about the factor structure will result (Kim & Mueller,
1978).
No outliers. As with most techniques, the presence of outliers can affect interpretations arising from PCA/FA.
Mahalanobis distance may be used to identify cases, which are multivariate outliers and remove them prior to the
analysis. Alternatively, a dummy variable, set to 1, can be created for cases with high Mahalanobis distance, then
regressed on all other variables. If this regression is nonsignificant (or simply has a low Rsquared for large
samples), then the outliers are judged to be at random and there is less danger in retaining them. The ratio of the
regression coefficients indicates which variables are most associated with the outlier cases.
Assumption of interval data. Kim & Mueller (1978) note that ordinal data may be used if it is thought that the
assignment of ordinal categories to the data will not seriously distort the underlying metric scaling. Likewise, the use
of dichotomous data is allowed if the underlying metric correlation between the variables is thought to be moderate
(.7) or lower. The result of using ordinal data is that the factors may be much harder to interpret. Note that
categorical variables with similar splits will necessarily tend to correlate with each other, regardless of their content
(see Gorsuch, 1983). This is particularly apt to occur when dichotomies are used. The correlation will reflect
similarity of "difficulty" for items in a testing context; hence such correlated variables are called difficulty factors. The
researcher should examine the factor loadings of categorical variables with care, in order to assess whether
common loading reflects a difficulty factor or a substantive correlation.
Linearity. Principal component factor analysis (PFA), which is the most common variant of FA, is a linear
procedure. As with multiple linear regression, nonlinear transformation of selected variables may be a pre
processing step, but is not common. The smaller the sample size, the more important it is to screen data for linearity.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 67
Multivariate normality of data is required for related significance tests. PCA and PFA have no distributional
assumptions. Note, however, that a variant of factor analysis, maximum likelihood factor analysis, does assume
multivariate normality. The smaller the sample size, the more important it is to screen data for normality. Moreover,
as factor analysis is based on correlation (or sometimes covariance), both correlation and covariance will be
attenuated when variables come from different underlying distributions (e.g., a normal vs. a bimodal variable will
correlate less than 1.0 even when both series are perfectly coordered).
Underlying dimensions shared by clusters of individual indicators are assumed. If this assumption is not met,
the "garbage in, garbage out" principle applies. Factor analysis cannot create valid dimensions (factors) if none exist
in the input data. In such cases, factors generated by the factor analysis algorithm will not be comprehensible.
Likewise, the inclusion of multiple definitionallysimilar individual indicators representing essentially the same data
will lead to tautological results.
Strong intercorrelations are not mathematically required, but applying factor analysis to a correlation matrix
with only low intercorrelations will require nearly as many factors as there are original variables, thereby defeating
the data reduction purposes of factor analysis. On the other hand, too high intercorrelations may indicate a multi
collinearity problem and collinear terms should be combined or otherwise eliminated prior to factor analysis. Notice
also that PCA and Factor analysis (as well as Cronbach’s alpha) assume uncorrelated measurement errors.
(a) The KaiserMeyerOlkin (KMO) measure of sampling adequacy is a statistic for comparing the magnitudes
of the observed correlation coefficients to the magnitudes of the partial correlation coefficients. The concept is that
the partial correlations should not be very large if distinct factors are expected to emerge from factor analysis
(Hutcheson & Sofroniou, 1999). A KMO statistic is computed for each individual indicator, and their sum is the KMO
overall statistic. KMO varies from 0 to 1.0. A KMO overall should be .60 or higher to proceed with factor analysis
(Kaiser & Rice, 1974), though realistically it should exceed 0.80 if the results of the principal components analysis
are to be reliable. If not, it is advisable to drop the individual indicators with the lowest individual KMO statistic
values, until KMO overall rises above .60.
(b) Varianceinflation factor (VIF) is simply the reciprocal of tolerance. A VIF value greater than 4.0 is an
arbitrary but common cutoff criterion for suggesting that there is a multicollinearity problem. Some researchers use
the more lenient cutoff VIF value of 5.0.
(c) The Bartlett’s test of sphericity is used to test the null hypothesis that the individual indicators in a
correlation matrix are uncorrelated, i.e. that the correlation matrix is an identity matrix. The statistic is based on a chi
squared transformation of the determinant of the correlation matrix. However, as Bartlett’s test is highly sensitive to
sample size (Knapp & Swoyer, 1967), Tabachnick & Fidell (1989) suggest implementing it with the KMO measure.
An important issue, however, is whether the TAI data set for the 23 countries can be viewed as a
“random” sample of the entire population, as required by the bootstrap procedures (Efron, 1987; Efron &
Tibshirani, 1993). Several points can be made regarding the issues of randomness and representativeness
of the data. First, it is often difficult to obtain complete information for a data set in the social sciences,
as controlled experiments are not always possible, unlike in natural sciences. As Efron and Tibshirani
(1993) state that, ‘in practice the selection process is seldom this neat […], but the conceptual framework
of random sampling is still useful for understanding statistical inferences.’ Second, the countries included
in the restricted set show no apparent pattern as to whether or not they are predominately developed or
developing countries. In addition, the countries are of varying sizes and span all the major continents of
the world, ensuring a wide representation of the global state of technological development.
Consequently, the restricted set could be considered representative of the total population. A third point
on data quality is that a certain amount of measurement error is likely to pertain. While such
measurement error can only be controlled at the data collection stage, rather than at the analytical stage,
it is argued that the data represent the best estimates currently available (UN, 2001).
Figure 12 (right graph) demonstrates graphically the relationship between the eigenvalues from the
deterministic PCA, their bootstrapped confidence intervals (5
th
and 95
th
percentiles) and the ranked
principal components. These confidence intervals make it possible to generalise the conclusions
68 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
concerning the small set of the individual indicators (23 countries) to the entire population (e.g. of
72 countries or even more generally), rather than confining the conclusions only to the sample set under
analysis. Bootstrapping was performed for 1 000 sample sets of size 23 (random sampling with
replacement). It is shown that the values of the eigenvalues drop sharply at the beginning and then
gradually approach zero after a certain point.
Figure 12. Eigenvalues for individual TAI numbers
0.0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Principal Component
E
i
g
e
n
v
a
l
u
e
0.0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Principal Component
E
i
g
e
n
v
a
l
u
e
Note: (left graph) Scree plot: Eigenvalues from traditional Principal Components Analysis
(right graph) Bootstrapped eigenvalues based on 1000 samples randomly selected with replacement
The correlation coefficients between the principal components Z and the variables x are called
component loadings, ) x , Z ( r
i j
. In the case of uncorrelated variables x, the loadings are equal to the
weights
ij
a given in equation (14). Analogously to Pearson's r , the squared loading is the percentage of
variance in that variable explained by the principal component. The component scores are the scores of
each case (each country in our example) on each principal component. The component score for a given
case for a principal component is calculated by taking the case’s standardised value on each variable,
multiplying by the corresponding loading of the variable for the given principal component factor, and
summing these products.
Table 8 presents the component loadings for the individual TAI indicators. High and moderate
loadings (>0.50) indicate how the individual indicators are related to the principal components. It can be
seen that with the exception of patents and royalties, all the other individual indicators are entirely
accounted for by one principal component alone and that the high and moderate loadings are all found in
the first four principal components. An undesirable property of these components is that two individual
indicators are related strongly to two principal components.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 69
Table 8. Component loadings for individual TAI indicators
Principal components
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PATENTS 0.11 0.75 0.13 0.60 0.10 0.12 0.17 0.05
ROYALTIES 0.56 0.48 0.22 0.54 0.27 0.17 0.04 0.10
INTERNET 0.92 0.21 0.02 0.10 0.04 0.11 0.27 0.13
EXPORTS 0.35 0.85 0.01 0.13 0.11 0.35 0.06 0.08
TELEPHONES 0.76 0.39 0.16 0.16 0.41 0.16 0.16 0.09
ELECTRICITY 0.91 0.13 0.01 0.07 0.19 0.30 0.04 0.16
SCHOOLING 0.74 0.11 0.37 0.39 0.33 0.02 0.20 0.07
UNIVERSITY 0.36 0.12 0.87 0.15 0.26 0.03 0.02 0.02
Note: Extraction method: PCA. Loadings greater than 0.5 (absolute values) are highlighted, n=23 countries.
The question of how many principal components should be retained in the analysis without losing
too much information and of how the interpretation of the components might be improved are addressed
in the following section on Factor Analysis.
4.2. Factor analysis
Factor analysis (FA) is similar to PCA. It aims to describe a set of Q variables x
1
, x
2
,..., x
Q
in terms
of a smaller number of m factors and to highlight the relationship between these variables. However,
while PCA is based simply on linear data combinations, FA is based on a rather special model. Contrary
to the PCA, the FA model assumes that the data is based on the underlying factors of the model, and that
the data variance can be decomposed into that accounted for by common and unique factors. The model
is given by:
x
1
= Į
11
F
1
+ Į
12
F
2
+...+ Į
1m
F
m
+ e
1
x
2
= Į
21
F
1
+ Į
22
F
2
+...+ Į
2m
F
m
+ e
2
...
x
Q
= Į
Q1
F
1
+ Į
Q2
F
2
+...+ Į
Qm
F
m
+ e
Q
(17)
where x
i
(i=1,…,Q) represents the original variables but standardized with zero mean and unit
variance; Į
i1
, Į
i2
, ..., Į
im
are the factor loadings related to the variable X
i
; F
1,
F
2
,...,F
m
are m uncorrelated
common factors, each with zero mean and unit variance; and e
i
are the Q specific factors supposed
independently and identically distributed with zero mean. There are several approaches to dealing with
the model given in equation (17), e.g. communalities, maximum likelihood factors, centroid method,
principal axis method, etc. The most common is the use of PCA to extract the first m principal
components and to consider them as factors, neglecting those remaining. Principal components factor
analysis is most preferred in the development of composite indicators, e.g. in the Product Market
Regulation Index (Nicoletti et al., 2000), as it has the virtue of simplicity and allows for the construction
of weights representing the information content of individual indicators. Note, however, that different
extraction methods supply different values for the factors and thus for the weights, influencing the score
of the composite and the corresponding country ranking.
On the issue of how factors should be retained in the analysis without losing too much information,
methodologists are divided. The decision on when to stop extracting factors depends basically on when
there is only very little “random” variability left, and is rather arbitrary. However, various guidelines
(“stopping rules”) have been developed, roughly in the order of frequency of their use in social science
(Dunteman, 1989: 223) (Box 6).
70 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
Box 6. A sample of "stopping rules"
Kaiser criterion. Drop all factors with eigenvalues below 1.0. The simplest justification for this is that it makes
no sense to add a factor that explains less variance than is contained in one individual indicator. According to this
rule, three factors should be retained in the analysis of the TAI example, although the fourth factor follows closely
with an eigenvalue of 0.90.
Scree plot. This method, proposed by Cattell, plots the successive eigenvalues, which drop sharply and then
level off. It suggests retaining all eigenvalues in the sharp descent before the first one on the line where they start to
level off. This approach would result in retaining three factors in the TAI example (Figure 12, left graph).
Variance explained criteria. Some researchers simply use the rule of keeping enough factors to account for
90% (sometimes 80%) of the variation. The first four factors account for 87.2% of the total variance.
Joliffe criterion. Drop all factors with eigenvalues under 0.70. This rule may result in twice as many factors as
the Kaiser criterion produces and is less often used. In the present case study, this criterion would have led to the
selection of four factors.
Comprehensibility. Though not a strictly mathematical criterion, there is much to be said for limiting the
number of factors to those whose dimension of meaning is readily comprehensible. Often this means the first two or
three.
A method for deciding on the number of factors to retain combines the bootstrapped eigenvalues
and eigenvectors (Jackson, 1993). Based on a combination of the Kaiser criterion and the bootstrapped
eigenvalues, the first four factors should be considered in the TAI example. In light of the above analysis,
the first four principal components, as identified by the bootstrap eigenvalue approach combined with the
Kaiser criterion, are retained. This choice implies a greater willingness to overstate the significance of
the fourth component and is in line with the idea that there are four main categories of technology
achievement indicators.
After choosing the number of factors to keep, it is standard practice to perform rotation so as to
enhance the interpretability of the results. The sum of eigenvalues is not affected by rotation, but
changing the axes will alter the eigenvalues of particular factors and will change the factor loadings.
Various rotational strategies have been proposed. The goal of all of these strategies is to obtain a clear
pattern of loadings. However, different rotations imply different loadings, and thus different meanings of
principal components – a problem some cite as a drawback to the method. The most common rotation
method is the “varimax rotation”.
Table 9 presents the factor loadings for the first factors in the TAI example. Note that the
eigenvalues have been affected by the rotation. The variance accounted for by the rotated components is
spread more evenly than for the unrotated. The first four factors now account for 87% of the total
variance and are not sorted into descending order according to how much of the original data set’s
variance is explained. The first factor has high positive coefficients (loadings) with Internet (0.79),
electricity (0.82) and schooling (0.88). Factor 2 is mainly dominated by patents and exports, while
university is exclusively loaded on Factor 3. Finally, Factor 4 is formed by royalties and telephones. Yet,
despite the rotation of factors, the individual indicator exports has sizeable loadings in both Factor 1
(negative loading) and Factor 2 (positive loading). A meaningful interpretation of the factors is not
straightforward. Furthermore, the statistical treatment of the eight individual indicators results in
different groups (factors) to the conceptual ones (see Table A.1 in Appendix). The factor loading shown
in Table 9 will be used later in the section on “Weighting and aggregation” to construct weights for the
TAI composite indicator.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 71
Table 9. Rotated factor loadings for individual TAI indicators (method 1)
Factor 1 Factor 2 Factor 3 Factor 4 Communality
PATENTS 0.07 0.97 0.06 0.06 0.95
ROYALTIES 0.13 0.07 0.07 0.93 0.89
INTERNET 0.79 0.21 0.21 0.42 0.89
EXPORTS 0.64 0.56 0.04 0.36 0.86
TELEPHONES 0.37 0.17 0.38 0.68 0.77
ELECTRICITY 0.82 0.04 0.25 0.35 0.85
SCHOOLING 0.88 0.23 0.09 0.09 0.85
UNIVERSITY 0.08 0.04 0.96 0.04 0.93
Explained variance 2.64 1.39 1.19 1.76
Cumulative (%) 33 50 65 87
Note: Extraction method: principal components, varimax normalised rotation. Positive loadings greater than 0.5 are highlighted.
Another method of extracting factors that deals with the noncorrelation of the specific factors
would have given different results. Table 10 presents the rotated factor loadings of the four factors for the
TAI case study (extraction method: principal factors maximum likelihood). For instance, electricity and
schooling are no longer loaded on F1: electricity is loaded on F4 and schooling on F2. 76% of the total
variance is explained by the four rotated common factors. In contrast, the total variance explained by the
four rotated principal components was much higher in the previous analysis (87%). The commonalties
for seven individual indicators are greater than 0.64, with the exception of university, for which the
communality is only 0.15, which indicates that university does not move with the other individual
indicators in the data set, and therefore is not wellrepresented by the four common factors. This
conclusion does not depend on the factor analysis method, as it has been confirmed by different methods
(centroid method, principal axis method).
Table 10. Rotated factor loadings for individual TAI indicators (method 2)
Factor 1 Factor 2 Factor 3 Factor 4 Communality
PATENTS 0.01 0.11 0.88 0.13 0.80
ROYALTIES 0.96 0.14 0.09 0.18 0.99
INTERNET 0.31 0.56 0.29 0.60 0.86
EXPORTS 0.29 0.45 0.58 0.14 0.65
TELEPHONES 0.41 0.13 0.18 0.73 0.75
ELECTRICITY 0.13 0.57 0.13 0.73 0.89
SCHOOLING 0.14 0.95 0.10 0.14 0.95
UNIVERSITY 0.01 0.03 0.03 0.39 0.15
Explained Variance 1.31 1.80 1.27 1.67
Cumulative (%) 16 39 55 76
Note: Extraction method: principal factors maximum likelihood, varimax normalised rotation.
72 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
Summarizing the steps of the PCA/FA exploratory analysis method:
1. Calculate the covariance/correlation matrix: if the correlation between individual indicators is
small, it is unlikely that they share common factors.
2. Identify the number of factors necessary to represent the data and the method for calculating
them.
3. Rotate factors to enhance their interpretability (by maximising loading of individual indicators
on individual factors).
4.3. Cronbach Coefficient Alpha
The Cronbach Coefficient Alpha (henceforth calpha) (Cronbach, 1951) is the most common
estimate of internal consistency of items in a model or survey – Reliability/Item Analysis (e.g. Boscarino
et al., 2004; Raykov, 1998; Cortina, 1993; Feldt et al., 1987; Green et al., 1977; Hattie, 1985; Miller,
1995). It assesses how well a set of items (in our terminology individual indicators) measures a single
unidimensional object (e.g. attitude, phenomenon, etc.).
Cronbach’s Coefficient Alpha can be defined as:
Q j i M c
x
x
Q
Q
x
x x
Q
Q
o
j
j
o
j i
j i
c
,.., 1 , ; ,.., 1
) var(
) var(
1
1 ) var(
) , cov(
1
= =



.

\

÷


.

\

÷
=


.

\

÷
=
¯ ¯
=
o
(18)
where M indicates the number of countries considered, Q the number of individual indicators
available, and
¯
=
=
Q
1 q
j o
x x is the sum of all individual indicators. Calpha measures the portion of total
variability of the sample of individual indicators due to the correlation of indicators. It increases with the
number of individual indicators and with the covariance of each pair. If no correlation exists and
individual indicators are independent, then Calpha is equal to zero, while if individual indicators are
perfectly correlated, Calpha is equal to one.
Calpha is not a statistical test, but a coefficient of reliability based on the correlation between
individual indicators. That is, if the correlation is high, then there is evidence that the individual
indicators are measuring the same underlying construct. Therefore a high calpha, or equivalently a high
“reliability”, indicates that the individual indicators measure the latent phenomenon well. Although
widely interpreted as such, strictly speaking calpha is not a measure of unidimensionality. A set of
individual indicators can have a high alpha and still be multidimensional. This happens when there are
separate clusters of individual indicators (separate dimensions) which intercorrelate highly, even though
the clusters themselves are not highly correlated. A question is how large the calpha must be. Nunnally
(1978) suggests 0.7 as an acceptable reliability threshold. Yet some authors use .75 or .80 as a cutoff
value, while others are as lenient as to go to 0.6. In general this varies by discipline.
If the variances of the individual indicators vary widely, as in our test case, a standard practice is to
standardise the individual indicators to a standard deviation of 1 before computing the coefficient alpha.
In our notation this would mean substituting x
i
with I
i
. The calpha is .70 for the data set of the 23
countries, which is equal to Nunnally’s cutoff value. An interesting exercise is to determine how the c
alpha varies with the deletion of each individual indicator at a time. This helps to reveal the existence of
clusters of individual indicators, thus it is useful to determine the nested structure of the composite. If the
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 73
reliability coefficient increases after deleting an individual indicator from the scale, one can assume that
the individual indicator is not correlated highly with other individual indicators in the scale.
Table 11 presents the values for the Cronbach coefficient alpha and the correlation with the total
after deleting one individual indicator at a time. Telephones has the highest variabletotal correlation and
if deleted the coefficient alpha would be as low as 0.60. If exports were to be deleted from the set, then
the value of the standardised coefficient alpha would increase from the current .70 to .77. Note that the
same individual indicator has the lowest variabletotal correlation value (.108). This indicates that
exports are not measuring the same construct as the rest of the individual indicators. Note also that the
factor analysis in the previous section had indicated university as the individual indicator that shared the
least amount of common variance with the other individual indicators. Although both factor analysis and
the Cronbach coefficient alpha are based on correlations among individual indicators, their conceptual
framework is different.
Table 11. Cronbach coefficient alpha results for individual TAI indicators
Deleted individual indicator Correlation with total Cronbach coefficient alpha
PATENTS 0.261 0.704
ROYALTIES
0.527 0.645
INTERNET
0.566 0.636
EXPORTS
0.108 0.774
TELEPHONES
0.701 0.603
ELECTRICITY
0.614 0.624
SCHOOLING
0.451 0.662
UNIVERSITY
0.249 0.706
Note: Cronbach coefficient alpha results for the 23 countries after deleting one individual indicator (standardised values) at a time.
4.4. Cluster analysis
Cluster analysis (CLA) is a collection of algorithms to classify objects such as countries, species,
and individuals (Anderberg, 1973; Massart & Kaufman, 1983). The classification aims to reduce the
dimensionality of a data set by exploiting the similarities/dissimilarities between cases. CLA techniques
can be hierarchical if the classification has an increasing number of nested classes, e.g. tree clustering; or
nonhierarchical when the number of clusters is decided ex ante, e.g. kmeans clustering. However, care
should be taken that classes are meaningful and not arbitrary or artificial.
Homogeneous and distinct groups could be delineated according to assessment of distances or, as in
the case of Ward’s method, an Ftest (Davis, 1986). A distance measure is an appraisal of the degree of
similarity or dissimilarity between cases in the set. A small distance is equivalent to a strong similarity. It
can be based on a single dimension or on multiple dimensions, for example, countries in the TAI
example can be evaluated according to the TAI composite indicator or according to all individual
indicators. Some of the most common distance measures are listed in Table 12, including Euclidean and
nonEuclidean distances.
18
The next step is to choose the clustering algorithm, i.e. the rules which govern how distances are
measured between clusters. There are many methods for this. The selection criteria could differ and
hence different classifications may be obtained for the same data, even using the same distance measure.
The most common linkage rules are (Spath, 1980):
74 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
• Single linkage (nearest neighbour). The distance between two clusters is determined by the
distance between the two closest elements in the different clusters. This rule produces
clusters chained together by single objects.
• Complete linkage (farthest neighbour). The distance between two clusters is determined
by the greatest distance between any two objects belonging to different clusters. This
method usually performs well when objects naturally form distinct groups.
• Unweighted pairgroup average. The distance between two clusters is calculated as the
average distance between all pairs of objects in the two clusters. This method usually
performs well when objects naturally form distinct groups. A variation of this method uses
the centroid of a cluster – the distance is the average point in the multidimensional space
defined by the dimensions.
• Weighted pairgroup average. Similar to the unweighted pairgroup average (centroid
included), except that the size of the cluster, i.e. the number of objects contained, is used as
a weight for the average distance. This method is useful when cluster sizes are very
different.
• Ward’s method (Ward, 1963). Cluster membership is determined by calculating the
variance of elements, i.e. the sum of the squared deviations from the mean of the cluster.
An element will belong to the cluster if it produces the smallest possible increase in the
variance.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 75
Table 12. Distance measures ) , ( y x D for individual TAI indicators between two objects x and y over
d
N
dimensions
Euclidean
2 / 1
1
2
) (
) , (




.

\

÷
=
¯
=
d
N
i
i i
N
y x
y x D
d
This is the geometric distance in a multi
dimensional space and is usually
computed from raw data (prior to any
normalisation). This measure is not
affected by the addition of new objects
such as outliers. However, it is highly
affected by the difference in scale, e.g.,
whether the same object is measured in
centimetres or in metres the D(x,y)
Squared Euclidean
d
N
i
i i
N
y x
y x D
d
¯
=
÷
=
1
2
) (
) , (
This measure places progressively
greater weight on objects that are further
apart. Usually this is computed from raw
data and shares the same advantages
and disadvantages of the Euclidean
distance.
Cityblock
19
(Manhattan)
d
N
i
i i
N
y x
y x D
d
¯
=
÷
=
1
) , (
This distance is the average of distances
across dimensions and it yields similar
results to the Euclidean distance. In this
measure the effect of outliers is less
pronounced, since it is not squared.
Chebychev
i i
y x Max y x D ÷ = ) , (
This measure is mostly used when it is
desired to define objects as “different” if
they are different in any one of the
dimensions.
Power
r
d
N
i
p
i i
N
y x
y x D
d
/ 1
1
) (
) , (




.

\

÷
=
¯
=
This distance measure is useful when it is
desired to increase or decrease the
progressive weight placed on one
dimension for which the respective objects
are very different. The parameters r and p
are userdefined, such that p controls the
progressive weights placed on differences
between individual dimensions, and r
controls the progressive weight placed on
larger differences between objects. Note
that for p=r=2 corresponds to the
Euclidean distance.
Percent disagreement
d
i i
N
y x of number
y x D
=
= ) , (
This measure is useful if the data are
categorical in nature.
76 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
Figure 13 shows the country clusters based on the individual Technology Achievement Index
indicators using tree clustering (hierarchical) with single linkage and squared Euclidean distances.
Similarity between countries belonging to the same cluster decreases as the linkage distance increases.
One of the biggest problems with CLA is identifying the optimum number of clusters. As the
amalgamation process continues, increasingly dissimilar clusters must be fused, i.e. the classification
becomes increasingly artificial. Deciding on the optimum number of clusters is largely subjective,
although looking at the plot of linkage distance across fusion steps may help (Milligan & Cooper, 1985).
Figure 13. Country clusters for individual TAI indicators
Japan
Norway
Korea
New Zealand
Australia
Singapore
Canada
Hungary
Czech Republic
Germany
Slovenia
Spain
Italy
France
Austria
Israel
Belgium
Ireland
United Kingdom
Netherlands
Sweden
USA
Finland
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
Threshold for the
formation of clusters
Note: Standardised data. Type: Hierarchical, single linkage, squared Euclidean distances.
Sudden jumps in the level of similarity (abscissa) could indicate that dissimilar groups or outliers
are fused. Such a plot is presented in Figure 14, where the greatest dissimilarity among the 23 countries
in the TAI example is found at a linkage distance close to 4.0, which indicates that the data are best
represented by ten clusters: Finland; Sweden and the USA; the group of countries located between the
Netherlands and Hungary; Canada; Singapore; Australia; New Zealand; Korea; Norway; and Japan. Note
that the most dissimilar are Korea, Norway and Japan, which are aggregated only at the very end of the
analysis. Besides, this result does not fully correspond to the division into laggard, average and leading
countries resulting from the standard aggregation methods. Japan, in fact, would be in the group of
leading countries, together with Finland, Sweden, USA, while Hungary, the Czech Republic, Slovenia
and Italy would be the laggards, at a great distance from the Netherlands, the USA or Sweden (see
Table 38 in the ‘Performance of the different aggregation methods’).
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 77
A nonhierarchical method of clustering, different from the joining or tree clustering shown below,
is kmeans clustering (Hartigan, 1975). This method is useful when the aim is to divide the sample into k
clusters of the greatest possible distinction. The parameter k is decided by the analyst; for example, it
may be decided to cluster the 23 countries in the TAI example into three groups, e.g. leaders, potential
leaders, and dynamic adopters. The kmeans algorithm will supply three clusters, as distinct as possible,
by analysing the variance of each cluster. This algorithm can be applied with continuous variables, yet it
can be also modified to accommodate other types of variables. The algorithm starts with k random
clusters and moves the objects in and out of the clusters with the aim of (i) minimising the variance of
elements within the clusters, and (ii) maximising the variance of the elements outside the clusters.
A line graph of the means across clusters is displayed in Figure 15. This plot could be very useful in
summarising the differences in the means between clusters. It is shown, for example, that the main
difference between the leaders and the potential leaders (Table 13) is between royalties and exports. At
the same time, the dynamic adopters are lagging behind the potential leaders due to their lower
performance on Internet, electricity and schooling. They are, however, performing better on exports Two
of the individual indicators, patents and university, are not useful in distinguishing between these three
groups, as the cluster means are very close.
Figure 14. Linkage distance vs fusion step in TAI's hierarchical cluster
78 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
Figure 15. Means plot for TAI clusters
2
1.5
1
0.5
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
R
E
C
E
I
P
T
S
I
N
T
E
R
N
E
T
E
X
P
O
R
T
S
T
E
L
E
P
H
O
N
E
S
E
L
E
C
T
R
I
C
I
T
Y
S
C
H
O
O
L
I
N
G
E
N
R
O
L
M
E
N
T
C
l
u
s
t
e
r
m
e
a
n
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
P
A
T
E
N
T
S
Note: Type: kmeans clustering (standardised data).
Table 13. Kmeans for clustering TAI countries
Group1 (leaders) Group 2 (potential leaders) Group 3 (dynamic adopters)
Finland
Netherlands
Sweden
USA
Australia
Canada
New Zealand
Norway
Austria
Belgium
Czech Rep.
France
Germany
Hungary
Ireland
Israel
Italy
Japan
Korea
Singapore
Slovenia
Spain
UK
Finally, expectation maximisation (EM) clustering extends the simple kmeans clustering in two
ways. First, instead of clustering the objects by maximising the differences in means for continuous
variables, EM clusters membership on the basis of probability distributions – each observation will
belong to each cluster with a certain probability. EM estimates mean and standard deviation of each
cluster so as to maximise the overall likelihood of the data, given the final clusters (Binder, 1978).
Second, unlike kmeans, EM can be applied to both continuous and categorical data.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 79
Ordinary significance tests are not valid for testing differences between clusters, as clusters are
formed to be as distinct as possible. Thus the assumption of usual tests – parametric or nonparametric –
is violated (see Hartigan, 1975). As a final remark, a warning: CLA will always produce a grouping; this
means that clusters may or may not prove useful for classifying objects, depending upon the objectives of
the analysis. For example, zipcode areas could be grouped into categories based on age, gender,
education and income to discriminate between winedrinking behaviours, but this would only be useful
information if the aim of the CLA was to establish a good location for a new wine store. Furthermore,
CLA methods are not clearly established – there are many options, all giving very different results
(Everitt, 1979).
Various alternative methods combining cluster analysis and the search for a lowdimensional
representation have been proposed and focus on multidimensional scaling or unfolding analysis
(e.g. Heiser, 1993; De Soete & Heiser, 1993). A method that combines kmeans cluster analysis with
aspects of Factor Analysis and PCA is offered by Vichi & Kiers (2001). A discrete clustering model and
a continuous factorial model are fitted simultaneously to twoway data with the aim of identifying the
best partition of the objects, described by the best orthogonal linear combinations of the variables
(factors) according to the leastsquares criterion.
This methodology, known as factorial kmeans analysis, has a wide range of applications, since it
achieves a double objective: data reduction and synthesis simultaneously in the direction of objects and
variables. Originally applied to shortterm macroeconomic data, factorial kmeans analysis has a fast
alternating leastsquares algorithm that extends its application to large data sets, i.e., multivariate data
sets with >2 variables. The methodology can therefore be recommended as an alternative to the widely
used tandem analysis that sequentially performs PCA and CLA.
4.5. Other methods for multivariate analysis
Other methods can be used for multivariate analysis of the data set. The characteristics of some of
these methods are sketched below, citing textbooks where the reader may find additional information and
references. Box 7 contains additional information about correlation measures, from the most widely used
(Pearson correlation coefficient or Spearman rank correlation) to the least common measures based on
sophisticated statistical concepts. Again, this is not an exhaustive list but rather a snapshot of the existing
literature aiming to encourage further exploration.
Correspondence Analysis is a descriptive/exploratory technique to analyse discrete variables with
many categories and to group relevant information (or relevant relationships between rows and columns
of the table) by reducing the dimensionality of the data set. Correspondence analysis is a nonparametric
technique which makes no distributional assumptions, unlike factor analysis. This technique finds scores
for the rows and columns on a small number of dimensions which account for the greatest proportion of
the
2
; for association between the rows and columns, just as principal components account for maximum
variance. Correspondence analysis therefore uses a definition of chisquare distance rather than
Euclidean distance between points. This is a special case of canonical correlation, in which one set of
entities (categories rather than variables as in conventional canonical correlation) is related to another set.
Correspondence analysis starts with tabular data, e.g. a multidimensional time series describing the
variable “number of doctorates” in 12 scientific disciplines (categories) given in the USA between 1960
and 1975 (Greenacre, 1984). Case values cannot be negative. The variable(s) must be discrete: nominal,
ordinal, or continuous variables segmented into ranges (in this case information may be lost, thus
affecting the interpretation of the results). The correspondence analysis of this data would show, for
example, whether anthropology and engineering degrees are at a distance from each other (based on the
80 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
number of doctorates for the eight years of the sample). This is visualized on the correspondence map,
which plots points (categories, i.e. values of the discrete variable) along the computed factor axes.
However, while conventional factor analysis determines which variables cluster together (parametric
approach), correspondence analysis determines which category values are close together (nonparametric
approach). Correspondence analysis can be used with many discrete variables. However, it handles only
two or three variables well – beyond this interpretability might be problematic. Furthermore, a certain
number of categories is needed, given that with only two or three categories, the dimensions computed in
correspondence analysis usually are not more informative than the original small table itself. Note that
correspondence analysis is an exploratory, not a confirmatory technique, thus appropriate variables and
value categories must be specified a priori. The classical textbooks for this technique are Greenacre
(1984, 1993)
Canonical correlation analysis (CCA) can be used to investigate the relationship between two
groups of variables. Suppose, for example, that the question is to investigate the relationship between
reading ability, measured by variables
1
X and
2
X , and arithmetic ability, measured by
1
Y and
2
Y .
Canonical correlation looks for a linear combination of
1
X and
2
X (e.g
2 2 1 1
X X U o o + = ) and a
linear combination of
1
Y and
2
Y (e.g.
2 2 1 1
Y Y V þ þ + = ) chosen so that the correlation between U and V
(the canonical variables) is maximized. Note that CCA groups variables such that correlation between
groups is maximized, whereas Principal Component Analysis (PCA) groups variables maximizing the
variance (and thus the difference between groups). As in PCA, CCA implies the extraction of the
eigenvalues and eigenvectors of the data matrix. In particular in the example above, we will have two
canonical correlations corresponding to the square root of the eigenvalues
2 1
ì ì > . An approximate test
for the relationship between ( ) ,
2 1
X X and ( ) ,
2 1
Y Y is the Bartlett test
20
, involving the calculation of the
statistic:
) 1 ( log )} 1 (
2
1
{
1
i
r
i
e
q p n B ì ÷ + + ÷ ÷ =
¯
=
where n is the sample size, p the number of X variables, q the number of Y variables and
r= ) , min( q p . The statistic B is distributed as a
pq
; . The null hypothesis of the test is that at least one of
the r canonical correlations is significant. Obviously, the possibility of detecting canonical correlation
robustly decreases with the sample size. For small sample sizes (n around 50) only strong canonical
correlations will be detected, whereas larger samples (n>200) make it possible to identify weaker
canonical correlations as well (e.g. 0.3). More information on Johnson & Wichern (2002).
A way to classify variables (or cases) into the values of a dichotomous dependent variable is given
by Discriminant Function Analysis (DFA), for example, to classify males and females according to
different body measurements. When the dependent variable has more than two categories then it is a case
of multiple Discriminant Analysis (or also Discriminant Factor Analysis or Canonical Discriminant
Analysis), e.g. to discriminate countries on the basis of employment patterns in nine industries
(predictors). The classification into groups will be done by estimating a set of discriminant functions
(also called canonical roots), where the eigenvalues (one for each discriminant function) reflect the ratio
of importance of the dimensions which classify cases of the dependent variable. Pairwise group
comparison (for more than two groups) will be done through an Ftest of significance of the
(Mahalanobis) distance between group means. Computationally, DFA is similar to the analysis of
variance. Note that the number of desired groups must be decided in advance. This is the main difference
to Cluster Analysis, in which groups are not predetermined. There are also conceptual similarities with
Principal Components and Factor Analysis, but while PCA maximises the variance in all the variables
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 81
accounted for by a factor, DFA maximises the differences between values of the dependent. DFA is
based on a number of assumptions, including: (i) DFA results being highly sensitive to variables added
or subtracted and to outliers; (ii) low correlation of the predictors, (iii) linearity and additivity; and (iv)
adequate sample size (a recommended four or five times as many cases as predictors). More details can
be found in McLachlan (2004).
Box 7. Measures of association
Pearson’s correlation coefficient
Suppose there are n measurements of two random variables X and Y normally distributed:
i i
y x , where i=1,…,n.
The Pearson correlation coefficient (also called Pearson productmoment correlation coefficient or sample
correlation coefficient) is the following:
y x
i
i i
xy
s s n
y y x x
r
) 1 (
) )( (
÷
÷ ÷
=
¯
where y x, (
y x
s s , ) are the sample means (standard deviations) of
i i
y x , , i=1,…,n. The square of the sample
correlation coefficient is known as the coefficient of determination and is the fraction of the variance in
i
y that is
accounted for by a linear fit of
i
x to
i
y .
Spearman’s rank correlation coefficient p
) 1 (
6
1
2
2
÷
÷ =
¯
n n
d
i
i
p
where
i
d is the difference between each rank of corresponding values of x and y. Spearman’s rank correlation is
equivalent to Pearson correlation on ranks but does not require the assumption of normality of X and Y. Nor does it
require variables measured on an interval scale or a linear association between variables. For a sufficiently large
sample size (> 20), the variable
) 2 /( ) 1 (
2
÷ ÷
=
n
t
p
p
has a Student’s tdistribution under the null hypothesis
(absence of correlation) and can be used to test the presence of statistically significant rank correlations.
Kendall t rank correlation coefficient
Kendall t measures the degree of correspondence between two rankings (and the statistical significance of this
association).
1
) 1 (
4
÷
÷
=
n n
P
t
82 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
where P is the sum of “concordant pairs” in the two rankings. More precisely, P is the sum, over all the items, of
items ranked after the given item by both rankings. Consider the following example.
Person A B C D E F G H
Rank by height 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Rank by weight 3 4 1 2 5 7 8 6
The first entry in the second row (rank by weight) is 3. This means that there are five higher ranks to the left of
“3”; the contribution of the first entry to P is then 5. The second entry is “4” and its contribution to P is 4 (because it
has four higher ranks to the left)….etc. With this reasoning, P=5+4+5+4+3+1+0+0=22 and t =0.57. Therefore, if the
two rankings are equal, t =1; if they are completely opposite, t =1. If the rankings are completely independent,
t =0.
Correlation ratio
The correlation ratio is a measure of the relationship between the statistical dispersion within categories and
the dispersion across the entire population. Suppose that
xi
y indicates the observation
i
y within the category x,
and
x
n , the number of observations in category x. Let
¯
=
i
xi
x
x
y
n
y
1
, and
¯ ¯
=
x
x
x
x x
n y n y / , the
sample mean of y within category x and across the whole population respectively. Then the correlation ratio n is
defined so as to satisfy:
¯
¯
÷
÷
=
xi
xi
x
x x
y y
y y n
2
2
2
) (
) (
n
Mutual information
A general concept of association is given by mutual information. Given two random variables X and Y, mutual
information I(X;Y) can be defined as:
) ( ) (
) , (
log ) , ( ) ; (
2
y p x p
y x p
y x p Y X I
Y y X x
¯ ¯
e e
=
where ) , ( y x p is the joint probability distribution of X and Y and ) (x p , ) ( y p are the marginal probability
density functions of X and Y, respectively. Note that the logarithm has base 2. Mutual information measures the
mutual dependency of two variables or, in other terms, by how much knowledge of one variable will reduce the
uncertainty in (or increase the information about) the other. If two variables X and Y are independent, then
) , ( y x p = ) (x p ) ( y p and I(X;Y)=0. Moreover, I(X;Y) 0 > . For further details see Papoulis, Probability, Random
Variables and Stochastic Processes (1991, 3rd edition, NY: McGrawHill). The generalization of mutual information
to more than two variables is called total correlation (or multivariate constraint or multiinformation) (see
Watanabe, 1960).
An even more general concept of association is given by the copula. A copula, in statistics, is a function
summarizing all the information on the nature of the dependencies in a set of random variables. Technically it is a
multivariate distribution function defined on the ndimensional unit cube (see Nelsen, 1999).
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 83
STEP 5. NORMALISATION
The objective is to identify the most suitable normalisation procedures to apply to the problem at
hand, taking into account their properties with respect to the measurement units in which the indicators
are expressed, and their robustness against possible outliers in the data (Ebert & Welsch, 2004). Different
normalisation methods will produce different results for the composite indicator. Therefore, overall
robustness tests should be carried out to assess their impact on the outcomes.
5.1. Scale transformation prior to normalisation
Certain normalisation procedures produce the same normalised value of the indicator irrespective of
the measurement unit. Applying a normalisation procedure which is not invariant to changes in the
measurement unit, however, could result in different outcomes. Below is a simple example with two
indicators – temperature and humidity – for two hypothetical countries A and B in 2003 and 2004. The
raw data and normalised composites are given in Table 14, where the temperature is first expressed in
Celsius and then in Fahrenheit. Each indicator is divided by the value of the leading country and
aggregated with equal weights. Using Celsius data normalised based on “distance to the best performer”,
the level of Country A has increased over time. While the same normalisation and aggregation methods
are used, the results in Fahrenheit show a different pattern. The composite indicator for country A now
decreases over time.
Table 14. Normalisation based on interval scales
2003 2004
Country A –Temperature (ºC) 35 35.9
Country A –Humidity (%) 75 70
Country B –Temperature (ºC) 39 40
Country B –Humidity (%) 50 45
Normalised data in Celsius
Country A 0.949 0.949
Country B 0.833 0.821
Country A –Temperature (F) 95 96.62
Country A –Humidity (%) 75 70
Country B –Temperature (F) 102.2 104
Country B –Humidity (%) 50 45
Normalised data in Fahrenheit
Country A 0.965 0.965
Country B 0.833 0.821
The example illustrated above is a case of an interval scale (Box 3), based on a transformation f
defined as 0 , 0 ; : = > + = ÷ þ o þ o x y x f , where the variable x is the temperature expressed in
Celsius (C) and y is the temperature expressed in Fahrenheit (F). Their relationship is given by:
32 C
5
9
F + = . Another common change of measurement unit is the socalled ratio scale, which is based
on the transformation 0 ; : > = ÷ o o x y x f . For example, a “length” might be expressed in
84 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
centimetres (cm) or yards (yd). Their relationship is indeed: 1 yd = 91.44 cm. The normalisation by
country leader, not invariant on the interval scale, is invariant on the ratio scale. This means that
þ
þ
+
+
=
max max
ax
ax
x
x
, whereas
max max
ax
ax
x
x
= .
In general, all normalisation methods which are invariant on the interval scale are also invariant on
the ratio scale.
Another transformation of the data, often used to reduce the skewness of (positive) data, is the
logarithmic transformation
0 ); log( : > = ÷ x x y x f .
When the range of values for the indicator is wide or is positively skewed, the log transformation
shrinks the righthand side of the distribution. As values approach zero they are also penalised, given that
after transformation they become largely negative. Expressing the weighted variables in a linear
aggregation in logarithms is equivalent to the geometric aggregation of the variables without logarithms.
The ratio between two weights indicates the percentage increase in one indicator that would compensate
for a one percentage point decline in another indicator. This transformation leads to the attribution of a
higher weight for a oneunit increase, starting from a low level of performance, compared to an identical
improvement starting from a high level of performance.
The normalisation methods described below are all noninvariant to this type of scale
transformation. The user may decide whether or not to use the log transformation before the
normalisation, bearing in mind that the normalised data will be affected by the log transformation.
In some circumstances outliers
21
can reflect the presence of unwanted information. An example is
offered in the Environmental Sustainability Index, where the variable distributions outside the 2.5 and
97.5 percentile scores are trimmed to partially correct for outliers, as well as to avoid having extreme
values overly dominate the aggregation algorithm. That is, any observed value greater than the 97.5
percentile is lowered to match the 97.5 percentile. Any observed value lower than the 2.5 percentile on is
raised to the 2.5 percentile. It is advisable first to try to remove outliers and consequently to perform the
normalisation, as this latter procedure can be more or less sensitive to outliers.
5.2. Standardisation (or zscores)
For each individual indicator
t
qc
x , the average across countries
t
qc c
x
=
and the standard deviation
across countries
t
qc c
o
=
are calculated. The normalisation formula is
t t
qc qc c t
qc
t
qc c
x x
I
o
=
=
÷
= , so that all
t
qc
I
have similar dispersion across countries. The actual minima and maxima of the
t
qc
I across countries
depend on the individual indicator. For timedependent studies, in order to assess country performance
across years, the average across countries
0
t
qc c
x
=
and the standard deviation across countries
0
t
qc c
o
=
are
calculated for a reference year, usually the initial time point,
0
t .
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 85
5.3. MinMax
Each indicator
t
qc
x for a generic country c and time t is transformed in
t t
qc c q t
qc
t t
c q c q
x min ( x )
I
max ( x ) min ( x )
÷
=
÷
, where
t
c q
min ( x ) and
t
c q
max ( x ) are the minimum and the maximum value of
t
qc
x across all countries
c at time t. In this way, the normalised indicators
qc
I
have values lying between 0 (laggard,
t t
qc c q
x min ( x ) = ), and 1 (leader,
t t
qc c q
x max ( x ) = ).
The expression
0
0 0
t t
qc c q t
qc t t
c q c q
x min ( x )
I
max ( x ) min ( x )
÷
=
÷
is sometimes used in timedependent studies.
However, if
0
t t
qc c q
x max ( x ) > , the normalised indicator
t
qc
y would be larger than 1.
Another variant of the MinMax method is
t t
qc t T c q t
qc
t t
t T c q t T c q
x min min ( x )
I
max max ( x ) min min ( x )
e
e e
÷
=
÷
, where the
minimum and maximum for each indicator are calculated across countries and time, in order to take into
account the evolution of indicators. The normalised indicators,
t
qc
I , have values between 0 and 1.
However, this transformation is not stable when data for a new time point become available. This implies
an adjustment of the analysis period T, which may in turn affect the minimum and the maximum for
some individual indicators and hence the values of
t
qc
I . To maintain comparability between the existing
and the new data, the composite indicator for the existing data must be recalculated.
5.4. Distance to a reference
This method takes the ratios of the indicator
t
qc
x for a generic country c and time t with respect to
the individual indicator
0
t
qc c
x
=
for the reference country at the initial time
0
t .
0
t
qc t
qc t
qc c
x
I
x
=
=
Using the denominator
0
t
qc c
x
=
, the transformation takes into account the evolution of indicators
across time; alternatively the denominator
t
qc c
x
=
may be used, with running time t.
A different approach is to consider the country itself as the reference country and calculate the
distance in terms of the initial time point as
0
t
qc t
qc t
qc
x
I
x
= .
This approach is used in Concern About Environmental Problems (Parker, 1991) for measuring the
concern of the public in relation to certain environmental problems in three countries (Italy, France and
the UK) and in the European Union. An alternative distance for the normalisation could be:
86 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
0
0
t t
qc qc c t
qc t
qc c
x x
y
x
=
=
÷
=
which is essentially same as above. Instead of being centred on 1, it is centred on 0. In the same way, the
reference country can be the average country, the group leader, or an external benchmark.
5.5. Indicators above or below the mean
This transformation considers the indicators which are above and below an arbitrarily defined
threshold, p, around the mean:
0
) 1 ( 1
) 1 ( ) 1 ( 0
) 1 ( 1
t
c qc
t
qc
t
qc
x
x
w where
p w if
p w p if
p w if
I
=
=
¦
¹
¦
´
¦
÷ < ÷
+ s s ÷
+ >
=
The threshold p builds a neutral region around the mean, where the transformed indicator is zero.
This reduces the sharp discontinuity, from 1 to +1, which exists across the mean value to two minor
discontinuities, from 1 to 0 and from 0 to +1, across the thresholds. A larger number of thresholds could
be created at different distances from the mean value, which might overlap with the categorical scales.
For timedependent studies to assess country performance over time, the average across countries
0
t
qc c
x
=
would be calculated for a reference year (usually the initial time point
0
t ). An indicator that moved from
significantly below the mean to significantly above the threshold in the consecutive year would have a
positive effect on the composite.
5.6. Methods for cyclical indicators
When indicators are in the form of time series the transformation can be made by subtracting the
mean over time
( )
t
t qc
E x and by then dividing by the mean of the absolute values of the difference from
the mean. The normalised series are then converted into index form by adding 100.
( )
( )
( )
t t
qc t qc
t
qc
t t
t qc t qc
x E x
I
E x E x
÷
=
÷
5.7. Percentage of annual differences over consecutive years
Each indicator is transformed using the formula
100
1
1

÷
=
÷
÷
t
qc
t
qc
t
qc
t
qc
x
x x
I
The transformed indicator is dimensionless.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 87
Table 15. Examples of normalisation techniques using TAI data
M
e
a
n
y
e
a
r
s
o
f
s
c
h
o
o
l
(
a
g
e
1
5
a
n
d
a
b
o
v
e
)
R
a
n
k
*
z

s
c
o
r
e
M
i
n

M
a
x
d
i
s
t
a
n
c
e
t
o
r
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
c
o
u
n
t
r
y
(
c
)
A
b
o
v
e
/
b
e
l
o
w
t
h
e
m
e
a
n
(
*
*
)
P
e
r
c
e
n
t
i
l
e
C
a
t
e
g
o
r
i
c
a
l
s
c
a
l
e
ratio difference
Country
c
=
m
e
a
n
c
=
b
e
s
t
c
=
w
o
r
s
t
c
=
m
e
a
n
c
=
w
o
r
s
t
Finland 10 15 0.26 0.59 1.04 0.83 1.41 0.04 0.41 0 65.2 60
United States 12 23 1.52 1.00 1.25 1.00 1.69 0.25 0.69 1 100 100
Sweden 11.4 19 1.14 0.88 1.19 0.95 1.61 0.19 0.61 0 82.6 60
Japan 9.5 12 0.06 0.49 0.99 0.79 1.34 0.01 0.34 0 52.2 50
Korea, Rep. 10.8 17 0.76 0.76 1.13 0.90 1.52 0.13 0.52 0 73.9 60
Netherlands 9.4 9 0.12 0.47 0.98 0.78 1.32 0.02 0.32 0 39.1 50
UK 9.4 9 0.12 0.47 0.98 0.78 1.32 0.02 0.32 0 39.1 50
Canada 11.6 20 1.27 0.92 1.21 0.97 1.63 0.21 0.63 1 87.0 80
Australia 10.9 18 0.83 0.78 1.14 0.91 1.54 0.14 0.54 0 78.3 60
Singapore 7.1 1 1.58 0.00 0.74 0.59 1.00 0.26 0.00 1 4.3 0
Germany 10.2 16 0.38 0.63 1.06 0.85 1.44 0.06 0.44 0 69.6 60
Norway 11.9 22 1.46 0.98 1.24 0.99 1.68 0.24 0.68 1 95.7 100
Ireland 9.4 9 0.12 0.47 0.98 0.78 1.32 0.02 0.32 0 39.1 50
Belgium 9.3 8 0.19 0.45 0.97 0.78 1.31 0.03 0.31 0 34.8 40
New Zealand 11.7 21 1.33 0.94 1.22 0.98 1.65 0.22 0.65 1 91.3 80
Austria 8.4 6 0.76 0.27 0.88 0.70 1.18 0.12 0.18 0 26.1 40
France 7.9 5 1.08 0.16 0.82 0.66 1.11 0.18 0.11 0 21.7 40
Israel 9.6 14 0.00 0.51 1.00 0.80 1.35 0.00 0.35 0 60.9 50
Spain 7.3 4 1.46 0.04 0.76 0.61 1.03 0.24 0.03 1 17.4 40
Italy 7.2 3 1.52 0.02 0.75 0.60 1.01 0.25 0.01 1 13.0 20
Czech Rep. 9.5 12 0.06 0.49 0.99 0.79 1.34 0.01 0.34 0 52.2 50
Hungary 9.1 7 0.31 0.41 0.95 0.76 1.28 0.05 0.28 0 30.4 40
Slovenia 7.1 1 1.58 0.00 0.74 0.59 1.00 0.26 0.00 1 4.3 0
(*) High value = Top in the list
(**) p=20%
Examples of the above normalisation methods are shown in Table 15 using the TAI data. The data
are sensitive to the choice of the transformation and this might cause problems in terms of loss of the
interval level of the information, sensitivity to outliers, arbitrary choice of categorical scores and
sensitivity to weighting.
Sometimes there is no need to normalise the indicators, for example if the indicators are already
expressed with the same standard. See, for example, the case of eBusiness Readiness (Nardo et al.,
2004), where all the indicators are expressed in terms of percentages of enterprises possessing a given
88 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
infrastructure or using a given ICT tool. In such cases the normalisation would rather obfuscate the issue,
as one would lose the information inherent in the percentages.
Box 8. Time distance
The difference between two countries with respect to an indicator is usually measured on the vertical axis as
the difference between values of that indicator at a point in time. However there could be a complementary measure
of difference which takes time into account, i.e. measuring the difference between two countries for a given indicator
on the horizontal axis as time distance between those countries. For example, the level of female life expectancy of
75 years was reached in Sweden in about 1960 and in the UK in 1970. The time distance is thus 10 years (see
Sicherl, 2004). Time distance is a dynamic measure of temporal disparity between two series expressed in units
(time) readily comparable across indicators. It requires any of actual time series, benchmarks or projections, thus
poor data availability may hamper its use. In formal terms, let
qi
x be as usual the level of indicator q for country i.
The time distance ) (
q ij
x S can be written as ) ( ) ( ) (
q j q i q ij
x T x T x S ÷ = , i.e. the difference in time which divides
country i and country j for the same level of indicator
q
x . Time distance can also be applied to calculate a kind of
growth rate for time: for each country
q q j q q i q
x x T x x T x S A ÷ A + = A / )) ( ) ( ( ) ( . For further information see
Sicherl (1973).
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 89
STEP 6. WEIGHTING AND AGGREGATION
WEIGHTING METHODS
6.1. Weights based on principal components analysis or factor analysis
Principal components analysis, and more specifically factor analysis, groups together individual
indicators which are collinear to form a composite indicator that captures as much as possible of the
information common to individual indicators. Note that individual indicators must have the same unit of
measurement. Each factor (usually estimated using principal components analysis) reveals the set of
indicators with which it has the strongest association. The idea under PCA/FA is to account for the
highest possible variation in the indicator set using the smallest possible number of factors. Therefore,
the composite no longer depends upon the dimensionality of the data set but rather is based on the
“statistical” dimensions of the data.
According to PCA/FA, weighting intervenes only to correct for overlapping information between
two or more correlated indicators and is not a measure of the theoretical importance of the associated
indicator. If no correlation between indicators is found, then weights cannot be estimated with this
method. This is the case for the new economic sentiment indicator, where factor and principal
components analysis excluded the weighting of individual questions within a subcomponent of the
composite index (see the supplement B of the Business and Consumer Surveys Result N. 8/9
August/September 2001
22
).
The first step in FA is to check the correlation structure of the data, as explained in the section on
multivariate analysis. If the correlation between the indicators is weak, then it is unlikely that they share
common factors. The second step is the identification of a certain number of latent factors (fewer than the
number of individual indicators) representing the data. Each factor depends on a set of coefficients
(loadings), each coefficient measuring the correlation between the individual indicator and the latent
factor. Principal components analysis is usually used to extract factors (Manly, 1994
23
). For a factor
analysis only a subset of principal components is retained (m), i.e. those that account for the largest
amount of the variance.
Standard practice is to choose factors that: (i) have associated eigenvalues larger than one; (ii)
contribute individually to the explanation of overall variance by more than 10%; and (iii) contribute
cumulatively to the explanation of the overall variance by more than 60%. With the reduced data set in
TAI (23 countries) the factors with eigenvalues close to unity are the first four, as summarised in
Table 16. Individually they explain more than 10% of the total variance and overall they count for about
the 87% of variance.
90 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
Table 16. Eigenvalues of TAI data set
Eigenvalue Variance
(%)
Cumulative variance
(%)
1 3.3 41.9 41.9
2 1.7 21.8 63.7
3 1.0 12.3 76.0
4 0.9 11.1 87.2
5 0.5 6.0 93.2
6 0.3 3.7 96.9
7 0.2 2.2 99.1
8 0.1 0.9 100
The third step deals with the rotation of factors (Table 17). The rotation (usually the varimax
rotation) is used to minimise the number of individual indicators that have a high loading on the same
factor. The idea behind transforming the factorial axes is to obtain a “simpler structure” of the factors
(ideally a structure in which each indicator is loaded exclusively on one of the retained factors). Rotation
is a standard step in factor analysis – it changes the factor loadings and hence the interpretation of the
factors, while leaving unchanged the analytical solutions obtained exante and expost the rotation.
Table 17. Factor loadings of TAI based on principal components
Factor loading Squared factor loading (scaled to unity sum)
Factor 1 Factor 2 Factor 3 Factor 4 Factor 1 Factor 2 Factor 3 Factor 4
Patents
0.07 0.97 0.06 0.06
0.00 0.67 0.00 0.00
Royalties
0.13 0.07 0.07 0.93
0.01 0.00 0.00 0.49
Internet
0.79 0.21 0.21 0.42
0.24 0.03 0.04 0.10
Tech exports 0.64 0.56 0.04 0.36 0.16 0.23 0.00 0.07
Telephones
0.37 0.17 0.38 0.68
0.05 0.02 0.12 0.26
Electricity
0.82 0.04 0.25 0.35
0.25 0.00 0.05 0.07
Schooling
0.88 0.23 0.09 0.09
0.29 0.04 0.01 0.00
University
0.08 0.04 0.96 0.04
0.00 0.00 0.77 0.00
Expl.Var
2.64 1.39 1.19 1.76
Expl./Tot
0.38 0.20 0.17 0.25
Note: Expl.Var is the variance explained by the factor and Expl./Tot is the explained variance divided by the total variance of the
four factors.
The last step deals with the construction of the weights from the matrix of factor loadings after
rotation, given that the square of factor loadings represents the proportion of the total unit variance of the
indicator which is explained by the factor. The approach used by Nicoletti et al., (2000) is that of
grouping the individual indicators with the highest factors loadings into intermediate composite
indicators. With the TAI data set there are four intermediate composites (Table 17). The first includes
Internet (with a weight of 0.24), electricity (weight 0.25) and schooling (weight 0.29).
24
Likewise the
second intermediate is formed by patents and exports (worth 0.67 and 0.23 respectively), the third only
by university (0.77) and the fourth by royalties and telephones (weighted with 0.49 and 0.26).
The four intermediate composites are aggregated by assigning a weight to each one of them equal to
the proportion of the explained variance in the data set: 0.38 for the first (0.38 =
2.64/(2.64+1.39+1.19+1.76)), 0.20 for the second, 0.17 for the third and 0.25 for the fourth (Table 18).
25
Note that different methods for the extraction of principal components imply different weights, hence
different scores for the composite (and possibly different country rankings). For example, if Maximum
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 91
Likelihood (ML) were to be used instead of Principal Components (PC), the weights obtained would be
as given in Table 18.
Table 18. Weights for the TAI indicators based on maximum likelihood (ML) or principal components (PC)
method for the extraction of the common factors
M L PC
Patents 0.19 0.17
Royalties 0.20 0.15
Internet 0.07 0.11
Tech exports 0.07 0.07
Telephones 0.15 0.08
Electricity 0.11 0.12
Schooling 0.19 0.14
University 0.02 0.16
6.2. Data envelopment analysis (DEA)
Data Envelopment Analysis (DEA) employs linear programming tools to estimate an efficiency
frontier that would be used as a benchmark to measure the relative performance of countries.
26
This
requires construction of a benchmark (the frontier) and the measurement of the distance between
countries in a multidimensional framework. The following assumptions are made for the benchmark:
(i) positive weights – the higher the value of a given individual indicator, the better for the
corresponding country;
(ii) nondiscrimination of countries which are the best in any single dimension (individual
indicator), thus ranking them equally, and;
(iii) a linear combination of the best performers is feasible, i.e. convexity of the frontier.
The distance of each country with respect to the benchmark is determined by the location of the
country and its position relative to the frontier. Both issues are represented in Figure 16 for the simple
case of four countries and two base indicators which are represented in the two axes. Countries (a, b, c,
d) are ranked according to the score of the indicators. The line connecting countries a, b and c constitutes
the performance frontier and the benchmark for country d which lies beyond the frontier. The countries
supporting the frontier are classified as the best performing, while country d is the worst performing.
92 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
Figure 16. Data envelopment analysis (DEA) performance frontier
Indicator 1
Indicator 2
a
b
c
d
d’
0
Source : Rearranged from Mahlberg & Obersteiner (2001)
The performance indicator is the ratio of two distances: the distance between the origin and the
actual observed point and between the origin and the projected point in the frontier: ' d 0 / d 0 . The best
performing countries will have a performance score of 1, and the worst, less than one. This ratio
corresponds to ) I w I w /( ) I w I w (
*
d 2 d 2
*
d 1 d 1 d 2 d 2 d 1 d 1
+ + , where
*
id
I is the frontier value of indicator
i=1,2, and
id
I is its actual value (see expression 18 for more than two indicators). The set of weights for
each country therefore depends on its position with respect to the frontier, while the benchmark
corresponds to the ideal point with a similar mix of indicators (d’ in the example). The benchmark could
also be determined by a hypothetical decisionmaker (Korhonen et al., 2001), who would locate the
target in the efficiency frontier with the most preferred combination of individual indicators. This is
similar to the budget allocation method (see below) where experts are asked to assign weights
(i.e. priorities) to individual indicators.
6.3. Benefit of the doubt approach (BOD)
The application of DEA to the field of composite indicators is known as the “benefit of the doubt”
approach (BOD) and was originally proposed to evaluate macroeconomic performance (Melyn &
Moesen, 1991).
27
In the BOD approach, the composite indicator is defined as the ratio of a country’s
actual performance to its benchmark performance:
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 93
¯
¯
=
=
=
M
1 c
qc
*
qc
M
1 c
qc qc
c
w I
w I
CI
(19)
where
qc
I is the normalised (with the maxmin method) score of q
th
individual indicator (q=1,…,Q) for
country c (c=1,…M) and w
qc
the corresponding weight. Cherchye et al., (2004), the first to implement
this method, suggested obtaining the benchmark as the solution of a maximisation problem, although
external benchmarks are also possible:
( )
¯
=
e
= =
Q
1 q
q qk
} M ,..., 1 { k , I
* *
w I max arg ) w ( I I
k
(20)
I* is the score of the hypothetical country that maximises the overall performance (defined as the
weighted average), given the (unknown) set of weights w. Note that (i) weights are country specific:
different sets of weights may lead to the selection of different countries, as long as no one country has the
highest score in all individual indicators; (ii) the benchmark would in general be countrydependent, so
there would be no unique benchmark (unless, as before, one particular country were best in all individual
indicators), (iii) individual indicators must be comparable, i.e. have the same unit of measurement.
The second step is the specification of the set of weights for each country. The optimal set of
weights – if such exists – guarantees the best position for the associated country visàvis all other
countries in the sample. With any other weighting profile, the relative position of that country would be
worse. Optimal weights are obtained by solving the following constrained optimisation:
( )
¯
¯
=
e
=
=
=
Q
1 q
qc qk
} M ,..., 1 { k , I
Q
1 q
qc qc
Q ,..., 1 q , w
*
c
w I max
w I
max arg CI
k
qc
for c=1,..,M
(21)
subject to nonnegativity constraints on weights.
28
The resulting composite index will range between zero (worst possible performance) and 1 (the
benchmark). Operationally, equation (21) can be reduced to the following linear programming problem
by multiplying all the weights with a common factor which does not alter the index value and may then
be solved using optimisation algorithms:
Q q M k
w
w I
t s
w I CI
qk
Q
q
qk qk
Q
q
qc qc
wqc
c
,..., 1 ; ,..., 1
0
1
. .
max arg
1
1
*
= ¬ = ¬
>
s
=
¯
¯
=
=
(22)
The result of the BOD approach applied to the TAI example can be seen in Table 19. Weights are
given in the first eight columns, while the last column contains the composite indicator values. Finland,
the United States and Sweden have a composite indicator value of one, i.e. they have the top score in the
ranking. This, however, masks a problem of multiple equilibria. In Figure 6 any point between country a
(e.g. Finland) and country b (e.g. United States) could be an optimal solution for these countries. Thus
weights are not uniquely determined. Note also that the multiplicity of solutions is likely to depend upon
94 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
the set of constraints imposed on the weights of the maximisation problem in (22) – the wider the range
of variation of weights, the lower the possibility of obtaining a unique solution.
29
Cherchye et al. (2008)
propose an application of the BOD approach to the Technology Achievement Index, which imposes
restrictions on the pieshares, instead of restrictions on the weights. The pieshares are expressed as the
ratio of the weighted indicator values over the overall composite indicator score. This application of the
BOD is particularly interesting as it directly reveals how the respective pie shares contribute to a
composite indicator score and the pieshares have a unity sum.
Table 19. Benefit of the doubt (BOD) approach applied to TAI
P
a
t
e
n
t
s
R
o
y
a
l
t
i
e
s
I
n
t
e
r
n
e
t
T
e
c
h
.
E
x
p
o
r
t
T
e
l
e
p
h
o
n
e
s
E
l
e
c
t
r
i
c
i
t
y
S
c
h
o
o
l
i
n
g
U
n
i
v
e
r
s
i
t
y
C
I
(
w
e
i
g
h
t
)
(
w
e
i
g
h
t
)
(
w
e
i
g
h
t
)
(
w
e
i
g
h
t
)
(
w
e
i
g
h
t
)
(
w
e
i
g
h
t
)
(
w
e
i
g
h
t
)
(
w
e
i
g
h
t
)
(
s
c
o
r
e
)
Finland
0.15 0.17 0.17 0.16 0.19 0.17 0.17 0.19 1
United
States
0.20 0.20 0.17 0.21 0.15 0.15 0.21 0.14 1
Sweden
0.18 0.21 0.15 0.19 0.19 0.16 0.20 0.14 1
Japan
0.22 0.15 0.15 0.22 0.22 0.16 0.21 0.15 0.87
Korea
0.22 0.14 0.14 0.22 0.14 0.14 0.22 0.22 0.80
Netherlands
0.22 0.22 0.14 0.22 0.22 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.75
United
Kingdom
0.14 0.21 0.14 0.21 0.21 0.14 0.20 0.15 0.71
Canada
0.14 0.14 0.14 0.21 0.21 0.21 0.21 0.14 0.73
Australia
0.13 0.13 0.20 0.13 0.13 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.66
Singapore
0.14 0.14 0.14 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.14 0.20 0.62
Germany
0.22 0.15 0.15 0.22 0.21 0.15 0.22 0.15 0.62
Norway
0.14 0.14 0.20 0.14 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.14 0.86
Ireland
0.14 0.21 0.14 0.21 0.21 0.14 0.20 0.15 0.60
Belgium
0.14 0.16 0.14 0.21 0.19 0.21 0.21 0.14 0.54
New
Zealand
0.21 0.14 0.21 0.14 0.14 0.21 0.21 0.14 0.58
Austria
0.22 0.14 0.14 0.22 0.22 0.22 0.14 0.14 0.52
France
0.22 0.14 0.14 0.22 0.22 0.22 0.14 0.14 0.51
Israel
0.21 0.15 0.15 0.22 0.22 0.15 0.22 0.15 0.49
Spain
0.21 0.14 0.14 0.21 0.21 0.14 0.14 0.21 0.34
Italy
0.22 0.14 0.14 0.22 0.22 0.22 0.14 0.14 0.38
Czech Republic
0.22 0.15 0.15 0.22 0.15 0.22 0.22 0.15 0.31
Hungary
0.22 0.14 0.21 0.22 0.14 0.14 0.22 0.15 0.27
Slovenia
0.22 0.14 0.14 0.22 0.22 0.22 0.14 0.14 0.28
Note: Columns 1 to 8: weights, column 9: composite indicator for a given country, n=23 countries.
6.4. Unobserved components model (UCM)
In the Unobserved Components Model (UCM), individual indicators are assumed to depend on an
unobserved variable plus an error term – for example, the “percentage of firms using internet in country
j” depends upon the (unknown) propensity to adopt new information and communication technologies
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 95
plus an error term, accounting, for example, for the error in the sampling of firms. Therefore, estimating
the unknown component sheds some light on the relationship between the composite and its components.
The weight obtained will be set to minimise the error in the composite. This method resembles the well
known regression analysis. The main difference lies in the dependent variable, which is unknown under
UCM.
Let ph(c) be the unknown phenomenon to be measured. The observed data consist in a cluster of
q=1,…,Q(c) indicators, each measuring an aspect of ph(c). Let c=1,…M(q) be the countries covered by
indicator q. The observed score of country c on indicator q, I(c,q) can be written as a linear function of
the unobserved phenomenon and an error term, ) q , c ( c :
)] q , c ( ) c ( ph )[ q ( ) q ( ) q , c ( I c þ o + + =
(23)
) q ( o and ) q ( þ are unknown parameters mapping ph(c) on I(c,q).
The error term captures two sources of uncertainty. First, the phenomenon can be only imperfectly
measured or observed in each country (e.g. errors of measurement). Second, the relationship between
ph(c) and I(c,q) may be imperfect (e.g. I(c,q) may be only a noisy indicator of the phenomenon if there
are differences between countries on the indicator). The error term ) q , c ( c is assumed to have a zero
mean, 0 )) q , c ( ( E = c , and the same variance across countries within a given indicator, but a different
variance across indicators,
2
q
2
) ) q , c ( ( E o c = ; it also holds that 0 )) h , i ( ) q , c ( ( E = c c for i c = or
h q = .
The error term is assumed to be independent across indicators, given that each individual indicator
should ideally measure a particular aspect of the phenomenon independent of others. Furthermore, it is
usually assumed that ph(c) is a random variable with zero mean and unit variance, and the indicators are
normalised using MinMax to take values between zero and one. The assumption that both ph(c) and
) q , c ( c are both normally distributed simplifies the estimation of the level of ph(c) in country c. This is
done by using the mean of the conditional distribution of the unobserved component, once the observed
scores are appropriately rescaled:
¯
=
÷
=
) c ( Q
1 q
) q (
) q ( ) q , c ( I
) q , c ( w ))] c ( Q , c ( I ),..., 1 , c ( I / ) c ( ph [ E
þ
o
(24)
The weights are equal to:
¯
=
÷
÷
+
=
) (
1
2
2
1
) , (
c Q
q
q
q
q c w
o
o
(25)
where w(c,q) is a decreasing function of the variance of indicator q, and an increasing function of the
variance of the other indicators. The weight, w(c,q), depends on the variance of indicator q (numerator)
and on the sum of the variances of the all the other individual indicators, including q (denominator).
However, since not all countries have data on all individual indicators, the denominator of w(c,q) could
be country specific. This may produce noncomparability of country values for the composite, as in
BOD. Clearly, whenever the set of indicators is equal for all countries, weights will no longer be country
specific and comparability will be assured. The variance of the conditional distribution is given by:
96 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
1
) c ( Q
1 q
2
q
] 1 [ ))] c ( Q , c ( I ),..., 1 , c ( I / ) c ( ph var[
÷
=
÷
¯
+ = o
(26)
and can be used as a measure of the precision of the composite. The variance decreases in the number of
indicators for each country, and increases in the disturbance term for each indicator. The estimation of
the model could be simplified by the assumption of normality for ph(c) and ) q , c ( c . Notice that the
unknown parameters to be estimated are s ) q ( o , s ) q ( þ , and s
2
q
o (hence at least 3 indicators per
country are needed for an exactly identified model) so the likelihood function of the observed data based
on equation (25) will be maximised with respect to s ) q ( o , s ) q ( þ , and s
2
q
o and their estimated
values substituted back in equations (24) and (25) to obtain the composite indicator and the weights.
30
6.5. Budget allocation process (BAP)
In the Budget Allocation Process (BAP), experts on a given theme (e.g. innovation, education,
health, biodiversity, …) described by a set of indicators are asked to allocate a “budget” of one hundred
points to the indicator set, based on their experience and subjective judgment of the relative importance
of the respective indicators. Weights are calculated as average budgets. The main advantages of BAP are
its transparent and relatively straightforward nature and short duration.
It is essential to bring together experts representing a wide spectrum of knowledge and experience
to ensure that a proper weighting system is established. Special care should be taken in the identification
of the population of experts from which to draw a sample, stratified or otherwise.
31
It is crucial that the
selected experts are not specialists for individual indicators, but rather for the given subindex. For
example, a biodiversity index should be handled by biodiversity experts, not by ornithology experts. It is
also noteworthy that at the top level, e.g. of a sustainable development index composed of economic,
social and environmental subindices, the “experts” should be those who decide on the relative (political)
weight of economic, social and environmental questions, i.e. ordinary voters.
The budget allocation process has four different phases:
• Selection of experts for the valuation;
• Allocation of budgets to the individual indicators;
• Calculation of weights;
• Iteration of the budget allocation until convergence is reached (optional).
6.6. Public opinion
From a methodological point of view, opinion polls focus on the notion of “concern”. That is,
people are asked to express their degree of concern (e.g. great or small) about issues, as measured by
base indicators. As with expert assessments, the budget allocation method could also be applied in public
opinion polls. However, it is more difficult to ask the public to allocate a hundred points to several
individual indicators than to express a degree of concern about a given problem.
6.7. Analytic hierarchy process (AHP)
The Analytic Hierarchy Process (AHP) is a widely used technique for multiattribute decision
making (Saaty, 1987). It facilitates the decomposition of a problem into a hierarchical structure and
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 97
assures that both qualitative and quantitative aspects of a problem are incorporated into the evaluation
process, during which opinions are systematically extracted by means of pairwise comparisons.
According to Forman (1983):
AHP is a compensatory decision methodology because alternatives that are efficient with respect to one or
more objectives can compensate by their performance with respect to other objectives. AHP allows for the
application of data, experience, insight, and intuition in a logical and thorough way within a hierarchy as a
whole. In particular, AHP as a weighting method enables decisionmakers to derive weights as opposed to
arbitrarily assigning them.
Weights represent the tradeoff across indicators. They measure willingness to forego a given
variable in exchange for another. Hence, they are not importance coefficients. It could cause
misunderstandings if AHP weights were to be interpreted as importance coefficients (see Ülengin et al.,
2001).
The core of AHP is an ordinal pairwise comparison of attributes. For a given objective, the
comparisons are made between pairs of individual indicators, asking which of the two is the more
important, and by how much. The preference is expressed on a semantic scale of 1 to 9. A preference of
1 indicates equality between two individual indicators, while a preference of 9 indicates that the
individual indicator is 9 times more important than the other one. The results are represented in a
comparison matrix (Table 20), where A
ii
= 1 and A
ij
= 1 / A
ji
.
Table 20. Comparison matrix of eight individual TAI indicators
Objective Patents Royalties Internet Tech
exports
Telephone Electricity Schooling University
Patents 1 2 3 2 5 5 1 3
Royalties 1/2 1 2 1/2 4 4 ½ 3
Internet 1/3 ½ 1 1/4 2 2 1/5 1/2
Tech. exports 1/2 2 4 1 4 4 1/2 3
Telephones 1/5 1/4 1/2 1/4 1 1 1/5 1/2
Electricity 1/5 ¼ 1/2 1/4 1 1 1/5 1/2
Schooling 1 2 5 2 5 5 1 4
University 1/3 1/3 2 1/3 2 2 1/4 1
For the example, patents is three times more important than Internet. Each judgement reflects the
perception of the relative contributions (weights) of the two individual indicators to the overall objective
(Table 21).
Table 21. Comparison matrix of three individual TAI indicators
Objective Patents Royalties Internet ……
Patents 1 w
P
/w
ROY
w
P
/w
I
Royalties w
ROY
/w
P
1 w
ROY
/w
I
Internet w
I
/w
P
w
I
/w
ROY
1
………
The relative weights of the individual indicators are calculated using an eigenvector. This method
makes it possible to check the consistency of the comparison matrix through the calculation of the
eigenvalues. Figure 17 shows the results of the evaluation process and the weights, together with the
corresponding standard deviation.
32
98 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
Figure 17. Analytical hierarchy process (AHP) weighting of the TAI indicators
Note. Average weight (bold) and standard deviation.
People's beliefs, however, are not always consistent. For example, if one person claims that A is
much more important than B, B slightly more important than C, and C slightly more important than A,
his/her judgment is inconsistent and the results are less trustworthy. Inconsistency, however, is part of
human nature. It might therefore be adequate to measure the degree of inconsistency in order to make
results acceptable to the public. For a matrix of size Q × Q, only Q–1 comparisons are required to
establish weights for Q indicators. The actual number of comparisons performed in AHP is Q(Q–1)/2.
This is computationally costly, but results in a set of weights that is less sensitive to errors of judgement.
In addition, redundancy allows for a measure of judgment errors, an inconsistency ratio. Small
inconsistency ratios – the suggested ruleofthumb is less than 0.1, although 0.2 is often cited – do not
drastically affect the weights (Saaty, 1980; Karlsson, 1998).
6.8. Conjoint analysis (CA)
Merely asking respondents how much importance they attach to an individual indicator is unlikely
to yield effective “willingness to pay” valuations. These can be inferred by using conjoint analysis (CA)
from respondents’ rankings of alternative scenarios (Hair et al., 1995). Conjoint analysis is a
decompositional multivariate data analysis technique frequently used in marketing (McDaniel & Gates,
1998) and consumer research (Green & Srinivasan, 1978). If AHP derives the “worth” of an alternative,
summing up the “worth” of the individual indicators, CA does the opposite, i.e. it disaggregates
preferences.
This method asks for an evaluation (a preference) of a set of alternative scenarios. A scenario might
be a given set of values for the individual indicators. The preference is then decomposed by relating the
single components (the known values of individual indicators of that scenario) to the evaluation.
Although this methodology uses statistical analysis to treat the data, it relies on the opinion of people
(e.g. experts, politicians, citizens), who are asked to choose which set of individual indicators they prefer,
each person being presented with a different selection of sets to evaluate.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 99
The absolute value (or level) of individual indicators could be varied both within the selection of
sets presented to the same individual and across individuals. A preference function would be estimated
using the information emerging from the different scenarios. A probability of the preference could
therefore be estimated as a function of the levels of the individual indicators defining the alternative
scenarios:
) I ,..., I , I ( P pref
Qc c 2 c 1 c
=
(27)
where I
qc
is the level of individual indicator q=1,…,Q, for country c=1,…,M. After estimating this
probability (often using discrete choice models), the derivatives with respect to the individual indicators
of the preference function can be used as weights to aggregate the individual indicators in a composite
index:
¯
=
c
c
=
Q
1 q
qc
qc
c
I
I
P
CI
(28)
The idea is to calculate the total differential of the function P at the point of indifference between
alternative states of nature. Solving for the individual indicator q, the marginal rate of substitution of I
qc
is obtained. Therefore
qc
I P c c (thus the weight) indicates a tradeoff – how the preference changes with
the change of indicator. This implies compensability among indicators, i.e. the possibility of offsetting a
deficit in some dimension with an outstanding performance in another. This is an important feature of
this method, and should be carefully evaluated visàvis the objectives of the overall analysis. For
example, compensability might not be desirable when dealing with environmental issues.
6.9. Performance of the different weighting methods
The weights for the TAI example are calculated using different weighting methods – equal
weighting (EW), factor analysis (FA), budget allocation (BAP) and analytical hierarchy process (AHP)
(Table 22). The diversity in the weights resulting from applying different methods is notable. Clearly,
with each method the various individual indicators are evaluated differently. Patents, for example, are
worth 17% of the weight according to FA, but only 9% according to AHP. This influences strongly the
variability of each country’s ranking (Table 23). For example, Korea ranks second with AHP, but only
fifth with EW or FA. AHP assigns high weights (more than 20%) to two indicators, exports and
university, for which Korea has higher scores for one or both indicators, compared to the United States,
Sweden or Japan. The role of the variability in the weights and their influence on the value of the
composite are discussed in the section on sensitivity analysis.
100 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
Table 22. TAI weights based on different methods
Equal weighting (EW), factor analysis (FA), budget allocation (BAP), analytic hierarchy process (AHP)
Method Weights for the indicators (fixed for all countries)
Patents Royalties Internet Tech exports Telephones Electricity Schooling University
EW 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13
FA 0.17 0.15 0.11 0.06 0.08 0.13 0.13 0.17
BAP 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.18 0.10 0.06 0.15 0.18
AHP 0.09 0.10 0.07 0.21 0.05 0.06 0.18 0.25
Table 23. TAI country rankings based on different weighting methods
EW FA BOD BAP AHP
Finland 1 1 1 1 1
United States 2 2 1 2 3
Sweden 3 3 1 3 4
Japan 4 4 4 5 5
Korea 5 5 6 4 2
Netherlands 6 6 7 8 11
United Kingdom 7 8 9 7 7
Singapore 8 11 12 6 6
Canada 9 10 8 10 10
Australia 10 7 10 11 9
Germany 11 12 11 9 8
Norway 12 9 5 13 16
Ireland 13 14 13 12 12
Belgium 14 15 15 14 13
New Zealand 15 13 14 17 18
Austria 16 16 16 15 15
France 17 17 17 16 14
Israel 18 18 18 18 17
Spain 19 19 20 19 19
Italy 20 20 19 21 21
Czech Republic 21 21 21 22 22
Hungary 22 23 23 20 20
Slovenia 23 22 22 23 23
Note: e.g. the United States ranks first according to BOD, second according to EW, FA and BAP, and third according to AHP.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 101
Table 24. Advantages and disadvantages of different weighting methods
Advantages Disadvantages
Benefit of the doubt (BOD)  e.g. Human Development Index (Mahlberg & Obersteiner, 2001); Sustainable Development
(Cherchye & Kuosmanen, 2002); Social Inclusion (Cherchye, et al., 2004); Macroeconomic performance evaluation (Melyn &
Moesen, 1991; Cherchye 2001); Unemployment (Storrie & Bjurek, 1999; 2000).
• The indicator is sensitive to national policy priorities,
in that the weights are endogenously determined by
the observed performances (this is a useful second
best approach whenever the best – full information
about true policy priorities – cannot be attained).
• The benchmark is not based upon theoretical
bounds, but on a linear combination of observed
best performances.
• Useful in policy arena, since policymakers could not
complain about unfair weighting: any other
weighting scheme would have generated lower
composite scores.
• Such an index could be “incentive generating” rather
than “punishing” the countries lagging behind.
• Weights, by revealing information about the policy
priorities, may help to define tradeoffs, overcoming
the difficulties of linear aggregations.
• Without imposing constraints on weights (except
nonnegativity) it is likely to have many of the
countries with a composite indicator score equal to 1
(many countries on the frontier).
• It may happen that there exists a multiplicity of
solutions making the optimal set of weights
undetermined (this is likely to happen when CI=1).
• The index is likely to reward the status quo, since for
each country the maximisation problem gives higher
weights to higher scores.
• The best performer (that with a composite equal to
one) will not see its progress reflected in the
composite (which will remain stacked to 1). This can
be solved by imposing an external benchmark.
Unobserved Components Models  e.g. Governance indicators (see Kaufmann et al., 1999; 2003)
• Weights do not depend on ad hoc restrictions. • Reliability and robustness of results depend on the
availability of sufficient data.
• With highly correlated individual indicators there
could be identification problems.
• Rewards the absence of outliers, given that weights
are a decreasing function of the variance of
individual indicators.
• If each country has a different number of individual
indicators; weights are country–specific.
Budget Allocation  e.g. Employment Outlook (OECD,1999); Composite Indicator on eBusiness Readiness (EC, 2004b); National
Health Care System Performance (King’s Fund., 2001); Ecoindicator 99 (PréConsultants NL, 2000) (weights based on survey from
experts); Overall Health System Attainment (WHO, 2000) (weights based on survey from experts).
• Weighting is based on expert opinion and not on
technical manipulations.
• Expert opinion is likely to increase the legitimacy of
the composite and to create a forum of discussion in
which to form a consensus for policy action.
• Weighting reliability. Weights could reflect specific
local conditions (e.g. in environmental problems), so
expert weighting may not be transferable from one
area to another.
• Allocating a certain budget over a too large number
of indicators may lead to serious cognitive stress for
the experts, as it implies circular thinking. The
method is likely to produce inconsistencies for a
number of indicators higher than 10.
• Weighting may not measure the importance of each
individual indicator but rather the urgency or need
for political intervention in the dimension of the
individual indicator concerned (e.g. more weight on
Ozone emissions if the expert feels that not enough
has been done to tackle them).
102 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
Advantages Disadvantages
Public Opinion – e.g. concern about environmental problems Index (Parker, 1991).
• Deals with issues on the public agenda.
• Allows all stakeholders to express their preference
and creates a consensus for policy action.
• Implies the measurement of “concern” (see previous
discussion on the Budget Allocation).
• Could produce inconsistencies when dealing with a
high number of indicators (see previous discussion
on the Budget Allocation).
Analytic Hierarchy Process  e.g. Index of Environmental Friendliness, (Puolamaa et al., 1996).
• Can be used both for qualitative and quantitative
data.
• Transparency of the composite is higher.
• Weighting is based on expert opinion and not on
technical manipulations.
• Expert opinion is likely to increase the legitimacy of
the composite and to create a forum of discussion in
which to form a consensus for policy action
• Provides a measure of the inconsistency in
respondents replies
• Requires a high number of pairwise comparisons
and thus can be computationally costly.
• Results depend on the set of evaluators chosen and
the setting of the experiment.
Conjoint Analysis – e.g. indicator of quality of life in the city of Istanbul (Ülengin et al., 2001); advocated by Kahn (1998) and Kahn
& Maynard (1995) for environmental applications.
• Weights represent tradeoffs across indicators.
• Takes into account the sociopolitical context and
the values of respondents.
• Needs a prespecified utility function and implies
compensability.
• Depends on the sample of respondents chosen and
on how questions are framed.
• Requires a large sample of respondents and each
respondent may be required to express a large
number of preferences.
• Estimation process is rather complex.
AGGREGATION METHODS
6.10. Additive aggregation methods
The simplest additive aggregation method entails the calculation of the ranking of each country
according to each individual indicator and summation of the resulting rankings, e.g. Information and
Communication Technologies Index (Fagerberg, 2001). The method is based on ordinal information (the
Borda rule). It is simple and independent of outliers. However, the absolute value of information is lost.
¯
=
=
Q
1 q
qc c
Rank CI for c=1,…,M.
(29)
The second method is based on the number of indicators that are above and below a given
benchmark. This method uses nominal scores for each indicator to calculate the difference between the
number of indicators above and below an arbitrarily defined threshold around the mean, e.g. the
Innovation Scoreboard (European Commission, 2001c).
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 103
¯
=
+ ÷ =
Q
1 q
EUq
qc
c
) p 1 (
I
I
sgn CI for c=1,…,M.
(30)
The threshold value p can be arbitrarily set above or below the mean. As with the preceding method,
it is simple and unaffected by outliers. However, the interval level information is lost. For example,
assume that the value of indicator I for country a is 30% above the mean and the value for country b is
25% above, with a threshold of 20% above the mean. Both country a and country b are then counted
equally as ‘above average’, in spite of a having a higher score than b.
By far the most widespread linear aggregation is the summation of weighted and normalised
individual indicators:
¯
=
=
Q
1 q
qc q c
I w CI
(31)
with 1 w
q
q
=
¯
and 1 w 0
q
s s , for all q=1,..,Q and c=1,…,M.
Although widely used, this aggregation imposes restrictions on the nature of individual indicators.
In particular, obtaining a meaningful composite indicator depends on the quality of the underlying
individual indicators and their unit of measurement. Furthermore, additive aggregations have important
implications for the interpretation of weights.
When using a linear additive aggregation technique, a necessary and sufficient condition for the
existence of a proper composite indicator is preference independence: given the individual
indicators{ }
Q 2 1
x ,..., x , x , an additive aggregation function exists if and only if these indicators are
mutually preferentially independent (Debreu, 1960; Keeney & Raiffa, 1976; Krantz et al., 1971).
33
Preferential independence is a very strong condition, as it implies that the tradeoff ratio between
two variables
, x y
S is independent of the values of the Q2 other variables (Ting, 1971).
34
From an
operational point of view, this means that an additive aggregation function permits the assessment of the
marginal contribution of each variable separately. These marginal contributions can then be added
together to yield a total value. If, for example, environmental dimensions are involved, the use of a linear
aggregation procedure implies that, among the different aspects of an ecosystem, there are no synergies
or conflicts. This appears to be quite an unrealistic assumption (Funtowicz et al., 1990). For example,
“laboratory experiments made clear that the combined impact of the acidifying substances SO
2
, NO
X
,
NH
3
and O
3
on plant growth is substantially more severe that the (linear) addition of the impacts of each
of these substances alone would be.” (Dietz & Van der Straaten, 1992). Additive aggregation could thus
result in a biased composite indicator, i.e. it would not entirely reflect the information of its individual
indicators. The dimension and the direction of the error are not easily determined, and the composite
cannot be adjusted properly.
6.11. Geometric aggregation
As discussed above, an undesirable feature of additive aggregations is the implied full
compensability, such that poor performance in some indicators can be compensated for by sufficiently
high values in other indicators. For example, if a hypothetical composite were formed by inequality,
environmental degradation, GDP per capita and unemployment, two countries, one with values 21, 1, 1,
104 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
1, and the other with 6,6,6,6, would have equal composites if the aggregation were additive and EW were
applied. Obviously the two countries would represent very different social conditions which would not
be reflected in the composite. If multicriteria analysis entails full noncompensability, the use of a
geometric aggregation (also called deprivational index)
I
=
=
Q
1 q
w
c , q c
q
x CI is an inbetween solution.
35
In the example above, the first country would have a much lower score on the composite than the
second, if the aggregation were geometric (2.14 for the first and 6 for the second). In a benchmarking
exercise, countries with low scores in some individual indicators thus would prefer a linear rather than a
geometric aggregation. On the other hand, the marginal utility of an increase in the score would be much
higher when the absolute value of the score is low: country 1, by increasing the second indicator by 1
unit, would increase its composite score from 2.14 to 2.54, while country 2 would go from 6 to 6.23. In
other words, the first country would increase its composite score by 19%, but the second only by 4%.
Consequently, a country would have a greater incentive to address those sectors/activities/alternatives
with low scores if the aggregation were geometric rather than linear, as this would give it a better chance
of improving its position in the ranking.
6.12. On the aggregation rules issue: lessons learned from social choice and multicriteria decision
analysis
36
The discrete multicriterion problem can be described in the following way: A is a finite set of N
feasible actions (or alternatives); M is the number of different points of view or evaluation criteria g
m
i=1, 2, ... , M considered relevant in a policy problem, where the action a is judged to be better than
action b (both belonging to the set A) according to the mth point of view if g
m
(a)>g
m
(b). In this way a
decision problem may be represented in a tabular or matrix form. Given the sets A (of alternatives) and G
(of evaluation criteria) and assuming the existence of N alternatives and M criteria, it is possible to build
an N x M matrix P called evaluation or impact matrix whose typical element p
ij
(i=1, 2 , ... , M; j=1, 2 ,
... , N) represents the evaluation of the jth alternative by means of the ith criterion. The impact matrix
may include quantitative, qualitative or both types of information.
In general, in a multicriteria problem, there is no solution optimising all the criteria at the same
time (the socalled ideal or utopia solution) and therefore compromise solutions have to be found.
In sum, the information contained in the impact matrix which is useful for solving the socalled
multicriterion problem is:
• Intensity of preference (when quantitative criterion scores are present).
• Number of criteria in favour of a given alternative.
• Weight attached to each criterion.
• Relationship of each alternative to all the other alternatives.
Combinations of this information generate different aggregation conventions, i.e. manipulation rules
for the available information to arrive at a preference structure. The aggregation of several criteria
implies taking a position on the fundamental issue of compensability. Compensability refers to the
existence of tradeoffs, i.e. the possibility of offsetting a disadvantage on some criteria by a sufficiently
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 105
large advantage on another criterion, whereas smaller advantages would not do the same. Thus a
preference relation is noncompensatory if no tradeoff occurs, and is compensatory otherwise. The use
of weights with intensity of preference originates in compensatory multicriteria methods and gives the
meaning of tradeoffs to the weights. By contrast, the use of weights with ordinal criterion scores
originates in noncompensatory aggregation procedures and gives the weights the meaning of importance
coefficients (Keeney & Raiffa, 1976; Podinovskii, 1994; Roberts, 1979).
37
Vansnick (1990) showed that the two main approaches in multicriteria decision theory, i.e. the
compensatory and noncompensatory, can be directly derived from the seminal work of Borda (1784)
and Condorcet (1785). The study of social choice literature reveals that the various ranking procedures
used in multicriterion methods have their origins in social choice. It is apparent that if the concept of
criterion is substituted with that of the individual indicator (or voter in social choice parlance), and if we
label alternatives as countries, the multicriterion/social choice problem and the construction of a
composite indicator are equivalent from a formal point of view. In conclusion, we can then state that
multicriterion and social choice literature are clearly relevant for understanding the aggregation rules
useful for building composite indicators.
A topic to begin with is Arrow’s impossibility theorem (Arrow, 1963). This theorem shows that if
one defines formally those properties which should hold in the definition of the concept of democracy, a
very sad conclusion results, namely that the only political system respecting all those properties would be
dictatorship. Arrow & Raynaud (1986, pp. 1723) have proved that the correct solution of a multi
criterion problem comes from a monocriterion optimisation. A consequence of this theorem is that no
perfect aggregation rule may exist. “Reasonable” ranking procedures must therefore be found. In the
context of composite indicators, this circumstance gives rise to two questions: is it possible to find a
ranking algorithm consistent with some desirable properties?; and conversely, is it possible to ensure that
no essential property is lost?
In social choice, the response to Arrow’s theorem has been to search for less ambitious voting
structures; it is necessary to retain only a few basic requirements. There are generally three such basic
requirements:
1. Anonymity: all voters must be treated equally (or, in other terms, all indicators must be equally
weighted);
2. Neutrality: all alternatives (countries) must be treated equally;
3. Monotonicity: greater support for one alternative may not jeopardize its success.
Note that while anonymity is clearly essential in the case of voters, this is not the case in the
building of a composite indicator, since equal weighting is usually only one of the possible weighting
systems. The consequences of losing anonymity will be discussed further on. The following will examine
some ranking procedures hailing directly from the social choice tradition. Emphasis will be put on
Arrow’s result, in the sense that limitations of these procedures will be elucidated.
106 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
Let us start with the first numerical example in Table 25, where 21 individual indicators rank four
countries (a, b, c, d):
Table 25. 21 indicators and 4 countries
Number of indicators 3 5 7 6
a a b c
b c d b
c b c d
d d a a
(Rearranged from Moulin, 1988, p. 228)
The first column of the example indicates that three indicators put country a in the first place,
followed by countries b, c, and d. Suppose that the objective is to find the best country. A first possibility
is to apply the socalled plurality rule, meaning that the country which is more often ranked first is the
‘winner’. Thus in this case, country a is chosen, since eight indicators put it in first place. However,
looking carefully at the numerical example 1 reveals that a is also the country with the strongest
opposition, since 13 indicators put it in last place.
It is interesting that this paradox was the starting point of Borda’s and Condorcet’s research at the
end of the 18th century, but the plurality rule corresponds to the most common electoral system in the
21st century – this is a clear example of what Arrow’s impossibility theorem means in the realworld
implementation of democracy. From the plurality rule paradox two main lessons can be learned:
1. Good ranking procedures should consider the entire ranking of countries and not only the first
position.
2. It is important to consider not only what a majority of criteria prefer but also what they do not
prefer at all.
The Borda solution to the plurality rule paradox is the following scoring rule: given N countries, if a
country is ranked last, it receives no points; it receives 1 point if ranked next to last. The scoring process
continues like this up to N1 points, awarded to the country ranked first. Of course, the Borda winner is
the country with the highest total score.
Let us then apply Borda’s rule to the data presented in Table 25. To begin, the information can be
presented in a frequency matrix fashion, as in Table 26. This shows how many individual indicators put
each of the countries into each of the four positions in the ranking and the score with which each position
is rewarded. Therefore, according to the first row of the matrix, eight indicators put country a into first
place; seven, b; and six, c; whereas no indicator puts d first. The sum for each row or each column is
always a constant equal to the number of individual indicators (21 in this example).
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 107
Table 26. A frequency matrix for the application of Borda's rule
Ranking Indicators Points
a b c d
1st 8 7 6 0 3
2nd 0 9 5 7 2
3rd 0 5 10 6 1
4th 13 0 0 8 0
By applying Borda’s scoring rule, the following results are obtained:
8 3 24
5 9 2 7 3 44
10 5 2 6 3 38
6 7 2 20
a
b
c
d
= × =
= + × + × =
= + × + × =
= + × =
It can be seen that the selected country is now b rather than a. The plurality rule paradox has been
solved.
Turning to Condorcet, his rule is based on a pairwise comparison between all countries considered.
For each pair, a concordance index is computed by counting how many individual indicators are in
favour of each country. In this way an outranking matrix, the elements of which hold the “constant sum
property”, is built. The pairs whose concordance index is higher than 50% of the indicators are selected.
Given the transitivity property, a final ranking is isolated.
To make this procedure even clearer, let us apply it to the data presented in Table 25. The
outranking matrix is shown in Table 27; in this case, the constant sum is 21 .
ij ji
e e i j + = ¬ =
According to the first row of this matrix, a is always preferred to b, c, and d by eight indicators.
Table 27. Outranking matrix derived from the Concordet approach
0 8 8 8
13 0 10 21
13 11 0 14
13 0 7 0
a b c d
a
b
c
d
In this case, the majority threshold (i.e. a number of individual indicators greater than 50% of the
indicators considered) is eleven indicators. The pairs with a concordance index higher than 11 are the
following:
bPa= 13, bPd=21, cPa=13, cPb=11, cPd=14, dPa=13. Clearly, country c is the Condorcet winner,
since it is always preferred to any other country. Country b is preferred to both a and d. Between a and d,
d is preferred to a. Thus the final ranking is the following: c b d a ÷ ÷ ÷ .
108 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
As can be seen, the derivation of a Condorcet ranking may sometimes be a long and complex
computation process. Both Borda and Condorcet approaches solve the plurality rule paradox. However,
the solutions offered are different. At this point, the question arises: in the context of composite
indicators, can we choose between Borda and Condorcet on any theoretical and/or practical
grounds?
A first question to address is: do Borda and Condorcet rules normally lead to different solutions?
Fishburn (1973) proves the following theorem: there are profiles where the Condorcet winner exists and
is never selected by any scoring method. Moulin (1988, p. 249) proves that “a Condorcet winner (loser)
cannot be a Borda loser (winner)”. In other words, Condorcet consistent rules and scoring voting rules
are deeply different in nature. Their disagreement in practice is in the normal situation. Both approaches
must therefore be examined carefully.
Consider the numerical example in Table 28 with 60 indicators and three countries, owed to
Condorcet himself (Condorcet, 1785).
Table 28. An original Concordet example
Number of
indicators
23 17 2 10 8
a b b c c
b c a a b
c a c b a
The corresponding frequency matrix is shown in Table29.
Table 29. An original Concordet example
Ranking Indicators Points
a b c
1st 23 19 18 2
2nd 12 31 17 1
3rd 25 10 25 0
By applying Borda’s scoring rule, the following results are obtained:
58, 69, 53 a b c = = = , thus b is unequivocally selected.
Applying the Condorcet rule, the corresponding outranking matrix is shown below in Table 30.
Table 30. Outranking matrix derived from Table 27
0 33 25
27 0 42
35 18 0
a b c
a
b
c
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 109
In this case, 60 indicators being used, the concordance threshold is 31. It is: aPb, bPc and cPa, thus,
due to the transitive property, a cycle exists and no country can be selected. From this example we might
conclude that the Borda rule (or any scoring rule) is more effective, since in this way a country is always
selected, while Condorcet sometimes leads to an irreducible state of indecision. However, Borda rules
have other drawbacks. This can be seen when analysing the properties of Borda’s rule.
Examine again the outranking matrix presented in Table 30. From this matrix it can be seen that 33
individual indicators are in favour of country a, while only 27 are in favour of b. So a legitimate question
is why the Borda rule ranks b before a. It is mainly due to the fact that the Borda rule is based on the
concept of intensity of preference, while the Condorcet rule uses only the number of indicators.
In the framework of the Borda rule, and all scoring methods in general, the intensity of preference is
measured by the scores given according to the rank positions. This implies that compensability is
allowed. Moreover, the rank position of a given country depends on the number of countries considered.
This implies that the mutual preference relation of a given pair of countries may change according to the
countries considered. As a consequence, preference reversal phenomena may easily occur. This problem
has been extensively studied by Fishburn (1984). Consider the numerical example presented in Table 31.
Table 31. Fishburn example on Borda rule
Number of
indicators
3 2 2
c b a
b a d
a d c
d c b
The corresponding frequency matrix is in Table 32.
Table 32. Frequency matrix derived from Table 31
Countries Points
Ranking a b c d
1st 2 2 3 0 3
2nd 2 3 0 2 2
3rd 3 0 2 2 1
4th 0 2 2 3 0
By applying Borda’s scoring rule, the following results are obtained:
13, 12, 11, 6 a b c d = = = = , thus country a is chosen. Now suppose that d is removed from the
analysis. Since d was at the bottom of the ranking, nobody should have any reasonable doubt that a is
still the best country. To check whether this assumption is correct, the corresponding frequency matrix is
presented in Table 33.
110 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
Table 33. Frequency matrix derived from Table 31 without country d
Countries
Ranking a b c Points
1st 2 2 3 2
2nd 2 3 2 1
3rd 3 2 2 0
By applying Borda’s scoring rule, the following results are obtained:
6, 7, 8 a b c = = = , thus country c is now preferred. Unfortunately, Borda’s rule is fully dependent
on irrelevant alternatives and preference reversals can occur with an extremely high frequency. At this
point, we need to tackle the issue of when, in the context of composite indicators, it is better to use a
Condorcet consistent rule or a scoring method. Given the consensus in the literature that the Condorcet
theory of voting is noncompensatory while Borda’s is fully compensatory, a first conclusion is that a
Condorcet approach is necessary when weights are to be understood as importance coefficients, while
Borda’s is desirable when weights are meaningful in the form of tradeoffs.
As we have seen, a basic problem inherent in the Condorcet approach is the presence of cycles,
i.e. cases where aPb, bPc and cPa may be found. The probability ( ) M N, t of obtaining a cycle with N
countries and M individual indicators increases with both N and M. Estimations of probabilities of getting
cycles can be found in Fishburn (1973, p. 95). Note that these probabilities are estimated under the so
called “impartial culture assumption”, i.e. that voters’ opinions do not influence each other. While this
assumption is unrealistic in a mass election, it is fully respected in the building of a composite indicator,
since individual indicators are supposed to be nonredundant.
Condorcet himself was aware of the problem of cycles in his approach; he built examples to explain
it (as in Table 28) and he even came close to finding a consistent rule capable of ranking any number of
alternatives when cycles are present. The main attempts to clarify, fully understand and axiomatize
Condorcet’s approach to solving cycles were made by Kemeny (1959), who made the first intelligible
description of the Condorcet approach, and Young & Levenglick (1978), who achieved its clearest
exposition and complete axiomatization. For this reason we can call this approach the Condorcet
KemenyYoungLevenglick ranking procedure, in short the CKYL ranking procedure.
Its main methodological foundation is the maximum likelihood concept. The maximum likelihood
principle selects as a final ranking that with the maximum pairwise support. This is the ranking which
involves the minimum number of pairwise inversions. Since Kemeny (1959) proposes the number of
pairwise inversions as a distance to be minimized between the selected ranking and the other individual
profiles, the two approaches are perfectly equivalent. The selected ranking is also a median ranking for
those composing the profile (in multicriteria terminology, it is the “compromise ranking” among the
various conflicting points of view); for this reason the corresponding ranking procedure is often known
as the Kemeny median order.
Condorcet made three basic assumptions:
1. Voters’ opinions do not influence each other.
2. Voters all have the same competence, i.e. each voter chooses his/her best candidate with a fixed
probability p, where 1
2
1
< < p and p is the same for all voters.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 111
3. Each voter’s judgement on any pair of candidates is independent of his/her judgement on any
other pair.
As discussed above, assumption 1 always applies for composite indicators. Assumption 2 states that
each individual indicator should be weighted equally, which is not always desirable in this context.
Indeed, given that complete decisiveness yields to dictatorship, Arrow’s impossibility theorem forces us
to make a tradeoff between decisiveness (an alternative has to be chosen or a ranking has to be made)
and anonymity (i.e. equal weighting). As a consequence, the loss of anonymity in favour of decisiveness
in this case is even a positive property. In general, it is essential that no indicator weight constitute more
than 50% of the total weights; otherwise the aggregation procedure would become lexicographic in
nature, and this individual indicator would become a dictator in Arrow’s terminology. Following from
this, when indicator weights are derived from different dimensions, the requirement is that no dimension
should weigh more than 50% of the total weights (Munda, 2005b).
The third assumption refers to the famous axiom of independence of irrelevant alternatives of
Arrow’s theorem. The CKYL ranking procedure naturally does not respect this axiom. However, two
considerations have to be observed on this subject.
1. A Condorcet consistent rule always presents smaller probabilities of the occurrence of a rank
reversal in comparison with any Borda consistent rule. This is again a strong argument in
favour of a Condorcet approach in a multicriterion framework.
2. The CKYL ranking procedure is the “only plausible ranking procedure that is locally
stable”, where local stability means that the ranking of countries does not change if only an
interval of the full ranking is considered.
Although the theoretical characterization of the CKYL ranking procedure is not easy, the
algorithm per se is very simple. The maximum likelihood ranking of countries is the ranking supported
by the maximum number of individual indicators for each pairwise comparison, summed over all pairs of
countries (see Munda & Nardo, 2007, for more detail). By applying the CKYL ranking procedure to
the numerical example of Table 28 the following six possible rankings with the corresponding scores are
obtained.
a b c 100
b c a 104
c a b 86
b a c 94
c b a 80
a c b 76
The ranking b c a ÷ ÷ is the final result. The original Condorcet problem has been solved in a
satisfactory way.
However, note that the computational problem is a clear drawback of this approach. The number of
permutations can easily become unmanageable; for example, when ten countries are considered, it is
10!=3,628,800. To solve this problem it is necessary to use numerical algorithms.
To conclude, consider the numerical example in Table 34 with three countries and three individual
indicators (this is the classical example of the Condorcet paradox shown in many textbooks).
112 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
Table 34. An unsolvable ranking problem
Number of
indicators
1 1 1
a c b
b a c
c b a
By applying the Borda rule, all countries receive a score equal to 3 – no selection is possible. By
applying the Condorcet rule, being majority equal to 2/3, the cycle aPb, bPc and cPa is obtained. By
applying the CKYL ranking procedure, three rankings have the greatest support. These are:
, , a b c b c a c a b ÷ ÷ ÷ ÷ ÷ ÷ the cycle remains unsolved.
This example is a perfect manifestation of Arrow’s theorem; no decision is possible. To eliminate
ties, a larger number of individual indicators, or some indicator weights, would be required. This is the
reason why the use of individual indicator weights is important. Anonymity is lost but decisiveness
improves enormously.
6.13. Noncompensatory multicriteria approach (MCA)
As in common practice, greater weight could be given to components which are considered more
significant in the context of the particular composite indicator (OECD, 2003). Yet it can be shown that
when using an additive or a multiplicative aggregation rule, and when individual indicators are expressed
as intensities (e.g. in pounds, litres or euro) and not as qualities (e.g. good, bad, medium) nor in rankings,
the substitution rates equal the weights of the variables up to a multiplicative coefficient (Munda &
Nardo, 2005).
38
As a consequence, weights in additive aggregations necessarily take the meaning of
substitution rates (tradeoffs) and do not indicate the importance of the associated indicator. This implies
a compensatory logic, i.e. the possibility of offsetting a disadvantage on some variables by a sufficiently
large advantage on others. For example, in the construction of the TAI a compensatory logic (using equal
weighting) would imply that it is acceptable to renounce, for example, 2% of patents granted to residents,
or 2% of university enrolment in exchange for a 2% increase in electricity consumption.
The implication is the existence of a theoretical inconsistency in the way weights are actually used
and their real theoretical meaning. For the weights to be interpreted as “importance coefficients” (the
greatest weight being placed on the most important “dimension”), noncompensatory aggregation
procedures must be used to construct composite indicators (Podinovskii, 1994). This can be done using a
noncompensatory multicriteria approach.
When a number of variables are used to evaluate a set of countries, some may be in favour of one
particular country, while others will favour another. As a consequence a conflict among the variables
could arise. This conflict can be treated in the light of a noncompensatory logic by taking into account
the absence of preferential independence within a discrete noncompensatory multicriteria approach
(NCMC) (Munda, 1995; Roy, 1996; Vincke, 1992).
Given a set of individual indicators G={x
q
}, q=1,…,Q, and a finite set M={c}, c=1,…,M of
countries, assume that the evaluation of each country c with respect to an individual indicator x
q
(i.e. the
indicator score or variable) is based on an interval or ratio scale of measurement. For simplicity’s sake, it
is also assumed that a higher value in an individual indicator is preferred to a lower, i.e. the higher, the
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 113
better. Further assume the existence of a set of weights w={w
q
}, q=1,2,...Q, with
¯
=
=
Q
1 q
q
1
w
,
interpreted as importance coefficients. This information constitutes the impact matrix. As has already
been discussed, a noncompensatory rule for ranking countries can be supplied by the CKYL ranking
procedure. For explanatory purposes, consider only five of the countries included in the TAI data set
39
and imagine that equal weights are given to all of the individual indicators (Table 35).
Table 35. Impact matrix for TAI (five countries)
Patents Royalties Internet
Tech
exports
Telephones Electricity Schooling University
Finland 187 125.6 200.2 50.7 3.080 4.150 10 27.4
USA 289 130 179.1 66.2 2.997 4.073 12 13.9
Sweden 271 156.6 125.8 59.7 3.096 4.145 11.4 15.3
Japan 994 64.6 49 80.8 3.003 3.865 9.5 10
Korea 779 9.8 4.8 66.7 2.972 3.653 10.8 23.2
weight 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8
The mathematical aggregation convention can be divided into two main steps
(Munda & Nardo, 2007):
• Pairwise comparison of countries according to the whole set of individual indicators used.
• Ranking of countries in a complete preorder.
The first step results in a M×M matrix, E, called outranking matrix (Arrow & Raynaud, 1986; Roy,
1996). Any generic element of E: e
jk
, j = k is the result of the pairwise comparison, according to all the Q
individual indicators, between countries j and k. Such a global pairwise comparison is obtained by means
of equation:
¯
=
+ =
Q
1 q
jk q jk q jk
)) In ( w
2
1
) (Pr w ( e
(32)
where ) (Pr w
jk q
and ) In ( w
jk q
are the weights of individual indicators presenting a preference
and an indifference relation respectively. In other words, the score of country j is the sum of the weights
of individual indicators on which this country does better than country I, as well as – if any – half of the
weights for the individual indicators on which the two countries do equally well (32) e
jk
+ e
kj
= 1 clearly
holds.
The pairwise comparisons are different from those in the AHP method – which belongs to the set of
compensatory multicriteria methods, together with CA. In the latter, the question to be answered is
whether I
q
is more important than I
z
; here, the question is rather whether I
q
is higher for country a or for
country b. And if I
q
is indeed higher for country a , it is the weight of individual indicator q which enters
into the computation of the overall importance of country a, in a manner consistent with the definition of
weights as importance measures.
114 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
In the TAI example, the pairwise comparison of countries such as Finland and the United States
shows that Finland has better scores for the individual indicators – Internet (weight 1/8), telephones
(weight 1/8), electricity (weight 1/8) and university (weight 1/8). Thus the score for Finland is 4*1/8=0.5,
while the complement to one is the score of the US. The resulting outranking matrix is Table 36:
Table 36. Outranking impact matrix for TAI (five countries)
Finland USA Sweden Japan Korea
Finland 0 0.5 0.375 0.75 0.625
USA 0.5 0 0.5 0.625 0.625
Sweden 0.625 0.5 0 0.75 0.625
Japan 0.25 0.375 0.25 0 0.75
Korea 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.25 0
According to CKYL, the ranking of countries with the highest likelihood is that supported by the
maximum number of individual indicators for each pairwise comparison, summed over all pairs of
countries considered. More formally, the outranking matrix E is composed of all the M(M–1) pairwise
comparisons. Call R the set of all M! possible complete rankings of alternatives, R={r
s
}, s=1,2,..., M!.
For each r
s
, compute the corresponding score m
s
as the summation of e
jk
over all the


.

\

2
M
pairs j,k of
alternatives. That is,
¯
=
e
jk
s
m r e
and ! M ... , 2 , 1 s , k j where
s jk
e = = . The final ranking
(
r
*
) is the solution of:
R
e
where
e r
jk jk
e = ·
¯
max
*
* m (33)
In the TAI example, the number of permutations obtained from five countries is 120: the first five
are listed in Table 37. For example, the score of the first ranking (USA, Sweden, Finland, Japan and
Korea) is obtained as follows: according to the impact matrix, the comparison of the USA with the other
countries yields 0.5 against Finland and Sweden and 0.625 against Japan and Korea (overall 2.25). The
comparison for Sweden yields 0.625 against Finland and Korea and 0.75 against Japan (overall 2).
Finland obtains 0.625 against Korea and 0.75 against Japan (overall 1.375). Finally Japan obtains 0.75
against Korea. The final score of this ranking is then equal to 2.25+2+1.375+0.75=6.375.
Table 37. Permutations obtained from the outranking matrix for TAI and associated score
USA Sweden Finland Japan Korea 6.375
Sweden Finland USA Japan Korea 6.375
Sweden USA Finland Japan Korea 6.375
Finland USA Sweden Japan Korea 6.125
Finland Sweden USA Japan Korea 6.125
USA Finland Sweden Japan Korea 6.125
According to expression (33) the final ranking will be the permutation(s) with the highest score. In
this example the first three permutations have the highest overall score, and thus all those can be
considered as a winning ranking.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 115
This aggregation method has the advantage of overcoming some of the problems raised by additive
or multiplicative aggregations, e.g. preference dependence, the use of different ratio or interval scales to
express the same indicator and the meaning of tradeoffs taken to the weights. With this method,
moreover, qualitative and quantitative information can be treated jointly. In addition, it does not need any
manipulation or normalisation to assure the comparability of individual indicators. The drawbacks, on
the other hand, include the dependence of irrelevant alternatives, i.e. the possible presence of cycles/rank
reversal in which in the final ranking, country a is preferred to b, b is preferred to c but c is preferred to a
(the same problem highlighted for AHP with indicators). Furthermore, information on intensity of
preference of variables is never utilised: even though the difference between values on an indicator for
two countries might be quite large, a very small difference could also produce the same ranking.
40
6.14. Performance of the different aggregation methods
The type of aggregation employed is strongly related to the method used to normalise raw data
(Step 5). In particular, Ebert & Welsch (2004) have shown that the use of linear aggregations yields
meaningful composite indicators only if data are all expressed on a partially comparable interval scale
(i.e. temperature in Celsius or Fahrenheit) of type 0 : > + ÷ o þ o
i
x x f (i.e. o fixed, but
i
þ
varying across sub indicators) or on a fully comparable interval scale (ȕ constant); Noncomparable data
measured on a ratio scale (i.e. kilograms and pounds) 0 where : > ÷
i i
x x f o o (i.e.
i
o varying
across individual indicators) can only be meaningfully aggregated by using geometric functions,
provided that x is strictly positive. In other terms, except in the case of indicators measured on a different
ratio scale, the measurement scale must be the same for all indicators when aggregating. Thus, care
should be taken when indicators measured on different scales coexist in the same composite. The
normalisation method should be properly used to remove the scale effect.
116 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
Table 38. TAI country rankings by different aggregation methods
LIN NCMC
GME
Finland 1 3
2
United States 2 1
1
Sweden 3 2
3
Japan 4 4
4
Korea, Rep. 5 9
16
Netherlands 6 8
5
United Kingdom 7 5
6
Singapore 8 12
18
Canada 9 11
13
Australia 10 9
14
Germany 11 7
8
Norway 12 6
11
Ireland 13 13
7
Belgium 14 17
9
New Zealand 15 15
17
Austria 16 15
12
France 17 14
10
Israel 18 18
15
Spain 19 20
19
Italy 20 19
21
Czech Republic 21 21
23
Hungary 22 23
22
Slovenia 23 22
20
Table 38 highlights the dependence of rankings on the aggregation methods used (in this case linear,
geometric and based on the multicriteria technique for the TAI data set with 23 countries). Although in
all cases equal weighting is used, the resulting rankings are very different. For example, Finland ranks
first according to the linear aggregation, second according to the geometric aggregation and third
according to the multicriteria. Note that Korea ranks sixteenth with GME, while its ranking is much
higher according to the other two methods, while the reverse is true for Belgium.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 117
STEP 7. UNCERTAINTY AND SENSITIVITY ANALYSIS
Sensitivity analysis is considered a necessary requirement in econometric practice (Kennedy, 2003)
and has been defined as the modeller’s equivalent of orthopaedists' Xrays.
Composite indicator development involves stages where subjective judgements have to be made: the
selection of individual indicators, the treatment of missing values, the choice of aggregation model, the
weights of the indicators, etc. All these subjective choices are the bones of the composite indicator and,
together with the information provided by the numbers themselves, shape the message communicated by
the composite indicator.
Since the quality of a model also depends on the soundness of its assumptions, good modelling
practice requires that the modeller provide an evaluation of the confidence in the model, assessing the
uncertainties associated with the modelling process and the subjective choices taken. This is what
sensitivity analysis does: it performs the ‘Xrays’ of the model by studying the relationship between
information flowing in and out of the model.
More formally, sensitivity analysis is the study of how the variation in the output can be
apportioned, qualitatively or quantitatively, to different sources of variation in the assumptions, and of
how the given composite indicator depends upon the information fed into it. Sensitivity analysis is thus
closely related to uncertainty analysis, which aims to quantify the overall uncertainty in country rankings
as a result of the uncertainties in the model input. A combination of uncertainty and sensitivity analysis
can help to gauge the robustness of the composite indicator ranking, to increase its transparency, to
identify which countries are favoured or weakened under certain assumptions and to help frame a debate
around the index.
Below is described how to apply uncertainty and sensitivity analysis to composite indicators. Our
synergistic use of uncertainty and sensitivity analysis has recently been applied for the robustness
assessment of composite indicators (Saisana et al., 2005a; Saltelli et al., 2008) and has proven to be
useful in dissipating some of the controversy surrounding composite indicators such as the
Environmental Sustainability Index (Saisana et al., 2005b) . Note that the structure of the uncertainty and
sensitivity analysis discussed below in relation to the TAI case study is only illustrative. In practice the
setup of the analysis will depend upon which sources of uncertainty and which assumptions the analyst
considers relevant for a particular application. In the TAI case study we focus on five main
uncertainties/assumptions: inclusion/exclusion of one indicator at a time, imputation of missing data,
different normalisation methods, different weighting schemes and different aggregation schemes.
Let CI be the index value for country c, c=1,…,M,
( ) ,... , , ,... ,
, 2 , 1 , , , 2 , 1 Q s s s c Q c c rs c
w w w I I I f CI =
(34)
according to the weighting model 3 , 2 , 1 , 3 , 2 , 1 , = = s r f
rs
, where the index r refers to the aggregation
system (LIN, GME, NCMC) and index s refers to the weighting scheme (BAP, AHP, BOD). The index is
based on Q normalised individual indicators
c Q c c
I I I
, , 2 , 1
,... , for that country and schemedependent
weights
Q s s s
w w w
, 2 , 1 ,
,... , for the individual indicators. The most frequently used normalisation methods
for the individual indicators are based on the MinMax (35) standardised (36), or on the raw indicator
values (37).
118 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
¦
¦
¦
¦
¹
¦
¦
¦
¦
´
¦
=
÷
=
÷
=
c q c q
q
q c q
c q
q
q c q
c q
x I
x std
x mean x
I
x range
x x
I
, ,
,
,
,
,
) (
) (
) (
) min(
(35)
(36)
(37)
where
c q
I
,
is the normalised and
c q
x
,
is the raw value of the individual indicator
q
x for country c .
Note that the MinMax method (35) can be used in conjunction with all the weighting schemes
(BAP, AHP and BOD) and for all aggregation systems (LIN, GME, NCMC). The standardised value
(36) can be used with weighting schemes (BAP, AHP) for aggregation systems (LIN, NCMC). And the
raw indicator value (37)can be used with weighting schemes (BAP, AHP) for aggregation systems
(GME, NCMC).
The rank assigned by the composite indicator to a given country, i.e. ) (
c
CI Rank is an output of the
uncertainty/sensitivity analysis. The average shift in country rankings is also explored. This latter statistic
captures the relative shift in the position of the entire system of countries in a single number. It can be
calculated as the average of the absolute differences in countries’ ranks with respect to a reference
ranking over the M countries:
¯
=
÷ =
M
1 c
c c ref S
) CI ( Rank ) CI ( Rank
M
1
R
(38)
The reference ranking for the TAI analysis is the original rank given to the country by the original
version of the index. The investigation of ) (
c
CI Rank and
S
R is the scope of the uncertainty and
sensitivity analysis.
41
7.1. General framework
The analysis is conducted as a single Monte Carlo experiment, e.g. by exploring all uncertainty
sources simultaneously to capture all possible synergy effects among uncertain input factors. This
involves the use of triggers, e.g. the use of uncertain input factors to decide which aggregation system
and weighting scheme to adopt. A discrete uncertain factor, which can take integer values between 1 and
3, is used for the aggregation system and similarly for the weighting scheme. Other trigger factors are
generated to select those indicators to be omitted, the editing scheme, the normalisation scheme and so
on, until a full set of input variables is available to compute
S c
R CI Rank ), ( .
7.2. Uncertainty analysis (UA)
Various components of the CI construction process can introduce uncertainty into the output
variables, ) (
c
CI Rank and
S
R . The UA is essentially based on simulations that are carried out on
various equations that constitute the underlying model. The uncertainties are transferred into a set of
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 119
scalar input factors, such that the resulting ) (
c
CI Rank and
S
R are nonlinear functions of the uncertain
input factors, and the estimated probability distribution (pdf) of ) (
c
CI Rank and
S
R . Various methods
are available for evaluating output uncertainty. The following is the Monte Carlo approach, which is
based on multiple evaluations of the model with k randomly selected model input factors. The
procedure has three steps:
 Assign a pdf to each input factor k i X
i
... 2 , 1 , = . The first input factor,
1
X , is used for the selection
of the editing scheme (for the second TAI analysis only):
1
X
Estimation of missing data
1 Use bivariate correlation to
impute missing data
2 Assign zero to missing
datum
The second input factor,
2
X , is the trigger to select the normalisation method.
2
X
Normalisation
1 MinMax (equation (35))
2 Standardisation (equation (36))
3 None (equation (37))
Both
1
X and
2
X are discrete random variables. In practice they are generated by drawing a random
number . , uniformly distributed between [0,1], and applying the socalled Russian roulette algorithm,
e.g. for
1
X , select 1 if ) 5 . 0 , 0 [ e . and 2 if ] 1 , 5 . 0 [ e . . Uncertain factor
3
X is generated to select
which individual indicator, if any, should be omitted.
.
3
X , excluded individual indicator
[0,
1
1
+ Q
)
None ( 0
3
= X ) all indicators
are used)
[
1
1
+ Q
,
1
2
+ Q
)
1
3
= X
… …
[
1 + Q
Q
,1]
Q X =
3
That is, with probability
1
1
+ Q
, no individual indicator will be excluded, while with probability [1
1
1
+ Q
], one of the Q individual indicators will be excluded with equal probability. Clearly, the
120 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
probability of 0
3
= X could have been made larger or smaller than
1
1
+ Q
and the values Q X ,... 2 , 1
3
=
could have been sampled with equal probability. A scatter plot based sensitivity analysis would be used
to track which indicator affects the output the most when excluded. Recall also that whenever an
indicator is excluded, the weights of the other factors are scaled to unity sum to make the composite
index comparable with either BAP or AHP. When BOD is selected the exclusion of individual indicators
leads to a reexecution of the optimisation algorithm.
Trigger
4
X is used to select the aggregation system:
4
X
Aggregation
Scheme
1 LIN
2 GME
3 NCMC
Note that when LIN is selected the composite indicators are computed as:
1
, ¯
=
=
Q
q
c q sq c
I w CI
(39)
while when GME is selected they are:
( )
1
, I
=
=
Q
q
w
c q c
sq
I CI
(40)
When NCMC is selected the countries are ranked directly from the outscoring matrix.
5
X is the trigger to select the weighting scheme:
5
X
Weighting
Scheme
1
BAP
2
AHP
3
BOD
The last uncertain factor,
6
X , is used to select the expert. In this experiment, there are 20 experts.
Once an expert has been selected at runtime via the trigger
6
X , the weights assigned by that expert
(either for the BAP or AHP schemes) are assigned to the data. Clearly the selection of the expert has no
bearing when BOD is used ( 3
5
= X ). However, this uncertain factor would be generated in each
individual Monte Carlo simulation, given that the row dimension of the Monte Carlo sample
(constructive dimension) should be fixed in a Monte Carlo experiment, i.e. even if some of the sampled
factors are active in a particular run, they will nevertheless be generated by the random sample
generation algorithm. The constructive dimension of the Monte Carlo experiment, the number of random
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 121
numbers to be generated for each trial, is hence 6 = k . Note that alternative arrangements of the analysis
would have been possible.
 Generate randomly N combinations of independent input factors
l
X , N l ,... 2 , 1 = (a set
l
k
l l l
X X X , ... , ,
2 1
= X of input factors is called a sample). For each trial sample
l
X the computational
model can be evaluated, generating values for the scalar output variable
l
Y , where
l
Y is either
) (
c
CI Rank , the value of the rank assigned by the composite indicator to each country, or
S
R , the
averaged shift in countries’ ranks.
. Close the loop over l, and analyse the resulting output vector Y
l
, with l = 1, ..., N.
The generation of samples can be performed using various procedures, such as simple random
sampling, stratified sampling, quasirandom sampling or others (Saltelli et al., 2008; Saltelli et al. 2004).
The sequence of Y
l
gives the pdf of the output Y. The characteristics of this pdf, such as the variance and
higher order moments, can be estimated with an arbitrary level of precision related to the size of the
simulation N .
7.3. Sensitivity analysis using variancebased techniques
A necessary step when designing a sensitivity analysis is to identify the output variables of interest.
Ideally these should be relevant to the issue addressed by the model. It has been noted earlier that
composite indicators may be considered as models. When several layers of uncertainty are present
simultaneously, a composite indicator could become a nonlinear, possibly nonadditive model. As
argued by practitioners (Chan et al., 2000; EPA, 2004; Saltelli et al., 2008), with nonlinear models,
robust, “modelfree” techniques should be used for sensitivity analysis. Sensitivity analysis using
variancebased techniques are modelfree and display additional properties convenient in the present
analysis, such as the following:
• They allow an exploration of the whole range of variation of the input factors, instead of just
sampling factors over a limited number of values, e.g. in fractional factorial design (Box et
al., 1978);
• They are quantitative, and can distinguish main effects (first order) from interaction effects
(higher order);
• They are easy to interpret and to explain;
• They allow for a sensitivity analysis whereby uncertain input factors are treated in groups
instead of individually;
• They can be justified in terms of rigorous settings for sensitivity analysis.
To compute a variancebased sensitivity measure for a given input factor
i
X , start from the
fractional contribution to the model output variance, i.e. the variance of Y , where Y is either a country’s
rank, ) (
c
CI Rank , or the overall shift in countries ranking with respect to a reference ranking,
S
R , due
to the uncertainty in
i
X :
122 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
)) ( (
i X i
X Y E V V
i i ÷
=
X (41)
Fix factor
i
X , e.g. to a specific value
*
i
x in its range, and compute the mean of the output Y
averaging over all factors but factor
i
X : ) (
*
i i
x X Y E
i
=
÷
X
. Then take the variance of the resulting
function of
*
i
x over all possible
*
i
x values. The result is given by equation (41) where the dependence on
*
i
x has been dropped.
i
V is a number between 0 (when
i
X does not make a contribution to Y at the first
order), and ( ) Y V , the unconditional variance of Y when all factors other than
i
X are noninfluential at
any order. Note that the following is always true:
) ( )) ( ( )) ( ( Y V X Y V E X Y E V
i X i X
i i i i
= +
÷ ÷
X X (42)
where the first term of equation (42) is called a main effect, and the second, the residual. An important
factor should have a small residual, e.g. a small value of )) ( (
i X
X Y V E
i i ÷
X
. This is intuitive as the
residual measures the expected reduction in variance that would be achieved if
i
X were fixed. Rewrite
this as ) (
*
i i
x X Y V
i
=
÷
X
, a variance conditional on
*
i
x . Then the residual )) ( (
i X
X Y V E
i i ÷
X
is the
expected value of such conditional variance, averaged over all possible values of
*
i
x . This would be
small if
i
X were influential. A firstorder sensitivity index is obtained through normalising the first
order term by the unconditional variance:
) ( ) (
)) ( (
Y V
V
Y V
X Y E V
S
i
i X
i
i i
= =
÷
X
(43)
One can compute conditional variances corresponding to more than one factor, e.g. for two factors
i
X and
j
X , the conditional variance would be )) , ( (
j i X X
X X Y E V
ij j i ÷
X
, and the variance contribution
of the secondorder term would become:
)) ( ( )) ( ( )) , ( (
j X i X j i X X ij
X Y E V X Y E V X X Y E V V
j j i i ij j i ÷ ÷ ÷
÷ ÷ =
X X X
(44)
where clearly
ij
V is different from zero only if )) , ( (
j i X X
X X Y E V
ij j i ÷
X
is larger than the sum of the first
order term relative to factors
i
X and
j
X .
When all k factors are independent from one another, the sensitivity indices can be computed using
the following decomposition formula for the total output variance V(Y):
k ... 12
i i j
i j
j l
ijl
i i j
ij
i
i
V ... V V V ) Y ( V + + + + =
¯¯¯ ¯¯ ¯
>
>
>
>
(45)
Terms above the first order in equation (45) are known as interactions. A model without interactions
among its input factors is said to be additive. In this case, ( )
¯
=
=
k
i
i
Y V V
1
,
¯
=
=
k
i
i
S
1
1 and the firstorder
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 123
conditional variances of equation (41) are all needed to decompose the model output variance. For a non
additive model, higher order sensitivity indices, responsible for interaction effects among sets of input
factors, have to be computed. However, higher order sensitivity indices are usually not estimated, since
in a model with k factors, the total number of indices (including the S
i
’s) to be estimated would be as
high as 1 2 ÷
k
. Instead a more compact sensitivity measure is used. The total effect sensitivity index
concentrates on a single term for all the interactions, involving a given factor X
i
. For example, for a
model of k=3 independent factors, the three total sensitivity indices would be:
123 13 12 1
3 2
1
) (
)) , ( ( ) (
1 3 2
S S S S
Y V
X X Y E V Y V
S
X X X
T
+ + + =
÷
= (46)
And analogously:
S
T2
=S
2
+S
12
+S
23
+S
123
S
T3
=S
3
+S
13
+S
23
+S
123
(47)
The conditional variance )) , ( (
3 2
1 3 2
X X Y E V
X X X
in equation (46) can be written in general terms as
)) ( (
i X
Y E V
i i
÷
÷
X
X
(Homma & Saltelli, 1996). This is the total contribution to the variance of Y due to
non
i
X , i.e. to the k1 remaining factors, such that )) ( ( ) (
i X
Y E V Y V
i i
÷
÷
÷ X
X
includes all terms. In
general, 1
1
> ¯
=
k
i
Ti
S .
The total effect sensitivity index can also be written as:
) (
)) ( (
) (
)) ( ( ) (
Y V
Y V E
Y V
Y E V Y V
S
i X i X
Ti
i i i i
÷ ÷
÷ ÷
=
÷
=
X X
X X
(48)
For a given factor X
i
a significant difference between S
Ti
and S
i
signals an important interaction role
for that factor in Y. Highlighting interactions among input factors helps to improve our understanding of
the model structure. Estimators for both (S
i
, S
Ti
) are provided by a variety of methods reviewed in Chan
et al., (2000). Here the method of Sobol’ (1993), in the improved version of Saltelli (2002), is used. The
method of Sobol’ uses quasirandom sampling of the input factors. The pair (S
i
, S
Ti
) gives a fairly good
description of the model sensitivities, which for the improved Sobol’ method is of n(k+2) model
evaluations, where n represents the sample size required to approximate the multidimensional
integration implicit in the E and V operators above to a plain sum. n can vary in the hundredto
thousand range.
When the uncertain input factors X
i
are dependent, the output variance cannot be decomposed, as in
equation (45) The
i
S ,
Ti
S indices, defined by (43) and (48) are still valid sensitivity measures for
i
X ,
though their interpretation has changed, e.g.
i
S could carry over the effects of other factors which may
be positively or negatively correlated to
i
X (see Saltelli & Tarantola, 2002), while
Ti
S can no longer be
meaningfully decomposed into main effect and interaction effects. The
i
S ,
Ti
S , in the case of non
independent input factors, could also be interpreted as “settings” for sensitivity analysis.
124 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
A description of two settings linked to
i
S ,
Ti
S is discussed below.
42
Factor Prioritisation (FP) Setting. Suppose a factor that, once “discovered” in its true value and
then fixed, would reduce V(Y) the most. The true values for the factors, however, are unknown. The best
choice would be the factor with the highest
i
S , regardless of whether the model is additive or the factors
are independent.
Factor Fixing (FF) Setting. Can one fix a factor [or a subset of input factors] at any given value
over their range of uncertainty without significantly reducing the variance of the output? Only those
(sets of) factors whose
Ti
S is zero can be fixed.
The extended variancebased methods, including the improved version of Sobol’, for both
dependent and independent input factors, are implemented in the freely distributed software SIMLAB
(Saltelli et al., 2004).
7.3.1. Analysis 1
The first analysis is run without imputation, i.e. by censoring all countries with missing data. As a
result, only 34 countries, in theory, may be analysed. Other countries from rank 24 onwards (in the
original TAI) are also dropped, e.g. Hong Kong, as this is the first country with missing data. The
analysis is restricted to the set of countries whose rank is not altered by the omission of missing records.
The uncertainty analysis for the remaining 23 countries is given in Figure 18 for the ranks, with countries
ordered by their original TAI position, ranging from Finland (rank=1) to Slovenia (rank=23). Note that
the choice of ranks, instead of composite indicator values, is dictated by the use of the NCMC
aggregation system.
The width of the 5
th
– 95
th
percentile bounds and the ordering of the medians (black hyphen) are
often at odds with the ordering of the original TAI (grey hyphen). For several countries, e.g. United
Kingdom or Belgium, the median rank is equal to the original TAI rank (overlap of black and grey
hyphen in Figure 18). Although the difference between the groups of leaders and laggards can still be
observed, there are considerable differences between the new and the original TAI. If the uncertainty
within the system were a true reflection of the status of knowledge and the (lack of) consensus among
experts on how TAI should be built, it would have to be concluded that TAI is not a robust measure of
countries’ technology achievement.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 125
Figure 18. Uncertainty analysis of TAI country rankings
0
5
1
0
1
5
2
0
2
5
F
i
n
l
a
n
d
U
n
i
t
e
d
S
t
a
t
e
s
S
w
e
d
e
n
J
a
p
a
n
K
o
r
e
a
,
R
e
p
.
o
f
N
e
t
h
e
r
l
a
n
d
s
U
n
i
t
e
d
K
i
n
g
d
o
m
C
a
n
a
d
a
A
u
s
t
r
a
l
i
a
S
i
n
g
a
p
o
r
e
G
e
r
m
a
n
y
N
o
r
w
a
y
I
r
e
l
a
n
d
B
e
l
g
i
u
m
N
e
w
Z
e
a
l
a
n
d
A
u
s
t
r
i
a
F
r
a
n
c
e
I
s
r
a
e
l
S
p
a
i
n
I
t
a
l
y
C
z
e
c
h
R
e
p
u
b
l
i
c
H
u
n
g
a
r
y
S
l
o
v
e
n
i
a
R
a
n
k
Note: Results show the country rankings according to the original TAI 2001 (light grey marks), the median (black mark) and the
corresponding 5
th
and 95
th
percentiles (bounds) of the distribution of the MCTAI for 23 countries. Uncertain input factors:
normalisation method, inclusion/exclusion of a individual indicator, aggregation system, weighting scheme, expert selection.
Countries are ordered according to the original TAI values.
Figure 19 shows the sensitivity analysis based on the firstorder indices. The total variance in each
country’s rank is presented along with the part that can be decomposed according to the firstorder
conditional variances. The aggregation system, followed by the inclusion/exclusion of individual
indicators and expert selection, is the most influential input factors. The countries with the highest total
variance in ranks are the middleofthetable countries, while the leaders and laggards in technology
achievement have low total variance. The nonadditive, nonlinear part of the variance that is not
explained by the firstorder sensitivity indices ranges from 35% for the Netherlands to 73% for the
United Kingdom, while for most countries it exceeds 50%. This underlines the necessity of computing
higher order sensitivity indices that capture the interaction effect among the input factors.
126 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
Figure 19. Sobol' sensitivity measures of firstorder TAI results
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
S
w
e
d
e
n
U
n
i
t
e
d
S
t
a
t
e
s
S
l
o
v
e
n
i
a
I
t
a
l
y
C
z
e
c
h
R
e
p
u
b
l
i
c
U
n
i
t
e
d
K
i
n
g
d
o
m
H
u
n
g
a
r
y
G
e
r
m
a
n
y
I
s
r
a
e
l
F
i
n
l
a
n
d
A
u
s
t
r
i
a
B
e
l
g
i
u
m
I
r
e
l
a
n
d
S
p
a
i
n
C
a
n
a
d
a
F
r
a
n
c
e
J
a
p
a
n
N
e
w
Z
e
a
l
a
n
d
N
e
t
h
e
r
l
a
n
d
s
A
u
s
t
r
a
l
i
a
N
o
r
w
a
y
S
i
n
g
a
p
o
r
e
K
o
r
e
a
,
R
e
p
.
o
f
V
a
r
i
a
n
c
e
o
f
c
o
u
n
t
r
y
r
a
n
k
Nonadditive
Expert selection
Weighting
Aggregation
Exclusion/Inclusion
Normalisation
Note: Results based on firstorder indices. Decomposition of country variance according to the firstorder conditional variances.
Aggregation system, followed by the inclusion/exclusion of individual indicator and expert selection, are the most influential input
factors. The part of the variance that is not explained by the firstorder indices is noted as nonadditive. Countries are ordered in
ascending order of total variance.
Figure 20 shows the total effect sensitivity indices for the variance of each country’s rank. The total
effect sensitivity indices concentrate on one single term for all the interactions involving each input
factor. The indices add up to a number greater than 1 due to the interactions which seem to exist among
the identified influential factors.
If the TAI model were additive with no interactions between the input factors, the nonadditive part
of the variance in Figure 19 would have been zero. In other words, the firstorder sensitivity indices
would have summed to 1, and the sum of the total effect sensitivity indices would have been 1. Yet the
sensitivity indices show the high degree of nonlinearity and additivity for the TAI model and the
importance of the interactions. The high effect of interactions for the Netherlands, which also has a large
percentile bound, is further explored. Figure 21 shows that the Netherlands is favoured by the
combination of “geometric mean system” with “BAP weighting”, and not favoured by the combination
of “Multicriteria system” with “AHP weighting”. This is a clear interaction effect. Indepth analysis of
the output data reveals that, as far as inclusion/exclusion is concerned, it is the exclusion of the individual
indicator royalties which leads to a deterioration in the Netherlands' rank under any aggregation system.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 127
Figure 20. Sobol' sensitivity measures of TAI total effect indices
0.0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
S
w
e
d
e
n
U
n
i
t
e
d
S
t
a
t
e
s
S
l
o
v
e
n
i
a
I
t
a
l
y
C
z
e
c
h
R
e
p
u
b
l
i
c
U
n
i
t
e
d
K
i
n
g
d
o
m
H
u
n
g
a
r
y
G
e
r
m
a
n
y
I
s
r
a
e
l
F
i
n
l
a
n
d
A
u
s
t
r
i
a
B
e
l
g
i
u
m
I
r
e
l
a
n
d
S
p
a
i
n
C
a
n
a
d
a
F
r
a
n
c
e
J
a
p
a
n
N
e
w
Z
e
a
l
a
n
d
N
e
t
h
e
r
l
a
n
d
s
A
u
s
t
r
a
l
i
a
N
o
r
w
a
y
S
i
n
g
a
p
o
r
e
K
o
r
e
a
,
R
e
p
.
o
f
T
o
t
a
l
e
f
f
e
c
t
s
e
n
s
i
t
i
v
i
t
y
i
n
d
e
x
Expert selection
Weighting
Aggregation
Exclusion/Inclusion
Normalisation
Figure 21. Netherlands' ranking by aggregation and weighting systems
Rank in [49]
Rank in [1015]
Rank in [1623]
Linear Aggregation Geometric mean Multicriteria
B
A
P
A
H
P
B
o
D
8
11
8
8
6
16
13
128 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
Figure 22 shows the histogram of values for the average shift in the rank of the output variable
(equation (38)) with respect to the original TAI rank. The mean value is almost three positions, with a
standard deviation slightly above one position. The input factors – the aggregation system plus
inclusion/exclusion at the first order – affect this variable the most (Table 39). When the interactions are
considered, both weighting scheme and expert choice become important. This effect can be seen in
Figure 23. In some cases the average shift in country’s rank when using NCMC can be as great as nine
places.
Table 39. Sobol' sensitivity measures of first order and total effects on TAI results
Input Factors
First order (
i
S ) Total effect (
i
T
S )
i T
S S
i
÷
Normalisation 0.000 0.008 0.008
Exclusion/Inclusion of an indicator 0.148 0.435 0.286
Aggregation system 0.245 0.425 0.180
Weighting Scheme 0.038 0.327 0.288
Expert selection 0.068 0.402 0.334
Sum 0.499 1.597
Note: Average shift in countries’ rank with respect to the original TAI. Significant values are underlined.
Figure 22. Uncertainty analysis for TAI output variable
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
0.5 1.5 2.5 3.5 4.5 5.5 6.5 7.5 8.5 9.5
Average shift in countries' rank with respect to the original TAI
F
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y
o
f
o
c
c
u
r
e
n
c
e
Note: Average shift in countries’ ranks with respect to the original TAI. Uncertain input factors: normalisation method, inclusion
exclusion of an indicator, aggregation system, weighting scheme, expert selection.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 129
Figure 23. Average shift in TAI country rankings by aggregation and weighting combinations
Shift less than 3 places
Shift greater than 3 places
Linear Aggregation Geometric mean Multicriteria
B
A
P
A
H
P
B
o
D
2.01
2.44
1.59
2.86
2.87
3.85
3.44
Note: Average shift in countries’ rank with respect to the original TAI for different combinations of aggregation system and
weighting scheme. Average value per case is indicated in the box.
7.3.2. Analysis 2
In this analysis it is assumed that the TAI stakeholders have agreed on a linear aggregation system.
In fact, it might be argued that the choice of the aggregation system is to some extent dictated by the use
of the index and by the expectation of its stakeholders. For instance, if stakeholders believe that the
system should be noncompensatory, NCMC would be adopted. Eventually, this would lead on average
to a mediumtogood performance, which is worth more to a country than a performance which is very
good on some individual indicators and bad in others. A GME approach would follow the progress of the
index over time in a scaleindependent fashion.
Given these considerations, the second analysis is based on the LIN system, as in the original TAI.
The uncertainty analysis plot (Figure 24) shows much more robust behaviour in the index, with fewer
inversions of rankings, when medianTAI and original TAI are compared. With regard to sensitivity, the
uncertainty arising from imputation does not seem to make a significant contribution to the output
uncertainties, which are also dominated by weighting, inclusion/exclusion and expert selection. Even
when, as in the case of Malaysia, imputation by bivariate approach leads to an unrealistic number of
patents being imputed for this country (234 patents granted to residents per million people), the
uncertainty in its rank is still insensitive to imputation. The sensitivity analysis results for the average
shift in rank output variable (equation (38)) is shown in Table 40. Interactions are now between expert
selection and weighting, and considerably less with inclusion/exclusion.
130 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
Figure 24. Uncertainty analysis of TAI country rankings
0
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
6
0
7
0
F
i
n
l
a
n
d
U
n
i
t
e
d
S
t
a
t
e
s
S
w
e
d
e
n
J
a
p
a
n
K
o
r
e
a
N
e
t
h
e
r
l
a
n
d
s
U
n
i
t
e
d
K
i
n
g
d
o
m
C
a
n
a
d
a
A
u
s
t
r
a
l
i
a
S
i
n
g
a
p
o
r
e
G
e
r
m
a
n
y
N
o
r
w
a
y
I
r
e
l
a
n
d
B
e
l
g
i
u
m
N
e
w
Z
e
a
l
a
n
d
A
u
s
t
r
i
a
F
r
a
n
c
e
I
s
r
a
e
l
S
p
a
i
n
I
t
a
l
y
C
z
e
c
h
R
e
p
u
b
l
i
c
H
u
n
g
a
r
y
S
l
o
v
e
n
i
a
H
o
n
g
K
o
n
g
S
l
o
v
a
k
i
a
G
r
e
e
c
e
P
o
r
t
u
g
a
l
B
u
l
g
a
r
i
a
P
o
l
a
n
d
M
a
l
a
y
s
i
a
C
r
o
a
t
i
a
M
e
x
i
c
o
C
y
p
r
u
s
A
r
g
e
n
t
i
n
a
R
o
m
a
n
i
a
C
o
s
t
a
R
i
c
a
R
a
n
k
0
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
6
0
7
0
C
h
i
l
e
U
r
u
g
u
a
y
S
o
u
t
h
A
f
r
i
c
a
T
h
a
i
l
a
n
d
T
r
i
n
i
d
a
d
a
n
d
T
o
b
a
g
o
P
a
n
a
m
a
B
r
a
z
i
l
P
h
i
l
i
p
p
i
n
e
s
C
h
i
n
a
B
o
l
i
v
i
a
C
o
l
o
m
b
i
a
P
e
r
u
J
a
m
a
i
c
a
I
r
a
n
T
u
n
i
s
i
a
P
a
r
a
g
u
a
y
E
c
u
a
d
o
r
E
l
S
a
l
v
a
d
o
r
D
o
m
i
n
i
c
a
n
R
e
p
u
b
l
i
c
S
y
r
i
a
n
A
r
a
b
R
e
p
u
b
l
i
c
E
g
y
p
t
A
l
g
e
r
i
a
Z
i
m
b
a
b
w
e
I
n
d
o
n
e
s
i
a
H
o
n
d
u
r
a
s
S
r
i
L
a
n
k
a
I
n
d
i
a
N
i
c
a
r
a
g
u
a
P
a
k
i
s
t
a
n
S
e
n
e
g
a
l
G
h
a
n
a
K
e
n
y
a
N
e
p
a
l
T
a
n
z
a
n
i
a
S
u
d
a
n
M
o
z
a
m
b
i
q
u
e
R
a
n
k
Note: Uncertainty analysis results showing country ranks according to the original TAI 2001 (light grey marks), the median (black
mark) and the corresponding 5th and 95th percentiles (bounds) of the distribution of the MCTAI for 72 countries. Uncertain input
factors: imputation, normalisation method, inclusion/exclusion of an individual indicator, weighting scheme, expert selection. A
linear aggregation system is used. Countries are ordered according to the original TAI values.
Table 40. Sobol' sensitivity measures and average shift in TAI rankings
Input Factors
First order (
i
S ) Total effect (
i
T
S )
i T
S S
i
÷
Imputation 0.001 0.005 0.004
Normalisation 0.000 0.021 0.021
Exclusion/Inclusion of an indicator 0.135 0.214 0.078
Weighting Scheme 0.212 0.623 0.410
Expert selection 0.202 0.592 0.390
Sum 0.550 1.453
Note: Significant values are underlined.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 131
The use of one strategy versus another in indicator building might lead to a biased picture of country
performance, depending on the severity of the uncertainties. As shown by the preceding analyses, if the
constructors of the index disagree on the aggregation system, it is highly unlikely that a robust index will
emerge. If uncertainties exist in the context of a wellestablished theoretical framework, e.g. if a
participatory approach within a linear aggregation scheme is favoured, the resulting country rankings
could be fairly robust in spite of the uncertainties.
Neither imputation nor normalisation significantly affect countries’ rankings when uncertainties of
higher order are present. In the current setup, the uncertainties of higher order are expert selection and
weighting scheme (second analysis). A fortiori normalisation does not affect output when the very
aggregation system is uncertain (first analysis). In other words, when the weights are uncertain, it is
unlikely that normalisation and editing will affect the country ranks.
The aggregation system is of paramount importance. It is recommended that indicator developers
agree on a common approach. Once the system is fixed, it is the choice of aggregation methods and of
experts which – together with indicator inclusion/exclusion – dominate the uncertainty in the country
ranks. However, note that even in the second analysis, when the aggregation system is fixed, the
composite indicator model is strongly nonadditive, which reinforces the case for the use of the
quantitative, Monte Carlo based approach to robustness analysis.
132 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
STEP 8. BACK TO THE DETAILS
Establishing a relationship between cause and effect is notoriously difficult; the widely accepted
statement “correlation does not mean causality” has to be borne in mind. Practically, however, in the
absence of a genuine theory on “what causes what”, the correlation structure of the data set can be of
some help in at least excluding causal relationships between variables (but not necessarily between the
theoretical constructs of which the variable is a manifestation). However, a distinction should be made
between spatial data (as in the case of TAI) and data which also have a time dimension (e.g. GDP of EU
countries from 1970 to 2005). In this latter case causality can be tested using tools such as the Granger
test (see e.g. Greene, 2002). The case of spatial data is more complicated, but tools such as Path Analysis
and Bayesian Networks (the probabilistic version of path analysis) could be of some help in studying the
many possible causal structures and removing those which are strongly incompatible with the observed
correlations.
Path analysis, conceived by the biologist S. Wright in the 1920s, is an extension of regression
analysis in which many endogenous and exogenous variables can be analysed simultaneously (Wright,
1934). Consider the following example in Figure 25. Variables A and B have a direct effect on variable
D. Variable B also has a direct effect on variable C, which in turn has a direct effect on D. Therefore the
effect of B on D is caused directly by B but also by the effect of B on C.
AD
p is the path coefficient
relating A to D whereas
BA
r is the correlation coefficient of the pair of variables A, B (see Box 7 for a
definition of correlation coefficient).
Path analysis consists in a set of multiple regressions. In this case the equations to estimate would
be:
2
1
c
c
+ =
+ + + =
B p C
C p B p A p D
BC
CD BD AD
Therefore, the standardized regression coefficients emerging from this estimation (i.e. the
coefficients of the model in which the variables are expressed as zscores) will be used as path
coefficients. The total effect of A on D will be the sum of the direct effect represented by the path
coefficient relating A to D and of the indirect effect through its correlation with B:
) (
BD BA AD AD
p r p r + = . A high value of
AD
r corroborates the relationship between A and D, whereas a
low value would point to the absence of a linear relationship (at least as far the data analysed are
concerned). Note that the arrows in a path analysis reflect an hypothesis about causality. However, the
resulting path coefficients or correlations only reflect the pattern of correlation found in the data. Path
analysis cannot be used to infer causality, given its confirmatory nature: the causal relationship has to be
modelled in advance.
43
In other terms, path analysis cannot tell us which of two distinct path diagrams is
to be preferred, whether the correlation between A and B represents a causal effect of A on B, of B on A,
or mutual dependence on another variable C, or some mixture of these. This technique is based on a
number of assumptions (those usually made in regression analysis), including: (i) the linearity of the
relationship between variables; (ii) the absence of interaction effects between variables (called additivity,
see also the preferential independence of the multicriteria methodology); (iii) recursivity (all arrows
flow one way with no feedback looping); and (iv) an adequate sample size (Kline, 1998, recommends 10
to 20 times as many cases as parameters to estimate). For a comprehensive list see Pedhazur (1982); the
seminal article on path analysis is Wright (1934).
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 133
Figure 25. Simple example of path analysis
A
C
B
D
rBA
pAD
pBC
pBD
PCD
The standardised regression coefficients (beta values) for the TAI example reveal that Internet and
patents have by far the strongest influence on the variance in the TAI scores (beta > 0.35), followed by
royalties, university, exports and schooling (Figure 26). Two indicators, telephones and electricity,
appear not to be influential on the variance in the TAI scores.
Figure 26. Standardised regression coefficients for the TAI
LOG_TELEPHONE
LOG_ELECTRICITY
SCHOOLING
EXPORTS
UNIVERSITY
RECEIPTS
PATENTS
INTERNET
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
All standardised regression coefficients are significant (p<0.01, R
2
= 0.9996, n = 23)
134 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
Table 41. Impact of eliminating two indicators from the TAI example
TAI
(Original,
8 indicators)
TAI 6
(Excluding telephones and electricity)
Absolute Difference
(TAITAI6)
Finland 1 1 0
United States 2 2 0
Sweden 3 3 0
Japan 4 4 0
Korea 5 5 0
Netherlands 6 6 0
United Kingdom 7 7 0
Canada 8 9 1
Australia 9 10 1
Singapore 10 8 2
Germany 11 11 0
Norway 12 12 0
Ireland 13 13 0
Belgium 14 14 0
New Zealand 15 15 0
Austria 16 16 0
France 17 17 0
Israel 18 18 0
Spain 19 19 0
Italy 20 22 2
Czech Republic 21 21 0
Hungary 22 20 2
Slovenia 23 23 0
To test the implications of these findings, one could exclude the two least influential indicators from
the TAI data set. Even in this scenario, TAI6, the indicators are weighted equally. Table 41 shows that
the TAI6 version, which excludes telephones and electricity, produces a ranking that is identical to the
original TAI for 18 of the 23 countries. Minor shifts are observed for Canada, Australia (1 position shift)
and Singapore, Italy and Hungary (2 positions). Thereafter, in a parsimonious approach, the indicators on
telephones and electricity would be excluded, as they do not have an impact on either the variance of the
TAI scores or on the TAI ranking.
Although this type of analysis cannot determine the TAI’s capacity to capture the concept of
technological achievement, it is fair to say that the TAI encompasses distinct and important dimensions.
However, not every indicator adds a crucial component to the index, which is reflected in the inferiority
of the indicator telephones and electricity, while others (e.g. Internet and patents) are highly influential
on the variance of the TAI scores. The path analysis results, based on the standardised regression
coefficients and the bivariate correlations between the indicators as explained above, are shown in
Table 42.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 135
Table 42. Path analysis results for TAI: total effect impact of the indicators on the TAI scores
Patents 13.5%
Royalties 16.2%
Internet 13.9%
Tech exports 6.1%
Telephones (logarithm) 15.8%
Electricity (logarithm) 10.6%
Schooling 13.1%
University 10.8%
There appears to be no dominance issue in the TAI example, as seven of the eight indicators
contribute more than 10% each to the overall TAI scores. The indicator on exports makes the smallest
contribution (6.1%). Yet this indicator was found to be influential on the variance of the TAI scores.
In the 1970s factor analysis and latent variables enriched path analysis, giving rise to the field of
Structural Equation Modelling (SEM, see Kline, 1998). SEM is an extension of the general linear
model that simultaneously estimates relationships between multiple independent, dependent and latent
variables. The idea is again that interrelations in a set of linear relationships can be examined using the
variance and covariance of the variables, but the advantages of SEM are its generality (it includes path
analysis and multivariate regression as special cases) and the possibility of including latent variables or
factors as nodes. This is particularly useful when working with composite indicators, given that in most
cases the available indicators only imperfectly measure theoretical concepts.
In the Composite Learning Index developed by the Canadian Council of Learning (http://www.ccl
cca.ca/CCL/Reports/CLI/), for example, the social and economic benefits of learning are considered a
latent variable since they can be only imperfectly measured by indicators such as crime rate, population
health or unemployment rate. SEM combines measurement and regression techniques. Measurement
techniques such as factor analysis and item response theory are used to relate latent variables to the
observed indicators (the measurement model), whereas regression techniques are used to relate
indicators. In the Composite Learning Index the aggregation of subindices into a composite and the
dependence of socioeconomic benefits on learning is captured by the multivariate regression, whereas
the disaggregation of learning into socialeconomic outcomes takes the form of a measurement model.
Note that this complex architecture is used to estimate (recursively) the weights used to compute the
Composite Learning Index. More generally, SEM can be viewed as a confirmatory procedure making it
possible to (i) determine that the pattern of covariances in the data is consistent with the model specified;
(ii) specify and test alternative models and determine which has the best fit; (iii) use SEM results to
change the structure of the model. However, as David Garson has remarked: “Regardless of the
approach, SEM cannot itself draw causal arrows in models or resolve causal ambiguities”.
44
Bayesian networks can also give some indication of which path diagram is more likely to be
supported by the data. Bayesian networks are graphical models encoding probabilistic relationships
between variables. Nodes (A, B, C and D in our example above) are not restricted to random variables
(as in path analysis) and can represent any kind of variable: a measured parameter or a latent variable.
If SEM stems from the classical (or frequentist) approach based on sampling distributions, Bayesian
networks rely on a subjective concept of probability. The prior density function of the graph reflects the
odds the analyst would give to the structure of nodes and arrows. The prior distribution, when combined
with the data via Bayes’ theorem, produces a posterior distribution. This posterior, in short a weighted
average of the prior density and of the conditional density (conditional on the data), is the output of
136 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
Bayesian analysis. (Note that the output of classical analysis is rather a point estimate.) Bayesian
networks can be used for several purposes: (i) to explore all possible combinations of a given set of
nodes in order to find the most likely structure; (ii) to see how the different evidence (the data available)
modifies the probability of each given node; (iii) to lean the probability distribution of the parameters of
the model, given the graph structure, the use of Bayesian networks is becoming increasingly common in
bioinformatics, artificial intelligence and decisionsupport systems;
45
however, their theoretical
complexity and the amount of computer power required to perform relatively simple graph searches
make them difficult to implement in a convenient manner.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 137
CONCLUDING REMARKS
COMPOSITE INDICATORS: BETWEEN NARRATIVE AND ANALYSIS
The construction of a composite indicator is not a straightforward process. It involves assumptions
which have to be assessed carefully to avoid resulting in a product of dubious analytic rigour.
In the present work an attempt has been made to map the effect of each assumption on the quality of
the aggregation, and to draft a stylised “checklist” for the practitioner to follow in the construction
process. We have emphasised the need for an explicit conceptual framework for the index and the
usefulness of multivariate analysis prior to the aggregation of the individual indicators. Also reviewed
were the tools available for imputation of missing observations, the methodologies for weighting and
aggregation, and the testing of the robustness of the composite using uncertainty and sensitivity analysis.
The present work is perhaps timely, as it seems to respond to an increasing interest in these measures.
The table below shows the number of hits obtained by searching for “composite indicators” through
Google (taken here as a proxy of overall diffusion of the concept) and Scholar Google (taken as a proxy
of academic interest).
Google Scholar Google
October 2005 ~ 35,500 992
June 2006 ~ 80,800 1,440
September 2007 ~ 2 million 167,000
We alluded in the introduction to the controversy surrounding the use of these measures, pitting
aggregators against nonaggregators. The authors of this Handbook believe that individual variables and
quantitative analyses (e.g. costbenefit, multicriteria) might be more relevant than aggregate measures
for policy formulation, while an aggregate index might be useful to make a argument for action, e.g.
positioning relation to the relative performance of a country, when this is of use in political discourse.
Distilling the “pros” described in Section I to their essence, it might be argued that the construction of
CIs is driven by the need for advocacy, for which the rationale can mainly be identified in the generation
of narratives to support the subject of the advocacy (Saltelli, 2007). As pointed out in The Financial
Times: “[…] Economists are often accused, justly, of thinking that what cannot be counted does not
count. In this case [the construction of CIs], economists are trying to count what  many would say 
cannot be counted. The alternatives, however, are worse. Either we ignore this fact or we make
subjective guesses.” (12 July, 2007).
At the same time, there is abundant literature on the analytic problems associated with even well
established statistical indices such as GDP, which we do not review here (see Rifkin, 2004, p.70 and
following, for a discussion). This literature hardly seems to dent the rather universal acceptance of GDP.
This suggests that a given constituency may come to accept an aggregate measure (and reach
compromise on weighting) on an index to be used to benchmark best practice, but such acceptance
cannot be taken for granted. On the other hand, a composite indicator of countries’ scholastic
achievement or competitiveness, such as the OECD’s PISA (2004) or the World Economic Forum’s
138 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
World Competitiveness Index, may lead to a valuable soulsearching exercise within constituencies of
countries, even if disagreement exists over the measures themselves.
On the same grounds a composite indicator may prove unfit to further a given cause. If a composite
indicator were to exacerbate disagreement among stakeholders, who would otherwise have been willing
to accept a scoreboard, i.e. an unaggregated list of the same variables, then there would be little point in
insisting on aggregation.
Acknowledging the limitations of composite indicators but focusing on their potentiality, Mahbub ul
Haq (the pioneer of the Human Development Index) states that “For any useful policy index, some
compromises must be made.” (Haq, 1995, p. 59). When questioned on the data reliability/quality of the
HDI, Haq said that it should be used to improve data quality, rather than to abandon the exercise. In fact,
all the debate on development and public policy and media attention would not have been possible if the
idea had been aborted at the level of indicators, without progressing to a composite indicator. The HDI
estimates and ranking have persuaded many countries to invest more resources and effort in preparing
better statistical series.
The point of these considerations is that subjectivity and fitness need not be antithetical. They are in
fact both at play when constructing and adopting a composite indicator, where intersubjectivity may be
at the core of the exercise, such as when participative approaches to weight negotiations are adopted.
Thus these apparently conflicting properties might underpin the suitability of CIs for advocacy purposes.
This is perhaps the opinion of Mario Monti, the former EU Commissioner for Competition, who, in
describing the internal market scoreboard and indices developed by the European Commission, notes:
[…] it is a pity that attempts to use even comparatively bland measures  such as the “naming and
shaming” of laggards  have been dropped. In other areas, such as the implementation of singlemarket
legislation or stateaid controls, “scoreboards” have played a useful role in bringing peer pressure to bear
on national decisionmakers. (Monti, 2005)
While the interplay between composite indicators and narratives is clear, the usefulness of
composite indicators for analytic purposes should not be discounted. To illustrate, Sapir (2005), in
making the case for a taxonomy of EU economic models among Mediterranean, Nordic, AngloSaxon
and Continental, makes use of a plot of “strictness of employment protection legislation” (a composite),
versus unemployment benefits. Similarly, Nicoletti and others make use of factor analysis in the analysis
of, for example, product market regulation in OECD countries (Nicoletti et al., 2000). Another example
can be found in the work of Amartya Sen. Sen was initially opposed to composite indicators but was
eventually convinced by their ability to represent his concept of ‘Capabilities’ (‘the range of things that a
person could do and be in her life,’ Sen, 1989) in the UN Human Development Index.
It might be contended that we are witnessing an growing appetite in the economically literate press
for statisticbased narratives. The media coverage of events such as the publishing of the World
Economic Forum’s World Competitiveness Index and Environmental Sustainability Index, the OECD’s
PISA study, not to mention more specialised measures such as Transparency International’s Corruption
Index or the Center for Global Development’s Commitment to Development Index, among many others,
is evidently on the rise (see also the table above). A telling remark along these lines comes from from
PisaniFerry and Sapir:
[…] civil societies learn from the experience of others. Such policy learning can be enhanced by initiatives
that facilitate cross country comparison and benchmarking. A telling example in this respect is […] PISA.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 139
[…] peer pressure and benchmarking should be integral parts of the political process that underpins Lisbon 2.
Transparency benefits the democratic process as it empowers national electorates to review the performance
of their own governments and it helps focus the debate on key areas of underperformance. The use of league
tables facilitates this process.
It is also evident that analysisbased narratives such as those supported by composite indicators
would gain in effectiveness if citizens’ statistical and economic literacy could be increased. Amartya Sen
remarks that:
[…] the ability to exercise freedom may, to a considerable extent, be directly dependent on the education we
have received, and thus the development of the educational sector may have foundational connections with the
capabilitybased approach.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 141
REFERENCES
Anderberg M.R. (1973), Cluster Analysis for Applications, New York: Academic Press, Inc.
Arrow K.J. (1963), Social choice and individual values, 2nd edition, Wiley, New York.
Arrow K.J. and Raynaud H. (1986), Social choice and multicriterion decision making, M.I.T. Press,
Cambridge.
Bandura R. (2006), A Survey of Composite Indices Measuring Country Performance: 2006 Update,
United Nations Development Programme – Office of Development Studies, available at
http://www.thenewpublicfinance.org/background/Measuring%20country%20performance_nov200
6%20update.pdf
Binder D.A. (1978), Bayesian Cluster Analysis, Biometrika, 65: 3138.
Borda J.C. de (1784), Mémoire sur les élections au scrutin, in Histoire de l’ Académie Royale des
Sciences, Paris.
Boscarino J.A., Figley C.R., and Adams R.E. (2004), Compassion Fatigue following the September 11
Terrorist Attacks: A Study of Secondary Trauma among New York City Social Workers,
International Journal of Emergency Mental Health, Vol. 6, 2: 110.
Box G., Hunter W. and Hunter J. (1978), Statistics for experimenters, New York: John Wiley and Sons.
Brand D.A., Saisana M., Rynn L.A., Pennoni F., Lowenfels A.B. (2007), Comparative Analysis of
Alcohol Control Policies in 30 Countries, PLoS Medicine, 0759 April 2007, Vol. 4, 4, e151:
07520759, www.plosmedicine.org
Bryant F.B., and Yarnold P.R. (1995), Principal components analysis and exploratory and confirmatory
factor analysis. In Grimm and Yarnold, Reading and understanding multivariate analysis.
American Psychological Association Books.
Center for Global Development’s Commitment to development index, http://www.cgdev.org/
Chan K., Tarantola S., Saltelli A. and Sobol' I.M. (2000), Variance based methods. In Sensitivity Analysis
(eds, Saltelli A., Chan K., Scott M.) 167197. New York: John Wiley & Sons.
Chantala K, Suchindran C., (2003) Multiple Imputation for Missing Data. SAS OnlineDocTM:
Version 8.
Charnes A., Cooper W.W., Lewin A.Y., and Seiford L.M. (1995), Data Envelopment Analysis: Theory,
Methodology and Applications. Boston:Kluwer.
142 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
Chatfield, C., Collins, A.J. (1980), Introduction to Multivariate Analysis, Chapman and Hall.
Cherchye L. (2001), Using data envelopment analysis to assess macroeconomic policy performance,
Applied Economics, 33: 407416
Cherchye L. and Kuosmanen T. (2002), Benchmarking sustainable development: a synthetic metaindex
approach, EconWPA Working Papers.
Cherchye, L., Moesen W. and Van Puyenbroeck T. (2004), Legitimately Diverse, Yet Comparable: on
Synthesising Social Inclusion Performance in the EU, Journal of Common Market Studies, 42:
919955.
Cherchye, L., Moesen, W., Rogge, N., van Puyenbroeck, T., Saisana, M., Saltelli, A., Liska, R.,
Tarantola, S. (2008), Creating composite indicators with DEA and robustness analysis: the case of
the Technology Achievement Index, Journal of the Operational Research Society, 59, 239251.
Condorcet, Marquis de (1785), Essai sur l’application de l’analyse à la probabilité des décisions rendues
à la probabilité des voix, De l’ Imprimerie Royale, Paris.
Cortina J.M. (1993), What is coefficient alpha? An examination of theory and applications, Journal of
Applied Psychology, 78, 1: 98104
Cronbach L. J. (1951), Coefficient alpha and the internal structure of tests, Psychometrika, 16: 297334.
Davis J. (1986), Statistics and Data Analysis in Geology, John Wiley & Sons, Toronto.
Debreu G. (1960), Topological methods in cardinal utility theory, in Arrow K.J., Karlin S. and Suppes P.
(eds.) Mathematical methods in social sciences, Stanford University Press, Stanford.
Dempster A.P. and Rubin D.B. (1983), Introduction (pp.310), in Incomplete Data in Sample Surveys
(vol. 2): Theory and Bibliography (Madow W.G., Olkin I. and Rubin D.B., eds.) New York:
Academic Press.
De Soete, G., Heiser, W.J. (1993), A latent class unfolding model for analyzing single stimulus
preference ratings. Psychometrika 58, 545565.
Dietz F.J. and van der Straaten J. (1992), Rethinking environmental economics: missing links between
economic theory and environmental policy, Journal of Economic Issues, Vol. XXVI,1: 2751.
Dunteman G.H. (1989), Principal components analysis, Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications,
Quantitative Applications in the Social Sciences Series, No. 69.
Ebert U. and Welsch H. (2004), Meaningful environmental indices: a social choice approach, Journal of
Environmental Economics and Management, Vol. 47: 270283.
Efron, B. (1987), Better bootstrap confidence intervals (with discussion). J. Amer. Statist. Assoc. 82,
171200.
Efron, B., Tibshirani, R. (1991), Statistical data analysis in the computer age. Science 253, 390395.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 143
Efron, B., Tibshirani, R. (1993), An Introduction to the Bootstrap, CHAPMAN & HALL/CRC, Boca
Raton
EPA, Environmental Protection Agency (2004), Council for Regulatory Environmental Modeling
(CREM), “Draft Guidance on the Development, Evaluation, and Application of Regulatory
Environmental Models”,
http://www.epa.gov/osp/crem/library/CREM%20Guidance%20Draft%2012_03.pdf.
European Commission (2000), Business Climate Indicator, DG ECFIN, Brussels.
European Commission (2001a), Summary Innovation Index, DG ENTR, Brussels.
European Commission (2001b), Internal Market Scoreboard, DG MARKT, Brussels.
European Commission (2001c), European Innovation Scoreboard, DG ENTR, Brussels.
European Commission (2004a), Economic Sentiment Indicator, DG ECFIN, Brussels,
http://europa.eu.int/comm/economy_finance/index_en.htm
European Commission (2004b), Composite Indicator on ebusiness readiness, DG JRC, Brussels.
Everitt B.S. (1979), Unresolved Problems in Cluster Analysis, Biometrics, 35: 169181.
Fagerberg J. (2001), in Lundvall B. and Archibugi D. (eds.) Europe at the crossroads: The challenge
from innovationbased growth in the Globalising Learning Economy, Oxford Press.
Feldt L.S., Woodruffe D.J., and Salih F.A. (1987), Statistical Inference for Coefficient Alpha, Applied
Psychological Measurement, 11,1: 93103.
Fishburn P.C. (1973), The theory of social choice, Princeton University Press, Princeton.
Fishburn P.C. (1984), Discrete mathematics in voting and group choice, SIAM Journal of Algebraic and
Discrete Methods, 5: 263275.
Forman E.H. (1983), The analytic hierarchy process as a decision support system, Proceedings of the
IEEE Computer society.
Freudenberg M. (2003), Composite indicators of country performance: a critical assessment, OECD,
Paris.
FukudaParr K.S. (2003) Readings in Human Development. Oxford University Press, Oxford.
Funtowicz S.O., Munda G., Paruccini M. (1990), The aggregation of environmental data using
multicriteria methods, Environmetrics, Vol. 1(4): 35336.
Gall M. (2007) Indices of social vulnerability to natural hazards: A comparative evaluation, PhD
dissertation, Department of Geography, University of South Carolina.
Gentle J.E.; Härdle W. and Mori, Yuichi (eds.) (2004): Handbook of Computational Statistics: Concepts
and Methods, Springer.
144 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
Golub G.H. and van der Vorst, H.A. (2000), Eigenvalue computation in the 20th century, Journal of
Computational and Applied Mathematics, Vol. 123 (12).
Gorsuch R. L. (1983), Factor Analysis. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. Orig. ed. 1974.
Green S.B., Lissitz R.W., and Mulaik S.A.(1977), Limitations of coefficient alpha as an index of test
unidimensionality, Educational and Psychological Measurement, 37: 827838.
Green P.E., and Srinivasan V. (1978), Conjoint analysis in consumer research: issues and outlook,
Journal of Consumer Research 5: 103123.
Greenacre, M. J., (1984), Theory and applications of correspondence analysis. Academic Press, London.
Greenacre, M.J., (1993), Correspondence analysis in practice, Academic Press, London.
Greene, William H. (2002), Econometric Analysis, Prentice Hall, 5
th
Edition.
Hair J.F., Anderson R.E., Tatham R.L., and Black W.C. (1995), Multivariate data analysis with
readings, fourth ed. Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ.
Hair J.F., Black W.C., B.J., Babin, Anderson R.E. and R.L.,Tatham (2006), Multivariate data analysis,
sixth edition, Pearson Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River, NJ.
Haq M. (1995), Reflections on Human Development, Oxford University Press, New York.
Hartigan J.A. (1975), Clustering Algorithms, New York: John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
Hatcher L. (1994), A stepbystep approach to using the SAS system for factor analysis and structural
equation modeling. Cary, NC: SAS Institute. Focus on the CALIS procedure.
Hattie J. (1985), Methodology Review: Assessing unidimensionality of tests and items, Applied
Psychological Measurement, 9, 2: 139164.
Heiser, W.J. (1993), Clustering in lowdimensional space. In: Opitz, O., Lausen, B. and Klar, R., Editors,
1993. Information and Classification., Springer, Berlin, 162173.
Homma T. and Saltelli A. (1996), Importance measures in global sensitivity analysis of model output,
Reliability Engineering and System Safety, 52(1), 117.
Hutcheson G. and Sofroniou N.(1999), The multivariate social scientist: Introductory statistics using
generalized linear models, Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications.
Jackson, D.A. (1993), Stopping rules in principal component analysis a comparison of heuristical and
statistical approaches, Ecology 74 (1993), 2204–2214.
Jacobs R., Smith P. and Goddard M. (2004), Measuring performance: an examination of composite
performance indicators, Centre for Health Economics, Technical Paper Series 29.
Jencks S.F., Huff E.D. and Cuerdon T. (2003), Change in the quality of care delivered to Medicare
beneficiaries, 19981999 to 20002001, Journal of the American Medical Association, 289(3):
30512.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 145
Johnson R., Wichern D.W., (2002), Applied Multivariate Statistical Analysis, 5
th
edition, Prentice Hall.
Jolliffe I.T. (1986), Principal component analysis. New York: Springer.
Kahn J.R and Maynard P. (1995), Conjoint Analysis as a Method of Measuring Use and NonUse Values
of Environmental Goods, paper presented at the American Economic Association.
Kahn J.R (1998), Methods for aggregating performance indicators, mimeo, University of Tennessee.
Kaiser H.F. and J. Rice,(1974), Little jiffy, mark IV, Educational and Psychological Measurement 34,
111117.
Karlsson J. (1998), A systematic approach for prioritizing software requirements, PhD. Dissertation
n. 526, Linkoping, Sverige.
Kaufmann D., Kraay A., and ZoidoLobatón P. (1999), Aggregating Governance Indicators, Policy
Research Working Papers, World Bank,
http://www.worldbank.org/wbi/governance/working_papers.html
Kaufmann D., Kraay A., and ZoidoLobatón P. (2003), Governance matters III: governance Indicators
for 19962002, mimeo, World Bank.
Keeney R. and Raiffa H. (1976), Decision with multiple objectives: preferences and value tradeoffs,
Wiley, New York.
Kemeny J. (1959), Mathematics without numbers, Daedalus, 88: 571591.
Kennedy P. (2003), A guide to Econometrics, 5th edition, MIT Press.
Kim, J.,Mueller, C.W. (1978), Factor analysis: Statistical methods and practical issues, Sage
Publications, Beverly Hills, California, pp.88.
King’s Fund (2001), The sick list 2000, the NHS from best to worst,
http://www.fulcrumtv.com/sick%20list.htm
Kline R.B. (1998), Principles and practice of structural equation modelling, NY: Guilford Press. Covers
confirmatory factor analysis using SEM techniques. See esp. Ch. 7.
Knapp, T. R., Swoyer, V. H. (1967), Some empirical results concerning the power of Bartlett's test of the
significance of a correlation matrix. American Educational Research Journal, 4, 1317.
Korhonen P., Tainio R., and Wallenius J. (2001), Value efficiency analysis of academic research,
European Journal of Operational Research, 130: 121132.
Krantz D.H., Luce R.D., Suppes P. and Tversky A. (1971), Foundations of measurement, vol. 1, Additive
and polynomial representations, Academic Press, New York.
Lawley D. N. and Maxwell A. E. (1971), Factor analysis as a statistical method, London: Butterworth
and Co.
146 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
Little R.J.A. and Schenker N. (1994), Missing Data, in Arminger G., Clogg C.C., and Sobel M.E.(eds.)
Handbook for Statistical Modeling in the Social and Behavioral Sciences, pp.3975, New York:
Plenum.
Little R.J.A (1997), Biostatistical Analysis with Missing Data, in Armitage P. and Colton T. (eds.)
Encyclopaedia of Biostatistics, London: Wiley.
Little R.J.A. and Rubin D.B. (2002), Statistical Analysis with Missing Data, Wiley Interscience, J. Wiley
& Sons, Hoboken, New Jersey.
Mahlberg B. and Obersteiner M. (2001), Remeasuring the HDI by data Envelopment analysis, Interim
report IR01069, International Institute for Applied System Analysis, Laxenburg, Austria.
Manly B. (1994), Multivariate statistical methods, Chapman & Hall, UK.
Massart D.L. and Kaufman L. (1983), The Interpretation of Analytical Chemical Data by the Use of
Cluster Analysis, New York: John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
McDaniel C. and Gates R. (1998), Contemporary Marketing Research. West Publishing, Cincinnati, OH.
McLachlan G., (2004), Discriminant Analysis and Statistical Pattern Recognition, NY: Wiley
Interscience, Wiley Series in Probability and Statistics.
Melyn W. and Moesen W.W. (1991), Towards a synthetic indicator of macroeconomic performance:
unequal weighting when limited information is available, Public Economic research Paper 17,
CES, KU Leuven.
Miller M.B. (1995), Coefficient Alpha: a basic introduction from the perspectives of classical test theory
and structural equation modelling, Structural Equation Modelling, 2, 3: 255273.
Milligan G.W. and Cooper M.C. (1985), An Examination of Procedures for Determining the Number of
Clusters in a Data Set, Psychometrika, 50: 159179.
Moldan B., Billharz S. and Matravers R. (1997), Sustainability Indicators: Report of the Project on
Indicators of Sustainable Development, SCOPE 58. Chichester and New York:
John Wiley & Sons.
Monti M. (2005), Toughen up EU reform agenda and make it count, Financial Times, Published:
March 21 2005.
Moulin H. (1988), Axioms of cooperative decision making, Econometric Society Monographs,
Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.
Munda G. (1995), Multicriteria evaluation in a fuzzy environment, PhysicaVerlag, Contributions to
Economics Series, Heidelberg.
Munda G. (2005a), MultiCriteria Decision Analysis and Sustainable Development, in Figueira J., Greco
S. and Ehrgott M. (eds.), Multiplecriteria decision analysis. State of the art surveys, Springer
International Series in Operations Research and Management Science, New York, pp. 953986.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 147
Munda G. (2005b), “Measuring sustainability”: a multicriterion framework, Environment, Development
and Sustainability, Vol. 7 (1): 117134.
Munda G. and Nardo M. (2005), Constructing Consistent Composite Indicators: the Issue of Weights,
EUR 21834 EN, Joint Research Centre, Ispra.
Munda G. and Nardo M. (2007), Noncompensatory/NonLinear composite indicators for ranking
countries: a defensible setting, Forthcoming in Applied Economics.
Munda G. (2007), Social multicriteria evaluation, SpringerVerlag, Heidelberg, New York, Economics
Series.
Nardo M., Tarantola S., Saltelli A., Andropoulos C., Buescher R., Karageorgos G., Latvala A. and Noel
F. (2004), The ebusiness readiness composite indicator for 2003: a pilot study, EUR 21294.
Nelsen R.B., (1999), An Introduction to Copulas (ISBN 0387986235).
Nicoletti G., Scarpetta S. and Boylaud O. (2000), Summary indicators of product market regulation with
an extension to employment protection legislation, OECD, Economics department working papers
No. 226, ECO/WKP(99)18. http://www.oecd.org/eco/eco.
Nilsson R. (2000), Confidence Indicators and Composite Indicator”, CIRET conference,
Paris, 1014 October 2000
Nunnaly J. (1978), Psychometric theory, New York: McGrawHill.
OECD (1999), Employment Outlook, Paris.
OECD (2003), Quality Framework and Guidelines for OECD Statistical Activities,
www.oecd.org/statistics.
OECD (2004), Learning for Tomorrow’s World  First Results from PISA 2003, Programme for
International Student Assessment, http://www.pisa.oecd.org/dataoecd/1/60/34002216.pdf.
OECD (2007), Data and Metadata Reporting and Presentation Handbook, available at
http://www.oecd.org/dataoecd/46/17/37671574.pdf ).
Parker J. (1991), Environmental reporting and environmental indices, PhD Dissertation, Cambridge, UK.
Pedhazur E. J. (1982), Multiple regression in behavioral research, 2
nd
edition, NY Holt.
Pré Consultants (2000), The Ecoindicator 99. A damage oriented method for life cycle impact
assessment. http://www.pre.nl/ecoindicator99/ei99reports.htm
Podinovskii V.V. (1994), Criteria importance theory, Mathematical Social Sciences, 27: 237252.
Puolamaa M., Kaplas M. and Reinikainen T. (1996), Index of Environmental Friendliness. A
methodological study, Eurostat.
Raykov T. (1998), Cronbach’s Alpha and Reliability of Composite with Interrelated Nonhomogenous
Items, Applied Psychological Measurement, 22: 375385.
148 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
Rifkin J. (2004), The European Dream, TarcherPenguin, New York.
Roberts F. S. (1979), Measurement theory with applications to decision making, utility and the social
sciences, AddisonWesley, London.
Rosen R. (1991), Life Itself: A Comprehensive Inquiry into Nature, Origin, and Fabrication of Life.
Columbia University Press.
Roy B. (1996), Multicriteria methodology for decision analysis, Kluwer, Dordrecht.
Saaty T. L. (1980), The Analytic Hierarchy Process, New York: McGrawHill.
Saaty R.W. (1987), The analytic hierarchy process: what it is and how it is used, Mathematical
Modelling, 9: 161176.
Saisana M. and Tarantola S. (2002), Stateoftheart report on current methodologies and practices for
composite indicator development, EUR 20408 EN, European CommissionJRC: Italy.
Saisana M., Tarantola S. and Saltelli A. (2005a), Uncertainty and sensitivity techniques as tools for the
analysis and validation of composite indicators, Journal of the Royal Statistical Society A, 168(2),
307323.
Saisana M., Nardo M. and Saltelli A. (2005b), Uncertainty and Sensitivity Analysis of the 2005
Environmental Sustainability Index, in Esty D., Levy M., Srebotnjak T. and de Sherbinin A.
(2005) Environmental Sustainability Index: Benchmarking National Environmental Stewardship.
New Haven: Yale Center for Environmental Law and Policy, pp.7578.
Saltelli A., Ratto M., Andres T., Campolongo F., Cariboni J., Gatelli D. Saisana M., and Tarantola S.
(2008), Global Sensitivity Analysis. The Primer, John Wiley & Sons.
Saltelli A. (2007) Composite indicators between analysis and advocacy, Social Indicators Research, 81:
6577.
Saltelli A., Tarantola S., Campolongo F. and Ratto M. (2004), Sensitivity Analysis in practice, a guide to
assessing scientific models, New York: John Wiley & Sons. Software for sensitivity analysis is
available at http://www.jrc.ec.europa.eu/uasa/prjsasoft.asp.
Saltelli A. (2002), Making best use of model valuations to compute sensitivity indices, Computer Physics
Communications, 145: 280297.
Saltelli A. and Tarantola S. (2002), On the relative importance of input factors in mathematical models:
safety assessment for nuclear waste disposal, Journal of American Statistical Association, 97
(459): 702709.
Sapir A. (2005), Globalisation and the Reform of European Social Models, http://www.bruegel.org/.
Sen A. (1989), Development as Capabilities Expansion, Journal of Development Planning, 19: 4158.
Sharpe A. (2004), Literature Review of Frameworks for Macroindicators, Centre for the Study of
Living Standards, Ottawa, CAN.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 149
Sicherl P., (1973), Time Distance as a Dynamic Measure of Disparities in Social and Economic
Development, Kyklos, XXVI, 3.
Sicherl, P., (2004), Time distance – a missing perspective in comparative analysis. eWisdom, Journal for
Comparative Research, 2a: 1130
Sobol’ I.M. (1993), Sensitivity analysis for nonlinear mathematical models, Mathematical Modelling &
Computational Experiment 1: 407414.
Spath H. (1980), Cluster Analysis Algorithms, Chichester, England: Ellis Horwood.
Storrie D. and Bjurek H. (1999), Benchmarking European labour market performance with efficiency
frontier technique, Discussion Paper FS I 002011.
Storrie D. and Bjurek H. (2000), Benchmarking the basic performance indicators using efficiency
frontier techniques, Report presented to the European commission, DG employment and social
affairs.
Tabachnick, B., Fidell L. (1989), Using Multivariate Statistics, Harper & Row Publishers, New York,
pp.746.
Tarantola S., Jesinghaus J. and Puolamaa M. (2000), Global sensitivity analysis: a quality assurance tool
in environmental policy modelling. In Saltelli A., Chan K., Scott M. (eds.) Sensitivity Analysis,
pp. 385397. New York: John Wiley & Sons.
Tarantola S., Saisana M., Saltelli A., Schmiedel F. and Leapman N. (2002), Statistical techniques and
participatory approaches for the composition of the European Internal Market Index 19922001,
EUR 20547 EN, European Commission: JRCItaly.
Tarantola S., Liska R., Saltelli A., Leapman N., Grant C. (2004), The Internal Market Index 2004,
EUR 21274 EN, European Commission: JRCItaly
Ting H.M. (1971), Aggregation of attributes for multiattributed utility assessment, Technical report
n. 66, Operations Research Center, MIT Cambridge Mass.
Transparency International’s Corruption
Index,http://www.transparency.org/cpi/2004/cpi2004.en.html#cpi2004
Trufte E.R. (2001), The Visual Display of Quantitative Information. Graphic Press, Connecticut, USA,
2
nd
edition (first edition 1981).
Ülengin B., Ülengin F. and Güvenç Ü. (2001), A multidimensional approach to urban quality of life: the
case of Istanbul, European Journal of Operational Research, 130: 361374.
United Nations (1992, 1999, 2000, 2001), Human Development Report. United Kingdom: Oxford
University Press. http://www.undp.org
U.K. Government (2004), Sustainable Development Indicators in Your Pocket 2004.
Vansnick J. C. (1990), Measurement theory and decision aid, in Bana e Costa C.A. (ed.), Readings in
multiple criteria decision aid, SpringerVerlag, Berlin, pp. 81100.
150 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
Vermunt J.K. and Magidson J. (2005), Factor Analysis with categorical indicators: A comparison
between traditional and latent class approaches. In A. Van der Ark, M.A. Croon and K. Sijtsma
(eds), New Developments in Categorical Data Analysis for the Social and Behavioral Sciences,
4162. Mahwah: Erlbaum.) Available at http://spitswww.uvt.nl/~vermunt/vanderark2004.pdf
Vichi M. and Kiers H. (2001), Factorial kmeans analysis for twoway data, Computational Statistics and
Data Analysis, 37(1): 4964.
Vincke P. (1992), Multicriteria decision aid, Wiley, New York.
Ward, J.H (1963), Hierarchical Grouping to optimize an objective function. Journal of American
Statistical Association, 58(301), 236244.
Watanabe S., (1960), Information theoretical analysis of multivariate correlation, IBM Journal of
Research and Development 4: 6682.
Willmott C.J. (1982), Some comments on the evaluation of model performance, Bulletin of the American
Meteorological Society 63: 13091313.
Willmott C.J., Ackleson S.G., Davis R.E, Feddema J.J., Klink K.M., Legates D.R., O’Donnel J., and
Rowe C.M. (1985), Statistics for the evaluation and comparison of models, Journal of Geophisical
Research 90: 89959005.
WHO (2000), Overall Health System attainment.
http://www.who.int/whr2001/2001/archives/2000/en/contents.htm
Wright S. (1934), The method of path coefficients Annals of Mathematical Statistics, Vol. 5: 161215.
Young H.P. and Levenglick A. (1978), A consistent extension of Condorcet’s election principle, SIAM
Journal of Applied Mathematics, 35: 285300.
Zimmermann H.J. and Zysno P. (1983), Decisions and evaluations by hierarchical aggregation of
information, Fuzzy Sets and Systems, 10: 243260
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 151
APPENDIX: TECHNOLOGY ACHIEVEMENT INDEX
Table A.1 List of individual indicators of the Technology Achievement Index
Indicator Unit Definition
CREATION OF TECHNOLOGY
PATENTS
Patents granted
per 1 000 000
people
Number of patents granted to residents, to reflect the current level of
invention activities (1998)
ROYALTIES
US $ per 1 000
people
Receipts of royalty and license fees from abroad per capita, so as to
reflect the stock of successful innovations of the past that are still useful
and hence have market value (1999)
DIFFUSION OF RECENT INNOVATIONS
INTERNET
Internet hosts per
1 000 people
Diffusion of the Internet, which is indispensable to participation in the
network age (2000)
EXPORTS %
Exports of high and medium technology products as a share of total
goods exports (1999)
DIFFUSION OF OLD INNOVATIONS
TELEPHONES
Telephone lines
per 1 000 people
(log)
Number of telephone lines (mainline and cellular), which represents old
innovation needed to use newer technologies and is also pervasive input
to a multitude of human activities (1999)
ELECTRICITY
kWh per capita
(log)
Electricity consumption, which represents old innovation needed to use
newer technologies and is also pervasive input to a multitude of human
activities (1998)
HUMAN SKILLS
SCHOOLING Years
Mean years of schooling (age 15 and above), which represents the basic
education needed to develop cognitive skills (2000)
UNIVERSITY %
Gross enrolment ratio of tertiary students enrolled in science,
mathematics and engineering, which reflects the human skills needed to
create and absorb innovations (19951997)
152 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
Table A.2 Raw data for the individual indicators of the Technology Achievement Index
P
A
T
E
N
T
S
R
O
Y
A
L
T
I
E
S
I
N
T
E
R
N
E
T
E
X
P
O
R
T
S
T
E
L
E
P
H
O
N
E
S
(
l
o
g
)
E
L
E
C
T
R
I
C
I
T
Y
(
l
o
g
)
S
C
H
O
O
L
I
N
G
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
Y
1 Finland 187 125.6 200.2 50.7 3.08 4.15 10 27.4
2 United States 289 130 179.1 66.2 3.00 4.07 12 13.9
3 Sweden 271 156.6 125.8 59.7 3.10 4.14 11.4 15.3
4 Japan 994 64.6 49 80.8 3.00 3.86 9.5 10
5 Korea, Rep. of 779 9.8 4.8 66.7 2.97 3.65 10.8 23.2
6 Netherlands 189 151.2 136 50.9 3.02 3.77 9.4 9.5
7 United Kingdom 82 134 57.4 61.9 3.02 3.73 9.4 14.9
8 Canada 31 38.6 108 48.7 2.94 4.18 11.6 14.2
9 Australia 75 18.2 125.9 16.2 2.94 3.94 10.9 25.3
10 Singapore 8 25.5 72.3 74.9 2.95 3.83 7.1 24.2
11 Germany 235 36.8 41.2 64.2 2.94 3.75 10.2 14.4
12 Norway 103 20.2 193.6 19 3.12 4.39 11.9 11.2
13 Ireland 106 110.3 48.6 53.6 2.97 3.68 9.4 12.3
14 Belgium 72 73.9 58.9 47.6 2.91 3.86 9.3 13.6
15 New Zealand 103 13 146.7 15.4 2.86 3.91 11.7 13.1
16 Austria 165 14.8 84.2 50.3 2.99 3.79 8.4 13.6
17 France 205 33.6 36.4 58.9 2.97 3.80 7.9 12.6
18 Israel 74 43.6 43.2 45 2.96 3.74 9.6 11
19 Spain 42 8.6 21 53.4 2.86 3.62 7.3 15.6
20 Italy 13 9.8 30.4 51 3.00 3.65 7.2 13
21 Czech Republic 28 4.2 25 51.7 2.75 3.68 9.5 8.2
22 Hungary 26 6.2 21.6 63.5 2.73 3.46 9.1 7.7
23 Slovenia 105 4 20.3 49.5 2.84 3.71 7.1 10.6
24 Hong Kong, China (SAR) 6 33.6 33.6 3.08 3.72 9.4 9.8
25 Slovakia 24 2.7 10.2 48.7 2.68 3.59 9.3 9.5
26 Greece 16.4 17.9 2.92 3.57 8.7 17.2
27 Portugal 6 2.7 17.7 40.7 2.95 3.53 5.9 12
28 Bulgaria 23 3.7 30 2.60 3.50 9.5 10.3
29 Poland 30 0.6 11.4 36.2 2.56 3.39 9.8 6.6
30 Malaysia 2.4 67.4 2.53 3.41 6.8 3.3
31 Croatia 9 6.7 41.7 2.63 3.39 6.3 10.6
32 Mexico 1 0.4 9.2 66.3 2.28 3.18 7.2 5
33 Cyprus 16.9 23 2.87 3.54 9.2 4
34 Argentina 8 0.5 8.7 19 2.51 3.28 8.8 12
35 Romania 71 0.2 2.7 25.3 2.36 3.21 9.5 7.2
36 Costa Rica 0.3 4.1 52.6 2.38 3.16 6.1 5.7
37 Chile 6.6 6.2 6.1 2.55 3.32 7.6 13.2
38 Uruguay 2 19.6 13.3 2.56 3.25 7.6 7.3
39 South Africa 1.7 8.4 30.2 2.43 3.58 6.1 3.4
40 Thailand 1 0.3 1.6 48.9 2.09 3.13 6.5 4.6
41 Trinidad and Tobago 7.7 14.2 2.39 3.54 7.8 3.3
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 153
P
A
T
E
N
T
S
R
O
Y
A
L
T
I
E
S
I
N
T
E
R
N
E
T
E
X
P
O
R
T
S
T
E
L
E
P
H
O
N
E
S
(
l
o
g
)
E
L
E
C
T
R
I
C
I
T
Y
(
l
o
g
)
S
C
H
O
O
L
I
N
G
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
Y
42 Panama 1.9 5.1 2.40 3.08 8.6 8.5
43 Brazil 2 0.8 7.2 32.9 2.38 3.25 4.9 3.4
44 Philippines 0.1 0.4 32.8 1.89 2.65 8.2 5.2
45 China 1 0.1 0.1 39 2.08 2.87 6.4 3.2
46 Bolivia 1 0.2 0.3 26 2.05 2.61 5.6 7.7
47 Colombia 1 0.2 1.9 13.7 2.37 2.94 5.3 5.2
48 Peru 0.2 0.7 2.9 2.03 2.81 7.6 7.5
49 Jamaica 2.4 0.4 1.5 2.41 3.35 5.3 1.6
50 Iran, Islamic Rep. of 1 2 2.12 3.13 5.3 6.5
51 Tunisia 1.1 19.7 1.98 2.92 5 3.8
52 Paraguay 35.3 0.5 2 2.14 2.88 6.2 2.2
53 Ecuador 0.3 3.2 2.09 2.80 6.4 6
54 El Salvador 0.2 0.3 19.2 2.14 2.75 5.2 3.6
55 Dominican Republic 1.7 5.7 2.17 2.80 4.9 5.7
56 Syrian Arab Republic 1.2 2.01 2.92 5.8 4.6
57 Egypt 0.7 0.1 8.8 1.89 2.94 5.5 2.9
58 Algeria 1 1.73 2.75 5.4 6
59 Zimbabwe 0.5 12 1.56 2.95 5.4 1.6
60 Indonesia 0.2 17.9 1.60 2.51 5 3.1
61 Honduras 8.2 1.76 2.65 4.8 3
62 Sri Lanka 0.2 5.2 1.69 2.39 6.9 1.4
63 India 1 0.1 16.6 1.45 2.58 5.1 1.7
64 Nicaragua 0.4 3.6 1.59 2.45 4.6 3.8
65 Pakistan 0.1 7.9 1.38 2.53 3.9 1.4
66 Senegal 0.2 28.5 1.43 2.05 2.6 0.5
67 Ghana 4.1 1.08 2.46 3.9 0.4
68 Kenya 0.2 7.2 1.04 2.11 4.2 0.3
69 Nepal 0.1 1.9 1.08 1.67 2.4 0.7
70 Tanzania, U. Rep. of 6.7 0.78 1.73 2.7 0.2
71 Sudan 0.4 0.95 1.67 2.1 0.7
72 Mozambique 12.2 0.70 1.73 1.1 0.2
Note: The first 23 countries are used as case study in the Handbook. Units are given in Table A.1.
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 155
ENDNOTES
1
Mansky (2004, Measuring Expectations, Econometrica vol. 72, pp. 13291376) notes, however:
“Economists have long been hostile to subjective data. Caution is prudent, but hostility is not warranted.
The empirical evidence cited in this article shows that, by and large, persons respond informatively to
questions eliciting probabilistic expectations for personally significant events. … The unattractive
alternative to measurement is to make unsubstantiated assumptions” (p.1370).
2
The Human Development Index uses MinMax normalisation method; it is also the default behaviour of
the Dashboard of Sustainability.
3
Colours need to be chosen (1) so that graphics communicate for colourblind persons, and (2) so that
graphics continue to communicate when they are printed in black and white.
4
The label “composite indicators” has not of universal acceptance. Sometimes CI are known as composite
indexes while in the measurement literature the term indicator is reserved for observable or directly
measurable variables.
5 The transitive property states that if aPb and bPc, then aPc.
6
In decision theory literature, this concept of weights as importance coefficients is usually referred to as
symmetrical importance, that is "… if we have two nonequal numbers to construct a vector in R
2
, then it
is preferable to place the greatest number in the position corresponding to the most important criterion.”
(Podinovskii, 1994, p. 241).
7
This Section is heavily based on Munda (2007, Chapter 4).
8
The median is the value that divides in two equal parts the distribution of the random variable.
9
The mode is the value with the highest frequency.
10
A variant of unconditional mean imputation is the fillin via conditional mean. The regression approach
is one possible method. Another common method (called imputing means within adjustment cells) is to
classify the data for the individual indicator with some missing values in classes and to impute
provisionally the missing values of that class with the sample mean of the class. The sample mean
(across all classes) is then calculated and substituted as final imputation value.
11
If the observed variables are dummies for a categorical variable, then the prediction
ih
xˆ are respondent
means within classes defined by the variable and the method reduces to that of imputing means with
adjustment cells.
12
Define
¯
÷ =
i
2
ih ih
) x ˆ x ( SSE ,
¯
÷ =
i
2
h ih
) x x ( SST , then ) SST / SSE ( 1 R
2
÷ = ,
) k r M /( SSE MSE ÷ ÷ = , where k is the number of coefficients in the regression and (Mr) the
number of observations.
¯
÷ =
i
2
h ih
) x x ˆ ( RMS and k 2 ) r M ( ) MSE / SSE ( C
k k
+ ÷ ÷ =
156 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
where the SSE
k
is computed from a model with only k coefficients and MSE is computed using all
available regressors.
13
Other iterative methods include the NewtonRaphson algorithm and the scoring method. Both involve a
calculation of the matrix of second derivatives of the likelihood, which, for complex patterns of
incomplete data, can be a very complicated function of u . As a result these algorithms often require
algebraic manipulations and complex programming. Numerical estimation of this matrix is also possible
but careful computation is needed.
14
For NMAR mechanisms one needs to make assumptions on the missingdata mechanism and to include
them in the model (see Little & Rubin, 2002, Ch. 15).
15
The technique of PCA was first described by Karl Pearson in 1901. A description of practical computing
methods came much later from Hotelling in 1933. For a detailed discussion on the PCA, see Jolliffe
(1986), Jackson (1991) and Manly (1994). Social scientists may also find the shorter monograph by
Dunteman (1989) helpful.
16
For reasons of clarity in this section we substitute the indexing q=1,…Q with the indexing i=1,…,Q and
j=1,…,Q.
17
Golub, Gene H. & van der Vorst, Henk A. (2000): Eigenvalue computation in the 20th century, Journal
of Computational and Applied Mathematics, Vol. 123, Iss. 12. and Gentle, James E.; Härdle, Wolfgang;
Mori, Yuichi (Eds.) (2004): Handbook of Computational Statistics: Concepts and Methods, Springer.
18
Euclidean distances can be greatly influenced by variables that have the largest values. One way around
this problem is to standardise the variables.
19
The name is based on the route that follows the grid of roads, as in most American cities it is not possible
to go directly between two points.
20
The Bartlett test is valid under the assumption that data are a random sample from a multivariate normal
distribution. A different version of the Bartlett test is also used to test that k samples have equal variance.
For details see http://www.itl.nist.gov/div898/handbook/eda/section3/eda357.htm
21
In a sample of n observations it is possible for a limited number to be so far separated in value from the
remainder that they give rise to the suspicion that they may be from a different population, or that the
sampling technique is at fault. Such values are called outliers (F.H.C. Marriott, 1990, A dictionary of
statistical terms, Longman Scientific & Technical, 5th edition, p.223). Eurostat employs this definition
of outlier.
22
http://europa.eu.int/comm/economy_finance/publications/european_economy/2001/b2001_0809_en.pdf
23
Other methods are available, e.g. the Maximum Likelihood or the Principal Factor centroids. Note that
these methods usually supply very different weights especially when the sample size of FA is small.
24
Weights are normalized squared factor loadings, e.g. 0.24 = (0.79^2)/2.64, which is the portion of the
variance of the first factor explained by the variable Internet.
25
To preserve comparability final weights could be rescaled to sum up to one.
26
DEA has also been used in production theory (for a review see Charnes et al., 1995).
27
We present the method as it has been used in Cherchye et al. (2004) and Cherchye & Kuosmanen (2002).
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008 157
28
Additional constraints could be imposed. Countryspecific restrictions to reflect prior information can
also be added. Note that constraints should not be given to the absolute value of weights but should be
placed on the relative weights. The result of this approach is therefore relative weights or tradeoffs to be
legitimately used in linear and geometric aggregations.
29
In our example we imposed the requirement that each individual indicator should take at least 10% and
no more than 15% of the total weight.
30
Maximum likelihood estimation requires the normality assumption. Without this assumption a method of
moments can be applied. For a discussion of the method and its applicability see Kaufmann et al. (1999).
31
In 1991, 400 German experts were asked to allocate a budget to several environmental indicators related
to an air pollution problem. The results were consistent, although the experts came from opposing social
spheres like the industrial and the environmental sectors (Jesinghaus, in Moldan & Billharz, 1997).
32
The exercise was carried out at the JRC through interviewing experts in the field.
33
A subset of indicators Y is preferentially independent of Y
c
(the complement of Y) only if any conditional
preference among elements of Y, holding all elements of Y
c
fixed, remain the same, regardless of the
levels at which Y
c
are held. The variables x
1
, x
2
,..., x
Q
are mutually preferentially independent if every
subset Y of these variables is preferentially independent of its complementary set of evaluators.
34
0
z
S
y , x
=
c
c
,
C
Y z , Y y , x e ¬ e ¬ , see the note above.
35
Compensability of aggregations is widely studied in fuzzy set theory, for example Zimmermann & Zysno
(1983) use the geometric operator
¸ ¸
)) I 1 ( 1 ( ) I (
q
q
) 1 (
q
q I I
÷ ÷
÷
where
¸
is a parameter of compensation:
the larger
¸
, the higher the degree of compensation between operators (in our case individual
indicators).
36
This section is heavily based on Chapter 6 of Munda (2007).
37
In decision theory literature, this concept of weights is usually referred to as symmetrical importance,
that is, "… if we have two nonequal numbers to construct a vector in R
2
, then it is preferable to place
the greatest number in the position corresponding to the most important criterion.” (Podinovskii, 1994,
p. 241).
38
Suppose that country a is evaluated according to some criteria/individual
indicators )) a ( x ),..., a ( x (
Q 1
, then the substitution rate at a of individual indicator j with respect to
individual indicator r (taken as a reference) is the amount ) a ( S
jr
such that country b, whose
evaluations are: r , j l ), b ( x ) a ( x
l l
= ¬ = ; 1 ) a ( x ) b ( x
j j
÷ = ; and ) a ( S ) a ( x ) b ( x
jr r r
+ = is
indifferent to country a. Therefore, ) a ( S
jr
is the amount which must be added to the reference
individual indicator in order to compensate the loss of one unit on individual indicator j, keeping the
others constant. While for additive aggregations the substitution rate is constant, in the multiplicative
aggregation it is proportional to the relative score of the indicator with respect to the others.
39
Data are not normalized. Normalization does not change the result of the multicriteria method whenever
it does not change the ordinal information of the data matrix.
158 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
40
To prevent this problem it is possible to set thresholds of this type: if the difference between two
countries in the indicator I is more than x%, then give to the country with the highest score a much
higher weight. If the difference is less than x%, give nearly the same weight. However, more precision
comes at the expenses of ad hoc threshold and weighting values.
41
The multicriteria approach MCA produces ranks for countries. The focus of the analysis thus
is ) (
c
CI Rank rather than the raw value of the index
c
CI .
42
For proof, see Saltelli et al., 2004.
43
Furthermore, no programme can take into account variables that are not included in an analysis.
44
Garson, Structural Equation Modeling, http://www2.chass.ncsu.edu/garson/pa765/structur.htm. This
webpage also contains a useful bibliography for Structural Equation Models. LISREL, AMOS and EQS
are statistical packages performing SEM.
45
Introductory information on Bayesian Networks can be found in Jensen (1996, Springer), Introduction to
Bayesian Networks, and Neapolitan (2001, Chapmann and Hall), Learning Bayesian networks.
OECD PUBLICATIONS, 2, rue AndréPascal, 75775 PARIS CEDEX 16
PRINTED IN FRANCE
(30 2008 25 1 P) ISBN 9789264043459 – No. 56327 2008
001002999eng.fm Page 3 Monday, August 18, 2008 1:35 PM
�����������������������
Subscribers to this printed periodical are entitled to free online access. If you do not yet have online access via your
institution’s network, contact your librarian or, if you subscribe personally, send an email to SourceOECD@oecd.org.
H
a
n
d
b
o
o
k
o
n
C
o
n
s
t
r
u
c
t
i
n
g
C
o
m
p
o
s
i
t
e
I
n
d
i
c
a
t
o
r
s
M
E
T
H
O
D
O
L
O
G
Y
A
N
D
U
S
E
R
G
U
I
D
E
ISBN 9789264043459
30 2008 25 1 P
:HSTCQE=UYXYZ^:
Handbook on Constructing Composite Indicators
METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE
This Handbook is a guide for constructing and using composite indicators for policy makers,
academics, the media and other interested parties. While there are several types of composite
indicators, this Handbook is concerned with those which compare and rank country performance in
areas such as industrial competitiveness, sustainable development, globalisation and innovation. The
Handbook aims to contribute to a better understanding of the complexity of composite indicators and
to an improvement of the techniques currently used to build them. In particular, it contains a set of
technical guidelines that can help constructors of composite indicators to improve the quality of their
outputs.
Handbook
on Constructing
Composite
Indicators
METHODOLOGY
AND USER GUIDE
AVAILABLE ON LINE
Handbook on Constructing Composite Indicators
METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE
social and environmental issues. All requests for public or commercial use and translation rights should be submitted to rights@oecd. France. Korea.ORGANISATION FOR ECONOMIC COOPERATION AND DEVELOPMENT The OECD is a unique forum where the governments of 30 democracies work together to address the economic. social and environmental challenges of globalisation. Norway. Austria.org/publishing/corrigenda. the information economy and the challenges of an ageing population. Japan.com. Iceland. Hungary. such as corporate governance. the Czech Republic. databases and multimedia products in your own documents. The opinions expressed and arguments employed herein do not necessarily reflect the official views of the Organisation or of the governments of its member countries or of the European Commission. websites and teaching materials.oecd. Greece. Italy. The OECD is also at the forefront of efforts to understand and to help governments respond to new developments and concerns.com or the Centre français d'exploitation du droit de copie (CFC) contact@cfcopies. Germany. © OECD 2008 You can copy. Spain. The Commission of the European Communities takes part in the work of the OECD. provided that suitable acknowledgment of OECD as source and copyright owner is given. Sweden. . Mexico. Corrigenda to OECD publications may be found on line at: www. Poland. the Slovak Republic. OECD Publishing disseminates widely the results of the Organisation’s statistics gathering and research on economic. presentations. and you can include excerpts from OECD publications. seek answers to common problems.org. Denmark. Canada. Switzerland. guidelines and standards agreed by its members. Finland. download or print OECD content for your own use. blogs. Luxembourg. The Organisation provides a setting where governments can compare policy experiences. Requests for permission to photocopy portions of this material for public or commercial use shall be addressed directly to the Copyright Clearance Center (CCC) at info@copyright. Portugal. Belgium. Ireland. Neither the European Commission nor any person acting on behalf of the Commission is responsible for the use which might be made of this publication. New Zealand. Turkey. The OECD member countries are: Australia. the United Kingdom and the United States. This work is published on the responsibility of the SecretaryGeneral of the OECD. the Netherlands. as well as the conventions. identify good practice and work to coordinate domestic and international policies.
Primary authors from the OECD are Anders Hoffmann and Enrico Giovannini.ec. In the OECD context. under the project KEI (Knowledge Economy Indicators). 502529.eu/ The research was partly funded by the European Commission. the work has benefited from a grant from the Danish Government. quality and evaluation' and other members of the Task Force on Composite Indicators) for the useful comments and the improvements they suggested. In particular. Research Directorate. globalization and innovation. Pascal Rivière from INSEE . Laurens Cherchye and Tom Van Puyenbroeck from the Catholic University of Leuven. Tanja Srebotnjak from the Yale Center for Environmental Law and Policy. Further information on the topics treated in this handbook and on other issues related to composite indicators can be found in the web page: http://compositeindicators. We are also grateful to the Statistical Offices of the OECD Committee on Statistics whose comments contributed to enhance the quality of this handbook.© OECD 2008 3 . the media and other interested parties. academics.FOREWORD This Handbook aims to provide a guide to the construction and use of composite indicators. and Ari LATVALA from the European Commission. it contains a set of technical guidelines that can help constructors of composite indicators to improve the quality of their outputs. The authors wish to thank especially Jochen Jesinghaus from the European Commission. for policymakers. DG Enterprise and Industry. this Handbook is concerned with those which compare and rank country performance in areas such as industrial competitiveness. The views expressed are those of the authors and should not be regarded as stating an official position of either the European Commission or the OECD. Italy. While there are several types of composite indicators. Contract FP6 No. DG Joint Research Centre. HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . DDG02 ' Statistical governance. Andrea Saltelli and Stefano Tarantola. Technology and Industry) and the Econometrics and Applied Statistics Unit of the Joint Research Centre (JRC) of the European Commission in Ispra. Senior Statistical Adviser to the UNDP Human Development Report. DG Joint Research Centre) who supplied all the material for the chapter on aggregation methods and the box on measurement scales and to Eurostat (Unit B5'Methodology and research'. Editorial assistance was provided by Candice Stevens. Gunseli Baygan.jrc. sustainable development. Tom Griffin. A special thank goes to Giuseppe Munda (Universitat Autònoma de Barcelona and European Commission. Primary authors from the JRC are Michela Nardo. Many people contributed to improve this handbook with their valuable comments and suggestions.europa. Karsten Olsen and Sarah Moore. It has been jointly prepared by the OECD (the Statistics Directorate and the Directorate for Science. The Handbook aims to contribute to a better understanding of the complexity of composite indicators and to an improvement in the techniques currently used to build them. Michaela Saisana.
.
................................................. 13 Pros and cons of composite indicators ....4 Multivariate analysis .......................... 13 Aim of the Handbook ...................................3 4....... 72 Cluster analysis .........................8 Back to the details ........5 4..................................................................................................................................... A TOOLBOX FOR CONSTRUCTORS .................................................. Multivariate analysis ............................................................................................ 14 What’s next ..................................... 56 Regression imputation.................3 3.......3 Imputation of missing data ................................ 23 1............................................................................ 55 3..................................6 Weighting and aggregation ...... 48 PART 2....................................................................................1 4.............................................................. 19 1....... 63 Factor analysis..3 Quality dimensions for procedures to build and disseminate composite indicators ................................ CONSTRUCTING A COMPOSITE INDICATOR ......................................................................................................................7 Robustness and sensitivity .............................................. 34 1....................................................................................................... 39 1...................... Imputation of missing data...................................... 73 Other methods for multivariate analysis ...............1 3........... 35 1......TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 10 Presentation and dissemination ............................ 44 2.............9 Links to other variables ............................................ 40 2......................... Steps for constructing a composite indicator ......... 51 Step 3......................................................... A quality framework for composite indicators ......................................................................................4 3...........................................................2 Quality dimensions for basic data ...................................................................................... 44 2................................................................................................................................................ 69 Cronbach Coefficient Alpha ................................... 63 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 .........1 Quality profile for composite indicators ............5 Single imputation ........ 58 Principal components analysis ............................... 31 1.................................................................................................. 79 Step 4.......... 17 PART I..1 Developing a theoretical framework ............5 Normalisation of data .....2 3. 56 Expected maximisation imputation ............................................................... 27 1.........4 4..........................................................................................................................................................© OECD 2008 5 ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 24 1..............2 Selecting variables .........2 4.................. 46 2............. 57 Multiple imputation........................................ 19 1........................................................................................................................................... 22 1....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 55 Unconditional mean imputation .............. 25 1.................
..........12 On the aggregation rules issue: lessons learned from social choice and multicriteria decision analysis ......................................................................................................................3....2 Analysis 2...............................................................3 Sensitivity analysis using variancebased techniques .................3 6.........11 Geometric aggregation .............................................................................................4 5.................4 6.............................................................. 89 Data envelopment analysis (DEA) ... 118 7.. 89 6..........14 Performance of the different aggregation methods .... 83 Standardisation (or zscores) ............................................................................... 98 Performance of the different weighting methods ....................... Weighting and aggregation . 102 6........................................1 6........................................6 6....... 96 Conjoint analysis (CA)............................................Step 5..... 92 Unobserved components model (UCM) .. 117 7...............................................................................2 5.............................................................................................................. 85 Indicators above or below the mean.......................10 Additive aggregation methods .................7 6................................................................................................................................. 112 6..............8 6......... Uncertainty and sensitivity analysis ............... 151 6 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 .... 102 6.......................................................................2 6.............................................................13 Noncompensatory multicriteria approach (MCA) .......................................... 83 5......................................... 115 Step 7....................................... 118 7............9 Weights based on principal components analysis or factor analysis................................................................................................1 5.....7 Scale transformation prior to normalisation ............ 96 Analytic hierarchy process (AHP) .............................................................................................................. 89 Weighting methods ....................................................................................... Normalisation .............................................................................................................................5 6............. 91 Benefit of the doubt approach (BOD) ............................ Back to the details ............2 Uncertainty analysis (UA).... 86 Methods for cyclical indicators ............................. 86 Step 6............................................................... 132 CONCLUDING REMARKS...................................................... 137 REFERENCES ..........6 5............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 129 Step 8.................................... 85 Distance to a reference ...................... 121 7........................................................................................................................... 84 MinMax .......................© OECD 2008 ............ 86 Percentage of annual differences over consecutive years ......................................3....................1 Analysis 1.............5 5.1 General framework.................................................................. 104 6...........................3 5.................. 94 Budget allocation process (BAP) .................................................................................. 141 APPENDIX: TECHNOLOGY ACHIEVEMENT INDEX ..................................................................................................................... 96 Public opinion .................... 103 6... 124 7............................................... 99 Aggregation methods ...............................................................................................................................
.......................... Table 17........ Table 4................. Table 28............................ Table 31.... Table 30....................... 94 Comparison matrix of eight individual TAI indicators............................................................... 64 Eigenvalues of individual TAI indicators ....................................................................................... 78 Normalisation based on interval scales ........................................ 100 Advantages and disadvantages of different weighting methods ...... 109 7 Table 19............ Table 11................................ Table 7... Table 9............... 30 Compatibility between aggregation and weighting methods ............. Checklist for building a composite indicator .............. Table 29..................... Table 15...................... Table 26...................... Table 18......... Table 3.... 91 Benefit of the doubt (BOD) approach applied to TAI ......................................... Table 5...... 26 Normalisation methods ...... HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 .............. Table 13................................... 71 Cronbach coefficient alpha results for individual TAI indicators . Table 20.......... Table 16................. 49 Correlation matrix for individual TAI indicators........© OECD 2008 ........................................................................................................................................................... Table 10.................... 69 Rotated factor loadings for individual TAI indicators (method 1) ..... 31 Quality dimensions of composite indicators .......................... Table 12................................ Table 27............. 90 Weights for the TAI indicators based on maximum likelihood (ML) or principal components (PC) method for the extraction of the common factors ........................... Table 23................................................. 97 TAI weights based on different methods ...................................TABLES Table 1.... 90 Factor loadings of TAI based on principal components ....................... Table 22.. 100 TAI country rankings based on different weighting methods ................................... 20 Strengths and weaknesses of multivariate analysis .................. 108 Fishburn example on Borda rule.................. Table 25............................. 83 Examples of normalisation techniques using TAI data ................................................ 97 Comparison matrix of three individual TAI indicators. 107 An original Concordet example ................................................................... 73 Distance measures for individual TAI indicators between two objects and over dimensions ................................. Table 24.................... Table 6........................................................... Table 14........ 107 Outranking matrix derived from the Concordet approach ...................... 87 Eigenvalues of TAI data set ........... 75 Kmeans for clustering TAI countries ........................ 101 21 indicators and 4 countries ....... 106 A frequency matrix for the application of Borda's rule ............ 108 Outranking matrix derived from Table 27 .......... 65 Component loadings for individual TAI indicators ...................................................... Table 2........................................................... 71 Rotated factor loadings for individual TAI indicators (method 2) .................................. Table 8........... 108 An original Concordet example ... Table 21.....................
..................... 152 8 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 ...... Table 34........................................................................... 114 Permutations obtained from the outranking matrix for TAI and associated score ..................© OECD 2008 ..................1 List of individual indicators of the Technology Achievement Index ....................................... Table 33........................................................................................... Table 40..... 116 Sobol' sensitivity measures of first order and total effects on TAI results ................... 130 Impact of eliminating two indicators from the TAI example .................... 112 Impact matrix for TAI (five countries) ..... Frequency matrix derived from Table 31 ...............2 Raw data for the individual indicators of the Technology Achievement Index ..... 110 An unsolvable ranking problem.......... Table 37..... Table 42.............................................. Table 39................ 151 Table A. Table 35................. 128 Sobol' sensitivity measures and average shift in TAI rankings ........ Table 41.... 135 Table A......... 113 Outranking impact matrix for TAI (five countries) ..............................Table 32... Table 36.............. 134 Path analysis results for TAI: total effect impact of the indicators on the TAI scores ........................... Table 38........ 109 Frequency matrix derived from Table 31 without country d .......................... 114 TAI country rankings by different aggregation methods ............
............... 36 Example of leader/laggard decomposition presentation ..................... 128 Figure 23....................................................................© OECD 2008 9 .................................................................. Markov Chain Monte Carlo imputation method........................... Country clusters for individual TAI indicators ......................... 41 Example of bar chart presentation of composite indicator ....................................................................... Figure 8... Figure 7...... 37 Example of colour decomposition presentation........... Figure 2............. 76 Figure 14............... Analytical hierarchy process (AHP) weighting of the TAI indicators.............................. 98 Figure 18............................................................................... 59 Figure 11........... Figure 3................................... 38 Link between TAI and GDP per capita........................ Sobol' sensitivity measures of firstorder TAI results .............. Standardised regression coefficients for the TAI....... 92 Figure 17.FIGURES Figure 1. 126 Figure 20..................................................................................................... Example of bar chart decomposition presentation ................... 37 Example of spider diagram decomposition presentation ........................... Uncertainty analysis of TAI country rankings ............ Average shift in TAI country rankings by aggregation and weighting combinations ................. Simple example of path analysis ....... Figure 9... 42 Example of trend diagram composite indicator ............................. 39 Example of tabular presentation of composite indicator .. 78 Figure 16....................... Uncertainty analysis for TAI output variable .... 130 Figure 25............. 133 Figure 26....... Linkage distance vs fusion step in TAI's hierarchical cluster ........................................ Means plot for TAI clusters ....... 43 Figure 10.................. Logic of multiple imputation .......... Figure 5............................................ 127 Figure 22.......... 133 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 .... Sobol' sensitivity measures of TAI total effect indices......................... Netherlands' ranking by aggregation and weighting systems ...... 42 Example of line chart presentation of composite indicator ... Eigenvalues for individual TAI numbers.......................... Data envelopment analysis (DEA) performance frontier ............................................ 129 Figure 24........... 2000 ........................................................................................... Uncertainty analysis of TAI country rankings .............. Figure 4................ Figure 6..... 68 Figure 13............. 60 Figure 12.................................... 127 Figure 21............... 125 Figure 19.... 77 Figure 15..
.... 66 Box 6........................ Rules of thumb in choosing the imputation method ..................................................................... Technology Achievement Index (TAI) ........................................... Measures of association....................................................................... 70 Box 7.......................................... 81 Box 8.......................................... 88 10 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 ...................................................................................................................... 62 Box 5......................................... Pros and Cons of Composite Indicators ............................. Time distance ..... 53 Box 4......BOXES Box 1....© OECD 2008 ....................... Assumptions in principal component analysis ............................................................ 17 Box 3........ 13 Box 2........................... A sample of "stopping rules" .......................................... Measurement scales ......
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS AHP BAP BOD CA CCA CI CKYL CLA DEA DFA DQAF EC EM EU EW FA GCI GDP GME HDI ICT IMF INSEE JRC KMO LIN MAR Analytic Hierarchy Processes Budget Allocation Process Benefit of the Doubt Conjoint Analysis Canonical Correlation Analysis Composite Indicator CondorcetKemenyYoungLevenglick Cluster Analysis Data Envelopment Analysis Discriminant Function Analysis Data Quality Framework European Commission Expected Maximisation European Union Equal weighting Factor Analysis Growth Competitiveness Index Gross Domestic Product Geometric aggregation Human Development Index Information and Communication Technologies International Monetary Fund National Institute for Statistics and Economic Studies (France) Joint Research Centre KaiserMeyerOlkin Linear aggregation Missing At Random [in the context of imputation methods] HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 .© OECD 2008 11 .
© OECD 2008 .MCA MCAR MCMC MCTAI MI ML MSE NCMC NMAR OECD PC PCA PISA R&D RMS SEM SII TAI UCM UN UNDP VIF WEF WHO MultiCriteria Approach Missing Completely At Random [in the context of imputation methods] Markov Chain Monte Carlo Monte Carlo version of the Technology Achievement Index Multiple Imputation Maximum Likelihood Mean Square Error Noncompensatory multicriteria analysis Not Missing At Random [in the context of imputation methods] Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development Principal Component Principal Components Analysis Programme for International Student Assessment (OECD) Research and Development Residual Mean Square Structural Equation Modelling Summary Innovation Index Technology Achievement Index Unobserved Components Model United Nations United Nations Development Program Varianceinflation factor World Economic Forum World Health Organisation 12 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 .
Such composite indicators provide simple comparisons of countries that can be used to illustrate complex and sometimes elusive issues in wideranging fields. Pros and Cons of Composite Indicators Pros: Cons: • • • • Can summarise complex. In fact. The composite indicator should ideally measure multidimensional concepts which cannot be captured by a single indicator. A composite indicator is formed when individual indicators are compiled into a single index on the basis of an underlying model. an indicator can point out the direction of change across different units and through time. multidimensional realities with a view to supporting decisionmakers. single market integration. The main pros and cons of using composite indicators are the following (Box 1) (adapted from Saisana & Tarantola. etc. 2002): Box 1. 2007). an indicator is a quantitative or a qualitative measure derived from a series of observed facts that can reveal relative positions (e. • HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . if the construction process is not transparent and/or lacks sound statistical or conceptual principles.© OECD 2008 13 . e. for a case study on alcohol control policies in the OECD countries). They can also be helpful in setting policy priorities and in benchmarking or monitoring performance. Can assess progress of countries over time. environment. 2007. composite indicators can send misleading policy messages if they are poorly constructed or misinterpreted. which cites more than 160 composite indicators). The number of CIs in existence around the world is growing year after year (for a recent review see Bandura. Their “big picture” results may invite users (especially policymakers) to draw simplistic analytical or policy conclusions. and they have also proven useful in benchmarking country performance (Saltelli. Pros and cons of composite indicators In general terms. May invite simplistic policy conclusions. industrialisation. of a country) in a given area. Are easier to interpret than a battery of many separate indicators. May be misused. competitiveness. composite indicators must be seen as a means of initiating discussion and stimulating public interest. Their relevance should be gauged with respect to constituencies affected by the composite index. e.. When evaluated at regular intervals. 2006. In the context of policy analysis (see Brand et al. economy. It often seems easier for the general public to interpret composite indicators than to identify common trends across many separate indicators.g.g. However. e.g. to support a desired policy. sustainability. society or technological development. knowledgebased society. • • • May send misleading policy messages if poorly constructed or misinterpreted. Reduce the visible size of a set of indicators without dropping the underlying information base. The selection of indicators and weights could be the subject of political dispute.INTRODUCTION Composite indicators (CIs) which compare country performance are increasingly recognised as a useful tool in policy analysis and public communication. indicators are useful in identifying trends and drawing attention to particular issues..g.
On the dispute over whether composite indicators are good or bad per se. if the construction process is not transparent. their construction owes more to the craftsmanship of the modeller than to universally accepted scientific rules for encoding. Pros and Cons of Composite Indicators Pros: Cons: • • • Thus make it possible to include more information within the existing size limit. the nonaggregators. the temptation of stakeholders and practitioners to summarise complex and sometime elusive processes (e. 1991). On the other hand.) into a single figure to benchmark country performance for policy consumption seems likewise irresistible. single market policy.) and promote accountability. media.Box 1. Place issues of country performance and progress at the centre of the policy arena. 2004) According to other commentators: […] it is hard to imagine that debate on the use of composite indicators will ever be settled […] official statisticians may tend to resent composite indicators. etc. 14 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 .g. Their key objection to aggregation is what they see as the arbitrary nature of the weighting process by which the variables are combined. complex • May disguise serious failings in some dimensions and increase the difficulty of identifying proper remedial action. • • • Composite indicators are much like mathematical or computational models. it has been noted: The aggregators believe there are two major reasons that there is value in combining indicators in some manner to produce a bottom line. The second school. (Saisana et al. With regard to models. May lead to inappropriate policies if dimensions of performance that are difficult to measure are ignored. Enable users to compare dimensions effectively. the justification for a composite indicator lies in its fitness for the intended purpose and in peer acceptance (Rosen. sustainability.© OECD 2008 . citizens. believe one should stop once an appropriate set of indicators has been created and not go the further step of producing a composite index. In particular. but only to contribute to a better understanding of the complexity of composite indicators and to an improvement in the techniques currently used to build them. Facilitate communication with general public (i. whereby a lot of work in data collection and editing is “wasted” or “hidden” behind a single number of dubious significance.. etc. As such. (Sharpe. it contains a set of technical guidelines that can help builders of composite indicators to improve the quality of their outputs.e. Help to construct/underpin narratives for lay and literate audiences. 2005a) Aim of the Handbook This Handbook does not aim to resolve the debate. and that stressing the bottom line is extremely useful in garnering media interest and hence the attention of policy makers. They believe that such a summary statistic can indeed capture reality and is meaningful.
Imputation of missing data. clearly expressed by participants at the workshop. measurability. Indicators should be selected on the basis of their analytical soundness. In particular. Indicators should be normalised to render them comparable.The proposal to develop a Handbook was launched at the end of a workshop on composite indicators jointly organised by the JRC and OECD in the spring of 2003 which demonstrated: • • • The growing interest in composite indicators in academic circles. Indicators should be aggregated and weighted according to the underlying theoretical framework. Key elements of the Handbook were presented at a second workshop. country coverage. The main aim of the Handbook is to provide builders of composite indicators with a set of recommendations on how to design. The use of proxy variables should be considered when data are scarce. methodological issues need to be addressed transparently prior to the construction and use of composite indicators in order to avoid data manipulation and misrepresentation. Normalisation. Therefore. In fact. relevance to the phenomenon being measured and relationship to each other. while its aims and outline were presented to the OECD Committee on Statistics in June 2004. A theoretical framework should be developed to provide the basis for the selection and combination of single indicators into a meaningful composite indicator under a fitnessforpurpose principle. Weighting and aggregation. The existence of a wide range of methodological approaches to composite indicators. and.© OECD 2008 15 . e. Attention needs to be paid to extreme values as they may influence subsequent steps in the process of building a composite indicator. the media and among policymakers. aggregation. Correlation and compensability issues among indicators need to considered and either be corrected for or treated as features of the phenomenon that need to retained in the analysis. • • • • • HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . The need. Consideration should be given to different approaches for imputing missing values. to develop the present Handbook. Data selection. Skewed data should also be identified and accounted for. open to other institutions. develop and disseminate a composite indicator. to guide constructors and users by highlighting the technical problems and common pitfalls to be avoided. Multivariate analysis. An exploratory analysis should investigate the overall structure of the indicators. held in Paris in February 2004. weighting. assess the suitability of the data set and explain the methodological choices. the JRC and OECD launched a project.g. Extreme values should be examined as they can become unintended benchmarks. the first part of the Handbook discusses the following steps in the construction of composite indicators: • Theoretical framework. This version of the Handbook is a revision of the document published in 2005 in the OECD’s statistics working paper series and contains an update of current research in the field. to have international guidelines in this domain.
For explanatory purposes. wr . A warning: the TAI (like any other composite indicator mentioned in this Handbook) is not intended to be an example of “good practice” but rather a flexible explanatory tool. Further details are given in the Appendix.q : weight associated to individual indicator q. with q=1. The second part of the Handbook. the imputation of missing data. Back to the real data.Q and c=1. as well as to identify linkages through regressions. 2001. t I q . When no time indication is present. which renders it suitable for the didactic purposes of this Handbook (Box 2).….© OECD 2008 . the time suffix is normally omitted and is present only in certain sections. For the sake of simplicity. Analysis should be undertaken to assess the robustness of the composite indicator in terms of. e. the TAI is well documented by its developers and the underlying data are freely available on the Internet. with r=1. Links to other variables. which can influence their interpretation. FukudaParr. 2003). the “Toolbox for Constructors”. the reader should consider that all variables have the same time dimension.g. Composite indicators should be transparent and fit to be decomposed into their underlying indicators or values. 16 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . Attempts should be made to correlate the composite indicator with other published indicators.c : normalised value of individual indicator q for country c at time t. It is composed of a relatively small number of individual indicators. CI ct : value of the composite indicator for country c at time t..….• Robustness and sensitivity. a concrete example (the Technology Achievement Index .….TAI) is used to illustrate the various steps in the construction of a composite indicator and to highlight problems that may arise. which serves to clarify some of the issues treated. • • • The first part of the Handbook also offers a thorough discussion on the quality framework for composite indicators. Composite indicators can be visualised or presented in a number of different ways.R denoting the weighting method. the mechanism for including or excluding single indicators. The TAI is a composite indicator developed by the United Nations for the Human Development Report (UN. presents and discusses in more detail popular methodologies already in use in the composite indicator community. the normalisation scheme. in which the relationships between methodologies used to construct and disseminate composite indicators and different quality dimensions are sketched. Presentation and Visualisation. For reasons of clarity. Moreover.M. The following notation is employed throughout the Handbook (more formal definitions are given in the Second Part: Toolbox for Constructors): t x q .c : raw value of individual indicator q for country c at time t. only the first 23 of the 72 original countries measured by the TAI are considered here. the choice of weights and the aggregation method.
© OECD 2008 17 . Technology Achievement Index (TAI) The TAI focuses on four dimensions of technological capacity (data given) in Table A. Human skills. Diffusion is measured by two individual indicators: (i) diffusion of the Internet (indispensable to participation). it contributes less to technology achievement. and (ii) receipts from royalty and license fees from abroad per capita (to reflect the stock of successful innovations that are still useful and hence have market value). Both indicators are expressed as logarithms. A composite based on a weak theoretical background or on soft data containing large measurement errors can lead to disputable policy messages.and mediumtechnology products as a share of all exports. Whichever framework is used. mathematics and engineering. Expressing the measure in logarithms ensures that as the level increases. we have preferred to make reference to relatively well established methodologies and procedures. The quality of a composite indicator as well as the soundness of the messages it conveys depend not only on the methodology used in its construction but primarily on the quality of the framework and the data used. These will be the subject of future work. in spite of the use of stateoftheart methodology in its construction. namely to propose a set of statistical approaches and common practices which can assure the technical quality of a composite. we have preferred to exclude them. because they are based on statistical and econometric approaches quite different from those relevant for other types of composite indicators. In this Handbook. Diffusion of recent innovations. In particular the following aspects should receive more attention in future versions of this handbook: HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . On the other hand. What’s next The literature on composite indicators is vast and almost every month new proposals are published on specific methodological aspects potentially relevant for the development of composite indicators. Two individual indicators are included: telephones and electricity. Our aim is much less ambitious.1 This Handbook has nothing to say about specific theoretical frameworks: our opinion is that the peer community is ultimately the legitimate forum to judge the soundness of the framework and fitness for purpose of the derived composite. Two individual indicators are used to reflect the human skills needed to create and absorb innovations: (i) mean years of schooling and (ii) gross enrolment ratio of tertiary students in science. but not at the most advanced stages.1 Creation of technology. Diffusion of old innovations. These are needed to use newer technologies and have wideranging applications. approaches. taking into account its potential audience.Box 2. but still experimental. During the process of revision of this handbook we received many useful suggestions about arguments or issues to add (or to treat in more detail). this version of the Handbook does not cover the “composite leading indicators” normally used to identify cyclical movements of economic activity. the Handbook should be seen as a “live” product. transparency must be the guiding principle of the entire exercise. as they are important at the earlier stages of technological advance. Two individual indicators are used to capture the level of innovation in a society: (i) the number of patents granted per capita (to reflect the current level of innovative activities). However. with successive editions being issued as long as new developments are taking place. and (ii) exports of high. avoiding the inclusion of some interesting. Although the OECD has a longstanding tradition and much experience in this field.
• 18 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 .© OECD 2008 .• • • • Time dimension and longitudinal datasets Criteria for deciding whether an indicator is appropriate More on normalization methods and on their relationship with measurement issues. Relationship between the practice of CI and the traditional measurement theory developed in psychometrics and in particular the relationship between effect and cause indicators and the statistical tools proposed in the various chapters. More detailed discussion and application of structural equation modelling and Bayesian analysis for composite indicator development.
Detailed information about the methodological tools to be used in each step is presented in the Part II of the Handbook. Table 1 provides a stylised ‘checklist’ to be followed in the construction of a composite indicator. but also to identify whether they fit together well. but coherence in the whole process is equally vital. the Handbook puts special emphasis on documentation and metadata. both to ensure the coherence of the whole process and to prepare in advance the methodological notes that will be disseminated together with the numeric results.PART I. In particular. Composite indicator developers have to face a justifiable degree of scepticism from statisticians.© OECD 2008 19 . the Handbook recommends the preparation of relevant documentation at the end of each phase. To avoid these risks. especially as far as methodologies and basic data are concerned. Each step is extremely important. Part 1 of the Handbook provides an overview of the individual steps in the construction of composite indicators and discusses the quality framework for composite indicators. from the development of a theoretical framework to the presentation and dissemination of a composite indicator. which is discussed in more detail in the next sections. CONSTRUCTING A COMPOSITE INDICATOR 1. economists and other groups of users. This scepticism is partially due to the lack of transparency of some existing indicators. HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . Choices made in one step can have important implications for others: therefore. STEPS FOR CONSTRUCTING A COMPOSITE INDICATOR This Handbook presents its recommendations following an “ideal sequence” of ten steps. the composite indicator builder has not only to make the most appropriate methodological choices in each step.
To make scale adjustments. To compile a list of selection criteria for the underlying variables. To transform highly skewed indicators. Normalisation Should be carried out to render the variables comparable. • • • 5. To discuss the strengths and weaknesses of each selected indicator. To identify groups of indicators or groups of countries that are statistically “similar” and provide an interpretation of the results.g.. aggregation). • • • 4. measurability. • • • 3. To check the underlying structure of the data along the two main dimensions. cluster analysis). weighting. To structure the various subgroups of the phenomenon (if needed). if necessary. e. To compare the statisticallydetermined structure of the data set to the theoretical framework and discuss possible differences.g.. • • • • 20 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . assess its suitability. e. To discuss the presence of outliers in the dataset. soft or input. type (hard. • • • Why it is needed To get a clear understanding and definition of the multidimensional phenomenon to be measured. To create a summary table on data characteristics. and guide subsequent methodological choices (e. Checklist for building a composite indicator Step 1. output. Data selection Should be based on the analytical soundness. availability (across country. To estimate missing values. by means of single or multiple imputation). To check the quality of the available indicators. output. namely individual indicators and countries (by means of suitable multivariate methods. principal components analysis. e. input. time).. Multivariate analysis Should be used to study the overall structure of the dataset. To provide a measure of the reliability of each imputed value.g. 2. Imputation of missing data Is needed in order to provide a complete dataset (e. process). and relevance of the indicators to the phenomenon being measured and relationship to each other.Table 1. process. so as to assess the impact of the imputation on the composite indicator results. source. To discuss the presence of outliers in the dataset as they may become unintended benchmarks.g. The use of proxy variables should be considered when data are scarce (involvement of experts and stakeholders is envisaged at this step). To select suitable normalisation procedure(s) that respect both the theoretical framework and the data properties. if necessary.© OECD 2008 .g. country coverage.. Theoretical framework Provides the basis for the selection and combination of variables into a meaningful composite indicator under a fitnessforpurpose principle (involvement of experts and stakeholders is envisaged at this step).
Step 6. Transparency is primordial to good analysis and policymaking.© OECD 2008 21 . To correlate the composite indicator with other relevant measures. taking into consideration the results of sensitivity analysis. Visualisation of the results Should receive proper attention. 10.. To identify a coherent set of presentational tools for the targeted audience. Weighting and aggregation Should be done along the lines of the underlying theoretical framework. alternative conceptual scenarios for the selection of the underlying indicators. the imputation of missing data. the normalisation scheme. • To profile country performance at the indicator level so as to reveal what is driving the composite indicator results. Uncertainty and sensitivity analysis Should be undertaken to assess the robustness of the composite indicator in terms of e. • To identify all possible sources of uncertainty in the development of the composite indicator and accompany the composite scores and ranks with uncertainty bounds. • • Why it is needed To select appropriate weighting and aggregation procedure(s) that respect both the theoretical framework and the data properties. To consider a multimodelling approach to build the composite indicator. To select the visualisation technique which communicates the most information. To discuss whether correlation issues among indicators should be accounted for. the mechanism for including or excluding an indicator. to identify if the composite indicator results are overly dominated by few indicators and to explain the relative importance of the subcomponents of the composite indicator. Back to the data Is needed to reveal the main drivers for an overall good or bad performance. To present the composite indicator results in a clear and accurate manner. • To conduct sensitivity analysis of the inference (assumptions) and determine what sources of uncertainty are more influential in the scores and/or ranks. and if available. • • 9. given that the visualisation can influence (or help to enhance) interpretability • • • • • HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . • • 7. To check for correlation and causality (if possible). 8.g. To develop datadriven narratives based on the results. the choice of weights. the aggregation method. To discuss whether compensability among indicators should be allowed. Links to other indicators Should be made to correlate the composite indicator (or its dimensions) with existing (simple or composite) indicators as well as to identify linkages through regressions.
Composite indicators in newly emerging policy areas. output or process. The Technology Achievement Index. sustainable development. The selection criteria should work as a guide to whether an indicator should be included or not in the overall composite index. therefore. It should refer to the theoretical framework. The theoretical and statistical frameworks to measure GDP have been developed over the last 50 years and a revision of the 1993 System of National Accounts is currently being undertaken by the major international organisations. gross domestic product (GDP) measures the total value of goods and services produced in a given country. the users of composite indicators should assess their quality and relevance. Transparency is thus essential in constructing credible indicators. Multidimensional concepts can be divided into several subgroups. e. For example. as well as the next. Such a nested structure improves the user’s understanding of the driving forces behind the composite indicator.g. Some complex concepts. It should be as precise as possible and should describe the phenomenon being measured. The definition should give the reader a clear sense of what is being measured by the composite indicator. Identifying the selection criteria for the underlying indicators. These subgroups need not be (statistically) independent of each other. However. Developing a theoretical framework What is badly defined is likely to be badly measured A sound theoretical framework is the starting point in constructing composite indicators. i. ebusiness readiness. a clear link between the framework (whatever this is) and the structure of the composite indicator.1. and existing linkages should be described theoretically or empirically to the greatest extent possible. diffusion of recent innovations. However. however. the Growth Competitiveness Index (GCI) developed by the World Economic Forum is founded on the idea “that the process of economic growth can be analysed within three important broad categories: the macroeconomic environment. diffusion of old innovations and human skills. Ultimately. HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . where the weights are estimated based on economic theory and reflect the relative price of goods and services.. is conceptually divided into four groups of technological capacity: creation of technology. only the latter set of output indicators should be included (or expressed in terms of output per unit of input) if the index is intended to measure innovation performance. an Innovation Index could combine R&D expenditures (inputs) and the number of new products and services (outputs) in order to measure the scope of innovative activity in a given country. since the economic research in these fields is still being developed. not all multidimensional concepts have such solid theoretical and empirical underpinnings. Too often composite indicators include both input and output measures. etc. Determining subgroups.© OECD 2008 • • 22 . and technology. For example. should involve experts and stakeholders as much as possible. for example. the quality of public institutions.e. linking various subgroups and the underlying indicators.1. are difficult to define and measure precisely or may be subject to controversy among stakeholders. It may also make it easier to determine the relative weights across different factors. This process should ideally be based on what is desirable to measure and not on which indicators are available. For example. might be very subjective. selecting individual indicators and weights that reflect their relative importance and the dimensions of the overall composite. This entails: • Defining the concept. in order to take into account multiple viewpoints and to increase the robustness of the conceptual framework and set of indicators.” The GCI has. input. competitiveness. This step. The framework should clearly define the phenomenon to be measured and its subcomponents.
To have an objective comparison across small and large countries. input. Finally. scaling of variables by an appropriate size measure. Selecting variables A composite indicator is above all the sum of its parts The strengths and weaknesses of composite indicators largely derive from the quality of the underlying variables. income. Ideally. Poor data will produce poor results in a “garbagein. is required. Instead. 1. however. From a pragmatic point of view. and populated land area. The builder should also pay close attention to whether the indicator in question is dependent on GDP or other sizerelated factors. On the other hand we do not marry the idea that using what is available is necessarily enough. e. accessibility. output or process indicators – must match the definition of the intended composite indicator. A list of selection criteria for the underlying variables. the number of employees who have access to computers could be used as a proxy. variables should be selected on the basis of their relevance. Proxy measures can be used when the desired data are unavailable or when crosscountry comparability is limited. caution must be taken in the utilisation of proxy indicators. the type of variables selected – input. What we deem essential is the transparency of these compromises. The quality and accuracy of composite indicators should evolve in parallel with improvements in data collection and indicator development. Clear documentation of the above. To the extent that data permit. etc.© OECD 2008 23 . HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . compromises need to be done when constructing a composite. output.g. data on the number of employees that use computers might not be available. etc. Criteria for assuring the quality of the basic data set for composite indicators are discussed in detail in Section 2: “Quality Framework for Composite Indicators”. analytical soundness.2. The current trend towards constructing composite indicators of country performance in a range of policy areas may provide further impetus to improving data collection. As in the case of soft data. garbageout logic. the data selection process can be quite subjective as there may be no single definitive set of indicators. For example. population.By the end of Step 1 the constructor should have: • • • • A clear understanding and definition of the multidimensional phenomenon to be measured. A lack of relevant data may also limit the developer’s ability to build sound composite indicators. Given a scarcity of internationally comparable quantitative (hard) data.g. trade volume. process. composite indicators often include qualitative (soft) data from surveys or policy reviews. e. timeliness. the accuracy of proxy measures should be checked through correlation and sensitivity analysis. identifying new data sources and enhancing the international comparability of statistics. While the choice of indicators must be guided by the theoretical framework for the composite. A nested structure of the various subgroups of the phenomenon if needed.
this approach ignores possible systematic differences between complete and incomplete samples and produces unbiased estimates only if deleted records are a random subsample of the original sample (MCAR assumption). cases are not deleted (Little & Rubin. the same income as people who do report income.g. When there are reasons to assume a nonrandom missing pattern (NMAR). on average.© OECD 2008 . if a variable has more than 5% missing values. Data can be missing in a random or nonrandom fashion. also called complete case analysis. on average. Furthermore.e. standard errors will generally be larger in a reduced sample. simply omits the missing records from the analysis. but are conditional on other variables in the data set. MCAR or MAR. while most of the methods that impute missing values require a missing at random mechanism. the probability of missing income is unrelated to the value of income. Unfortunately.g. availability (across country.3. Missing at random (MAR). Discussed the strengths and weaknesses of each selected indicator. As a rule of thumb. For example. e. time). e. hotand 24 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . soft or input. then survey question 2 is not to be answered. for the people who did not report their income and the people who did report their income. Missing by design. e.By the end of Step 2 the constructor should have: • • • Checked the quality of the available indicators. Missing values depend on the values themselves. There are three general methods for dealing with missing data: (i) case deletion. (ii) single imputation or (iii) multiple imputation. However. regression imputation. mean/median/mode substitution. given that less information is used. Missing values do not depend on the variable of interest. The missing patterns could be: Missing completely at random (MCAR). process). the missing values in variable income would be of the MCAR type if (i) people who do not report their income have. the pattern must be explicitly modelled and included in the analysis.g. The other two approaches consider the missing data as part of the analysis and try to impute values through either single imputation. are also MAR as missingness depends on the covariates. if survey question 1 is answered yes. Imputation of missing data The idea of imputation could be both seductive and dangerous Missing data often hinder the development of robust composite indicators. 1. high income households are less likely to report their income. Created a summary table on data characteristics. This could be very difficult and could imply ad hoc assumptions that are likely to influence the result of the entire exercise. For example. source. there is no statistical test for NMAR and often no basis on which to judge whether data are missing at random or systematically. Missing values do not depend on the variable of interest or on any other observed variable in the data set. and if (ii) each of the other variables in the data set would have to be the same. type (hard. output. For example. within each category of marital status. The first. i. the missing values in income would be MAR if the probability of missing data on income depends on marital status but. 2002). Not missing at random (NMAR).
whether negative imputed values are possible. This can lead to indices which overwhelm. It is seductive because it can lull the user into the pleasurable state of believing that the data are complete after all. as well as heuristically for their meaningfulness. and it is dangerous because it lumps together situations where the problem is sufficiently minor that it can be legitimately handled in this way and situations where standard estimators applied to real and imputed data have substantial bias. there has been an increase in the number of composite indicators being developed by various national and international agencies. Unfortunately. weighting and aggregation. This preliminary step is helpful in assessing the suitability of the data set and will provide an understanding of the implications of the methodological choices. e. The analyst must first decide whether the nested structure of the composite indicator is well defined (see Step 1) and whether the set of 25 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . Some analysts characterise this environment as “indicator rich but information poor”. However. individual indicators are sometimes selected in an arbitrary manner with little attention paid to the interrelationships between them.4. single imputation is known to underestimate the variance. Discussed the presence of outliers in the dataset Documented and explained the selected imputation procedures and the results. Multivariate analysis Analysing the underlying structure of the data is still an art Over the last few decades. confuse and mislead decisionmakers and the general public.g. 1. This makes it possible to take into account the effects of imputation in the course of the analysis. • Grouping information on individual indicators. No imputation model is free of assumptions and the imputation results should hence be thoroughly checked for their statistical properties. such as distributional characteristics. Data imputation could lead to the minimisation of bias and the use of ‘expensive to collect’ data that would otherwise be discarded by case deletion. By the end of Step 3 the constructor should have: • • • • A complete data set without missing values. can more effectively represent the uncertainty due to imputation. Markov Chain Monte Carlo algorithm. The uncertainty in the imputed data should be reflected by variance estimates. e. However. because it partially reflects the imputation uncertainty. it can also allow data to influence the type of imputation. A measure of the reliability of each imputed value so as to explore the impact of imputation on the composite indicator. In the words of Dempster & Rubin (1983): The idea of imputation is both seductive and dangerous. The underlying nature of the data needs to be carefully analysed before the construction of a composite indicator. expectationmaximisation imputation.colddeck imputation. Information can be grouped and analysed along at least two dimensions of the data set: individual indicators and countries.g.© OECD 2008 . or multiple imputation.g. The multiple imputation method. e. during the construction phase of the composite indicator. which provides several values for each missing value.
Cluster analysis is another tool for classifying large amounts of information into manageable sets. Factor analysis (FA) is similar to PCA. • Grouping information on countries. Table 2. This is achieved by transforming correlated variables into a new set of uncorrelated variables using a covariance matrix or its standardised form – the correlation matrix. e. new countries. When the number of variables is large or when is it believed that some of them do not contribute to identifying the clustering structure in the data set. (iii) a method of disseminating information on the composite indicator without losing that on the dimensions of the individual indicators. can be used to explore whether the dimensions of the phenomenon are statistically wellbalanced in the composite indicator. it is important to avoid carrying out multivariate analysis if the sample is small compared to the number of indicators.g. Researchers frequently carry out a PCA and then apply a clustering algorithm on the object scores on the first few components. as individual indicators that are similar across countries are of little interest and cannot possibly explain differences in performance. called “tandem analysis”. Minimisation of the contribution of individual indicators which do not move with other individual indicators. which may introduce a spurious variability in the data. However. 26 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . which are particularly relevant when the focus is on a limited set of countries. Sensitive to modifications in the basic data: data revisions and updates. such as principal components analysis. However. and (iv) a method for selecting groups of countries for the imputation of missing data with a view to decreasing the variance of the imputed values. This decision can be based on expert opinion and the statistical structure of the data set. continuous and discrete models can be applied sequentially.© OECD 2008 . It has been applied to a wide variety of research problems and fields. Strengths and weaknesses of multivariate analysis Strengths Principal Components/ Factor Analysis Can summarise a set of individual indicators while preserving the maximum possible proportion of the total variation in the original data set. as PCA or FA may identify dimensions that do not necessarily help to reveal the clustering structure in the data and may actually mask the taxonomic information (Table 2). The goal of principal components analysis (PCA) is to reveal how different variables change in relation to each other and how they are associated. Cluster analysis serves as: (i) a purely statistical method of aggregation of the indicators. ii) a diagnostic tool for exploring the impact of the methodological choices made during the construction phase of the composite indicator. Sensitive to the presence of outliers. but is based on a particular statistical model.available individual indicators is sufficient or appropriate to describe the phenomenon (see Step 2). a desirable property for crosscountry comparisons. An alternative way to investigate the degree of correlation among a set of variables is to use the Cronbach coefficient alpha (calpha). If not. Weaknesses Correlations do not necessarily represent the real influence of the individual indicators on the phenomenon being measured. caution is required. a revision of the individual indicators might be necessary. from medicine to psychiatry and archaeology. Different analytical approaches. which is the most common estimate of internal consistency of items in a model or survey. Sensitive to smallsample problems. Cluster analysis is also used in the development of composite indicators to group information on countries based on their similarity on different individual indicators. since results will not have known statistical properties. These multivariate analysis techniques are useful for gaining insight into the structure of the data set of the composite. Largest factor loadings are assigned to the individual indicators that have the largest variation across countries.
factorial kmeans analysis has a fast alternating leastsquares algorithm that extends its application to large data sets. Thus it is useful to cluster similar objects. how well they describe a unidimensional construct. A discrete clustering model together with a continuous factorial model are fitted simultaneously to twoway data to identify the best partition of the objects. gives some insight into the structure of the data set. Jacobs et al. Country performance in absolute terms however cannot be evaluated as information on levels is lost. Weaknesses Correlations do not necessarily represent the real influence of the individual indicators on the phenomenon expressed by the composite indicator. Factorial kmeans analysis combines kmeans cluster analysis with aspects of FA and PCA. 27 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 ..© OECD 2008 .e. This has a wide range of applications since it achieves a double objective: data reduction and synthesis. countries. Ranking is the simplest normalisation technique. simultaneously in the direction of objects and variables. Cluster Analysis Offers a different way to group countries. Normalisation of data Avoid adding up apples and oranges Normalisation is required prior to any data aggregation as the indicators in a data set often have different measurement units.g. Various alternative methods combining cluster analysis and the search for a lowdimensional representation have been proposed.Strengths Cronbach Coefficient Alpha Measures the internal consistency in the set of individual indicators.e. Analysed the structure of the data set and compared this to the theoretical framework. This method is not affected by outliers and allows the performance of countries to be followed over time in terms of relative positions (rankings). 2003. Documented the results of the multivariate analysis and the interpretation of the components and factors. i. 2003). i. may not be transparent if the methodological choices made during the analysis are not motivated and clearly explained. PCA. 2001) and the Medicare Study on Healthcare Performance across the United States (Jencks et al. This methodology can be recommended as an alternative to the widelyused tandem analysis. e. Applied the suitable multivariate methodology. individual indicators. as the sum of the individual indicators). By the end of Step 4 the constructor should have: • • • • • Checked the underlying structure of the data along various dimensions. Purely a descriptive tool. described by the best orthogonal linear combinations of the variables (factors) according to the leastsquares criterion. focusing on multidimensional scaling or unfolding analysis. cluster analysis.e. A number of normalisation methods exist (Table 3) (Freudenberg. 2004): 1. 1. Some examples that use ranking include: the Information and Communications Technology Index (Fagerberg..5. FA. Identified subgroups of indicators or groups of countries that are statistically “similar”. Meaningful only when the composite indicator is computed as a ‘scale’ (i. Originally applied to shortterm macroeconomic data.
if an extremely good result on a few indicators is thought to be better than a lot of average scores. 5. and the value for country B is 25% above the mean. the values between the 65th and the 85th percentiles receive 60 points. all the way to 0 points. is based on extreme values which could be unreliable outliers. any change in the definition of the indicator over time will not affect the transformed variable. e. This could be a target to be reached in a given time frame. Categories can be numerical. For example. two or three stars. or qualitative.2. the percentile bands force the categorisation on the data. This effect can be corrected in the aggregation methodology. in which the leading country receives 1 and the others are given percentage points away from the leader. Since the same percentile transformation is used for different years. it is difficult to follow increases over time. 6. however. increasing the effect on the composite indicator more than the zscore transformation. Often. HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . extreme values/or outliers could distort the transformed indicator. Distance to a reference measures the relative position of a given indicator visàvis a reference point. For example.2 However. However. 1] by subtracting the minimum value and dividing by the range of the indicator values. Standardisation (or zscores) converts indicators to a common scale with a mean of zero and standard deviation of one. i. Categorical scale assigns a score for each indicator. the top 5% receive a score of 100. This might not be desirable if the intention is to reward exceptional behaviour. whereas those above/below a certain threshold receive 1 and 1 respectively. the scores are based on the percentiles of the distribution of the indicator across countries. Besides. the units between the 85th and 95th percentiles receive 80 points. Indicators above or below the mean are transformed such that values around the mean receive 0. The reference could also be an external benchmark country. while other countries would receive scores depending on their distance from the average. For example.g. by excluding the best and worst individual indicator scores from inclusion in the index or by assigning differential weights based on the “desirability” of the individual indicator scores. 2001a). MinMax normalises indicators to have an identical range [0. such as one. thereby rewarding the best performing countries and penalising the worst. the Kyoto Protocol has established an 8% reduction target for CO2 emissions by 2010 for European Union members. the Summary Innovation Index (EC. if the value of a given indicator for country A is 3 times (300%) above the mean. the reference country could be the average country of the group and would be assigned a value of 1. Indicators with extreme values thus have a greater effect on the composite indicator. The reference country could also be the group leader. standardised indicators that are higher than 1 indicate countries with aboveaverage performance. Categorical scales exclude large amounts of information about the variance of the transformed indicators. 28 . such as ‘fully achieved’. when there is little variation within the original scores. MinMax normalisation could widen the range of indicators lying within a small interval. A possible solution is to adjust the percentile brackets across the individual indicators in order to obtain transformed categorical variables with almost normal distributions. Hence. However.© OECD 2008 3..g. ‘partly achieved’ or ‘not achieved’. 4. irrespective of the underlying distribution. This normalisation method is simple and is not affected by outliers. e. For example. both countries would be counted as ‘above average’ with a threshold of 20% around the mean. This approach. On the other hand.e. the United States and Japan are often used as benchmarks for the composite indicators built in the framework of the EU Lisbon agenda. the arbitrariness of the threshold level and the omission of absolute level information are often criticised. Alternatively.
Percentage of annual differences over consecutive years represents the percentage growth with respect to the previous year instead of the absolute level. This method implicitly gives less weight to the more irregular series in the cyclical movement of the composite indicator. 2001b. See. 2004). e.7. The transformation can be used only when the indicators are available for a number of years. 9. Methods for cyclical indicators.. 2002. for example. and to better forecast cycles in economic activities (Nilsson. 2004a). and the EU economic sentiment indicators (EC. Tarantola et al. 2000). The latter is a special case of balance of opinions. 8. unless some prior ad hoc smoothing is performed. Tarantola et al. Internal Market Index (EC.© OECD 2008 29 . The results of business tendency surveys are usually combined into composite indicators to reduce the risk of false signals. HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . in which managers of firms from different sectors and of varying sizes are asked to express their opinion on their firm’s performance.. the OECD composite leading indicators.g.
4. Balance of opinions (EC) t I qc = 100 Ne t xqc Ne e t sgn e xqc ( t xqc 1 ) 9. Pi is x t qc and p an arbitrary threshold around the mean. the ith percentile of the distribution of the indicator Ne is the total number of experts surveyed. 30 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . Ranking 2.© OECD 2008 . The normalisation method should take into account the data properties. however. 2004) or transformation or highly skewed indicators.e. Percentage of annual differences over consecutive years t x qc t I qc = t xqc 1 t xqc Note: is the value of indicator q for country c at time t. +1 if the argument is positive. The operator sgn gives the sign of the argument (i. Categorical scales Example: 0 20 I = t qc t if xqc < P15 if P15 if P 25 if P 65 if P 85 t xqc < P 25 t xqc < P 65 t xqc < P 85 t xqc < P 95 t xqc 40 60 80 100 if P 95 6. is not trivial and deserves special attention to eventual scale adjustments (Ebert & Welsh. c is the reference country. Cyclical indicators (OECD) I = t qc Et x ( t qc ( ) E (x ) ) t qc 8.Table 3. as well as the objectives of the composite indicator. 1 if the argument is negative). Robustness tests might be needed to assess their impact on the outcomes. MinMax I = t qc t I qc = t t max c ( xq0 ) min c ( xq0 ) t xqc t0 xqc = c . Normalisation methods Method 1. Indicators above or below the mean 1 I t qc if w > (1 + p) (1 + p) = 0 if (1 p ) w 1 if w < (1 p) t0 t w = xqc xqc = c t xqc t Et xqc t where 7. Distance to a reference country or t I qc = t xqc t0 xqc = c t0 xqc = c 5. The selection of a suitable method. Standardisation (or zscores) t t I qc = Rank ( xqc ) Equation t I qc = t xqc t xqc = c t qc = c t xqc t min c ( xq0 ) 3.
then applying equal weighting to the variables may imply an unequal weighting of the dimension (the dimensions grouping the larger number of variables will have higher weight). Documented and explained the selected normalisation procedure and the results. but it could also disguise the absence of a statistical or an empirical basis. This essentially implies that all variables are “worth” the same in the composite. depending on expert opinion. 2. In any case.© OECD 2008 31 . Most composite indicators rely on equal weighting (EW). others might reward (or punish) components that are deemed more (or less) influential. At least with the multicriteria methods requiring weights as importance coefficients.g. if variables are grouped into dimensions and those are further aggregated into the composite. e. weights are essentially value judgements. While some analysts might choose weights based only on statistical methods. data envelopment analysis and unobserved components models (UCM). analytic hierarchy processes (AHP) and conjoint analysis (CA). Weighting and aggregation The relative importance of the indicators is a source of contention When used in a benchmarking framework. weights can have a significant effect on the overall composite indicator and the country rankings. 3. Transformed highly skewed indicators. BOD requires additive aggregation. A number of weighting techniques exist (Table 4). but implicitly implies that the weights are equal. or from participatory methods like budget allocation processes (BAP). to better reflect policy priorities or theoretical factors.e. when there is insufficient knowledge of causal relationships or a lack of consensus on the alternative.6. 1. Regardless of which method is used. Moreover. such as factor analysis. Some are derived from statistical models. Normalized with the MinMax method. With both linear and geometric aggregations weights are tradeoffs and not “importance” coefficients. equal weighting does not mean “no weights”. Table 4. Compatibility between aggregation and weighting methods Weighting methods EW PCA/FA BOD UCM BAP AHP CA Linear Yes Yes 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 4 Aggregation methods Geometric Yes Yes 2 No 2 No Yes Yes Yes 4 Multicriteria Yes Yes 2 No 2 No Yes 3 No 3 No 1.By the end of Step 5 the constructor should have: • • • • Selected the appropriate normalisation procedure(s) with reference to the theoretical framework and to the properties of the data. all variables are given the same weight. if necessary. Made scale adjustments. i. HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . This could result in an unbalanced structure in the composite index. if necessary. similar arguments apply to UCM. 4. Unobserved component and conjoint analysis approaches are explained in the “Toolbox for Constructors”.
1997). a rule of thumb should be introduced to define a threshold beyond which the correlation is a symptom of double counting. Public opinion polls have been extensively used over the years as they are easy and inexpensive to carry out (Parker. On the other hand. citizens and politicians – can be used to assign weights. If too many indicators are involved. giving less weight to correlated indicators. Alternatively. double counting should not only be determined by statistical analysis but also by the analysis of the indicator itself visàvis the rest of indicators and the phenomenon they all aim to capture. Statistical models such as principal components analysis (PCA) or factor analysis (FA) could be used to group individual indicators according to their degree of correlation. the unique dimension that the two indicators measure would have weight ( w1 + w2 ) in the composite. In the budget allocation approach. such as the “benefit of the doubt” (BOD) approach. cannot be estimated with these methods if no correlation exists between indicators.Weights may also be chosen to reflect the statistical quality of the data. or deliver contradictory results. Note that there will almost always be some positive correlation between different measures of the same aggregate. this method could be biased towards the readily available indicators. Thus. such as transparency and parsimony. relating correlation analysis to weighting could be dangerous when motivated by apparent redundancy. experts are given a “budget” of N points. When using equal weights. in Moldan et al. Other statistical methods. I 2 ) or should the two indicators be considered to measure different aspects of innovation and adoption of communication technologies and therefore bear equal weight in the construction of the composite? If weights should ideally reflect the contribution of each indicator to the composite. Aggregation methods also vary. see Box 7) – and to choose only indicators which exhibit a low degree of correlation or to adjust weights correspondingly. to be distributed over a number of individual indicators. are extremely parsimonious about weighting assumptions as they allow the data to decide on the weights and are sensitive to national priorities. 1994.88 in 2003: given the high correlation. it may happen that – by combining variables with a high degree of correlation – an element of double counting may be introduced into the index: if two collinear indicators are included in the composite index with a weight of w1 and w2 .© OECD 2008 . While the linear aggregation method is useful when all individual indicators have the same measurement unit. However. in the CI of eBusiness Readiness the indicator I 1 “Percentage of firms using Internet” and indicator I 2 “Percentage of enterprises that have a website” display a correlation of 0. provided that some mathematical properties are respected. minimizing the number of variables in the index may be desirable on other grounds. The response has often been to test indicators for statistical correlation – for example using the Pearson correlation coefficient (Manly. such references are often not available. 1991). For example. this method can induce serious cognitive stress in the experts who are asked to allocate the budget. e. is it permissible to give less weight to the pair ( I 1 . Geometric aggregations are better suited if the modeller wants some degree of non compensability 32 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . participatory methods that incorporate various stakeholders – experts. 2007). For international comparisons. Higher weights could be assigned to statistically reliable data with broad coverage.g. Furthermore. Weights. 2005a. The existing literature offers a quite rich menu of alternative weighting methods all having pros and cons.. This approach is feasible when there is a welldefined basis for a national policy (Munda. However. however. with BOD weights are country specific and have a number of estimation problems. “paying” more for those indicators whose importance they want to stress (Jesinghaus. penalising the information that is statistically more problematic to identify and measure. The budget allocation is optimal for a maximum of 1012 indicators.
keeping weights unchanged across time might be justified if the researcher is willing to analyse the evolution of a certain number of variables. The absence of an “objective” way to determine weights and aggregation methods does not necessarily lead to rejection of the validity of composite indicators. 2007). If. the compensability is constant. a country would have a greater incentive to address those sectors/activities/alternatives with low scores if the aggregation were geometric rather than linear. Consequently. the objective of the analysis is that of defining best practice or of setting priorities.© OECD 2008 33 . instead. HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . however. i. the marginal utility from an increase in low absolute score would be much higher than in a high absolute score under geometric aggregation. if different goals are equally legitimate and important. in particular methods that do not allow compensability. other aggregation methods should be used. as this would give it a better chance of improving its position in the ranking (Munda & Nardo. then weights should necessarily change over time. In a linear aggregation. This is usually the case when highly different dimensions are aggregated in the composite. if compensability is admitted (as in the case of pure economic indicators). A noncompensatory multicriteria approach (MCA) could assure noncompensability by finding a compromise between two or more legitimate goals. On the other hand. and the chosen model must be tested to see to what extent it fulfils the modeller’s goal. as in the case of environmental indices that include physical. In terms of policy. To ensure that weights remain a measure of importance. social and economic data. countries with low scores prefer a linear rather than a geometric aggregation. as the number of permutations to calculate increases exponentially (Munda & Nardo. Furthermore. Weights do not change with MCA. while geometric aggregations reward those countries with higher scores. If the analyst decides that an increase in economic performance cannot compensate for a loss in social cohesion or a worsening in environmental sustainability. This implies an inconsistency between how weights are conceived (usually measuring the importance of the associated variable) and the actual meaning when geometric or linear aggregations are used. 2005). in benchmarking exercises. as long as the entire process is transparent. a noncompensatory logic might be necessary. a country with low scores on one indicator will need a much higher score on the others to improve its situation when geometric aggregation is used. linear aggregations reward baseindicators proportionally to the weights. while with geometric aggregations compensability is lower for the composite indicators with low values.e. The modeller’s objectives must be clearly stated at the outset. being associated to the intrinsic value of the indicators used to explain the phenomenon. then neither the linear nor the geometric aggregation is suitable. With regard to the time element. In both linear and geometric aggregations. This method. weights express tradeoffs between indicators. Thus. A deficit in one dimension can thus be offset (compensated) by a surplus in another. those countries having a greater advantage (disadvantage) in individual indicators. In its basic form this approach does not reward outliers.between individual indicators or dimensions. Moreover. as in the case of the evolution of the EC Internal Market Index from 1992 to 2002. as it retains only ordinal information. could be computationally costly when the number of countries is high.
not abandoning the index. e. 5. The results of the robustness analysis are generally reported as country rankings with their related uncertainty bounds.” (UN. Tarantola et al. Sensitivity analysis assesses the contribution of the individual source of uncertainty to the output variance. e. on the selection of indicators.. the iterative use of uncertainty and sensitivity analysis during the development of a composite indicator could improve its structure (Saisana et al.. weights and aggregation methods. The robustness of the composite indicators and the underlying policy messages may thus be contested. Using different plausible values for the weights. aggregation method. etc. While uncertainty analysis is used more often than sensitivity analysis and is almost always treated separately.By the end of Step 6 the constructor should have: • • • • • Selected the appropriate weighting and aggregation procedure(s) with reference to the theoretical framework. Discussed whether correlation issues among indicators should be accounted for Discussed whether compensability among indicators should be allowed Documented and explained the weighting and aggregation procedures selected. single or multiple imputation. Using alternative data normalisation schemes. normalisation. etc. 1. data normalisation. 7. such as MniMax. But this is an argument for improving the data. use of rankings. 6.g. analytic hierarchy process) and endogenous weighting (benefit of the doubt). e.g. 3. data quality. Robustness and sensitivity Sensitivity analysis can be used to assess the robustness of composite indicators Several judgements have to be made when constructing composite indicators. Modelling data error based on the available information on variance estimation.g.g.© OECD 2008 . and multicriteria ordering. which are due to the uncertainties at play. Using different aggregation systems. Gall. 2.7. 2007). 1992). geometric mean of unscaled variables. Ideally. The consideration of the uncertainty inherent in the development of a composite indicator is mentioned in very few studies. Considered the possibility of using alternative methods (multimodelling principle). weighting. standardisation. Inclusion and exclusion of individual indicators. Using different weighting schemes. methods from the participatory family (budget allocation. 4. e. Using alternative editing schemes. A combination of uncertainty and sensitivity analysis can help gauge the robustness of the composite indicator and improve transparency. 2000. This makes it possible to communicate to the user the plausible range of the composite indicator 34 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . all potential sources of uncertainty should be addressed: selection of individual indicators. 2005a. linear. The approach taken to assess uncertainties could include the following steps: 1. Uncertainty analysis focuses on how uncertainty in the input factors propagates through the structure of the composite indicator and affects the composite indicator values. The Human Development Index produced annually since 1990 by the United Nations Development Programme has encouraged improvement of the indicators used in its formulation: “No index can be better than the data it uses.
While they can be used as summary indicators to guide policy and data work. Bayesian networks and structural equation modelling could help to further illuminate the relationship between the composite and its components. This shows that a country like Finland is very strong in human skills and diffusion of recent innovations. each subcomponent of the index has been further disaggregated.© OECD 2008 35 . while Japan is strong in technology creation but weaker in human skills. Back to the details Deconstructing composite indicators can help extend the analysis Composite indicators provide a starting point for analysis. which contribute differently to the aggregated composite indicator and country rankings (Figure 1). Nevertheless the statistical analysis could (and should) help in thinking about the framework used.values for each country.g. they can also be decomposed such that the contribution of subcomponents and individual indicators can be identified and the analysis of country performance extended. Scatter plots help to reveal patterns in the inputoutput relationships. HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . e. We already claimed that a sound theoretical framework is the primary ingredient. Conducted sensitivity analysis of the inference. There is no optimal way of presenting individual indicators and country profiles can be presented variously. Assessed the impact of the uncertainties/assumptions on the final result. Is the assessment of robustness enough for guaranteeing a sensible composite? Certainly not. Documented and explained the sensitivity analyses and the results. Tools like path analysis. (ii) spider diagrams and (iii) traffic light presentations. The following discusses three examples: (i) leaders and laggards. The decomposition of the composite indicator can thus shed light on the overall performance of a given country. the TAI index has four subcomponents. The sensitivity analysis results are generally shown in terms of the sensitivity measure for each input source of uncertainty. getting the theoretical model correct is the main challenge of a composite. To profile national innovation performance. to show what sources of uncertainty are more influential in determining the relative ranking of two entities. The results of a sensitivity analysis are often also shown as scatter plots with the values of the composite indicator for a country on the vertical axis and each input source of uncertainty on the horizontal axis. The individual indicators are then used to show strengths and weaknesses. 1. in our experience. By the end of Step 7 the constructor should have: • • • • Identified the sources of uncertainty in the development of the composite indicator. This is a sort of “backward thinking” that should enable the modeller to answer questions like: “does the theoretical derived model provide a good fit to the data? What the lack of fit tells about the conceptual definition of the composite of the indicators chosen for it? What concept would the available indicators good measure of? Is that concept useful? Proving an answer to these questions assures the robustness and coherence of the index given that.8. These sensitivity measures represent how much the uncertainty in the composite indicator for a country would be reduced if that particular input source of uncertainty were removed. For example.
0 Finland United States Sweden Japan Rep. In the first example. the laggard and the average performance (Figure 2). of Korea Netherlands United Kingdom Canada Australia Note: Contribution of components to overall Technology Achievement Index (TAI) composite indicator. The sum of these four components equals the overall TAI index.4 0.2 0.5 0.8 Human skills Diffusion of old innovation Diffusion of recent innovation Technology creation 0. Finland’s top ranking is primarily based on having the highest values for the indicators relating to the Internet and university.6 0.Figure 1.7 0.© OECD 2008 .3 0.1 0. while the country’s only weakness relates to the patents indicator. Example of bar chart decomposition presentation 0. 36 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . The figure is constructed by showing the standardised value of the subcomponents multiplied by their individual weights. performance on each indicator can be compared to the leader.
The average of all countries is illustrated by the 100line. Example of leader/laggard decomposition presentation 925 875 825 775 725 675 625 575 525 475 425 375 325 275 225 175 125 75 25 25 TAI Patents Royalties Internet Tech exports Telephones Electricity Schooling University Performance range Finland Note: Technology Achievement Index (TAI).Figure 2. Finland (the dot) is used as an example. The figure is based on the standardised indicators (using distance to the mean).© OECD 2008 37 . Finland is compared to the top three TAI performers and to the United States. 0. Example of spider diagram decomposition presentation TAI 100 90 University 80 70 60 50 40 30 Schooling 20 10 0 Royalties Patents Top 3 (average) Finland United States Electricity Internet T elephones T ech exports Note: Technology Achievement Index (TAI). HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . The best performing country for each indicator takes the value 100. The grey area shows the range of values for that particular indicator. and the worst. Figure 3.
one can use a colour decomposition presentation. By the end of Step 8 the constructor should have: • • • Decomposed the composite indicator into its individual parts and tested for correlation and causality (if possible).Figure 4. here the United States. Here Finland is compared to the three best countries on each indicator and to one other country. and in particular whether the composite indicator is overly dominated by a small number of indicators. Profiled country performance at the indicator level to reveal what is driving the composite indicator results. one indicator in dark grey (tech exports) and five indicators in black where performance is the highest. Upon these considerations it is clear why the overall TAI performance of Finland is in the dark grey zone where scores are above the average (range 6080). grey.© OECD 2008 . This approach is useful when many indicators are used in the composite. For example. 38 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . light grey. Figure 4 shows that Finland has one indicator in white (patents) where performance is relatively low. Example of colour decomposition presentation score Finland TAI Patents Royalties Internet Tech exports Telephones Electricity Schooling University Japan TAI Patents Royalties Internet Tech exports Telephones Electricity Schooling University 74 19 46 86 63 100 100 82 100 Well below Below average average (under 20) (2040) Average (4060) Above average (6080) X Well above average (over 80) X X X X X X X X 70 100 24 21 100 100 100 78 36 X X X X X X X X X Note: Technology Achievement Index (TAI). dark grey. Documented and explained the relative importance of the subcomponents of the composite indicator. where each indicator takes the colour white. or black according to the relative performance of the country. There are several ways to assign colours. Finally. one indicator in grey (royalties). Another way of illustrating country performance is to use spider diagrams or radar charts (Figure 3). In the chosen format five shades of grey are used but the number of shades (or colours) can be reduced or increased as appropriate.
g. as correlation with very heterogeneous groups tends to be misleading. For example. Most countries are close to the trend line. entry of new firms.1. 2000 25000 Italy Australia Finland 20000 Portugal 15000 Greece Spain New Zealand Korea Czech Republic 10000 Mexico Slovakia Poland Hungary 5000 0 0.3 0. Only Norway and Korea are clear outliers. could be linked to entry rates of new firms. 2000 40000 Norway 35000 United States 30000 Austria Ireland Belgium France Canada Netherlands Germany United Kingdom Sweden Japan GDP (PPP) per capita. Norway is an outlier due to revenues from oil reserves. $) and TAI (unitless) equals 0.47.7 0.9. productivity growth. HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . that is.© OECD 2008 39 . Higher technology achievement should lead to higher wealth. while Korea has long prioritised technology development as an industrial strategy to catch up with highincome countries. countries with a high TAI would be expected to have high GDP per capita. Correlating TAI with GDP per capita shows this link (Figure 5). e. Simple crossplots are often the best way to illustrate such links.6 0. Links to other variables Composite indicators can be linked to other variables and measures Composite indicators often measure concepts that are linked to wellknown and measurable phenomena. the Technology Achievement Index helps to assess the position of a country relative to others concerning technology achievements. Link between TAI and GDP per capita.5 TAI 0. An indicator measuring the environment for business startups. Only OECD countries are included in the correlation.8 Note: The correlation is significantly different from zero at the 1% level and r² between GDP (PPP. for example. where good performance on the composite indicator of business environment would be expected to yield higher entry rates.4 0. Figure 5. These links can be used to test the explanatory power of a composite.
2001). the Growth Competitiveness 40 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . More detailed econometric analyses can be used to determine causality. or other) on the degree of correlation between a composite indicator and another variable of interest can be evaluated in a Monte Carlo framework. whether to include a table a graphic or both. Correlation analysis should not be mistaken with causality analysis. in each situation.g. Granger causality tests require time series for all variables.One remark is worthwhile at this point. Composite indicators must be able to communicate a story to decisionmakers and other endusers quickly and accurately. At each simulation. Our examples show three situations where indicator information is communicated graphically. The causality remains unclear in the correlation analysis. The impact of the weights (or normalisation method. Therefore presenter needs to decide. It should be noted that composite indicators often include some of the indicators with which they are being correlated. 1. numbers and graphics working together (see Trufte. for example. A tabular format is the simplest presentation. Tables. Presentation and dissemination A welldesigned graph can speak louder than words The way composite indicators are presented is not a trivial issue. for example. most composite indicators of sustainable development include some measure of GDP as a subcomponent. a weight can. A change in the indicator does not necessarily lead to a change in the composite indicator and vice versa. e. There are plenty of other possibilities. 10. can sometimes obscure sensitive issues immediately visible with a graphical representation. Correlation simply indicates that the variation in the two data sets is similar. which are often not available. the GDP measure should be removed from the composite indicator before running any correlation. Developed datadriven narratives on the results Documented and explained the correlations and the results. In all situations graphics need to be designed carefully for clarity and aesthetics. leading to double counting. Rankings can be used to track changes in country performance over time as. be allowed to vary between 0 and 1 and the simulated weights for all the indicators are then divided by the overall sum of the weights (unity sum property). the Granger causality test. This simulation is repeated 10 000 times and the composite indicator scores for each country (or unit of reference in general) are calculated 10 000 times. the correlation between the composite indicator and the measurable phenomenon can be maximised or minimised by choosing a proper set of weights. However. Tested the links with variations of the composite indicator as determined through sensitivity analysis. in which the composite indicator is presented for each country as a table of values. For example. Countries with high GDP might invest more in technology or more technology might lead to higher GDP. Usually countries are displayed in descending rank order. Alternatively. median and lowest possible correlation determined. In such cases. In all situations we need to have words. The correlation coefficient can thus be calculated for each simulation and the highest.© OECD 2008 . albeit providing the complete information. By the end of Step 9 the constructor should have: • • • • Correlated the composite indicator with related measurable phenomena.
© OECD 2008 41 . which shows the rankings of countries for two consecutive years (Figure 6).org/gcr HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . However. they can be adapted to show targeted information for sets of countries grouped by geographic location. 2004 www. they may be too detailed and not visually appealing. Example of tabular presentation of composite indicator Source: WEF.weforum. While tables are a comprehensive approach to displaying results.Index. GDP. growing or not growing. The underlying individual indicators can also be displayed on a bar chart.3 The top bar can be thought of as a target to be reached by countries. The countries are on the vertical axis and the values of the composite on the horizontal. etc. The top bar indicates the average performance of all countries and enables the reader to identify how a country is performing visàvis the average. Figure 6. The use of colours can make the graph more visually appealing and highlight the countries performing well or not so well. etc. Composite indicators can be expressed via a simple bar chart (Figure 7).
© OECD 2008 .eu/eurostat 42 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . 2007.Figure 7.europa. http:// ec. Example of bar chart presentation of composite indicator Source: (U. Comparative price levels of final consumption by private households including indirect taxes (EU27=100). data source: Eurostat. 2004) Figure 8.K Government. Example of line chart presentation of composite indicator Belgium 150 140 130 Price level 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 2000 2001 2002 Denmark Greece France EU27 2003 2004 2005 2006 Note: EU price level index. JRC elaboration.
pdf For the definition of SII1 see ibid. Countries in the upper quadrant are “moving ahead”. 9. Visualised the results of the composite indicator in a clear and accurate manner. By the end of Step 10 the constructor should have: • • • Identified a coherent set of presentational tools for the target audience. the values of the indicator are linearly transformed so that their indexed value for a given year is 100 (or another integer).eu/pub/focus/docs/innovation_scoreboard_2003_en. at ftp://ftp. in percentage points with respect to the previous year or a number of past years.Figure 9.cordis.g. The indicators can be displayed using. The price level index shows values such that EU27=100 for each year. Example of trend diagram composite indicator Note: 2003 SII1 stands for 2003 EU Summary Innovation Index Source: The European Innovation Scoreboard 2003. When indexed. When a composite indicator is available for a set of countries for at least two different time points. Selected the visualisation technique which communicates the most information. The values for different countries (or different indicators) are shown by different colours and or symbols. Countries in the bottom left quadrant are “falling further behind” because they are below the EU average for both variables. The two axes divide the area into four quadrants. HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . for example.europa. changes or growth rates can be depicted. because both their value and their trend are above the EU average. Line charts can be used to illustrate the changes of a composite (or its dimensions/components) across time.© OECD 2008 43 . with more expensive countries having values greater than 100 and less expensive countries below 100 (Figure 8). In this picture. The EU Summary Innovation Index is used to track relative performance of European countries on innovation indicators (Figure 9). the horizontal axis gives the EU average value and the vertical axis shows the EU trend.. Country trends are reported on the Xaxis and levels are given on the Yaxis (although levels in the abscissa and % changes in the yaxis constitute the usual practice). c) indexed levels and d) indexed growth rates. p. e. Trends in country performance as revealed through a composite indicator can be presented through trend diagrams. b) absolute growth rates. a) absolute levels.
Quality is usually defined as “fitness for use” in terms of user needs. Particularly important are the frameworks developed by Eurostat and the International Monetary Fund (IMF). the autonomy given to statistical agencies. consistency.1. which vary across usergroups. adequate to portray the reality to be captured? 4.g. It is now generally recognised that there are other important dimensions. through coverage of governance. or appear to conflict with other data. Statistics Canada. An evaluation of the way in which national statistical offices (or systems) perform their tasks is carried out by means of a detailed questionnaire to identify the degree of scientific independence of statistical agencies. etc. Statistics Sweden) have been working towards the identification of various dimensions of quality for statistical products. so as to maintain users’ confidence? 2. A QUALITY FRAMEWORK FOR COMPOSITE INDICATORS 2. The five quality dimensions used by the IMF are the following: 1. With regard to the prerequisites of quality. the DQAF assesses how the quality of statistics is affected by the legal and institutional environment and the available resources. quality is a multifaceted concept. this definition is broader than has been used in the past when quality was equated with accuracy. Quality profile for composite indicators The development of a quality framework for composite indicators is not an easy task. addressing a broad range of questions which are captured through (i) the prerequisites of quality and (ii) five quality dimensions. and also whether there is an awareness of quality in the management of statistical activities. International Monetary Fund. Assurance of integrity: What are the features that support firm adherence to objectivity in the production of statistics. The IMF developed the DQAF to assess the overall quality of statistics produced by its member countries. As far as statistics are concerned. related both to the quality of elementary data used to build the indicator and the soundness of the procedures used in its construction. etc. and their revision cycle? 5. Methodological soundness: How do the current practices relate to the internationally agreed methodological practices for specific statistical activities? 3. the overall quality of the composite indicator depends on several aspects. needs and priorities. statistical processes and observable features of the outputs. In fact. cannot be easily accessed.© OECD 2008 . With the adoption of the European Statistics Code of Practice in 2005. statistical techniques. their frequency. Several organisations (e. the Eurostat quality framework is now quite similar to the IMF’s “Data Quality Framework (DQAF)”.. The most important quality characteristics depend on user perspectives. Eurostat. Accuracy and reliability: Are the source data. in the sense that both frameworks provide a comprehensive approach to quality.2.. Accessibility: Are effective data and metadata easily available to data users and is there assistance to users? 44 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . Thus. Serviceability: How are users’ needs met in terms of timeliness of the statistical products. they cannot be said to be of good quality if they are produced too late to be useful. Even if data are accurate.
Finally. etc. Therefore the 45 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . whose overall quality depends on two aspects: (i) the quality of basic data. In 2003 the OECD published the first version of its “Quality Framework and Guidelines for OECD Statistics” (OECD. documentation. it largely aims to use quantifiable measures. Both elements are equally important: the application of the most advanced approaches to the development of composite indicators based on inaccurate or incoherent data would not produce good quality results. processing.© OECD 2008 . media (paper. marketing conditions (copyright. “Punctuality” refers to the time lag between the target delivery date and the actual date of the release of the data. regardless of the quality of the basic indicators. “Timeliness” refers to the length of time between the availability of the information and the event or phenomenon it describes. etc). and (ii) the quality of internal processes for collection. adapting them to the OECD context. maps. the main aim of the Eurostat quality approach is to ensure that certain standards are met in various aspects of statistical production processes carried out by national statistical agencies and by Eurostat itself. Accuracy refers to the closeness of computations or estimates to the exact or true values. Timeliness and Punctuality. availability of micro or macro data. The European Statistics Code of Practice (Principles 1115) focuses on statistical outputs as viewed by users. and (ii) the quality of procedures used to build and disseminate the composite indicator. the quality of statistics disseminated depends on two aspects: (i) the quality of national statistics received. Accessibility and Clarity. there are some similarities between what the OECD has done in the development of its own quality framework and the characteristics of composite indicators. Comparability refers to the measurement of the impact of differences in applied statistical concepts and measurement tools and procedures when statistics are compared between geographical areas. 5. “Clarity” refers to the statistics’ information environment: appropriate metadata provided with the statistics (textual information. Coherence refers to the adequacy of the data to be reliably combined in different ways and for various uses. 6. composite indicators disseminated without appropriate metadata could easily be misinterpreted. such as measurement errors or days (or months) of publication delay after the reference period. pricing policy. ordering procedures. for an international organisation. 4. Six quality dimensions are considered: 1. nongeographical domains or over time. analysis and dissemination of data and metadata. 3. 2. CDROM. In fact. and other illustrations. then the quality of the composite indicator will be weak. “Accessibility” refers to the physical conditions in which users can access statistics: distribution channels. graphs. If they do not fit with the theoretical concept being measured.). 2003). Internet. availability of information on the statistics’ quality (possible limitation in use). It relies heavily on the results achieved by the international statistical community. explanations.Given the institutional setup of the European Statistical System. etc). Relevance refers to the degree to which statistics meet current and potential needs of the users. In addition. From this point of view. but the quality of a composite indicator will be largely determined by the appropriateness of the indicators used. time required for delivery.
however. these attributes are typically measured or described in terms of the error. Given the actual availability of data. In the case of sample surveybased estimates. In the context of composite indicators. processing. 46 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . and problems in dissemination. For derived estimates. the major sources of error include coverage. Value is characterised by the degree to which statistics meet current and potential needs of the users. An aspect of accuracy is the closeness of the initially released value(s) to the subsequent value(s) of estimates. It depends upon both the coverage of the required topics and the use of appropriate concepts. but in this case some evidence of their relationships with “target” series should be produced whenever possible. and in practical terms it has no single aggregate or overall measure. and valuation and that the techniques used to compensate can only partially succeed. In the following section each is considered separately 2. ”proxy” series are often used. In particular. introduced through individual major sources of error. and (iv) updating of the base year for constantprice estimates. timing. (ii) replacement of judgemental projections with source data.2. In this context it useful to consider the sources of revision. Of necessity. Careful evaluation and selection of basic data have to be carried out to ensure that the right range of domains is covered in a balanced way. a key point of interest is how close a preliminary value is to subsequent estimates. Quality dimensions for basic data The selection of basic data should maximise the overall quality of the final result. the absence of revisions does not necessarily mean that the data are accurate. which include (i) replacement of preliminary source data with later data. Eurostat and OECD) are to be considered: Relevance The relevance of data is a qualitative assessment of the value contributed by these data. Accuracy has many attributes. and from separation of price and quantity in the preparation of volume measures. from the fact that source data do not fully meet the requirements of the accounts in terms of coverage. In light of the policy and media attention given to first estimates. such as for national accounts or balance of payments. or the potential significance of error. in selecting the data the following dimensions (drawing on the IMF.© OECD 2008 . sources of error arise from the surveys and censuses that provide source data. Smaller and fewer revisions is an aim. Accuracy The accuracy of basic data is the degree to which they correctly estimate or describe the quantities or characteristics that they are designed to measure. (iii) changes in definitions or estimating procedures. Accuracy refers to the closeness between the values provided and the (unknown) true values. nonresponse.quality framework for composite indicators must consider all these aspects. relevance has to be evaluated considering the overall purpose of the indicator. response. sampling. from seasonal adjustment.
thus. given improvements in electronic access to databases released by various sources. Timeliness The timeliness of data products reflects the length of time between their availability and the event or phenomenon they describe. In this respect. largely determines the degree of interpretability. Other things being equal. timeliness is especially important to minimise the need for the estimation of missing data or for revisions of previously published data.In the context of composite indicators. taking into account institutional. In the context of composite indicators. pricing policy. One important aspect is trust in the objectivity of the data. It also includes the affordability of the data to users in relation to its value to them and whether the user has a reasonable opportunity to know that the data are available and how to access them.e. The credibility of data products refers to confidence that users place in those products based simply on their image of the data producer. the conditions in which users can access statistics (such as distribution channels. etc. Here the issue of credibility of the source becomes crucial. Therefore special attention must be paid to the overall coherence of the vintages of data used to build composite indicators (see also coherence). if any. but should also take other quality dimensions into account. Closely related to the dimension of timeliness. Punctuality implies the existence of a publication schedule and reflects the degree to which data are released in accordance with it. but considered in the context of the time period that permits the information to be of value and to be acted upon. data are not manipulated. variables and terminology underlying the data and of the information describing the limitations of the data. Thus. the media of dissemination. The adequacy of the definitions of concepts. the only difference is the timeframe. Interpretability The interpretability of data products reflects the ease with which the user may understand and properly use and analyse the data. and the availability of metadata and user support services. the issue of coherence across data sets can become relevant. The range of different users leads to considerations such as multiple dissemination formats and selective presentation of metadata. the brand image. accessibility includes the suitability of the form in which the data are available. This implies that the data are perceived to be produced professionally in accordance with appropriate statistical standards and policies and that practices are transparent (for example. HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . Definitional and procedural metadata assist in interpretability. the coherence of these metadata is an aspect of interpretability. data produced by “official sources” (e. Accessibility The accessibility of data products reflects how readily the data can be located and accessed from original sources.g. copyright. accessibility of basic data can affect the overall cost of production and updating of the indicator over time. the selection of the source should not always give preference to the most accessible source. national statistical offices or other public bodies working under national statistical regulations or codes of conduct) should be preferred to other sources. i. data covering different domains are often released at different points of time. nor their release timed in response to political pressure).).© OECD 2008 47 . It can also influence the credibility of the composite indicator if poor accessibility of basic data makes it difficult for third parties to replicate the results of the composite indicators.e. the punctuality of data products is also very important.. target populations. In the context of composite indicators. accuracy of basic data is extremely important. The range of different users leads to considerations such as the presentation of metadata in layers of increasing detail. The concept applies equally to shortterm or structural data. As individual basic data sources establish their optimal tradeoff between accuracy and timeliness. both for national and international data providers. i. Therefore. organisational and resource constraints.
Coherence over time implies that the data are based on common concepts. the wide range of data used to build them and the difficulties due to the aggregation procedure require the full interpretability of basic data. Coherence in its loosest sense implies the data are “at least reconcilable”. Incoherence over time refers to breaks in a series resulting from changes in concepts. 48 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . Furthermore. if two data series purporting to cover the same phenomena differ.© OECD 2008 . and that variations in methodology that might affect data values should not be made without explanation. The proper definition of the theoretical framework affects not only the relevance of the composite indicator. The quality of basic data chosen to build the composite indicator strongly affects its accuracy and credibility. Coherence implies that the same term should not be used without explanation for different concepts or data items. The imputation of missing data affects the accuracy of the composite indicator and its credibility. the interpretability of the composite indicator relies heavily on the correctness of the approach followed in the normalisation phase. or that any differences are explained and can be allowed for. In the following matrix. as well as the normalisation and the aggregation. or that any differences are explained and can be allowed for. definitions. the multivariate analysis is important to increase its reliability. The availability of definitions and classifications used to produce basic data is essential to assess the comparability of data over time and across countries (see coherence): for example. Timeliness can also be greatly influenced by the choice of appropriate data. Therefore the availability of adequate metadata is an important element in the assessment of the overall quality of basic data. The use of multivariate analysis to identify the data structure can increase both the accuracy and the interpretability of final results.3. etc. Quality dimensions for procedures to build and disseminate composite indicators Each phase of the composite indicator building process is important and has to be carried out with quality concerns in mind. the most important links between each phase of the building process and quality dimensions are identified. The normalisation phase is crucial both for the accuracy and the coherence of final results. using the seven dimensions of the OECD Quality Framework (Table 5). From this point of view. On the other hand. even if it can improve the dimension of timeliness. i. two aspects of coherence are especially important: coherence over time and across countries.e. but also its credibility and interpretability. several composite indicators are quite weak and such weakness is often offered as a criticism of the general idea of composite indicators. can affect its accuracy. but also takes into account its theoretical foundation. definitions. the differences in time of recording. 2.In the context of composite indicators. the design of the theoretical framework can affect the relevance of the indicator. and coverage should be identified so that the series can be reconciled. The relevance of a composite indicator is usually evaluated on the basis of analytical and policy needs. valuation. definitions and methodology over time. Coherence The coherence of data products reflects the degree to which they are logically connected and mutually consistent. For example. An inappropriate normalisation procedure can give rise to unreliable or biased results. In the context of composite indicators. This step is also very important to identify redundancies among selected phenomena and to evaluate possible gaps in basic data. the imputation of missing data. that different terms should not be used for the same concept or data item without explanation. too much use of imputation techniques can undermine the overall quality of the indicator and its relevance. series breaks need to be assessed when composite indicators are built to compare performances over time. classifications and methodology. For example. Coherence across countries implies that from country to country the data are based on common concepts. the adequacy of the data to be reliably combined in different ways and for various uses. or methodology.
composite indicators provide a starting point for analysis. To minimise the risks of producing meaningless composite indicators. 2007). Finally. A comparison between the composite indicator and other well known and “classical” measures of relevant phenomena can be very useful to evaluate the capacity of the former to produce meaningful and relevant results. The presentation of composite indicators and their visualisation affects both relevance and interpretability of the results. Analysis of this type can improve the accuracy. credibility and interpretability of the final results. Almost all quality dimensions are affected by this choice. As highlighted in this Handbook. The OECD has recently developed the “Data and Metadata Reporting and Presentation Handbook” (OECD. which has then to be deepened by going back to the detail. sensitivity and robustness analysis are required. In addition. accessibility and interpretability. the dissemination phase is crucial to assure the relevance of the indicator.One of the key issues in the construction of composite indicators is the choice of the weighting and aggregation model. Therefore. which describes practices useful to improve the dissemination of statistical products. citizens. neither the general public (media.© OECD 2008 49 . relevance and interpretability of the results can be strongly reinforced by such comparison. coherence and interpretability. sensitivity checks can help distinguish between significant and insignificant differences. This is also one of the most criticised characteristics of composite indicators: therefore. especially accuracy. Therefore. the indicator developer has to pay special attention to avoid internal contradictions and mistakes when dealing with weighting and aggregating individual indicators. etc. Therefore. Too often statisticians do not pay enough attention to this fundamental phase. Given public and media interest in country rankings. its credibility. if the way in which the indicator is built or disseminated does not allow users and analysts to go into the details. the credibility of the indicator can benefit from its capacity to produce results which are highly correlated with the reference data. Moreover. their comprehension of the results will be largely based on the “messages” transmitted through summary tables or charts. the overall credibility of the exercise can be impaired. Given the complexity of composite indicators. Quality dimensions of composite indicators CONSTRUCTION PHASE Relevance Theoretical framework Data selection Imputation of missing data Multivariate analysis Normalisation Weighting and aggregation Back to the data Robustness and sensitivity Links to other variables Visualisation Dissemination Accuracy Credibility QUALITY DIMENSIONS Timeliness Accessibility Interpretability Coherence HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . Table 5. thus limiting the audience for their products and their overall impact. thereby minimising the risk of misinterpretation and misuse. this analytical phase can affect the relevance of the indicator and also its interpretability.) nor policymakers generally read methodological notes and “caveats”.
.
within the environmental dimension CO2 emissions have to be minimised. Variable: is a constructed measure stemming from a process that represents. for example. individual indicators and variables used. individual indicators and variables. For example. This implies that what formally defines a composite indicator is the set of properties underlying its aggregation convention. in comparing two countries within the economic dimension. For example. The techniques used to standardise indicators of disparate natures into a common unit are also presented. a shared perception of a realworld state of affairs consistent with a given individual indicator. Dimension: is the highest hierarchical level of analysis and indicates the scope of objectives. a sustainability composite indicator can include economic. environmental and institutional dimensions. But this could also be maximized when the hierarchical level is constituted by OECD countries and peer learning is under analysis. A composite indicator or synthetic index is an aggregate of all dimensions. Another example: an objective connected with the social dimension might be “maximisation of residential attractiveness”. some basic definitions are given at the outset. could be minimized when the hierarchical level is the country and the scope of the analysis is. Objective: indicates the desired direction of change. For the sake of clarity. drawing on concepts from multicriteria decision theory and complex system theory (see Munda & Nardo.© OECD 2008 51 . A TOOLBOX FOR CONSTRUCTORS A number of statistical methods are discussed in detail below to provide constructors with the necessary tools for building sound composite indicators. Different methodologies for weighting and aggregating indicators into a composite are explored. The need for multivariate analysis prior to the aggregation of the individual indicators is stressed. This is not always obvious: international mobility of researchers for example.g. objectives. one objective could be “maximisation of economic growth”. Individual indicator: is the basis for evaluation in relation to a given objective (any objective may imply a number of different individual indicators). These definitions have been adapted to the context of composite indicators. saving rate and inflation rate within the objective “growth maximisation”. e. For example. social. the individual indicator might be R&D performance.PART 2. The example of the Technology Achievement Index (TAI) (see Appendix) is used as a baseline case to illustrate differences across various methods and to highlight potential pitfalls. The variable providing the individual indicator score might be the ratio of persons per hectare. GDP. the indicator score or variable could be “number of patents per million of inhabitants”. focusing on the practical implementation of the steps 3 to 8 outlined above. A possible individual indicator could then be “residential density”. within the social dimension social exclusion has to be minimised. The problem of missing data is discussed first. measuring brain drain.4 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . at a given point in space and time. as well as the need to test the robustness of the composite indicator using uncertainty and sensitivity analysis. It is a function that associates each single country with a variable indicating its desirability according to expected consequences related to the same objective. within the economic dimension GDP has to be maximised. 2007).
. q=1. For simplicity of explanation.. both fulfilling the transitive property.. An additional property could be the guarantee that weights are used with the meaning of “importance of the associated individual indicator”. Q. M of countries. 1963) clearly shows that no perfect aggregation convention can exist (see the section on aggregation and weighting).. that is: c j Pc k c j Ic k t t x q (c j ) > x q ( c k ) t t x q (c j ) = x q ( c k ) where P and I indicate a preference and an indifference relation respectively.e. Arrow’s impossibility theorem (Arrow.2. we assume that a higher value of a variable is preferred to a lower one (i. that is.Q.e.c is based on an ordinal. It is therefore essential to check not only which properties are respected by a given ranking procedure. all ad hoc parameters should be avoided.6 The method r Wr ={ wr .2.. let us assume that the variable (i..c }. The manipulation rules should be as objective and simple as possible.e. interval or ratio scale of measurement (Box 3).q }..q mathematical problem is then how to use this available information to rank in a complete preorder (i.5 Let us also assume the existence of a set of indicator weights (calculated according to the weighting w = 1 .. and a finite set: C={ ci }. with q r .. the individual indicator score) t of each country ci with respect to an individual indicator x q .© OECD 2008 . without any incomparability relation) all the countries from the best to the worst.t Given a set of Q individual indicators for country c at time t: X ct ={ x q . derived as importance coefficients. i=1. the better). 2.. In doing so the following operational properties are desirable: • • The sources of uncertainty and imprecise assessment should be reduced as much as possible. the higher. q=1. but also whether any essential property for the problem being tackled has been lost... 52 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 .
while that measured on an interval or ratio scale is called quantitative. therefore it is necessary to find a procedure for pairing each object with another number.).Box 3. weight. or measurement at the ordinal level. In principle it is possible to assign a number t(o). etc. and o1 and o2 (a) O. which can be called its numerical measurement. A fundamental point in measurement theory is that of the uniqueness of scale. Any measurement procedure for which equation (a) applies is an example of ordinal scaling. information measured on a nominal or ordinal scale is called qualitative information.). preference for seaside resorts. Sometimes this is called categorical or nominal scaling (e.e. Furthermore. such as value. profession. Ideally. by this rule it is possible to say that if two measurements are unequal. it is unique up to a strictly monotone increasing transformation (with infinite degrees of liberty). HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . Suppose that the statement of equation (b) is true: m(o1 ) m(o2 ) only if t (o1 ) t (o2 ) m(o1 ) > m(o2 ) only if t (o1 ) > t (o2 ) t (o) = x iff m(o) = ax + b.g.). Measurement scales 7 Let us start by clarifying what a measurement scale is. Often. restaurant ratings. In the case of an ordinal scale. the numerical measurement m(o) is some affine function of the true magnitude x. to measure an object o. The measurement R . the measurement operation is called interval scaling. Measurement operations or procedures differ in the information that the numerical measurements themselves provide about the true magnitudes. Let us suppose that there is a measurement rule for assigning a number m(o) to each object suppose that the following statements are true for any pair of objects o O . then one magnitude exceeds another. However. let us suppose that each object o has a certain amount or degree of that property. 1979. weight. An interval scale is unique up to a positive affine transformation (with two degrees of freedom).© OECD 2008 53 . this is not always possible. or measurement at the intervalscale level. age. marital status.g. Other measurement procedures associate objects o O with a real number m(o). m(o). where much stronger statements can be made about the true magnitudes from the numerical measurements.g. There are at least three kinds of numerical measurement that can be distinguished (Roberts. standing for the amount that o actually "has" of that characteristic. this number reflects a magnitude of some quantitative property (how to assign this number constitutes the socalled representation problem). to any object o O. height. etc. which admissable transformations of scale allow for the truth or falsity of the statement involving numerical scales to remain unchanged (problem of meaningfulness). Imagine a set of objects O. classification according to gender. The set of equivalence classes itself is called a nominal scale. interval scale (e. we would like to determine this number t(o) directly. i. intelligence or motivation. 1990): these are called ordinal scale (e. The process of grouping individual observations into qualitative classes is measurement at its most primitive level. where a R + (b) where iff stands for “if and only if”. When equation (b) applies. That is. temperature) and ratio scale (e. and if one measurement is larger than another. etc. instructing how to give an object o its m(o) value in a procedure used constitutes a function rule m : O systematic way. m(o1 ) m(o2 ) only if t (o1 ) t (o2 ) m(o1 ) > m(o2 ) only if t (o1 ) > t (o2 ) In other words.g. and suppose that there is some property that all objects in the set possess. Vansnick. The word measurement is usually reserved for the situation in which a number is assigned to each observation. length.
Of course. ratios of numerical measurements are unique and can be interpreted directly as ratios of magnitudes of objects. From this point of view. However. it is sometimes possible to find measurement operations making the statement of equation (c) true: m(o1 ) m(o2 ) only if t (o1 ) t (o2 ) m(o1 ) > m(o2 ) only if t (o1 ) > t (o2 ) t (o) = x iff m(o) = ax. and even this level of measurement is all too rare in social sciences. it is better to have a ratio scale than an interval scale. especially in the physical sciences. and it is better to have an interval scale than an ordinal scale. For such scales. the ratio between differences is unique (with only one degree of liberty). in this case. and the results can be interpreted as statements about magnitudes of the underlying property. This is not possible for ordinalscale numbers but can be done for differences between intervalscale numbers. the more meaningful the statements involving that scale. A ratio scale is unique up to a linear transformation. then measurement is said to be at the ratioscale level.When measurement is at the interval scale level. where a R + (c) When the measurement operation defines a function such that the statement contained in equation (c) is true.© OECD 2008 . The table below presents in a comparative manner the main characteristics of the measurement scales. any of the ordinary operations of arithmetic can be applied to the differences between numerical measurements. Interval scaling is the best that can be done in most scientific work. Characteristics Type of Scale Nominal Ordinal Interval Ratio Allows classification Yes Yes Yes Yes Allows ordering No Yes Yes Yes Equal intervals No No Yes Yes Unique origin No No No Yes 54 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . The important part is the interpretation of a numerical result as a quantitative statement about the property shown by the objects. the fewer the admissible transformations of a scale.
The missing values are substituted by estimates obtained through an iterative process. These predictions are then used to update the parameter values. The dependent variable of the regression is the individual indicator hosting the missing value. sex. with implicit underlying assumptions which need to be verified in terms of whether they are reasonable and fit for the issue under consideration. • Substitution. usually a high degree of correlation. place of residence. job. The danger of this type of modelling of missing data is the tendency to consider the resulting data set as complete. family relationships. Filling in blanks cells with individual data. Explicit modelling. The predictive distribution is based on a formal statistical model where the assumptions are made explicitly. then a previously nonselected household in the same housing block is selected. as in the following: • Unconditional mean/median/mode imputation.STEP 3. age. the missing values are predicted based on initial estimates of the model parameter values. race. drawn from “similar” responding units.1. This section covers the main methods.g. • Regression imputation. The focus is on an algorithm. Little (1997) and Little & Schenker (1994). • Expectation Maximisation (EM) imputation. e. mode) of the recorded values for the given individual indicator replaces the missing values. For example. i. and the time to convergence depends on the proportion of missing data and the flatness of the likelihood function. First. More comprehensive surveys can be found in Little & Rubin (2002). The predictive distribution must be generated by employing the observed data either through implicit or explicit modelling: Implicit modelling. and the process is repeated. Implicit modelling includes: • Hot deck imputation. e. showing a strong relationship with the dependent variable. and the regressor(s) is (are) the individual indicator(s). Replacing nonresponding units with unselected units in the sample.e. • Cold deck imputation. if a household cannot be contacted. 3. The sample mean (median. etc. HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . forgetting that an imputation has been carried out. The sequence of parameters converges to maximumlikelihood estimates. Single imputation Imputations are means or draws from a predictive distribution of missing values. For example. This model focuses on the interdependence between model parameters and the missing values. IMPUTATION OF MISSING DATA The literature on the analysis of missing data is extensive and in rapid development.g.© OECD 2008 55 . Replacing the missing value with a value from an external source. from a previous realisation of the same survey. Missing values are substituted by the predicted values obtained from regression. missing values for individual income may be replaced with the income of another respondent with similar characteristics.
and M.c recorded (1) Similarly. Then the best subset(s) is determined using the following criteria:12 • the value of the explanation rate R2. even in the case of MCAR mechanisms. Unconditional mean imputation Let Xq be the random variable associated with the individual indicator q. an important limitation of the single imputation method is its systematic underestimation of the variance of the estimates (with some exceptions for the EM method. • the value of Mallows’ C k . all different subsets of predictors are adopted in a multiple regression manner. where the bias depends on the algorithm used to estimate the variance). 3.3.If simplicity is its main appeal. First. with q=1. Regression imputation computes the regression of xh on (x1.Q. but missing for the remaining Mr countries.© OECD 2008 .2.…. and xq.…..…... the median8 and the mode9 of the distribution could be calculated on the available sample and to substitute missing values. and the sample variance underestimates true variance.. The unconditional mean is then given by: xq = 1 mq x q .10 By “filling in” blank spaces with the sample mean. • the value of the residual mean square RMS.c the observed value of Xq for country c. M j ij r (2) In general.. • stepwise regression.M. the strategy to define the ‘best’ regression is a twostep procedure. the imputed value becomes a biased estimator of the population mean. and imputes the missing values as a prediction from the regression:11 ˆ ih = ˆ 0 + x h 1 j =1 ˆ x i = 1. 3. Regression imputation Suppose a set of h1<Q fully observed individual indicators (x1.xh1) using r complete observations.m q the number of missing values. thus underestimating the uncertainty in the composite due to the imputation. Let m q be the number of recorded or nonmissing values on Xq. 56 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 ..xh1) and an individual indicator xh observed for r countries. Therefore. with c=1. this method does not fully assess the implications of imputation or the robustness of the composite index derived from the imputed data set.
including the imputed data. i is a random variable N ( 0 . The probability function captures the relationship between the dataset and the parameter of the model.…. Expected maximisation imputation Suppose that X denotes the matrix of data. which imputes a conditional draw instead of the conditional mean: ˆ ih = ˆ 0 + x h 1 j =1 ˆ x + j ij i i = 1. rounding of the predictions or a logistic. xM )T . ˆ 2 ) and ˆ on (x1. M r 2 (3) is the residual variance from the regression of xh where.. while the dataset is known. it makes sense observing a data set for a given to reverse the argument. given X. In the case that the variable with missing observations is categorical. In the likelihoodbased estimation. where unknown parameter vector lying in the parameter space (e. For M independent and identically distributed observations X = ( x1 . the joint density is (5) f (X  .and colddeck imputation methods might be more appropriate.. described by a probability or density function f ( X  ) . Replication methods and multiple imputation could correct the loss of precision of simple imputation. For nominal variables. the real line for means.© OECD 2008 57 . the positive real line for variances and the interval [0. for example.. based on the r complete cases. of observing a certain . Since is unknown.1] for probabilities). ordinal or multinomial logistic regression model. given X. The loglikelihood is then the natural logarithm of 2 the likelihood function.. 2 ) = (2 2 ) M /2 exp 1 M ( xc 2 c =1 )2 2 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 .. although stochastic regression lessens the distortions. Hence.g. and describes the probability of . does not fully count for imputation uncertainty. and look for the probability. the likelihood function L(  X ) is any function of f (X  ): L(  X ) = k ( X ) f ( X  ) where k ( X ) > 0 is a function of X and not of from a normal population with mean and variance (4) . using. or the likelihood.. A key problem in both approaches is again the underestimation of the standard errors. the inference based on the entire data set.. regression imputation is still possible but adjustment is required. frequency statistics such as the mode or hot. The result is that pvalues of tests are too small and confidence intervals too narrow. the data is assumed to is the be generated by a model.A variation of the regression approach is the stochastic regression approach.xh1). 3. proportional to Therefore.4.
To start the process. to create N “complete” datasets. It can be used for a broad range of problems. 3. An EM algorithm is also often easy to construct conceptually and practically. Each step is completed once within each algorithm cycle. however. This implies solving the likelihood equation: is best Dl (  X obs ) ln L(  X obs ) =0 (7) When a closedform solution of equation (7) cannot be found. is that convergence may be very slow when a large proportion of information is missing (if there were no missing information. Imputation is done N times. 2 ): 2 l( . however. This procedure is repeated until convergence (absence of changes in estimates and in the variancecovariance matrix).© OECD 2008 . X mis ) .g. convergence would be immediate). conditional on the observed data and parameter vector.e. i.For a given sample X the loglikelihood is (ignoring additive constants of function f ( ) ) a function of ( . Assuming that missing data are MAR or MCAR14. each step has a statistical interpretation and convergence is reliable. The imputation of missing data is performed with a random process that reflects uncertainty. the parameter vector is estimated by applying maximum likelihood as if there were no missing data. e. The main drawback. X = ( X obs . the expected values of the missing variables are calculated. First (M). 2 )] (6) M ln 2 2 1 M ( xc 2 c =1 ) 2 2 Maximising the likelihood function corresponds to the question of which value of supported by a given sampling realisation X. iterative methods can be applied. The parameters of interest are estimated on each data set. Thus both the unknown parameters and the unknown observations of the model have to be found. this process maximises the expectation of the complete data loglikelihood in each cycle. The user should also be careful that the maximum found is indeed a global maximum and not local. 58 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 .5. variance component estimation or factor analysis. The advantage of the EM is its broadness. and second (E). To test this. This is obtained by running the first Mstep on the nonmissing observations only and then predicting the missing variables by using the estimate on . an initial estimate of the missing data is needed. Average (mean or median) estimates are combined using the N sets and betweenand withinimputation variance is calculated. Multiple imputation Multiple imputation (MI) is a general approach that does not require a specification of parameterised likelihood for all data (Figure 10). = ln k ( X ) 2  X )] = ln[k ( X ) f ( X  . Effectively. different initial starting values for can be used. given the estimate of obtained in the Mstep.  X ) = ln[ L( . Besides. The Expected maximisation (EM) algorithm is one of these iterative methods. together with their standard errors. 13 The issue is that X contains both observable and missing values. the EM consists of two components: the expectation (E) and maximisation (M) steps. Cycles are repeated until a suitable convergence criterion is satisfied. The procedure is as follows.
X=(Xobs. HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . which cannot be solved adequately without making assumptions on the functional form of the interdependency. regression imputation could be used repeatedly. Since ˆ is itself a random variable. For example.Figure 10.© OECD 2008 59 . the process is called ignorable and the analyst may concentrate on modelling the missing data given the observed data and . but if and are independent. Logic of multiple imputation D a ta se t with m issin g va lu e s Set 2 Set 1 R e su lt 1 R es ult 2 Set N Re su lt N Co m b in e resu lts Any “proper” imputation method can be used in multiple imputation. Xmis). yielding ˆ . MCMC is a sequence of random variables in which the distribution of the actual element depends on the value of the previous one. If the distribution of Xmis. If the two processes are not independent. and using the distribution f(XmisXobs ˆ ). we must also take its variability into account in drawing imputations. were known. The missingdata generating process may also depend on additional parameters . since is unknown. However. then Xmis could be imputed by drawing from the conditional distribution f(XmisXobs. one of the most general models is the Markov Chain Monte Carlo (MCMC) method. with parameter vector . then a nonignorable missingdata generating process pertains. The theory of MCMC is most easily understood using Bayesian methodology (Figure 11). drawing N values of the regression parameters using the variance matrix of estimated coefficients. and the complete data set. it shall be estimated from the data. where Xmis is to be filled in via multiple imputation. ). The observed data are denoted Xobs. It assumes that data are drawn from a multivariate normal distribution and requires MAR or MCAR assumptions. However.
f( Y. the following imputation algorithm can be used: from the posterior distribution of • Draw variables that may influence . Xobs. the mean) and its variance V( ) (withinimputation variance). * * * * . * * These steps are repeated independently N times. A possible combination is the mean of all individual estimates (but the median can also be used): * = 1 N N n =1 * n (8) 60 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . This is the posterior distribution need more iterations Source: Rearranged from Chantala & Suchindran (2003) In Bayesian terms. i. resulting in n . Markov Chain Monte Carlo imputation method MCMC method Choose starting values: compute mean vector and covariance matrix from the data that does not have missing values.e. matrix are unchanged as we iterate) Posterior step: recompute mean vector and covariance matrix with the imputed estimates from the Imputation step. the N imputations are combined. n=1. Xobs).N. Use to estimate Prior distribution. The first from the data. Usually this posterior is step in its estimation is to obtain the posterior distribution of approximated by a normal distribution. V( n ). Use imputation from final iteration to form a data set without missing values Imputation step: simulate values for missing data items by randomly selecting a value from the available distribution of values enough iterations Required iterations done? (need enough iterations so distribution is stationary. • Draw Xmis from f(XmisY. the distribution of which depends on the data. where Y denotes exogenous ) • Use the completed data X and the model to estimate the parameter of interest (e.g. mean vector and cov. Finally. is a random variable.Figure 11.….© OECD 2008 . After formulating the posterior distribution of .
The pooling of the results of the analyses performed on the multiple imputed data sets implies that the resulting point estimates are averaged over the N completed sample points. Thus. MSE. the “betweenimputation variance” provides a measure of the extra inferential uncertainty due to missing data which is not reflected in single imputation). r = 1+ 1 B N V (13) Based on these variances. approximate 95% confidence intervals can be calculated. The total variance is obtained as a weighted sum of the withinimputation variance and the betweenimputation variance: V* =V + N +1 B N (9) where the mean of the withinimputation variances is V = 1 N N V n =1 ( ) * n (10) and the betweenimputation variance is given by B= 1 N N 1 n =1 ( * n * )( * n * ) (11) Confidence intervals are obtained by taking the overall estimate plus or minus a multiple of standard error. The Multiple Imputation method imputes several values (N) for each missing value (from the predictive distribution of the missing data).g.This combination will be the value that fills in the blank space in the data set. which formally incorporate missing data uncertainty.© OECD 2008 61 . and the resulting standard errors and pvalues are adjusted according to the variance of the corresponding N completed sample point estimates. where that number is a quantile of Student’s tdistribution with degrees of freedom: df = ( N 1 1) 1+ r 2 (12) where r is the betweentowithin ratio. to represent the uncertainty about which values to impute. HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . regression coefficients). standard errors and pvalues. The N versions of completed data sets are analysed by standard complete data methods and the results combined using simple rules to yield single combined estimates (e.
For each sample the performance analysis is performed. (1985) the value of R could be unrelated to the sizes of the difference between the predicted and the observed values. the coefficient of determination ( R ) N i =1 2 R2 = 1 N [( P i P )(Oi P O O) ] 2 With imputation). The goodness of imputation can be checked using several instruments: the correlation coefficient (R) and its square.© OECD 2008 . This consists in taking the complete part of the dataset. Therefore there is not "a" method we advise to use but the method should be fitted to the characteristics of the missing information. The choice principally depends on the dataset available (e. and the identity of the country and the indicator for which the data is missing. To the best of our knowledge there is no definitive answer to this question but a number of rules of thumb (and lot of common sense). eliminate some of the data (for the same countries and in the same proportion of the complete dataset). To solve the problem Willmott (1982) developed an index of agreement: d =1 N i =1 [( P N i =1 ( Pi i =1 N Oi ) k O )k 2 i O + Oi ] with k equal to 1 or 2. use several imputation methods and evaluate the performance of each of them.g. Standard errors are then calculated as a standard deviation of the performance analysis. the number of missing data as compared to the dimension of the dataset (few missing data in a large dataset do not probably require sophisticated imputation methods). O 2 ( P ) the standard deviation of the observed (imputed) data. Another measure of the average error of the model is the root mean square error and the mean absolute error: 1 RMSE = N 1/ 2 ( Pi Oi ) 2 MAE = 1 N N i =1 Pi Oi Finally a complementary measure of accuracy of imputation is the use of bootstrapping methods to generate samples of imputed values. A useful (but time consuming) exercise is the application of the “in sample/out of sample” logic in order to find the suitable imputation method. Rules of thumb in choosing the imputation method The main question a modeler has to face when dealing with imputation is which method he/she has to use to fill in empty data spaces. data expressed on a continuous scale or ordinal data where methods like MCMC cannot be used). As noticed by Willmott et al. N the Pi number of imputations.Box 4. 62 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . Oi the observed data point (the one that has been excluded to do the the imputed data point and O ( P ) the average of the observed (imputed) data.
STEP 4. MULTIVARIATE ANALYSIS
Multivariate data analysis techniques which have found use in the construction or analysis of composite indicators are described in this section. For further details refer to, e.g., Hair et al., (2006). The majority of methods in this section are thought for data expressed in an interval or ratio scale, although some of the methods have been used with ordinal data (for example principal components and factor analysis, see Vermunt & Magidson 2005). 4.1. Principal components analysis The objective is to explain the variance of the observed data through a few linear combinations of the original data. 15 Even though there are Q variables, x1 , x 2 ,...xQ , much of the data’s variation can often be accounted for by a small number of variables – principal components, or linear relations of the original data, Z 1 , Z 2 ,...Z Q , that are uncorrelated. At this point there are still Q principal components, i.e., as many as there are variables. The next step is to select the first, e.g., P<Q principal components that preserve a “high” amount of the cumulative variance of the original data.
Z 1 = a11 x1 + a12 x 2 + ... + a1Q xQ Z 2 = a 21 x1 + a 22 x 2 + ... + a 2Q xQ ... Z Q = aQ 1 x1 + aQ 2 x 2 + ... + aQQ xQ
A lack of correlation in the principal components is a useful property. It indicates that the principal components are measuring different “statistical dimensions” in the data. When the objective of the analysis is to present a huge data set using a few variables, some degree of economy can be achieved by applying Principal Components Analysis (PCA) if the variation in the Q original x variables can be accounted for by a small number of Z variables. It must be stressed that PCA cannot always reduce a large number of original variables to a small number of transformed variables. Indeed, if the original variables are uncorrelated, then the analysis is of no value. On the other hand, a significant reduction can be obtained when the original variables are highly correlated – positively or negatively. The weights aij (also called component or factor loadings) applied to the variables x j in equation (14) are chosen so that the principal components Z i satisfy the following conditions: (i) (ii) they are uncorrelated (orthogonal); the first principal component accounts for the maximum possible proportion of the variance of the set of x s, the second principal component accounts for the maximum of the remaining variance, and so on until the last of the principal components absorbs all the remaining variance not accounted for by the preceding components, and 16 (14)
2 ai2 + ai22 + ... + aiQ = 1, i = 1,2,..., Q 1
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
63
where aij are the factor loadings, x1 , x 2 ,...xQ are the variables (indicators), and Q the number of variables. PCA involves finding the eigenvalues
j
, j=1,…,Q, of the sample covariance matrix CM,
cm11 cm12 ...cm1Q CM = cm21 cm22 ...cm2Q
... cmQ1 cmQ 2 ...cmQQ
(15)
where the diagonal element cmii is the variance of xi and cmij is the covariance of variables
xi and x j . The eigenvalues of the matrix CM are the variances of the principal components and can be
found by solving the characteristic equation CM
I = 0 , where I is the identity matrix with the same
order as CM and is the vector of eigenvalues. This is possible, however, only if Q is small. If there are too many variables, solving for is nontrivial and other methods exist (see e.g. Gentle et al., 2004; Golub & van der Vorst, 2000).17 There are Q eigenvalues, some of which may be negligible. Negative eigenvalues are not possible for a covariance matrix. An important property of the eigenvalues is that they add up to the sum of the diagonal elements of CM. That is, the sum of the variances of the principal components is equal to the sum of the variances of the original variables:
1+ 2+
... +
Q=
cm11 + cm22 + ... + cmQQ
(16)
In order to prevent one variable having an undue influence on the principal components, it is common to standardise the variables – x s – to have zero means and unit variances at the start of the analysis. The covariance matrix CM then takes the form of the correlation matrix (Table 6). In the TAI example, the highest correlation is found between the individual indicators electricity and Internet, with a coefficient of 0.84.
Table 6. Correlation matrix for individual TAI indicators
ELECTRICITY
TELEPHONE
SCHOOLING
PATENTS ROYALTIES INTERNET EXPORTS TELEPHONE ELECTRICITY SCHOOLING UNIVERSITY
1.00
0.13 1.00
0.09 0.46 1.00
0.45 0.25 0.45 1.00
0.28 0.56 0.56 0.00 1.00
0.03 0.32 0.84 0.36 0.64 1.00
0.22 0.30 0.63 0.35 0.30 0.65 1.00
0.08 0.06 0.27 0.03 0.33 0.26 0.08 1.00
Note: n=23. Marked correlations are statistically significant at p < 0.05.
64
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
UNIVERSITY
ROYALTIES
INTERNET
EXPORTS
PATENTS
Table 7 gives the eigenvalues of the correlation matrix of the eight individual indicators (standardised values) that compose TAI. Note that the sum of the eigenvalues is equal to the number of individual indicators ( Q = 8 ). Figure 12 (left graph) is a graphical presentation of the eigenvalues in descending order. Given that the correlation matrix rather than the covariance matrix is used in the PCA, all eight individual indicators are assigned equal weights in forming the principal components (Chatfield & Collins, 1980). The first principal component explains the maximum variance in all the individual indicators (eigenvalue of 3.3). The second principal component explains the maximum amount of the remaining variance, with a variance of 1.7. The third and fourth principal components have an eigenvalue close to 1. The last four principal components explain the remaining 12.8% of the variance in the data set.
Table 7. Eigenvalues of individual TAI indicators PC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Eigenvalue 3.3 1.7 1.0 0.9 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 % of variance 41.9 21.8 12.3 11.1 6.0 3.7 2.2 0.9 Cumulative % 41.9 63.7 76.0 87.2 93.2 96.9 99.1 100.0
A drawback of the conventional PCA is that it does not allow for inference on the properties of the general population. Traditionally, drawing such inferences requires certain distributional assumptions to be made regarding the population characteristics, which PCA techniques are not based on. There are several assumptions made in the application of PCA/FA which are discussed in Box 5. These assumptions are referred to in almost all textbooks, yet are often neglected in the development of composite indicators. Furthermore, in a traditional PCA framework there is no estimation of the statistical precision of the results, which is essential for relatively small sample sizes, as in the present example of the TAI. The bootstrap method has therefore been utilised in conjunction with PCA to make inferences about the population (Efron & Tibshirani, 1991, 1993). Bootstrap refers to the process of randomly resampling the original data set to generate new data sets. Estimates of the relevant statistics are made for each bootstrap sample. A very large number of bootstrap samples will give satisfactory results but the computation may be cumbersome. Various values have been suggested, ranging from 25 (Efron & Tibshirani, 1991) to as high as 1000 (Efron, 1987).
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
65
there are 23:8 casestovariables. The ratio of the regression coefficients indicates which variables are most associated with the outlier cases. 1983). 1994). There should be 51 more cases than the number of variables. but is not common. the presence of outliers can affect interpretations arising from PCA/FA. Note that categorical variables with similar splits will necessarily tend to correlate with each other. if individual indicators are deleted arbitrarily in order to obtain a "cleaner" factorial solution. Likewise. the factors which are uncovered. 1971) These rules are not mutually exclusive. No outliers. 1978). The casestovariables ratio should be no lower than 5 (Bryant & Yarnold. endorse both the casestovariables ratio and the Rule of 200. The smaller the sample size. 1983). set to 1. Although social scientists may be attracted to factor analysis as a way of exploring data whose structure is unknown. As with multiple linear regression. 3:1 ratio. then the outliers are judged to be at random and there is less danger in retaining them. Alternatively. Gorsuch. is a linear procedure. nonlinear transformation of selected variables may be a preprocessing step. Rule of 150: Hutcheson & Sofroniou (1999) recommend at least 150 . There should be at least 200 cases. the more important it is to screen data for linearity. In the TAI example. therefore the first and (to a large extent) the second rule are satisfied. 5:1 ratio. This dilemma creates a chickenandegg problem. erroneous conclusions about the factor structure will result (Kim & Mueller. Linearity. to support chisquare testing (Lawley & Maxwell. The correlation will reflect similarity of "difficulty" for items in a testing context. for instance. Kim & Mueller (1978) note that ordinal data may be used if it is thought that the assignment of ordinal categories to the data will not seriously distort the underlying metric scaling. Rule of 200. The question of how many cases (or countries) are necessary to perform PCA/FA has no scientific answer and methodologists’ opinions differ. can be created for cases with high Mahalanobis distance. As with most techniques. The exclusion of relevant individual indicators and the inclusion of irrelevant individual indicators in the correlation matrix being factored will affect. 1995.Box 5. The result of using ordinal data is that the factors may be much harder to interpret. often substantially. Also. Bryant & Yarnold (1995). which are multivariate outliers and remove them prior to the analysis. If this regression is nonsignificant (or simply has a low Rsquared for large samples). knowing the factorial structure in advance helps select the individual indicators to be included and yields the best analysis of factors. Alternative arbitrary rules of thumb in descending order of popularity include the following: Rule of 10. 66 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . Note that this is not just a matter of including all relevant individual indicators. The casestovariables ratio should be no lower than 3. Assumption of interval data. hence such correlated variables are called difficulty factors. The researcher should examine the factor loadings of categorical variables with care. Rule of 100: The number of cases should be the larger of “5 × number of variables” and 100 (Hatcher. Principal component factor analysis (PFA). This is particularly apt to occur when dichotomies are used.© OECD 2008 . Mahalanobis distance may be used to identify cases. in order to assess whether common loading reflects a difficulty factor or a substantive correlation. regardless of their content (see Gorsuch. the use of dichotomous data is allowed if the underlying metric correlation between the variables is thought to be moderate (. Significance rule. 1983).300 cases (closer to 150 when there are a few highly correlated variables). No bias in selecting individual indicators. 1978.7) or lower. There should be at least 10 cases for each variable. Assumptions in principal component analysis Sufficient number of cases. regardless of the casestovariables ratio (Gorsuch. which is the most common variant of FA. Nunnaly. a dummy variable. then regressed on all other variables.
A VIF value greater than 4.© OECD 2008 67 . however. However. On the other hand.e. If this assumption is not met. thereby defeating the data reduction purposes of factor analysis. Moreover. as Bartlett’s test is highly sensitive to sample size (Knapp & Swoyer.80 if the results of the principal components analysis are to be reliable. is whether the TAI data set for the 23 countries can be viewed as a “random” sample of the entire population. PCA and PFA have no distributional assumptions. but the conceptual framework of random sampling is still useful for understanding statistical inferences. A third point on data quality is that a certain amount of measurement error is likely to pertain. too high intercorrelations may indicate a multicollinearity problem and collinear terms should be combined or otherwise eliminated prior to factor analysis. i. 1974). (a) The KaiserMeyerOlkin (KMO) measure of sampling adequacy is a statistic for comparing the magnitudes of the observed correlation coefficients to the magnitudes of the partial correlation coefficients. garbage out" principle applies. the more important it is to screen data for normality. Consequently. The concept is that the partial correlations should not be very large if distinct factors are expected to emerge from factor analysis (Hutcheson & Sofroniou. The smaller the sample size. factors generated by the factor analysis algorithm will not be comprehensible.0 even when both series are perfectly coordered). both correlation and covariance will be attenuated when variables come from different underlying distributions (e.g. In such cases. as required by the bootstrap procedures (Efron. A KMO statistic is computed for each individual indicator. Efron & Tibshirani. though realistically it should exceed 0. the countries included in the restricted set show no apparent pattern as to whether or not they are predominately developed or developing countries. Likewise. Strong intercorrelations are not mathematically required. and their sum is the KMO overall statistic. unlike in natural sciences. While such measurement error can only be controlled at the data collection stage. the countries are of varying sizes and span all the major continents of the world. that a variant of factor analysis. ensuring a wide representation of the global state of technological development. a normal vs. Underlying dimensions shared by clusters of individual indicators are assumed.0 is an arbitrary but common cutoff criterion for suggesting that there is a multicollinearity problem. These confidence intervals make it possible to generalise the conclusions HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 .60. As Efron and Tibshirani (1993) state that. ‘in practice the selection process is seldom this neat […]. Tabachnick & Fidell (1989) suggest implementing it with the KMO measure. A KMO overall should be .. (b) Varianceinflation factor (VIF) is simply the reciprocal of tolerance. Some researchers use the more lenient cutoff VIF value of 5. until KMO overall rises above .60 or higher to proceed with factor analysis (Kaiser & Rice. First.’ Second. as controlled experiments are not always possible.0. 1987. 1999). If not. does assume multivariate normality. Factor analysis cannot create valid dimensions (factors) if none exist in the input data. maximum likelihood factor analysis. An important issue. it is often difficult to obtain complete information for a data set in the social sciences. a bimodal variable will correlate less than 1. as factor analysis is based on correlation (or sometimes covariance). but applying factor analysis to a correlation matrix with only low intercorrelations will require nearly as many factors as there are original variables. that the correlation matrix is an identity matrix. it is argued that the data represent the best estimates currently available (UN. their bootstrapped confidence intervals (5th and 95th percentiles) and the ranked principal components. the "garbage in. it is advisable to drop the individual indicators with the lowest individual KMO statistic values. The statistic is based on a chisquared transformation of the determinant of the correlation matrix.Multivariate normality of data is required for related significance tests. the restricted set could be considered representative of the total population. the inclusion of multiple definitionallysimilar individual indicators representing essentially the same data will lead to tautological results. Note.0. 1967). 2001). 1993). however. Several points can be made regarding the issues of randomness and representativeness of the data. rather than at the analytical stage. (c) The Bartlett’s test of sphericity is used to test the null hypothesis that the individual indicators in a correlation matrix are uncorrelated. KMO varies from 0 to 1. In addition. Figure 12 (right graph) demonstrates graphically the relationship between the eigenvalues from the deterministic PCA. Notice also that PCA and Factor analysis (as well as Cronbach’s alpha) assume uncorrelated measurement errors.
Eigenvalues for individual TAI numbers 4.5 Eigenvalue 4. of 72 countries or even more generally).5 4.0 2. The component score for a given case for a principal component is calculated by taking the case’s standardised value on each variable.0 3. all the other individual indicators are entirely accounted for by one principal component alone and that the high and moderate loadings are all found in the first four principal components.0 1.© OECD 2008 . r( Z j .5 Eigenvalue 3. An undesirable property of these components is that two individual indicators are related strongly to two principal components. High and moderate loadings (>0. Table 8 presents the component loadings for the individual TAI indicators.0 1. Bootstrapping was performed for 1 000 sample sets of size 23 (random sampling with replacement). rather than confining the conclusions only to the sample set under analysis.5 0. It can be seen that with the exception of patents and royalties.g. Analogously to Pearson's r .5 0.5 2. and summing these products.concerning the small set of the individual indicators (23 countries) to the entire population (e.5 4. 68 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . Figure 12.5 1.0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Principal Component 3.0 2.0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Principal Component Note: (left graph) Scree plot: Eigenvalues from traditional Principal Components Analysis (right graph) Bootstrapped eigenvalues based on 1000 samples randomly selected with replacement The correlation coefficients between the principal components Z and the variables x are called component loadings. the squared loading is the percentage of variance in that variable explained by the principal component.5 2. In the case of uncorrelated variables x.50) indicate how the individual indicators are related to the principal components.5 1.0 0.0 0.0 3. the loadings are equal to the weights a ij given in equation (14). The component scores are the scores of each case (each country in our example) on each principal component. It is shown that the values of the eigenvalues drop sharply at the beginning and then gradually approach zero after a certain point. multiplying by the corresponding loading of the variable for the given principal component factor. xi ) .
21 0.92 0. There are several approaches to dealing with the model given in equation (17).39 0.04 0. 2000).75 0. while PCA is based simply on linear data combinations.05 0.35 0. x2 .. Principal components factor analysis is most preferred in the development of composite indicators.06 0.….87 4 0.22 0. The question of how many principal components should be retained in the analysis without losing too much information and of how the interpretation of the components might be improved are addressed in the following section on Factor Analysis. However. 1989: 223) (Box 6)..Table 8.30 0.10 0.85 0.37 0.5 (absolute values) are highlighted.13 0. methodologists are divided. etc. Loadings greater than 0. centroid method.g. xQ in terms of a smaller number of m factors and to highlight the relationship between these variables.19 0. neglecting those remaining.03 7 0.36 2 0. and that the data variance can be decomposed into that accounted for by common and unique factors. im are the factor loadings related to the variable Xi.Q) represents the original variables but standardized with zero mean and unit variance.16 0. xQ = 11F1 + 21F1 + Q1F1 + 12F2 +.60 0..g.17 0.16 0.+ 1mFm 2mFm + e1 + e2 + eQ (17) QmFm where xi (i=1. principal axis method.2. n=23 countries.13 0..39 0.. i1.. The decision on when to stop extracting factors depends basically on when there is only very little “random” variability left.74 0. 4... as it has the virtue of simplicity and allows for the construction of weights representing the information content of individual indicators.16 0.09 0.35 0.+ Q2F2 +.. that different extraction methods supply different values for the factors and thus for the weights. However.12 0. roughly in the order of frequency of their use in social science (Dunteman. influencing the score of the composite and the corresponding country ranking. F1. HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 .02 Note: Extraction method: PCA.17 0. maximum likelihood factors. .02 0.04 0.+ 22F2 +.07 0.54 0.11 0.01 0. e.. and is rather arbitrary. Note. On the issue of how factors should be retained in the analysis without losing too much information.13 0. FA is based on a rather special model.. communalities. each with zero mean and unit variance.48 0. Component loadings for individual TAI indicators Principal components PATENTS ROYALTIES INTERNET EXPORTS TELEPHONES ELECTRICITY SCHOOLING UNIVERSITY 1 0.12 3 0..26 6 0.08 0.16 0..07 0. Factor analysis Factor analysis (FA) is similar to PCA.02 0.. in the Product Market Regulation Index (Nicoletti et al.56 0.11 0.16 0..01 0.27 0.Fm are m uncorrelated common factors. however. various guidelines (“stopping rules”) have been developed.© OECD 2008 69 . Contrary to the PCA. and ei are the Q specific factors supposed independently and identically distributed with zero mean..20 0. e.. It aims to describe a set of Q variables x1.76 0.91 0. F2. the FA model assumes that the data is based on the underlying factors of the model.13 0..41 0.11 0.10 0. i2.02 8 0.33 0.. The model is given by: x1 = x2 = . The most common is the use of PCA to extract the first m principal components and to consider them as factors.15 5 0..10 0.04 0.11 0.27 0.
In light of the above analysis. while university is exclusively loaded on Factor 3. different rotations imply different loadings. Furthermore.2% of the total variance. Factor 2 is mainly dominated by patents and exports. proposed by Cattell. Drop all factors with eigenvalues below 1. Drop all factors with eigenvalues under 0. although the fourth factor follows closely with an eigenvalue of 0. the individual indicator exports has sizeable loadings in both Factor 1 (negative loading) and Factor 2 (positive loading). Based on a combination of the Kaiser criterion and the bootstrapped eigenvalues. The first four factors now account for 87% of the total variance and are not sorted into descending order according to how much of the original data set’s variance is explained. It suggests retaining all eigenvalues in the sharp descent before the first one on the line where they start to level off. Comprehensibility. Factor 4 is formed by royalties and telephones. plots the successive eigenvalues. as identified by the bootstrap eigenvalue approach combined with the Kaiser criterion. According to this rule. left graph). A sample of "stopping rules" Kaiser criterion. The most common rotation method is the “varimax rotation”. three factors should be retained in the analysis of the TAI example. electricity (0. Finally.82) and schooling (0. Though not a strictly mathematical criterion.90. Scree plot. Some researchers simply use the rule of keeping enough factors to account for 90% (sometimes 80%) of the variation. the first four principal components.79). A method for deciding on the number of factors to retain combines the bootstrapped eigenvalues and eigenvectors (Jackson. Variance explained criteria.© OECD 2008 .1 in Appendix). The first four factors account for 87. This method. Table 9 presents the factor loadings for the first factors in the TAI example. This approach would result in retaining three factors in the TAI example (Figure 12. The simplest justification for this is that it makes no sense to add a factor that explains less variance than is contained in one individual indicator. After choosing the number of factors to keep. Often this means the first two or three.0. Note that the eigenvalues have been affected by the rotation. Joliffe criterion. are retained. but changing the axes will alter the eigenvalues of particular factors and will change the factor loadings. The variance accounted for by the rotated components is spread more evenly than for the unrotated. there is much to be said for limiting the number of factors to those whose dimension of meaning is readily comprehensible. The first factor has high positive coefficients (loadings) with Internet (0. 70 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . and thus different meanings of principal components – a problem some cite as a drawback to the method. The sum of eigenvalues is not affected by rotation. it is standard practice to perform rotation so as to enhance the interpretability of the results. the statistical treatment of the eight individual indicators results in different groups (factors) to the conceptual ones (see Table A.88). this criterion would have led to the selection of four factors. A meaningful interpretation of the factors is not straightforward. 1993). Yet. which drop sharply and then level off. The factor loading shown in Table 9 will be used later in the section on “Weighting and aggregation” to construct weights for the TAI composite indicator. the first four factors should be considered in the TAI example. This rule may result in twice as many factors as the Kaiser criterion produces and is less often used.Box 6. This choice implies a greater willingness to overstate the significance of the fourth component and is in line with the idea that there are four main categories of technology achievement indicators. However. The goal of all of these strategies is to obtain a clear pattern of loadings.70. Various rotational strategies have been proposed. In the present case study. despite the rotation of factors.
38 0. For instance.© OECD 2008 71 .89 0.73 0.06 0.88 0.39 1.09 0.03 1.89 0. Table 10. principal axis method).25 0. and therefore is not wellrepresented by the four common factors. This conclusion does not depend on the factor analysis method.19 65 Factor 4 0.04 1.14 0.17 0.93 0.64 0.18 0.36 0.39 50 Factor 3 0.95 0.97 0.07 0.13 0. Rotated factor loadings for individual TAI indicators (method 1) Factor 1 PATENTS ROYALTIES INTERNET EXPORTS TELEPHONES ELECTRICITY SCHOOLING UNIVERSITY Explained variance Cumulative (%) 0.10 0. HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 .04 0.13 0.5 are highlighted. as it has been confirmed by different methods (centroid method. Table 10 presents the rotated factor loadings of the four factors for the TAI case study (extraction method: principal factors maximum likelihood). the total variance explained by the four rotated principal components was much higher in the previous analysis (87%).35 0.89 0.06 0.85 0.31 16 Factor 2 0.09 0.99 0.60 0.29 0.13 0.11 0.95 0. In contrast.21 0.80 0.85 0.14 0. with the exception of university.86 0.15 Note: Extraction method: principal factors maximum likelihood.96 1.82 0.45 0.08 2. Rotated factor loadings for individual TAI indicators (method 2) Factor 1 PATENTS ROYALTIES INTERNET EXPORTS TELEPHONES ELECTRICITY SCHOOLING UNIVERSITY Explained Variance Cumulative (%) 0.23 0.29 0.13 0.65 0.56 0.07 0.Table 9. varimax normalised rotation.64 33 Factor 2 0.09 0.31 0.93 Note: Extraction method: principal components.41 0.03 1.01 0.21 0.01 1.76 87 Communality 0.86 0.96 0. 76% of the total variance is explained by the four rotated common factors. which indicates that university does not move with the other individual indicators in the data set.27 55 Factor 4 0. varimax normalised rotation.15.73 0. The commonalties for seven individual indicators are greater than 0.67 76 Communality 0.64.14 0. Another method of extracting factors that deals with the noncorrelation of the specific factors would have given different results.75 0. for which the communality is only 0.58 0. Positive loadings greater than 0.14 0.77 0.56 0.04 0.07 0.95 0.88 0.79 0.18 0.37 0.57 0. electricity and schooling are no longer loaded on F1: electricity is loaded on F4 and schooling on F2.13 0.04 1.68 0.80 39 Factor 3 0.42 0.
then there is evidence that the individual indicators are measuring the same underlying construct. and xo = Q q =1 x j is the sum of all individual indicators. Although widely interpreted as such.© OECD 2008 . In general this varies by discipline. as in our test case. It assesses how well a set of items (in our terminology individual indicators) measures a single unidimensional object (e. If no correlation exists and individual indicators are independent.. Calpha is equal to one. which is equal to Nunnally’s cutoff value. 2004. A question is how large the calpha must be.g. 1993. attitude. even though the clusters themselves are not highly correlated.7 as an acceptable reliability threshold. while others are as lenient as to go to 0. Green et al. An interesting exercise is to determine how the calpha varies with the deletion of each individual indicator at a time.. Hattie. 4. Q (18) where M indicates the number of countries considered. it is unlikely that they share common factors. a standard practice is to standardise the individual indicators to a standard deviation of 1 before computing the coefficient alpha.70 for the data set of the 23 countries.. Calculate the covariance/correlation matrix: if the correlation between individual indicators is small.75 or . Yet some authors use . In our notation this would mean substituting xi with Ii. 3. Feldt et al. A set of individual indicators can have a high alpha and still be multidimensional. This helps to reveal the existence of clusters of individual indicators. while if individual indicators are perfectly correlated. The calpha is . Miller.. This happens when there are separate clusters of individual indicators (separate dimensions) which intercorrelate highly. 1985. but a coefficient of reliability based on the correlation between individual indicators.. 2. 1998. or equivalently a high “reliability”... x j ) i j var( xo ) Q = 1 Q 1 var( x j ) j var( xo ) c = 1. j = 1. if the correlation is high. then Calpha is equal to zero. etc. 1977. thus it is useful to determine the nested structure of the composite. It increases with the number of individual indicators and with the covariance of each pair. indicates that the individual indicators measure the latent phenomenon well.6. If the variances of the individual indicators vary widely.Summarizing the steps of the PCA/FA exploratory analysis method: 1. phenomenon. Raykov. Calpha is not a statistical test. i. 1987. Calpha measures the portion of total variability of the sample of individual indicators due to the correlation of indicators. Therefore a high calpha. Cronbach’s Coefficient Alpha can be defined as: c Q = Q 1 cov( xi . Q the number of individual indicators available..g.. Nunnally (1978) suggests 0. If the 72 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . 1951) is the most common estimate of internal consistency of items in a model or survey – Reliability/Item Analysis (e. strictly speaking calpha is not a measure of unidimensionality.80 as a cutoff value. That is. Boscarino et al.3. Rotate factors to enhance their interpretability (by maximising loading of individual indicators on individual factors).). M . Identify the number of factors necessary to represent the data and the method for calculating them. Cortina. Cronbach Coefficient Alpha The Cronbach Coefficient Alpha (henceforth calpha) (Cronbach. 1995).
566 0. their conceptual framework is different.60. There are many methods for this. This indicates that exports are not measuring the same construct as the rest of the individual indicators.614 0. an Ftest (Davis. and individuals (Anderberg.70 to . one can assume that the individual indicator is not correlated highly with other individual indicators in the scale. However. 1983). 1973. Cluster analysis Cluster analysis (CLA) is a collection of algorithms to classify objects such as countries. Although both factor analysis and the Cronbach coefficient alpha are based on correlations among individual indicators. It can be based on a single dimension or on multiple dimensions. Some of the most common distance measures are listed in Table 12.451 0. The classification aims to reduce the dimensionality of a data set by exploiting the similarities/dissimilarities between cases.701 0. for example. species.261 0.g. Table 11.249 Cronbach coefficient alpha 0.© OECD 2008 73 .662 0. e. i. Massart & Kaufman.774 0. 1986).706 Note: Cronbach coefficient alpha results for the 23 countries after deleting one individual indicator (standardised values) at a time. 4.603 0.reliability coefficient increases after deleting an individual indicator from the scale. Table 11 presents the values for the Cronbach coefficient alpha and the correlation with the total after deleting one individual indicator at a time. e. The selection criteria could differ and hence different classifications may be obtained for the same data. kmeans clustering.77. CLA techniques can be hierarchical if the classification has an increasing number of nested classes.4. or nonhierarchical when the number of clusters is decided ex ante.108). Cronbach coefficient alpha results for individual TAI indicators Deleted individual indicator PATENTS ROYALTIES INTERNET EXPORTS TELEPHONES ELECTRICITY SCHOOLING UNIVERSITY Correlation with total 0. then the value of the standardised coefficient alpha would increase from the current . If exports were to be deleted from the set. care should be taken that classes are meaningful and not arbitrary or artificial. 1980): HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . including Euclidean and nonEuclidean distances.624 0. Note that the same individual indicator has the lowest variabletotal correlation value (. the rules which govern how distances are measured between clusters.636 0. Telephones has the highest variabletotal correlation and if deleted the coefficient alpha would be as low as 0.704 0. A distance measure is an appraisal of the degree of similarity or dissimilarity between cases in the set. Note also that the factor analysis in the previous section had indicated university as the individual indicator that shared the least amount of common variance with the other individual indicators. Homogeneous and distinct groups could be delineated according to assessment of distances or.e.527 0. The most common linkage rules are (Spath.108 0.645 0. countries in the TAI example can be evaluated according to the TAI composite indicator or according to all individual indicators. tree clustering.18 The next step is to choose the clustering algorithm. as in the case of Ward’s method.g. A small distance is equivalent to a strong similarity. even using the same distance measure.
A variation of this method uses the centroid of a cluster – the distance is the average point in the multidimensional space defined by the dimensions. The distance between two clusters is calculated as the average distance between all pairs of objects in the two clusters. This method usually performs well when objects naturally form distinct groups. • Weighted pairgroup average. Similar to the unweighted pairgroup average (centroid included). the sum of the squared deviations from the mean of the cluster. • Ward’s method (Ward. is used as a weight for the average distance. i. This method usually performs well when objects naturally form distinct groups. 74 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . An element will belong to the cluster if it produces the smallest possible increase in the variance. The distance between two clusters is determined by the greatest distance between any two objects belonging to different clusters. except that the size of the cluster.e. • • Unweighted pairgroup average. the number of objects contained. i. The distance between two clusters is determined by the distance between the two closest elements in the different clusters.• Single linkage (nearest neighbour). This rule produces clusters chained together by single objects. Complete linkage (farthest neighbour). This method is useful when cluster sizes are very different.e.© OECD 2008 . 1963). Cluster membership is determined by calculating the variance of elements.
In this measure the effect of outliers is less pronounced. The parameters r and p are userdefined. it is highly affected by the difference in scale. Distance measures D ( x. This measure is not affected by the addition of new objects such as outliers. y ) = number of xi Nd yi HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . y ) = ( xi Nd yi ) p i =1 Percent disagreement D ( x.g. whether the same object is measured in centimetres or in metres the D(x. and r controls the progressive weight placed on larger differences between objects. y) = Max xi yi Nd 1/ r Power D ( x. e. Nd Squared Euclidean D ( x. y ) for individual TAI indicators between two objects dimensions x and y over Nd Nd 1/ 2 Euclidean D ( x. This distance measure is useful when it is desired to increase or decrease the progressive weight placed on one dimension for which the respective objects are very different.Table 12.y) This measure places progressively greater weight on objects that are further apart. y ) = ( xi Nd yi ) 2 i =1 Nd Cityblock 19 (Manhattan) D ( x. However.. This measure is mostly used when it is desired to define objects as “different” if they are different in any one of the dimensions. y ) = i =1 ( xi Nd yi ) 2 This is the geometric distance in a multidimensional space and is usually computed from raw data (prior to any normalisation). Usually this is computed from raw data and shares the same advantages and disadvantages of the Euclidean distance. This distance is the average of distances across dimensions and it yields similar results to the Euclidean distance. such that p controls the progressive weights placed on differences between individual dimensions.© OECD 2008 75 . This measure is useful if the data are categorical in nature. Note that for p=r=2 corresponds to the Euclidean distance. since it is not squared. y ) = xi Nd yi i =1 Chebychev D( x.
where the greatest dissimilarity among the 23 countries in the TAI example is found at a linkage distance close to 4. New Zealand.0. Similarity between countries belonging to the same cluster decreases as the linkage distance increases. USA. and Japan. the USA or Sweden (see Table 38 in the ‘Performance of the different aggregation methods’). One of the biggest problems with CLA is identifying the optimum number of clusters. the Czech Republic. would be in the group of leading countries.© OECD 2008 . Country clusters for individual TAI indicators Threshold for the formation of clusters Finland USA Sweden Netherlands United Kingdom Ireland Belgium Israel Austria France Italy Spain Slovenia Germany Czech Republic Hungary Canada Singapore Australia New Zealand Korea Norway Japan 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 Note: Standardised data. average and leading countries resulting from the standard aggregation methods. together with Finland. which indicates that the data are best represented by ten clusters: Finland.e. Norway and Japan. i. Singapore. 1985). Sweden. at a great distance from the Netherlands. Slovenia and Italy would be the laggards. Figure 13. which are aggregated only at the very end of the analysis. Japan. squared Euclidean distances. while Hungary. increasingly dissimilar clusters must be fused. in fact. Type: Hierarchical. Korea.Figure 13 shows the country clusters based on the individual Technology Achievement Index indicators using tree clustering (hierarchical) with single linkage and squared Euclidean distances. Sudden jumps in the level of similarity (abscissa) could indicate that dissimilar groups or outliers are fused. Note that the most dissimilar are Korea. 76 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . Besides. Canada. the group of countries located between the Netherlands and Hungary. Norway. Such a plot is presented in Figure 14. As the amalgamation process continues. Deciding on the optimum number of clusters is largely subjective. the classification becomes increasingly artificial. Sweden and the USA. single linkage. Australia. this result does not fully correspond to the division into laggard. although looking at the plot of linkage distance across fusion steps may help (Milligan & Cooper.
A nonhierarchical method of clustering, different from the joining or tree clustering shown below, is kmeans clustering (Hartigan, 1975). This method is useful when the aim is to divide the sample into k clusters of the greatest possible distinction. The parameter k is decided by the analyst; for example, it may be decided to cluster the 23 countries in the TAI example into three groups, e.g. leaders, potential leaders, and dynamic adopters. The kmeans algorithm will supply three clusters, as distinct as possible, by analysing the variance of each cluster. This algorithm can be applied with continuous variables, yet it can be also modified to accommodate other types of variables. The algorithm starts with k random clusters and moves the objects in and out of the clusters with the aim of (i) minimising the variance of elements within the clusters, and (ii) maximising the variance of the elements outside the clusters. A line graph of the means across clusters is displayed in Figure 15. This plot could be very useful in summarising the differences in the means between clusters. It is shown, for example, that the main difference between the leaders and the potential leaders (Table 13) is between royalties and exports. At the same time, the dynamic adopters are lagging behind the potential leaders due to their lower performance on Internet, electricity and schooling. They are, however, performing better on exports Two of the individual indicators, patents and university, are not useful in distinguishing between these three groups, as the cluster means are very close.
Figure 14. Linkage distance vs fusion step in TAI's hierarchical cluster
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
77
Figure 15.
Means plot for TAI clusters
2 1.5 1
Cluster mean
0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2
PATENTS RECEIPTS INTERNET TELEPHONES ELECTRICITY SCHOOLING ENROLMENT Italy Japan Korea Singapore Slovenia Spain UK EXPORTS Group 1 Group 2 Group 3
Note: Type: kmeans clustering (standardised data).
Table 13. Kmeans for clustering TAI countries Group1 (leaders) Group 2 (potential leaders) Group 3 (dynamic adopters)
Finland Netherlands Sweden USA
Australia Canada New Zealand Norway
Austria Belgium Czech Rep. France Germany Hungary Ireland Israel
Finally, expectation maximisation (EM) clustering extends the simple kmeans clustering in two ways. First, instead of clustering the objects by maximising the differences in means for continuous variables, EM clusters membership on the basis of probability distributions – each observation will belong to each cluster with a certain probability. EM estimates mean and standard deviation of each cluster so as to maximise the overall likelihood of the data, given the final clusters (Binder, 1978). Second, unlike kmeans, EM can be applied to both continuous and categorical data.
78
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
Ordinary significance tests are not valid for testing differences between clusters, as clusters are formed to be as distinct as possible. Thus the assumption of usual tests – parametric or nonparametric – is violated (see Hartigan, 1975). As a final remark, a warning: CLA will always produce a grouping; this means that clusters may or may not prove useful for classifying objects, depending upon the objectives of the analysis. For example, zipcode areas could be grouped into categories based on age, gender, education and income to discriminate between winedrinking behaviours, but this would only be useful information if the aim of the CLA was to establish a good location for a new wine store. Furthermore, CLA methods are not clearly established – there are many options, all giving very different results (Everitt, 1979). Various alternative methods combining cluster analysis and the search for a lowdimensional representation have been proposed and focus on multidimensional scaling or unfolding analysis (e.g. Heiser, 1993; De Soete & Heiser, 1993). A method that combines kmeans cluster analysis with aspects of Factor Analysis and PCA is offered by Vichi & Kiers (2001). A discrete clustering model and a continuous factorial model are fitted simultaneously to twoway data with the aim of identifying the best partition of the objects, described by the best orthogonal linear combinations of the variables (factors) according to the leastsquares criterion. This methodology, known as factorial kmeans analysis, has a wide range of applications, since it achieves a double objective: data reduction and synthesis simultaneously in the direction of objects and variables. Originally applied to shortterm macroeconomic data, factorial kmeans analysis has a fast alternating leastsquares algorithm that extends its application to large data sets, i.e., multivariate data sets with >2 variables. The methodology can therefore be recommended as an alternative to the widely used tandem analysis that sequentially performs PCA and CLA. 4.5. Other methods for multivariate analysis Other methods can be used for multivariate analysis of the data set. The characteristics of some of these methods are sketched below, citing textbooks where the reader may find additional information and references. Box 7 contains additional information about correlation measures, from the most widely used (Pearson correlation coefficient or Spearman rank correlation) to the least common measures based on sophisticated statistical concepts. Again, this is not an exhaustive list but rather a snapshot of the existing literature aiming to encourage further exploration. Correspondence Analysis is a descriptive/exploratory technique to analyse discrete variables with many categories and to group relevant information (or relevant relationships between rows and columns of the table) by reducing the dimensionality of the data set. Correspondence analysis is a nonparametric technique which makes no distributional assumptions, unlike factor analysis. This technique finds scores for the rows and columns on a small number of dimensions which account for the greatest proportion of the 2 for association between the rows and columns, just as principal components account for maximum variance. Correspondence analysis therefore uses a definition of chisquare distance rather than Euclidean distance between points. This is a special case of canonical correlation, in which one set of entities (categories rather than variables as in conventional canonical correlation) is related to another set. Correspondence analysis starts with tabular data, e.g. a multidimensional time series describing the variable “number of doctorates” in 12 scientific disciplines (categories) given in the USA between 1960 and 1975 (Greenacre, 1984). Case values cannot be negative. The variable(s) must be discrete: nominal, ordinal, or continuous variables segmented into ranges (in this case information may be lost, thus affecting the interpretation of the results). The correspondence analysis of this data would show, for example, whether anthropology and engineering degrees are at a distance from each other (based on the
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
79
g. a certain number of categories is needed. Note that CCA groups variables such that correlation between groups is maximized. DFA is similar to the analysis of variance.number of doctorates for the eight years of the sample). As in PCA. to discriminate countries on the basis of employment patterns in nine industries (predictors).e. The statistic B is distributed as a pq . for example. measured by Y1 and Y2 . This is the main difference to Cluster Analysis.g U = 1 X1 + 2 X 2 ) and a linear combination of Y1 and Y2 (e. for example. to classify males and females according to different body measurements. However. Pairwise group comparison (for more than two groups) will be done through an Ftest of significance of the (Mahalanobis) distance between group means. where the eigenvalues (one for each discriminant function) reflect the ratio of importance of the dimensions which classify cases of the dependent variable. q ) . There are also conceptual similarities with Principal Components and Factor Analysis. in which groups are not predetermined. 0. The classical textbooks for this technique are Greenacre (1984. e. that the question is to investigate the relationship between reading ability. 1993) Canonical correlation analysis (CCA) can be used to investigate the relationship between two groups of variables. whereas larger samples (n>200) make it possible to identify weaker canonical correlations as well (e. which plots points (categories. whereas Principal Component Analysis (PCA) groups variables maximizing the variance (and thus the difference between groups). Furthermore. The null hypothesis of the test is that at least one of the r canonical correlations is significant. the dimensions computed in correspondence analysis usually are not more informative than the original small table itself. Correspondence analysis can be used with many discrete variables. Suppose.3). given that with only two or three categories. Note that correspondence analysis is an exploratory. In particular in the example above. and arithmetic ability. This is visualized on the correspondence map. CCA implies the extraction of the eigenvalues and eigenvectors of the data matrix. not a confirmatory technique. measured by variables X 1 and X 2 .g. it handles only two or three variables well – beyond this interpretability might be problematic. while conventional factor analysis determines which variables cluster together (parametric approach). Computationally. we will have two canonical correlations corresponding to the square root of the eigenvalues 1 > 2 . Obviously. V = 1Y1 + 2Y2 ) chosen so that the correlation between U and V (the canonical variables) is maximized. the possibility of detecting canonical correlation robustly decreases with the sample size. More information on Johnson & Wichern (2002). but while PCA maximises the variance in all the variables 80 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . Canonical correlation looks for a linear combination of X 1 and X 2 (e. thus appropriate variables and value categories must be specified a priori. The classification into groups will be done by estimating a set of discriminant functions (also called canonical roots). Y2 ) is the Bartlett test20. involving the calculation of the statistic: B = {n 1 ( p + q + 1)} 2 r i =1 log e (1 i ) where n is the sample size. An approximate test for the relationship between ( X 1 . However. A way to classify variables (or cases) into the values of a dichotomous dependent variable is given by Discriminant Function Analysis (DFA). Note that the number of desired groups must be decided in advance. For small sample sizes (n around 50) only strong canonical correlations will be detected. When the dependent variable has more than two categories then it is a case of multiple Discriminant Analysis (or also Discriminant Factor Analysis or Canonical Discriminant Analysis). X 2 ) and ( Y1 . correspondence analysis determines which category values are close together (nonparametric approach).© OECD 2008 . values of the discrete variable) along the computed factor axes. p the number of X variables. i.g. q the number of Y variables and r= min( p.
Box 7. i=1. Spearman’s rank correlation is equivalent to Pearson correlation on ranks but does not require the assumption of normality of X and Y.…. More details can be found in McLachlan (2004). For a sufficiently large sample size (> 20). y i . The Pearson correlation coefficient (also called Pearson productmoment correlation coefficient or sample correlation coefficient) is the following: rxy = where i ( xi x )( y i y) (n 1) s x s y x. DFA maximises the differences between values of the dependent.n. and (iv) adequate sample size (a recommended four or five times as many cases as predictors).accounted for by a factor. Nor does it require variables measured on an interval scale or a linear association between variables. the variable t= (1 2 ) /(n 2) has a Student’s tdistribution under the null hypothesis (absence of correlation) and can be used to test the presence of statistically significant rank correlations. The square of the sample correlation coefficient is known as the coefficient of determination and is the fraction of the variance in accounted for by a linear fit of yi that is xi to yi .© OECD 2008 81 . (ii) low correlation of the predictors. including: (i) DFA results being highly sensitive to variables added or subtracted and to outliers.…. Kendall rank correlation coefficient Kendall measures the degree of correspondence between two rankings (and the statistical significance of this association). DFA is based on a number of assumptions.n. (iii) linearity and additivity. s y ) are the sample means (standard deviations) of xi . y ( s x . Measures of association Pearson’s correlation coefficient Suppose there are n measurements of two random variables X and Y normally distributed: xi . = 4P 1 n(n 1) HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . Spearman’s rank correlation coefficient =1 where 6 i d i2 n(n 2 1) di is the difference between each rank of corresponding values of x and y. y i where i=1.
P=5+4+5+4+3+1+0+0=22 and =0. If two variables X and Y are independent.Y) can be defined as: I ( X . Technically it is a multivariate distribution function defined on the ndimensional unit cube (see Nelsen. y ) log 2 p ( x. if they are completely opposite. Moreover. A copula. The second entry is “4” and its contribution to P is 4 (because it has four higher ranks to the left)…. over all the items. 82 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . p ( y ) are the marginal probability density functions of X and Y. in statistics. 1960). respectively. Given two random variables X and Y. 1999). Then the correlation ratio defined so as to satisfy: 2 = x nx ( y x xi y)2 y)2 ( y xi Mutual information A general concept of association is given by mutual information. Let yx = 1 nx i y xi . mutual information I(X. Probability. of items ranked after the given item by both rankings.Y) 0 . the is sample mean of y within category x and across the whole population respectively. P is the sum. Random Variables and Stochastic Processes (1991. in other terms. =1. Therefore. y ) p( x) p( y ) where p ( x. is a function summarizing all the information on the nature of the dependencies in a set of random variables. An even more general concept of association is given by the copula. Person A B 2 4 C 3 1 D 4 2 E 5 5 F 6 7 G 7 8 H 8 6 Rank by height 1 Rank by weight 3 The first entry in the second row (rank by weight) is 3. Suppose that and y xi indicates the observation yi x within the category x.Y)=0. With this reasoning. Consider the following example.Y ) = y Y x X p( x.etc. Correlation ratio The correlation ratio is a measure of the relationship between the statistical dispersion within categories and the dispersion across the entire population. y ) = p (x) p ( y ) and I(X. More precisely. the contribution of the first entry to P is then 5. Note that the logarithm has base 2. =0. nx .where P is the sum of “concordant pairs” in the two rankings. then p ( x. and y= nx y x / x nx . This means that there are five higher ranks to the left of “3”. For further details see Papoulis. the number of observations in category x. by how much knowledge of one variable will reduce the uncertainty in (or increase the information about) the other. I(X. If the rankings are completely independent. two rankings are equal. y ) is the joint probability distribution of X and Y and p (x ) . if the =1.57. Mutual information measures the mutual dependency of two variables or. 3rd edition.© OECD 2008 . The generalization of mutual information to more than two variables is called total correlation (or multivariate constraint or multiinformation) (see Watanabe. NY: McGrawHill).
STEP 5. NORMALISATION The objective is to identify the most suitable normalisation procedures to apply to the problem at hand, taking into account their properties with respect to the measurement units in which the indicators are expressed, and their robustness against possible outliers in the data (Ebert & Welsch, 2004). Different normalisation methods will produce different results for the composite indicator. Therefore, overall robustness tests should be carried out to assess their impact on the outcomes. 5.1. Scale transformation prior to normalisation Certain normalisation procedures produce the same normalised value of the indicator irrespective of the measurement unit. Applying a normalisation procedure which is not invariant to changes in the measurement unit, however, could result in different outcomes. Below is a simple example with two indicators – temperature and humidity – for two hypothetical countries A and B in 2003 and 2004. The raw data and normalised composites are given in Table 14, where the temperature is first expressed in Celsius and then in Fahrenheit. Each indicator is divided by the value of the leading country and aggregated with equal weights. Using Celsius data normalised based on “distance to the best performer”, the level of Country A has increased over time. While the same normalisation and aggregation methods are used, the results in Fahrenheit show a different pattern. The composite indicator for country A now decreases over time.
Table 14. Normalisation based on interval scales 2003 35 75 39 50 0.949 0.833 95 75 102.2 50 0.965 0.833 2004 35.9 70 40 45 0.949 0.821 96.62 70 104 45 0.965 0.821
Country A –Temperature (ºC) Country A –Humidity (%) Country B –Temperature (ºC) Country B –Humidity (%) Normalised data in Celsius Country A Country B Country A –Temperature (F) Country A –Humidity (%) Country B –Temperature (F) Country B –Humidity (%) Normalised data in Fahrenheit Country A Country B
The example illustrated above is a case of an interval scale (Box 3), based on a transformation f defined as f : x y = x + ; > 0, 0 , where the variable x is the temperature expressed in Celsius (C) and y is the temperature expressed in Fahrenheit (F). Their relationship is given by:
9 C + 32 . Another common change of measurement unit is the socalled ratio scale, which is based 5 y = x; > 0 . For example, a “length” might be expressed in on the transformation f : x F=
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
83
centimetres (cm) or yards (yd). Their relationship is indeed: 1 yd = 91.44 cm. The normalisation by country leader, not invariant on the interval scale, is invariant on the ratio scale. This means that
x xmax
ax + axmax +
, whereas
x xmax
=
ax . axmax
In general, all normalisation methods which are invariant on the interval scale are also invariant on the ratio scale. Another transformation of the data, often used to reduce the skewness of (positive) data, is the logarithmic transformation
f: x
y = log( x); x > 0 .
When the range of values for the indicator is wide or is positively skewed, the log transformation shrinks the righthand side of the distribution. As values approach zero they are also penalised, given that after transformation they become largely negative. Expressing the weighted variables in a linear aggregation in logarithms is equivalent to the geometric aggregation of the variables without logarithms. The ratio between two weights indicates the percentage increase in one indicator that would compensate for a one percentage point decline in another indicator. This transformation leads to the attribution of a higher weight for a oneunit increase, starting from a low level of performance, compared to an identical improvement starting from a high level of performance. The normalisation methods described below are all noninvariant to this type of scale transformation. The user may decide whether or not to use the log transformation before the normalisation, bearing in mind that the normalised data will be affected by the log transformation. In some circumstances outliers21 can reflect the presence of unwanted information. An example is offered in the Environmental Sustainability Index, where the variable distributions outside the 2.5 and 97.5 percentile scores are trimmed to partially correct for outliers, as well as to avoid having extreme values overly dominate the aggregation algorithm. That is, any observed value greater than the 97.5 percentile is lowered to match the 97.5 percentile. Any observed value lower than the 2.5 percentile on is raised to the 2.5 percentile. It is advisable first to try to remove outliers and consequently to perform the normalisation, as this latter procedure can be more or less sensitive to outliers. 5.2. Standardisation (or zscores)
t t For each individual indicator xqc , the average across countries xqc = c and the standard deviation
across countries
t qc = c
t are calculated. The normalisation formula is I qc =
t xqc
t xqc =c t qc = c
t , so that all I qc
t have similar dispersion across countries. The actual minima and maxima of the I qc across countries
depend on the individual indicator. For timedependent studies, in order to assess country performance t0 t0 across years, the average across countries xqc = c and the standard deviation across countries qc = c are calculated for a reference year, usually the initial time point, t0 .
84
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
5.3. MinMax Each indicator x
t qc
for a generic country c and time t is transformed in I
t qc
=
t xqc
t minc ( xq )
t t maxc ( xq ) minc ( xq )
t t t , where minc ( xq ) and maxc ( xq ) are the minimum and the maximum value of xqc across all countries
c at time t. In this way, the normalised indicators I qc have values lying between 0 (laggard,
t t t t xqc = minc ( xq ) ), and 1 (leader, xqc = maxc ( xq ) ). t xqc t minc ( xq0 )
The expression I
t qc
=
t t maxc ( xq0 ) minc ( xq0 )
is sometimes used in timedependent studies.
t t t However, if xqc > maxc ( xq0 ) , the normalised indicator yqc would be larger than 1. t xqc t mint T minc ( xq )
Another variant of the MinMax method is I
t qc
=
t t maxt T maxc ( xq ) mint T minc ( xq )
, where the
minimum and maximum for each indicator are calculated across countries and time, in order to take into t account the evolution of indicators. The normalised indicators, I qc , have values between 0 and 1. However, this transformation is not stable when data for a new time point become available. This implies an adjustment of the analysis period T, which may in turn affect the minimum and the maximum for t some individual indicators and hence the values of I qc . To maintain comparability between the existing and the new data, the composite indicator for the existing data must be recalculated. 5.4. Distance to a reference
t This method takes the ratios of the indicator xqc for a generic country c and time t with respect to t0 the individual indicator xqc = c for the reference country at the initial time t0 . t xqc t0 xqc =c
t I qc =
t0 Using the denominator xqc = c , the transformation takes into account the evolution of indicators t across time; alternatively the denominator xqc = c may be used, with running time t.
A different approach is to consider the country itself as the reference country and calculate the distance in terms of the initial time point as I
t qc
=
t xqc t0 xqc
.
This approach is used in Concern About Environmental Problems (Parker, 1991) for measuring the concern of the public in relation to certain environmental problems in three countries (Italy, France and the UK) and in the European Union. An alternative distance for the normalisation could be:
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
85
y =
t qc
t xqc
t0 xqc =c t0 xqc =c
which is essentially same as above. Instead of being centred on 1, it is centred on 0. In the same way, the reference country can be the average country, the group leader, or an external benchmark. 5.5. Indicators above or below the mean This transformation considers the indicators which are above and below an arbitrarily defined threshold, p, around the mean:
1 I
t qc
if if 1 if
w > (1 + p ) (1 p ) w w < (1 p ) (1 + p ) where w =
= 0
t x qc t0 x qc = c
The threshold p builds a neutral region around the mean, where the transformed indicator is zero. This reduces the sharp discontinuity, from 1 to +1, which exists across the mean value to two minor discontinuities, from 1 to 0 and from 0 to +1, across the thresholds. A larger number of thresholds could be created at different distances from the mean value, which might overlap with the categorical scales. t0 For timedependent studies to assess country performance over time, the average across countries xqc = c would be calculated for a reference year (usually the initial time point t0 ). An indicator that moved from significantly below the mean to significantly above the threshold in the consecutive year would have a positive effect on the composite. 5.6. Methods for cyclical indicators When indicators are in the form of time series the transformation can be made by subtracting the t mean over time Et xqc and by then dividing by the mean of the absolute values of the difference from
( )
the mean. The normalised series are then converted into index form by adding 100.
I =
t qc
t Et xqc
(
t xqc
t Et ( xqc )
t Et ( xqc )
)
5.7. Percentage of annual differences over consecutive years Each indicator is transformed using the formula
I
t qc
=
t x qc
t x qc1 t x qc1
100
The transformed indicator is dimensionless.
86
HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459  © OECD 2008
4 9. the case of eBusiness Readiness (Nardo et al.63 1.3 11.80 0.83 1. Rep. arbitrary choice of categorical scores and sensitivity to weighting.03 1.02 0.54 0.41 0.4 7.66 0.19 0.5 10.61 1.78 1.24 0.49 0.97 0.2 9.26 0.31 0.1 39. See.35 0.58 0.85 0.65 1.28 0.32 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 65.88 0.54 1.9 39.32 0.06 1.19 0.68 0.35 1.34 1.65 0.94 0.44 1.95 0.2 73.47 0.1 34.27 0.03 0.76 0.1 20 18 1 16 22 9 8 21 6 5 14 4 3 12 7 1 1.00 1.14 0.18 0.34 0.34 0.0 78.76 1.47 1.7 39.6 7.4 9.12 0.76 0.95 0.03 0.99 0.13 0.32 0.28 1.59 0. for example.98 0.5 9.1 7.4 13.52 0.00 0.12 0.9 9.00 0.4 4.59 1.97 1.11 1.© OECD 2008 87 Categorical scale 60 100 60 50 60 50 50 distance to reference country (c) Percentile MinMax zscore Rank * 80 60 0 60 100 50 40 80 40 40 50 40 20 50 40 0 .01 0.52 1.02 c=worst c=mean c=mean c=best 0.33 0.9 17.3 69.9 9.00 0.45 0.00 0.78 0.01 0.2 100 82.1 10.13 0.98 0.83 1.90 0.31 1.51 0.04 1.41 0.00 0.3 7.32 1.26 0.92 0.91 0.46 1.06 0.88 0.06 0.47 0.59 1.12 0.49 0.2 30. where all the indicators are expressed in terms of percentages of enterprises possessing a given HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 .11 0.1 21.52 0.00 0.16 0.04 0.98 0.25 0.46 0.63 0.76 0.76 0. Examples of normalisation techniques using TAI data Mean years of school (age 15 and above) Above/below the mean (**) ratio difference c= worst Country Finland United States Sweden Japan Korea. sensitivity to outliers.79 0.22 0.8 91.70 0.61 0.3 4.00 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 87.6 52.00 1.3 (*) High value = Top in the list (**) p=20% Examples of the above normalisation methods are shown in Table 15 using the TAI data. Netherlands UK 10 12 11.01 0.32 0.41 1.78 0. for example if the indicators are already expressed with the same standard.19 1.7 60.21 0.27 0.99 1.21 1.1 Canada Australia Singapore Germany Norway Ireland Belgium New Zealand Austria France Israel Spain Italy Czech Rep.14 0.98 0.75 0.68 1.02 0.4 9.78 0.02 0.44 0.6 95..9 7.00 1.05 0.24 0. 2004).22 0.06 0.24 0. Sometimes there is no need to normalise the indicators.63 0.38 1.25 0. The data are sensitive to the choice of the transformation and this might cause problems in terms of loss of the interval level of the information.00 0.34 1.7 8. Hungary Slovenia 11.18 1.79 0.6 10.26 1.04 0.32 1.2 11.25 1.52 1.Table 15.78 0.98 0.61 0.08 0.4 15 23 19 12 17 9 9 0.14 0.18 0.31 1.60 0.01 1.69 0.58 0.74 0.3 26.99 0.0 52.82 1.8 9.74 1.12 0.69 1.
benchmarks or projections. as one would lose the information inherent in the percentages.e. In such cases the normalisation would rather obfuscate the issue. 88 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . 2004). S ij ( x q ) can be written as S ij ( x q ) = Ti ( xq ) T j ( xq ) . Time distance is a dynamic measure of temporal disparity between two series expressed in units (time) readily comparable across indicators. It requires any of actual time series.e. let The time distance x qi be as usual the level of indicator q for country i. In formal terms. measuring the difference between two countries for a given indicator on the horizontal axis as time distance between those countries. For example. Time distance can also be applied to calculate a kind of growth rate for time: for each country S ( Sicherl (1973). i. i. For further information see country i and country j for the same level of indicator x q . However there could be a complementary measure of difference which takes time into account. Box 8.infrastructure or using a given ICT tool.© OECD 2008 . the difference in time which divides x q ) = (Ti ( x q + x q ) T j ( x q )) / x q . The time distance is thus 10 years (see Sicherl. Time distance The difference between two countries with respect to an indicator is usually measured on the vertical axis as the difference between values of that indicator at a point in time. the level of female life expectancy of 75 years was reached in Sweden in about 1960 and in the UK in 1970. thus poor data availability may hamper its use.
The first step in FA is to check the correlation structure of the data. each coefficient measuring the correlation between the individual indicator and the latent factor. and (iii) contribute cumulatively to the explanation of the overall variance by more than 60%.STEP 6. Standard practice is to choose factors that: (i) have associated eigenvalues larger than one. If no correlation between indicators is found. Therefore. This is the case for the new economic sentiment indicator. then it is unlikely that they share common factors. Each factor (usually estimated using principal components analysis) reveals the set of indicators with which it has the strongest association. Principal components analysis is usually used to extract factors (Manly. Individually they explain more than 10% of the total variance and overall they count for about the 87% of variance. For a factor analysis only a subset of principal components is retained (m).1. the composite no longer depends upon the dimensionality of the data set but rather is based on the “statistical” dimensions of the data. i. those that account for the largest amount of the variance. where factor and principal components analysis excluded the weighting of individual questions within a subcomponent of the composite index (see the supplement B of the Business and Consumer Surveys Result N. If the correlation between the indicators is weak. 8/9 August/September 200122). groups together individual indicators which are collinear to form a composite indicator that captures as much as possible of the information common to individual indicators. 199423). WEIGHTING AND AGGREGATION WEIGHTING METHODS 6. The second step is the identification of a certain number of latent factors (fewer than the number of individual indicators) representing the data. The idea under PCA/FA is to account for the highest possible variation in the indicator set using the smallest possible number of factors. and more specifically factor analysis. According to PCA/FA. Weights based on principal components analysis or factor analysis Principal components analysis. With the reduced data set in TAI (23 countries) the factors with eigenvalues close to unity are the first four. Each factor depends on a set of coefficients (loadings). as explained in the section on multivariate analysis. HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . as summarised in Table 16. then weights cannot be estimated with this method.e. (ii) contribute individually to the explanation of overall variance by more than 10%. weighting intervenes only to correct for overlapping information between two or more correlated indicators and is not a measure of the theoretical importance of the associated indicator. Note that individual indicators must have the same unit of measurement.© OECD 2008 89 .
39 0. Factor loadings of TAI based on principal components Factor loading Factor 1 Patents Royalties Internet Tech exports Telephones Electricity Schooling University 0.09 0.67 and 0.19+1.82 0.04 0.09 0.07 0.07 0.00 0.64+1.2 96.23 0.00 0. given that the square of factor loadings represents the proportion of the total unit variance of the indicator which is explained by the factor.04 0.67 0.0 3.04 0.42 0.17 Factor 4 0.2 93. The last step deals with the construction of the weights from the matrix of factor loadings after rotation.Table 16.00 Factor 2 0.88 0.00 Expl.9 0.25) and schooling (weight 0. The four intermediate composites are aggregated by assigning a weight to each one of them equal to the proportion of the explained variance in the data set: 0./Tot Note: Expl.06 0.49 and 0.20 Factor 3 0. The idea behind transforming the factorial axes is to obtain a “simpler structure” of the factors (ideally a structure in which each indicator is loaded exclusively on one of the retained factors).03 0.25 Note that different methods for the extraction of principal components imply different weights.29).25 for the fourth (Table 18).68 0. the third only by university (0.21 0.21 0.00 0.25 0.01 0.36 0.24 Likewise the second intermediate is formed by patents and exports (worth 0.1 Variance (%) 41.9 21.7 1.64 0.24).00 0.07 0.76)).02 0.00 0.3 11.97 0.08 2.© OECD 2008 . hence different scores for the composite (and possibly different country rankings).7 76.5 0..49 0./Tot is the explained variance divided by the total variance of the four factors.9 99.3 0. The first includes Internet (with a weight of 0.1 6.3 1.96 1.19 0.00 0.38 = 2.07 0.13 0.17 0.77 Factor 4 0. With the TAI data set there are four intermediate composites (Table 17). 0.2 0.00 Factor 3 0.77) and the fourth by royalties and telephones (weighted with 0.0 0.00 0.23 respectively).26 0. Rotation is a standard step in factor analysis – it changes the factor loadings and hence the interpretation of the factors.04 0.39+1.07 0.Var Expl. 0. For example.38 Factor 2 0. if Maximum 90 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . The approach used by Nicoletti et al.04 1.17 for the third and 0.06 0.9 63. Eigenvalues of TAI data set Eigenvalue 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3.20 for the second.0 87.26).00 0.76 0.01 0. (2000) is that of grouping the individual indicators with the highest factors loadings into intermediate composite indicators.12 0.10 0.25 0.05 0.7 2.64/(2.38 for the first (0.16 0. electricity (weight 0.23 0.79 0. Table 17.04 1. while leaving unchanged the analytical solutions obtained exante and expost the rotation.93 0.38 0. The rotation (usually the varimax rotation) is used to minimise the number of individual indicators that have a high loading on the same factor.1 100 The third step deals with the rotation of factors (Table 17).Var is the variance explained by the factor and Expl.05 0.8 12.9 Cumulative variance (%) 41.37 0.2 0.35 0.25 Squared factor loading (scaled to unity sum) Factor 1 0.56 0.24 0.64 0.29 0.
Countries (a. Table 18. The distance of each country with respect to the benchmark is determined by the location of the country and its position relative to the frontier. The line connecting countries a.2.02 PC 0.19 0.14 0. convexity of the frontier.16 6. (ii) nondiscrimination of countries which are the best in any single dimension (individual indicator). HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 .19 0. while country d is the worst performing. the better for the corresponding country.12 0.15 0. Data envelopment analysis (DEA) Data Envelopment Analysis (DEA) employs linear programming tools to estimate an efficiency frontier that would be used as a benchmark to measure the relative performance of countries. The countries supporting the frontier are classified as the best performing.© OECD 2008 91 .26 This requires construction of a benchmark (the frontier) and the measurement of the distance between countries in a multidimensional framework.17 0. (iii) a linear combination of the best performers is feasible. Both issues are represented in Figure 16 for the simple case of four countries and two base indicators which are represented in the two axes.07 0.07 0.08 0. d) are ranked according to the score of the indicators.11 0.Likelihood (ML) were to be used instead of Principal Components (PC).11 0. b. thus ranking them equally. c.20 0. the weights obtained would be as given in Table 18.e.07 0.15 0. and. The following assumptions are made for the benchmark: (i) positive weights – the higher the value of a given individual indicator. b and c constitutes the performance frontier and the benchmark for country d which lies beyond the frontier. i. Weights for the TAI indicators based on maximum likelihood (ML) or principal components (PC) method for the extraction of the common factors ML Patents Royalties Internet Tech exports Telephones Electricity Schooling University 0.
where I id is the frontier value of indicator i=1. less than one.e. and the worst. priorities) to individual indicators. The benchmark could also be determined by a hypothetical decisionmaker (Korhonen et al. the composite indicator is defined as the ratio of a country’s actual performance to its benchmark performance: 92 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 .27 In the BOD approach. The best performing countries will have a performance score of 1. This ratio * * * corresponds to ( w1d I 1d + w2 d I 2 d ) /( w1d I 1d + w2 d I 2 d ) . 2001). This is similar to the budget allocation method (see below) where experts are asked to assign weights (i.3.. 6. and I id is its actual value (see expression 18 for more than two indicators). while the benchmark corresponds to the ideal point with a similar mix of indicators (d’ in the example). who would locate the target in the efficiency frontier with the most preferred combination of individual indicators. Benefit of the doubt approach (BOD) The application of DEA to the field of composite indicators is known as the “benefit of the doubt” approach (BOD) and was originally proposed to evaluate macroeconomic performance (Melyn & Moesen.2.© OECD 2008 . 1991). The set of weights for each country therefore depends on its position with respect to the frontier. Data envelopment analysis (DEA) performance frontier Indicator 2 a d’ b d c 0 Source : Rearranged from Mahlberg & Obersteiner (2001) Indicator 1 The performance indicator is the ratio of two distances: the distance between the origin and the actual observed point and between the origin and the projected point in the frontier: 0 d / 0 d' .Figure 16.
however..q =1 . Cherchye et al.M } max ( I qc wqc Q I w q =1 qk qc ) for c=1.k { 1 . The optimal set of weights – if such exists – guarantees the best position for the associated country visàvis all other countries in the sample.M (21) subject to nonnegativity constraints on weights.... Finland) and country b (e. they have the top score in the ranking.CI c = M c =1 qc M * c =1 qc I wqc I wqc (19) where I qc is the normalised (with the maxmin method) score of qth individual indicator (q=1. suggested obtaining the benchmark as the solution of a maximisation problem.. (2004). Weights are given in the first eight columns. equation (21) can be reduced to the following linear programming problem by multiplying all the weights with a common factor which does not alter the index value and may then be solved using optimisation algorithms: CI c* = arg max wqc Q q =1 qc I wqc (22) s. With any other weighting profile.. United States) could be an optimal solution for these countries. masks a problem of multiple equilibria.g. the United States and Sweden have a composite indicator value of one.© OECD 2008 93 ..Q q =1 I k .... as before. i. Operationally. M . as long as no one country has the highest score in all individual indicators. have the same unit of measurement.….. although external benchmarks are also possible: I * = I * ( w ) = arg max I k . i.. (ii) the benchmark would in general be countrydependent. In Figure 6 any point between country a (e.e.t. (iii) individual indicators must be comparable.... one particular country were best in all individual indicators)..Q) for country c (c=1. q = 1. This.. The second step is the specification of the set of weights for each country.... Finland.. Thus weights are not uniquely determined. Q The result of the BOD approach applied to the TAI example can be seen in Table 19. Q q =1 qk I wqk 0 1 wqk k = 1. Note that (i) weights are country specific: different sets of weights may lead to the selection of different countries.g.…M) and wqc the corresponding weight. so there would be no unique benchmark (unless.. Optimal weights are obtained by solving the following constrained optimisation: Q CI = arg max * c wqc .M } ( Q q =1 qk I wq ) (20) I* is the score of the hypothetical country that maximises the overall performance (defined as the weighted average).. Note also that the multiplicity of solutions is likely to depend upon HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 ..k { 1 . while the last column contains the composite indicator values. the first to implement this method. 28 The resulting composite index will range between zero (worst possible performance) and 1 (the benchmark). the relative position of that country would be worse. given the (unknown) set of weights w.e.
15 0.28 Note: Columns 1 to 8: weights.15 0.16 0.14 0. Table 19.20 0.14 0.15 0.13 0.14 0.15 0.27 0.15 0.31 0.21 0.58 0.15 0.22 0.16 0.21 0.71 0.14 0.80 0.22 0.19 0.21 0.22 0.22 0.21 0. Unobserved components model (UCM) In the Unobserved Components Model (UCM).22 0.62 0.87 0.14 0.22 0.22 0.20 0.14 0.21 0.14 0.22 0.20 0. the lower the possibility of obtaining a unique solution.21 0.22 0.14 0.15 0.14 0.14 0.38 0.14 0.14 0.22 0.17 0.14 0.20 0.66 0.14 0.22 0.22 0.22 0.22 0.14 0.14 0.19 0. This application of the BOD is particularly interesting as it directly reveals how the respective pie shares contribute to a composite indicator score and the pieshares have a unity sum. the “percentage of firms using internet in country j” depends upon the (unknown) propensity to adopt new information and communication technologies 94 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 .20 0.15 0.22 0.14 0. The pieshares are expressed as the ratio of the weighted indicator values over the overall composite indicator score.17 0.21 0.21 0.62 0.22 0.21 0.34 0.14 0.21 0.51 0.22 0.22 0.21 0.22 0.15 0.22 0.22 0.22 0.22 0.14 0.© OECD 2008 (score) 1 1 1 CI .14 0.21 0.14 0.21 0.19 0.14 0. n=23 countries.20 0.21 0.14 0.15 0. instead of restrictions on the weights.21 0.20 0.21 0.14 0. column 9: composite indicator for a given country.75 0.14 0.14 0.15 0.14 0.15 0.14 0.21 0.22 0.21 0.21 0.22 0.20 0.17 0.14 0.20 0.22 0.22 0.22 0.14 0.21 0.14 0.22 0.73 0.20 0.18 0.14 0.22 0.14 0. which imposes restrictions on the pieshares.21 0.14 0.14 0. Benefit of the doubt (BOD) approach applied to TAI Telephones Schooling University Electricity Royalties Internet Patents Tech.22 0.14 0.17 0.14 0.14 0.16 0.14 0.15 0.22 0.14 0.22 0.14 0.19 0.20 0.15 0.14 0.22 0.22 0.14 0.14 0.49 0.20 0.20 0.21 0.14 0.54 0.20 0.14 0.15 0.21 0.22 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.19 0.21 0.14 0.14 0.15 0.15 0.21 0.13 0.14 0.22 0.29 Cherchye et al. individual indicators are assumed to depend on an unobserved variable plus an error term – for example.15 0. Export (weight) (weight) (weight) (weight) (weight) (weight) (weight) (weight) Finland United States Sweden Japan Korea Netherlands United Kingdom Canada Australia Singapore Germany Norway Ireland Belgium New Zealand Austria France Israel Spain Italy Czech Republic Hungary Slovenia 0.14 0.22 0.14 0.21 0.15 0. 6.14 0.4.14 0.16 0.15 0.20 0.21 0.13 0.52 0.60 0.15 0.21 0.15 0. (2008) propose an application of the BOD approach to the Technology Achievement Index.14 0.14 0.20 0.86 0.13 0.20 0.22 0.17 0.22 0.the set of constraints imposed on the weights of the maximisation problem in (22) – the wider the range of variation of weights.
but a different variance across indicators. First. once the observed scores are appropriately rescaled: E [ ph( c ) / I ( c .q ) (q) (q) (24) w(c.. The weight obtained will be set to minimise the error in the composite. q ) I ( c. q ) : I ( c . q )] ( q ) and ( q ) are unknown parameters mapping ph(c) on I(c. q) = q 1+ Q (c ) q =1 q 2 (25) where w(c.Q( c ))] = The weights are equal to: 2 Q( c ) q =1 w( c . depends on the variance of indicator q (numerator) and on the sum of the variances of the all the other individual indicators. since not all countries have data on all individual indicators. Second.q) may be imperfect (e. Clearly. h )) = 0 for c i or q h. The error term is assumed to be independent across indicators.Q(c) indicators. the phenomenon can be only imperfectly measured or observed in each country (e.g. q )) = 0 . The observed data consist in a cluster of q=1. including q (denominator). However.q). given that each individual indicator should ideally measure a particular aspect of the phenomenon independent of others. q ) is assumed to have a zero mean. q ) are both normally distributed simplifies the estimation of the level of ph(c) in country c. The variance of the conditional distribution is given by: HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 .q). w(c.. each measuring an aspect of ph(c). the relationship between ph(c) and I(c. The observed score of country c on indicator q. E( ( c . and the same variance across countries within a given indicator. as in BOD.. for example. and an increasing function of the variance of the other indicators. which is unknown under UCM.q) could be country specific. This method resembles the well known regression analysis.© OECD 2008 95 .q) is a decreasing function of the variance of indicator q. Let ph(c) be the unknown phenomenon to be measured. The main difference lies in the dependent variable.q) can be written as a linear function of the unobserved phenomenon and an error term. ( c . The weight. it is usually assumed that ph(c) is a random variable with zero mean and unit variance.1 ).plus an error term. This is done by using the mean of the conditional distribution of the unobserved component. errors of measurement). The assumption that both ph(c) and ( c . The error term ( c .…. the denominator of w(c. and the indicators are normalised using MinMax to take values between zero and one.g. (23) The error term captures two sources of uncertainty. Let c=1.. estimating the unknown component sheds some light on the relationship between the composite and its components. q ) 2 ) = 2 q . q ) = ( q ) + ( q )[ ph( c ) + ( c . I ( c . whenever the set of indicators is equal for all countries.…M(q) be the countries covered by indicator q. Furthermore.q) may be only a noisy indicator of the phenomenon if there are differences between countries on the indicator). E( ( c . q ) ( i . Therefore. for the error in the sampling of firms. This may produce noncomparability of country values for the composite. it also holds that E( ( c . weights will no longer be country specific and comparability will be assured. accounting. I(c. I(c.
. Weights are calculated as average budgets. not by ornithology experts. Analytic hierarchy process (AHP) The Analytic Hierarchy Process (AHP) is a widely used technique for multiattribute decisionmaking (Saaty. That is. 6. q ) . the budget allocation method could also be applied in public opinion polls. Budget allocation process (BAP) In the Budget Allocation Process (BAP). innovation. based on their experience and subjective judgment of the relative importance of the respective indicators. social and environmental subindices. 6. 1987).1 ).© OECD 2008 .g. great or small) about issues..5. I ( c . a biodiversity index should be handled by biodiversity experts. The budget allocation process has four different phases: • • • • Selection of experts for the valuation. and 2 q s (hence at least 3 indicators per country are needed for an exactly identified model) so the likelihood function of the observed data based 2 on equation (25) will be maximised with respect to ( q )s .. As with expert assessments. Public opinion From a methodological point of view. The estimation of the model could be simplified by the assumption of normality for ph(c) and ( c .6.e. Notice that the unknown parameters to be estimated are ( q )s . stratified or otherwise. biodiversity. as measured by base indicators. ( q )s . It is essential to bring together experts representing a wide spectrum of knowledge and experience to ensure that a proper weighting system is established. but rather for the given subindex. Calculation of weights. and increases in the disturbance term for each indicator. ordinary voters. Allocation of budgets to the individual indicators.31 It is crucial that the selected experts are not specialists for individual indicators. Iteration of the budget allocation until convergence is reached (optional). of a sustainable development index composed of economic. the “experts” should be those who decide on the relative (political) weight of economic. people are asked to express their degree of concern (e. However. It facilitates the decomposition of a problem into a hierarchical structure and 96 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . health. experts on a given theme (e. it is more difficult to ask the public to allocate a hundred points to several individual indicators than to express a degree of concern about a given problem. social and environmental questions. i.7. opinion polls focus on the notion of “concern”.g. It is also noteworthy that at the top level.g.30 6. ( q )s . …) described by a set of indicators are asked to allocate a “budget” of one hundred points to the indicator set. The variance decreases in the number of indicators for each country. The main advantages of BAP are its transparent and relatively straightforward nature and short duration. For example. e. education.. Special care should be taken in the identification of the population of experts from which to draw a sample.Q( c ))] = [ 1 + Q( c ) q =1 q 2 ] 1 (26) and can be used as a measure of the precision of the composite.var[ ph( c ) / I ( c . and q s and their estimated values substituted back in equations (24) and (25) to obtain the composite indicator and the weights.
together with the corresponding standard deviation.. They measure willingness to forego a given variable in exchange for another. AHP as a weighting method enables decisionmakers to derive weights as opposed to arbitrarily assigning them. The core of AHP is an ordinal pairwise comparison of attributes. A preference of 1 indicates equality between two individual indicators. In particular. asking which of the two is the more important. Each judgement reflects the perception of the relative contributions (weights) of the two individual indicators to the overall objective (Table 21). Table 20. insight. According to Forman (1983): AHP is a compensatory decision methodology because alternatives that are efficient with respect to one or more objectives can compensate by their performance with respect to other objectives. Table 21.assures that both qualitative and quantitative aspects of a problem are incorporated into the evaluation process. patents is three times more important than Internet. It could cause misunderstandings if AHP weights were to be interpreted as importance coefficients (see Ülengin et al. during which opinions are systematically extracted by means of pairwise comparisons. and intuition in a logical and thorough way within a hierarchy as a whole. exports Telephones Electricity Schooling University Patents 1 1/2 1/3 1/2 1/5 1/5 1 1/3 Royalties 2 1 ½ 2 1/4 ¼ 2 1/3 Internet 3 2 1 4 1/2 1/2 5 2 Tech exports 2 1/2 1/4 1 1/4 1/4 2 1/3 Telephone 5 4 2 4 1 1 5 2 Electricity 5 4 2 4 1 1 5 2 Schooling 1 ½ 1/5 1/2 1/5 1/5 1 1/4 University 3 3 1/2 3 1/2 1/2 4 1 For the example. 2001). This method makes it possible to check the consistency of the comparison matrix through the calculation of the eigenvalues. they are not importance coefficients.32 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . where Aii = 1 and Aij = 1 / Aji.© OECD 2008 97 . The preference is expressed on a semantic scale of 1 to 9. For a given objective. Comparison matrix of three individual TAI indicators Objective Patents Royalties Internet ……… Patents 1 wROY/wP wI/wP Royalties wP/wROY 1 wI/wROY Internet wP/wI wROY/wI 1 …… The relative weights of the individual indicators are calculated using an eigenvector. the comparisons are made between pairs of individual indicators. Weights represent the tradeoff across indicators. The results are represented in a comparison matrix (Table 20). experience. and by how much. while a preference of 9 indicates that the individual indicator is 9 times more important than the other one. AHP allows for the application of data. Figure 17 shows the results of the evaluation process and the weights. Comparison matrix of eight individual TAI indicators Objective Patents Royalties Internet Tech. Hence.
In addition. People's beliefs. Conjoint analysis is a decompositional multivariate data analysis technique frequently used in marketing (McDaniel & Gates. 6. summing up the “worth” of the individual indicators. 1995). and C slightly more important than A. only Q–1 comparisons are required to establish weights for Q indicators. A scenario might be a given set of values for the individual indicators. For example. who are asked to choose which set of individual indicators they prefer. The preference is then decomposed by relating the single components (the known values of individual indicators of that scenario) to the evaluation. 1998).Figure 17.8.e. but results in a set of weights that is less sensitive to errors of judgement.2 is often cited – do not drastically affect the weights (Saaty. 98 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . CA does the opposite. 1980. These can be inferred by using conjoint analysis (CA) from respondents’ rankings of alternative scenarios (Hair et al. Analytical hierarchy process (AHP) weighting of the TAI indicators Note.. are not always consistent. an inconsistency ratio. each person being presented with a different selection of sets to evaluate. is part of human nature. however. redundancy allows for a measure of judgment errors. Conjoint analysis (CA) Merely asking respondents how much importance they attach to an individual indicator is unlikely to yield effective “willingness to pay” valuations. Average weight (bold) and standard deviation. although 0. 1978). it disaggregates preferences. This is computationally costly.g. Although this methodology uses statistical analysis to treat the data. Small inconsistency ratios – the suggested ruleofthumb is less than 0.1.© OECD 2008 . citizens). This method asks for an evaluation (a preference) of a set of alternative scenarios. his/her judgment is inconsistent and the results are less trustworthy. The actual number of comparisons performed in AHP is Q(Q–1)/2. B slightly more important than C. 1998) and consumer research (Green & Srinivasan. For a matrix of size Q × Q. i. Karlsson. experts. if one person claims that A is much more important than B. Inconsistency. it relies on the opinion of people (e. however. It might therefore be adequate to measure the degree of inconsistency in order to make results acceptable to the public. If AHP derives the “worth” of an alternative. politicians.
for which Korea has higher scores for one or both indicators. are worth 17% of the weight according to FA. 6. but only fifth with EW or FA. For example. A probability of the preference could therefore be estimated as a function of the levels of the individual indicators defining the alternative scenarios: pref c = P( I 1c . The diversity in the weights resulting from applying different methods is notable. I 2 c . HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . I Qc ) (27) where Iqc is the level of individual indicator q=1. Korea ranks second with AHP. Solving for the individual indicator q. for country c=1. budget allocation (BAP) and analytical hierarchy process (AHP) (Table 22). Therefore P I qc (thus the weight) indicates a tradeoff – how the preference changes with the change of indicator. Performance of the different weighting methods The weights for the TAI example are calculated using different weighting methods – equal weighting (EW). Sweden or Japan. and should be carefully evaluated visàvis the objectives of the overall analysis. A preference function would be estimated using the information emerging from the different scenarios. exports and university. the derivatives with respect to the individual indicators of the preference function can be used as weights to aggregate the individual indicators in a composite index: CI c = Q q =1 P I qc I qc (28) The idea is to calculate the total differential of the function P at the point of indifference between alternative states of nature. Patents. Clearly. with each method the various individual indicators are evaluated differently. but only 9% according to AHP.. AHP assigns high weights (more than 20%) to two indicators. This influences strongly the variability of each country’s ranking (Table 23).9.. For example.e. the possibility of offsetting a deficit in some dimension with an outstanding performance in another.….The absolute value (or level) of individual indicators could be varied both within the selection of sets presented to the same individual and across individuals. the marginal rate of substitution of Iqc is obtained.. i. This implies compensability among indicators. The role of the variability in the weights and their influence on the value of the composite are discussed in the section on sensitivity analysis.Q.…. This is an important feature of this method. After estimating this probability (often using discrete choice models).© OECD 2008 99 . compared to the United States.. compensability might not be desirable when dealing with environmental issues. factor analysis (FA).M. for example.
g.11 0.18 0.13 0.11 0.© OECD 2008 .13 0.13 0.10 Weights for the indicators (fixed for all countries) Internet 0.09 Royalties 0.13 0.17 0.17 0. and third according to AHP.18 University 0.13 0.15 0. the United States ranks first according to BOD. FA and BAP.10 0.18 0.13 0.05 Electricity 0.13 0.11 0. factor analysis (FA).06 0.08 0.13 0. analytic hierarchy process (AHP) Method Patents EW FA BAP AHP 0.13 0.06 0. budget allocation (BAP). 100 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . TAI weights based on different methods Equal weighting (EW).25 Table 23. TAI country rankings based on different weighting methods EW Finland United States Sweden Japan Korea Netherlands United Kingdom Singapore Canada Australia Germany Norway Ireland Belgium New Zealand Austria France Israel Spain Italy Czech Republic Hungary Slovenia 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 FA 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 11 10 7 12 9 14 15 13 16 17 18 19 20 21 23 22 BOD 1 1 1 4 6 7 9 12 8 10 11 5 13 15 14 16 17 18 20 19 21 23 22 BAP 1 2 3 5 4 8 7 6 10 11 9 13 12 14 17 15 16 18 19 21 22 20 23 AHP 1 3 4 5 2 11 7 6 10 9 8 16 12 13 18 15 14 17 19 21 22 20 23 Note: e.21 Telephones 0.15 0.07 Tech exports 0.11 0.Table 22. second according to EW.06 Schooling 0.13 0.
et al. 2003) • Weights do not depend on ad hoc restrictions.© OECD 2008 101 . as it implies circular thinking.g. Governance indicators (see Kaufmann et al.. 2004).. Rewards the absence of outliers. so expert weighting may not be transferable from one area to another.g.e. in that the weights are endogenously determined by the observed performances (this is a useful secondbest approach whenever the best – full information about true policy priorities – cannot be attained). Useful in policy arena.g. • • HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . weights are country–specific. since for each country the maximisation problem gives higher weights to higher scores. by revealing information about the policy priorities. If each country has a different number of individual indicators. The benchmark is not based upon theoretical bounds. • Weighting reliability. more weight on Ozone emissions if the expert feels that not enough has been done to tackle them). The method is likely to produce inconsistencies for a number of indicators higher than 10. 2000) (weights based on survey from experts). Ecoindicator 99 (PréConsultants NL. Social Inclusion (Cherchye. 2001). • Without imposing constraints on weights (except nonnegativity) it is likely to have many of the countries with a composite indicator score equal to 1 (many countries on the frontier). 2001). Overall Health System Attainment (WHO. since policymakers could not complain about unfair weighting: any other weighting scheme would have generated lower composite scores. The index is likely to reward the status quo.g. Composite Indicator on eBusiness Readiness (EC. Employment Outlook (OECD. in environmental problems). This can be solved by imposing an external benchmark. Advantages and disadvantages of different weighting methods Advantages Disadvantages Benefit of the doubt (BOD) . given that weights are a decreasing function of the variance of individual indicators. Cherchye 2001). Allocating a certain budget over a too large number of indicators may lead to serious cognitive stress for the experts. 2000). but on a linear combination of observed best performances. Sustainable Development (Cherchye & Kuosmanen. National Health Care System Performance (King’s Fund. • • • • Reliability and robustness of results depend on the availability of sufficient data. Weights. Such an index could be “incentive generating” rather than “punishing” the countries lagging behind. Weighting may not measure the importance of each individual indicator but rather the urgency or need for political intervention in the dimension of the individual indicator concerned (e. It may happen that there exists a multiplicity of solutions making the optimal set of weights undetermined (this is likely to happen when CI=1). Macroeconomic performance evaluation (Melyn & Moesen. 1991. may help to define tradeoffs.g.1999).e. The best performer (that with a composite equal to one) will not see its progress reflected in the composite (which will remain stacked to 1). overcoming the difficulties of linear aggregations.Table 24. 2004b). • • • • • • • Unobserved Components Models . Weights could reflect specific local conditions (e. • • Weighting is based on expert opinion and not on technical manipulations. Budget Allocation . Unemployment (Storrie & Bjurek. 2000) (weights based on survey from experts). 1999. 1999. 2002).e. With highly correlated individual indicators there could be identification problems. • The indicator is sensitive to national policy priorities. Human Development Index (Mahlberg & Obersteiner.. Expert opinion is likely to increase the legitimacy of the composite and to create a forum of discussion in which to form a consensus for policy action.
g. However. Could produce inconsistencies when dealing with a high number of indicators (see previous discussion on the Budget Allocation). the Innovation Scoreboard (European Commission. Results depend on the set of evaluators chosen and the setting of the experiment. Allows all stakeholders to express their preference and creates a consensus for policy action.. 2001).e. • • • • • Can be used both for qualitative and quantitative data.g. Transparency of the composite is higher. e. indicator of quality of life in the city of Istanbul (Ülengin et al. It is simple and independent of outliers.….10. Additive aggregation methods The simplest additive aggregation method entails the calculation of the ranking of each country according to each individual indicator and summation of the resulting rankings. Index of Environmental Friendliness. • • Implies the measurement of “concern” (see previous discussion on the Budget Allocation). (Puolamaa et al. e. CI c = Q q =1 Rank qc for c=1.© OECD 2008 .g. • • Weights represent tradeoffs across indicators. Takes into account the sociopolitical context and the values of respondents.M. 2001c). (29) The second method is based on the number of indicators that are above and below a given benchmark. Information and Communication Technologies Index (Fagerberg. Expert opinion is likely to increase the legitimacy of the composite and to create a forum of discussion in which to form a consensus for policy action Provides a measure of the inconsistency in respondents replies • • Requires a high number of pairwise comparisons and thus can be computationally costly. • • • • Needs a prespecified utility function and implies compensability. the absolute value of information is lost. Analytic Hierarchy Process . advocated by Kahn (1998) and Kahn & Maynard (1995) for environmental applications.g. 1991). concern about environmental problems Index (Parker. Requires a large sample of respondents and each respondent may be required to express a large number of preferences. Disadvantages • • Deals with issues on the public agenda.Advantages Public Opinion – e.g. 102 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 .. Estimation process is rather complex. Weighting is based on expert opinion and not on technical manipulations. Depends on the sample of respondents chosen and on how questions are framed. The method is based on ordinal information (the Borda rule). Conjoint Analysis – e. 1996). 2001). This method uses nominal scores for each indicator to calculate the difference between the number of indicators above and below an arbitrarily defined threshold around the mean. AGGREGATION METHODS 6.
For example. i. with a threshold of 20% above the mean.M. in spite of a having a higher score than b.. obtaining a meaningful composite indicator depends on the quality of the underlying individual indicators and their unit of measurement. for example. (31) wq = 1 and 0 Although widely used. As with the preceding method.. x 2 . These marginal contributions can then be added together to yield a total value. if a hypothetical composite were formed by inequality. Krantz et al. HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . However. If. When using a linear additive aggregation technique. such that poor performance in some indicators can be compensated for by sufficiently high values in other indicators. “laboratory experiments made clear that the combined impact of the acidifying substances SO2. 33 Preferential independence is a very strong condition. 1. the interval level information is lost.….Q and c=1..M.11. GDP per capita and unemployment. Keeney & Raiffa.…. the use of a linear aggregation procedure implies that.... Both country a and country b are then counted equally as ‘above average’. 1990).. 1992). 1971). NH3 and O3 on plant growth is substantially more severe that the (linear) addition of the impacts of each of these substances alone would be. Additive aggregation could thus result in a biased composite indicator. NOX. environmental degradation. this aggregation imposes restrictions on the nature of individual indicators. In particular. 1.” (Dietz & Van der Straaten. it is simple and unaffected by outliers. 6. assume that the value of indicator I for country a is 30% above the mean and the value for country b is 25% above. Furthermore. This appears to be quite an unrealistic assumption (Funtowicz et al. environmental dimensions are involved.CI c = Q sgn q =1 I qc I EUq ( 1 + p ) for c=1. (30) The threshold value p can be arbitrarily set above or below the mean. 1976. a necessary and sufficient condition for the existence of a proper composite indicator is preference independence: given the individual indicators x1 . Geometric aggregation As discussed above. By far the most widespread linear aggregation is the summation of weighted and normalised individual indicators: CI c = with q Q q =1 wq I qc wq 1 . For example. 1960. this means that an additive aggregation function permits the assessment of the marginal contribution of each variable separately. an undesirable feature of additive aggregations is the implied full compensability.34 From an operational point of view. 1971). one with values 21.e.. xQ . there are no synergies or conflicts. an additive aggregation function exists if and only if these indicators are { } mutually preferentially independent (Debreu. two countries. among the different aspects of an ecosystem. For example. and the composite cannot be adjusted properly.© OECD 2008 103 . as it implies that the tradeoff ratio between two variables S x . The dimension and the direction of the error are not easily determined. for all q=1. additive aggregations have important implications for the interpretation of weights. it would not entirely reflect the information of its individual indicators.. y is independent of the values of the Q2 other variables (Ting.
the information contained in the impact matrix which is useful for solving the socalled multicriterion problem is: • • • • Intensity of preference (when quantitative criterion scores are present).6.12. Given the sets A (of alternatives) and G (of evaluation criteria) and assuming the existence of N alternatives and M criteria. j=1.e. would have equal composites if the aggregation were additive and EW were applied. 6. Compensability refers to the existence of tradeoffs. .e. it is possible to build an N x M matrix P called evaluation or impact matrix whose typical element pij (i=1.14 to 2. . Weight attached to each criterion. . by increasing the second indicator by 1 unit. In general.. In other words.54. .. there is no solution optimising all the criteria at the same time (the socalled ideal or utopia solution) and therefore compromise solutions have to be found. M. In a benchmarking exercise.© OECD 2008 . In sum.. .. qualitative or both types of information. 2 .qc is an inbetween solution. the possibility of offsetting a disadvantage on some criteria by a sufficiently 104 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . Number of criteria in favour of a given alternative. M considered relevant in a policy problem. in a multicriteria problem. The aggregation of several criteria implies taking a position on the fundamental issue of compensability.. and the other with 6. Obviously the two countries would represent very different social conditions which would not be reflected in the composite. a country would have a greater incentive to address those sectors/activities/alternatives with low scores if the aggregation were geometric rather than linear. On the aggregation rules issue: lessons learned from social choice and multicriteria decision analysis36 The discrete multicriterion problem can be described in the following way: A is a finite set of N feasible actions (or alternatives).1. the marginal utility of an increase in the score would be much higher when the absolute value of the score is low: country 1.6.23. The impact matrix may include quantitative. manipulation rules for the available information to arrive at a preference structure. N) represents the evaluation of the jth alternative by means of the ith criterion.14 for the first and 6 for the second). Combinations of this information generate different aggregation conventions. Consequently. while country 2 would go from 6 to 6. as this would give it a better chance of improving its position in the ranking. countries with low scores in some individual indicators thus would prefer a linear rather than a geometric aggregation. but the second only by 4%. If multicriteria analysis entails full noncompensability. In this way a decision problem may be represented in a tabular or matrix form.6. On the other hand.35 w In the example above.. where the action a is judged to be better than action b (both belonging to the set A) according to the mth point of view if gm(a)>gm(b). Relationship of each alternative to all the other alternatives. i. the use of a geometric aggregation (also called deprivational index) CI c = Q q =1 x q . 2. i. would increase its composite score from 2. the first country would increase its composite score by 19%. . the first country would have a much lower score on the composite than the second. 2 . if the aggregation were geometric (2. M is the number of different points of view or evaluation criteria gm i=1.
this is not the case in the building of a composite indicator. 1979). 3. A consequence of this theorem is that no perfect aggregation rule may exist. i. and if we label alternatives as countries. since equal weighting is usually only one of the possible weighting systems. the compensatory and noncompensatory.e. we can then state that multicriterion and social choice literature are clearly relevant for understanding the aggregation rules useful for building composite indicators. 1963). 2. a very sad conclusion results. 1976. the use of weights with ordinal criterion scores originates in noncompensatory aggregation procedures and gives the weights the meaning of importance coefficients (Keeney & Raiffa. Thus a preference relation is noncompensatory if no tradeoff occurs. 1994. Podinovskii.large advantage on another criterion. Neutrality: all alternatives (countries) must be treated equally. Note that while anonymity is clearly essential in the case of voters. In the context of composite indicators.© OECD 2008 105 . The use of weights with intensity of preference originates in compensatory multicriteria methods and gives the meaning of tradeoffs to the weights. There are generally three such basic requirements: 1. and conversely. can be directly derived from the seminal work of Borda (1784) and Condorcet (1785). The following will examine some ranking procedures hailing directly from the social choice tradition. “Reasonable” ranking procedures must therefore be found. this circumstance gives rise to two questions: is it possible to find a ranking algorithm consistent with some desirable properties?. This theorem shows that if one defines formally those properties which should hold in the definition of the concept of democracy. in the sense that limitations of these procedures will be elucidated. whereas smaller advantages would not do the same. By contrast. HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . In conclusion. is it possible to ensure that no essential property is lost? In social choice. 37 Vansnick (1990) showed that the two main approaches in multicriteria decision theory. A topic to begin with is Arrow’s impossibility theorem (Arrow. namely that the only political system respecting all those properties would be dictatorship. It is apparent that if the concept of criterion is substituted with that of the individual indicator (or voter in social choice parlance). and is compensatory otherwise. all indicators must be equally weighted). the response to Arrow’s theorem has been to search for less ambitious voting structures. Roberts. The study of social choice literature reveals that the various ranking procedures used in multicriterion methods have their origins in social choice. the multicriterion/social choice problem and the construction of a composite indicator are equivalent from a formal point of view. Monotonicity: greater support for one alternative may not jeopardize its success. it is necessary to retain only a few basic requirements. Arrow & Raynaud (1986. 1723) have proved that the correct solution of a multicriterion problem comes from a monocriterion optimisation. pp. Emphasis will be put on Arrow’s result. in other terms. The consequences of losing anonymity will be discussed further on. Anonymity: all voters must be treated equally (or.
country a is chosen. Good ranking procedures should consider the entire ranking of countries and not only the first position. whereas no indicator puts d first. However. as in Table 26. The sum for each row or each column is always a constant equal to the number of individual indicators (21 in this example). It is important to consider not only what a majority of criteria prefer but also what they do not prefer at all. Of course. Suppose that the objective is to find the best country. and d. it receives 1 point if ranked next to last. since eight indicators put it in first place. The Borda solution to the plurality rule paradox is the following scoring rule: given N countries. Thus in this case. d): Table 25. 228) 5 a c b d 7 b d c a 6 c b d a The first column of the example indicates that three indicators put country a in the first place.Let us start with the first numerical example in Table 25. and six. 21 indicators and 4 countries Number of indicators 3 a b c d (Rearranged from Moulin. b. This shows how many individual indicators put each of the countries into each of the four positions in the ranking and the score with which each position is rewarded. 2. 1988. awarded to the country ranked first. It is interesting that this paradox was the starting point of Borda’s and Condorcet’s research at the end of the 18th century. 106 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . c. followed by countries b. according to the first row of the matrix. seven. where 21 individual indicators rank four countries (a. A first possibility is to apply the socalled plurality rule. Let us then apply Borda’s rule to the data presented in Table 25. if a country is ranked last.© OECD 2008 . since 13 indicators put it in last place. it receives no points. but the plurality rule corresponds to the most common electoral system in the 21st century – this is a clear example of what Arrow’s impossibility theorem means in the realworld implementation of democracy. To begin. c. looking carefully at the numerical example 1 reveals that a is also the country with the strongest opposition. meaning that the country which is more often ranked first is the ‘winner’. Therefore. From the plurality rule paradox two main lessons can be learned: 1. the Borda winner is the country with the highest total score. b. The scoring process continues like this up to N1 points. c. the information can be presented in a frequency matrix fashion. p. eight indicators put country a into first place.
let us apply it to the data presented in Table 25. Table 27. Clearly. dPa=13. bPd=21. The i j. A frequency matrix for the application of Borda's rule Ranking a 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 8 0 0 13 Indicators b 7 9 5 0 c 6 5 10 0 d 0 7 6 8 3 2 1 0 Points By applying Borda’s scoring rule. and d by eight indicators. since it is always preferred to any other country. To make this procedure even clearer. his rule is based on a pairwise comparison between all countries considered. a number of individual indicators greater than 50% of the indicators considered) is eleven indicators. In this way an outranking matrix. The pairs whose concordance index is higher than 50% of the indicators are selected. Country b is preferred to both a and d. the majority threshold (i. country c is the Condorcet winner. For each pair. the following results are obtained: a = 8 × 3 = 24 b = 5 + 9 × 2 + 7 × 3 = 44 c = 10 + 5 × 2 + 6 × 3 = 38 d = 6 + 7 × 2 = 20 It can be seen that the selected country is now b rather than a. in this case. Outranking matrix derived from the Concordet approach a a 0 b 13 b 8 c 8 0 7 d 8 14 0 0 10 21 c 13 11 d 13 0 In this case. Between a and d. cPd=14. Thus the final ranking is the following: c HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . Given the transitivity property. cPa=13. is built. The plurality rule paradox has been solved.Table 26. b d a. cPb=11. a final ranking is isolated. d is preferred to a. The pairs with a concordance index higher than 11 are the following: bPa= 13. a is always preferred to b. Turning to Condorcet.© OECD 2008 107 . c.e. the constant sum is eij + e ji = 21 According to the first row of this matrix. a concordance index is computed by counting how many individual indicators are in favour of each country. outranking matrix is shown in Table 27. the elements of which hold the “constant sum property”.
1785). the solutions offered are different. the derivation of a Condorcet ranking may sometimes be a long and complex computation process. owed to Condorcet himself (Condorcet. the corresponding outranking matrix is shown below in Table 30. At this point. p. can we choose between Borda and Condorcet on any theoretical and/or practical grounds? A first question to address is: do Borda and Condorcet rules normally lead to different solutions? Fishburn (1973) proves the following theorem: there are profiles where the Condorcet winner exists and is never selected by any scoring method. thus b is unequivocally selected.As can be seen. Their disagreement in practice is in the normal situation. Table 28. Both approaches must therefore be examined carefully. An original Concordet example Number of indicators 23 a b c 17 b c a 2 b a c 10 c a b 8 c b a The corresponding frequency matrix is shown in Table29. Outranking matrix derived from Table 27 a a 0 b c 33 25 b 27 0 42 c 35 18 0 108 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . the question arises: in the context of composite indicators. Moulin (1988. In other words. However. c = 53 . the following results are obtained: a = 58. 249) proves that “a Condorcet winner (loser) cannot be a Borda loser (winner)”. Condorcet consistent rules and scoring voting rules are deeply different in nature.© OECD 2008 . Table 30. Applying the Condorcet rule. An original Concordet example Ranking a 1st 2nd 3rd 23 12 25 Indicators b 19 31 10 c 18 17 25 2 1 0 Points By applying Borda’s scoring rule. Consider the numerical example in Table 28 with 60 indicators and three countries. Table 29. Both Borda and Condorcet approaches solve the plurality rule paradox. b = 69.
d = 6 . This can be seen when analysing the properties of Borda’s rule. while only 27 are in favour of b. Consider the numerical example presented in Table 31. due to the transitive property. To check whether this assumption is correct. By applying Borda’s scoring rule. c = 11. Now suppose that d is removed from the analysis. This problem has been extensively studied by Fishburn (1984). 60 indicators being used. and all scoring methods in general. the corresponding frequency matrix is presented in Table 33. preference reversal phenomena may easily occur.In this case. Examine again the outranking matrix presented in Table 30. However. bPc and cPa. while Condorcet sometimes leads to an irreducible state of indecision. Table 32. the rank position of a given country depends on the number of countries considered. the following results are obtained: HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . nobody should have any reasonable doubt that a is still the best country.© OECD 2008 109 . thus country a is chosen. Fishburn example on Borda rule Number of indicators 3 c b a d 2 b a d c 2 a d c b The corresponding frequency matrix is in Table 32. Table 31. the concordance threshold is 31. From this matrix it can be seen that 33 individual indicators are in favour of country a. thus. a cycle exists and no country can be selected. So a legitimate question is why the Borda rule ranks b before a. It is: aPb. while the Condorcet rule uses only the number of indicators. b = 12. Frequency matrix derived from Table 31 Countries Ranking 1st 2nd 3rd 4th a 2 2 3 0 b 2 3 0 2 c 3 0 2 2 d 0 2 2 3 3 2 1 0 Points a = 13. From this example we might conclude that the Borda rule (or any scoring rule) is more effective. This implies that compensability is allowed. the intensity of preference is measured by the scores given according to the rank positions. since in this way a country is always selected. This implies that the mutual preference relation of a given pair of countries may change according to the countries considered. Borda rules have other drawbacks. Moreover. As a consequence. It is mainly due to the fact that the Borda rule is based on the concept of intensity of preference. In the framework of the Borda rule. Since d was at the bottom of the ranking.
b = 7. in short the CKYL ranking procedure. bPc and cPa may be found. and Young & Levenglick (1978). each voter chooses his/her best candidate with a fixed probability p. Since Kemeny (1959) proposes the number of pairwise inversions as a distance to be minimized between the selected ranking and the other individual profiles. i. it is better to use a Condorcet consistent rule or a scoring method. for this reason the corresponding ranking procedure is often known as the Kemeny median order. in the context of composite indicators. The probability ( N. a basic problem inherent in the Condorcet approach is the presence of cycles. the two approaches are perfectly equivalent. since individual indicators are supposed to be nonredundant. While this assumption is unrealistic in a mass election.e. a first conclusion is that a Condorcet approach is necessary when weights are to be understood as importance coefficients. i. Note that these probabilities are estimated under the socalled “impartial culture assumption”. The maximum likelihood principle selects as a final ranking that with the maximum pairwise support. thus country c is now preferred. while Borda’s is desirable when weights are meaningful in the form of tradeoffs. Voters all have the same competence.e. For this reason we can call this approach the CondorcetKemenyYoungLevenglick ranking procedure. the following results are obtained: a = 6. c = 8 . 2 110 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 .e. Voters’ opinions do not influence each other. 2. cases where aPb. he built examples to explain it (as in Table 28) and he even came close to finding a consistent rule capable of ranking any number of alternatives when cycles are present. The selected ranking is also a median ranking for those composing the profile (in multicriteria terminology. This is the ranking which involves the minimum number of pairwise inversions. As we have seen. i. Frequency matrix derived from Table 31 without country d Countries Ranking 1st 2nd 3rd a 2 2 3 b 2 3 2 c 3 2 2 Points 2 1 0 By applying Borda’s scoring rule. 95). Estimations of probabilities of getting cycles can be found in Fishburn (1973. we need to tackle the issue of when. that voters’ opinions do not influence each other. Given the consensus in the literature that the Condorcet theory of voting is noncompensatory while Borda’s is fully compensatory. p. Its main methodological foundation is the maximum likelihood concept. who made the first intelligible description of the Condorcet approach. fully understand and axiomatize Condorcet’s approach to solving cycles were made by Kemeny (1959). M ) of obtaining a cycle with N countries and M individual indicators increases with both N and M. where 1 < p <1 and p is the same for all voters. At this point. Borda’s rule is fully dependent on irrelevant alternatives and preference reversals can occur with an extremely high frequency.Table 33. it is the “compromise ranking” among the various conflicting points of view). it is fully respected in the building of a composite indicator. The main attempts to clarify. Condorcet himself was aware of the problem of cycles in his approach.© OECD 2008 . Condorcet made three basic assumptions: 1. who achieved its clearest exposition and complete axiomatization. Unfortunately.
2007. The CKYL ranking procedure naturally does not respect this axiom. c a is the final result. the algorithm per se is very simple. for more detail).© OECD 2008 111 . note that the computational problem is a clear drawback of this approach. which is not always desirable in this context. The original Condorcet problem has been solved in a However. 2. when ten countries are considered. it is essential that no indicator weight constitute more than 50% of the total weights. when indicator weights are derived from different dimensions. Each voter’s judgement on any pair of candidates is independent of his/her judgement on any other pair. given that complete decisiveness yields to dictatorship. and this individual indicator would become a dictator in Arrow’s terminology. summed over all pairs of countries (see Munda & Nardo.3. In general. A Condorcet consistent rule always presents smaller probabilities of the occurrence of a rank reversal in comparison with any Borda consistent rule. Arrow’s impossibility theorem forces us to make a tradeoff between decisiveness (an alternative has to be chosen or a ranking has to be made) and anonymity (i. it is 10!=3. The maximum likelihood ranking of countries is the ranking supported by the maximum number of individual indicators for each pairwise comparison. Assumption 2 states that each individual indicator should be weighted equally. 1. 2005b). As a consequence. consider the numerical example in Table 34 with three countries and three individual indicators (this is the classical example of the Condorcet paradox shown in many textbooks). To conclude. for example. HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . As discussed above. a b c b c a b c a a b c c a b c a b 100 104 86 94 80 76 The ranking b satisfactory way.e. where local stability means that the ranking of countries does not change if only an interval of the full ranking is considered. Indeed. To solve this problem it is necessary to use numerical algorithms. The third assumption refers to the famous axiom of independence of irrelevant alternatives of Arrow’s theorem. equal weighting). two considerations have to be observed on this subject. By applying the CKYL ranking procedure to the numerical example of Table 28 the following six possible rankings with the corresponding scores are obtained. otherwise the aggregation procedure would become lexicographic in nature. However. the loss of anonymity in favour of decisiveness in this case is even a positive property. This is again a strong argument in favour of a Condorcet approach in a multicriterion framework. the requirement is that no dimension should weigh more than 50% of the total weights (Munda.628. assumption 1 always applies for composite indicators. Following from this. The number of permutations can easily become unmanageable. Although the theoretical characterization of the CKYL ranking procedure is not easy.800. The CKYL ranking procedure is the “only plausible ranking procedure that is locally stable”.
This conflict can be treated in the light of a noncompensatory logic by taking into account the absence of preferential independence within a discrete noncompensatory multicriteria approach (NCMC) (Munda. 6. weights in additive aggregations necessarily take the meaning of substitution rates (tradeoffs) and do not indicate the importance of the associated indicator.e. As a consequence a conflict among the variables could arise.M of countries. it is also assumed that a higher value in an individual indicator is preferred to a lower.….13. for example. For simplicity’s sake.…. some may be in favour of one particular country.© OECD 2008 . the 112 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . For example. the indicator score or variable) is based on an interval or ratio scale of measurement. c=1. the cycle aPb. i. being majority equal to 2/3.Q. These are: a b c. 1996. a larger number of individual indicators. b c a. three rankings have the greatest support.38 As a consequence. while others will favour another. the possibility of offsetting a disadvantage on some variables by a sufficiently large advantage on others. 2005). By applying the Condorcet rule.Table 34. An unsolvable ranking problem Number of indicators 1 a b c 1 c a b 1 b c a By applying the Borda rule. The implication is the existence of a theoretical inconsistency in the way weights are actually used and their real theoretical meaning. in the construction of the TAI a compensatory logic (using equal weighting) would imply that it is acceptable to renounce. bPc and cPa is obtained. 1994). the substitution rates equal the weights of the variables up to a multiplicative coefficient (Munda & Nardo. Noncompensatory multicriteria approach (MCA) As in common practice. To eliminate ties. litres or euro) and not as qualities (e.e. This implies a compensatory logic. When a number of variables are used to evaluate a set of countries. and when individual indicators are expressed as intensities (e. bad. This example is a perfect manifestation of Arrow’s theorem. the higher. good. assume that the evaluation of each country c with respect to an individual indicator xq (i. This is the reason why the use of individual indicator weights is important. Vincke. This can be done using a noncompensatory multicriteria approach. q=1. Anonymity is lost but decisiveness improves enormously. 2003). in pounds. For the weights to be interpreted as “importance coefficients” (the greatest weight being placed on the most important “dimension”). or 2% of university enrolment in exchange for a 2% increase in electricity consumption.e. noncompensatory aggregation procedures must be used to construct composite indicators (Podinovskii. i. or some indicator weights. greater weight could be given to components which are considered more significant in the context of the particular composite indicator (OECD.g. 1995. c a b the cycle remains unsolved. By applying the CKYL ranking procedure. medium) nor in rankings. would be required. Given a set of individual indicators G={xq}. all countries receive a score equal to 3 – no selection is possible. no decision is possible. and a finite set M={c}. 2% of patents granted to residents. Roy.g. 1992). Yet it can be shown that when using an additive or a multiplicative aggregation rule.
003 2. And if Iq is indeed higher for country a . In the latter. Further assume the existence of a set of weights w={wq}. Table 35.3 10 23. The first step results in a M × M matrix. a noncompensatory rule for ranking countries can be supplied by the CKYL ranking procedure. the score of country j is the sum of the weights of individual indicators on which this country does better than country I. here.7 1/8 Telephones 3.653 1/8 Schooling 10 12 11.8 66. it is the weight of individual indicator q which enters into the computation of the overall importance of country a.080 2.6 9.. This information constitutes the impact matrix.7 80.6 64.8 49 4. • Ranking of countries in a complete preorder. For explanatory purposes.. Roy.073 4.2 179. with q =1 wq = 1 .. Any generic element of E: ejk . interpreted as importance coefficients. according to all the Q individual indicators. Such a global pairwise comparison is obtained by means of equation: e jk = Q q =1 ( wq (Pr jk ) + 1 wq ( In jk )) 2 (32) where wq (Pr jk ) and wq ( In jk ) are the weights of individual indicators presenting a preference and an indifference relation respectively. 1986. q=1.4 9.9 15.Q better.© OECD 2008 113 .1 125.865 3.150 4.096 3.4 13.145 3. As has already been discussed. the question to be answered is whether Iq is more important than Iz. In other words. in a manner consistent with the definition of weights as importance measures. 2007): aggregation convention can be divided into two main steps • Pairwise comparison of countries according to the whole set of individual indicators used. j k is the result of the pairwise comparison.997 3.Q.6 130 156.2 59.2. the question is rather whether Iq is higher for country a or for country b. between countries j and k.8 1/8 Tech exports 50. together with CA.7 66.5 10. E.8 1/8 University 27.2 1/8 The mathematical (Munda & Nardo. The pairwise comparisons are different from those in the AHP method – which belongs to the set of compensatory multicriteria methods. Impact matrix for TAI (five countries) Patents Finland USA Sweden Japan Korea weight 187 289 271 994 779 1/8 Royalties 125. 1996). called outranking matrix (Arrow & Raynaud. HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . consider only five of the countries included in the TAI data set39 and imagine that equal weights are given to all of the individual indicators (Table 35). as well as – if any – half of the weights for the individual indicators on which the two countries do equally well (32) ejk + ekj = 1 clearly holds.972 1/8 Electricity 4.8 1/8 Internet 200.
the score of the first ranking (USA.625 0. R={rs}. For each rs. M ! and e jk r s ..5 0.75 0 According to CKYL.125 6. 2 .125 According to expression (33) the final ranking will be the permutation(s) with the highest score.75 0 0..625 0.625 against Finland and Korea and 0.2. Sweden.In the TAI example. while the complement to one is the score of the US.625 0. electricity (weight 1/8) and university (weight 1/8).625 against Japan and Korea (overall 2. The comparison for Sweden yields 0.25 0.375 6. More formally.375 USA 0.625 0.375.75 against Japan (overall 1.625 against Korea and 0. the ranking of countries with the highest likelihood is that supported by the maximum number of individual indicators for each pairwise comparison.5..© OECD 2008 . Call R the set of all M! possible complete rankings of alternatives.125 6. the number of permutations obtained from five countries is 120: the first five are listed in Table 37. In this example the first three permutations have the highest overall score. ( r * ) is the solution of: s s as the summation of ejk over all the M 2 pairs j. Finally Japan obtains 0.5 0. the pairwise comparison of countries such as Finland and the United States shows that Finland has better scores for the individual indicators – Internet (weight 1/8). s = 1.5 0 0. Thus the score for Finland is 4*1/8=0. That is. Outranking impact matrix for TAI (five countries) Finland Finland USA Sweden Japan Korea 0 0. For example.. M!.25).25 0. The final score of this ranking is then equal to 2.375 6.375).75 against Korea.375 Japan 0. the comparison of the USA with the other countries yields 0.25 Korea 0.75 0.375 0. and thus all those can be considered as a winning ranking. Finland obtains 0.25+2+1. compute the corresponding score alternatives.75=6. summed over all pairs of countries considered.. Permutations obtained from the outranking matrix for TAI and associated score USA Sweden Sweden Finland Finland USA Sweden Finland USA USA Sweden Finland Finland USA Finland Sweden USA Sweden Japan Japan Japan Japan Japan Japan Korea Korea Korea Korea Korea Korea 6. Japan and Korea) is obtained as follows: according to the impact matrix.375 6.75 against Japan (overall 2). Finland.5 against Finland and Sweden and 0.625 0. the outranking matrix E is composed of all the M(M–1) pairwise comparisons. The resulting outranking matrix is Table 36: Table 36.5 0 0.. telephones (weight 1/8).375 0. 114 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 .375 Sweden 0.375+0. Table 37. The final ranking r* * = max e jk where e jk R (33) In the TAI example. s=1.k of = e jk where j k ..
e. In other terms. i varying ix across individual indicators) can only be meaningfully aggregated by using geometric functions.14. The drawbacks.e. b is preferred to c but c is preferred to a (the same problem highlighted for AHP with indicators). the measurement scale must be the same for all indicators when aggregating. Thus. temperature in Celsius or Fahrenheit) of type f : x varying across sub indicators) or on a fully comparable interval scale ( constant). HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 .g. i. provided that x is strictly positive. Ebert & Welsch (2004) have shown that the use of linear aggregations yields meaningful composite indicators only if data are all expressed on a partially comparable interval scale x+ i > 0 (i. but i (i. qualitative and quantitative information can be treated jointly. on the other hand. moreover. the possible presence of cycles/rank reversal in which in the final ranking. care should be taken when indicators measured on different scales coexist in the same composite. In particular. e. the use of different ratio or interval scales to express the same indicator and the meaning of tradeoffs taken to the weights. The normalisation method should be properly used to remove the scale effect.e. it does not need any manipulation or normalisation to assure the comparability of individual indicators. With this method. except in the case of indicators measured on a different ratio scale.© OECD 2008 115 . country a is preferred to b.e.This aggregation method has the advantage of overcoming some of the problems raised by additive or multiplicative aggregations. Noncomparable data measured on a ratio scale (i.e. a very small difference could also produce the same ranking.40 6. include the dependence of irrelevant alternatives. In addition. Performance of the different aggregation methods The type of aggregation employed is strongly related to the method used to normalise raw data (Step 5). information on intensity of preference of variables is never utilised: even though the difference between values on an indicator for two countries might be quite large. Furthermore. kilograms and pounds) f : x where i > 0 (i. fixed. preference dependence.
second according to the geometric aggregation and third according to the multicriteria. Netherlands United Kingdom Singapore Canada Australia Germany Norway Ireland Belgium New Zealand Austria France Israel Spain Italy Czech Republic Hungary Slovenia 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 NCMC 3 1 2 4 9 8 5 12 11 9 7 6 13 17 15 15 14 18 20 19 21 23 22 GME 2 1 3 4 16 5 6 18 13 14 8 11 7 9 17 12 10 15 19 21 23 22 20 Table 38 highlights the dependence of rankings on the aggregation methods used (in this case linear. while the reverse is true for Belgium. Finland ranks first according to the linear aggregation. the resulting rankings are very different. geometric and based on the multicriteria technique for the TAI data set with 23 countries).Table 38. Rep. 116 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . Note that Korea ranks sixteenth with GME. For example. Although in all cases equal weighting is used. while its ranking is much higher according to the other two methods.© OECD 2008 . TAI country rankings by different aggregation methods LIN Finland United States Sweden Japan Korea.
etc.c .I Q . imputation of missing data. ws .. I 2. Note that the structure of the uncertainty and sensitivity analysis discussed below in relation to the TAI case study is only illustrative. Our synergistic use of uncertainty and sensitivity analysis has recently been applied for the robustness assessment of composite indicators (Saisana et al..1 . the choice of aggregation model. Sensitivity analysis is thus closely related to uncertainty analysis. More formally. The index is based on Q normalised individual indicators I 1. to increase its transparency.c for that country and schemedependent weights ws . ws . which aims to quantify the overall uncertainty in country rankings as a result of the uncertainties in the model input. 2 .c .ws . 2 .... AHP.2. GME.I Q . In practice the setup of the analysis will depend upon which sources of uncertainty and which assumptions the analyst considers relevant for a particular application. NCMC) and index s refers to the weighting scheme (BAP.. 2008) and has proven to be useful in dissipating some of the controversy surrounding composite indicators such as the Environmental Sustainability Index (Saisana et al.2.3 . shape the message communicated by the composite indicator.© OECD 2008 117 . This is what sensitivity analysis does: it performs the ‘Xrays’ of the model by studying the relationship between information flowing in and out of the model. All these subjective choices are the bones of the composite indicator and. CI c = f rs (I 1. r = 1.. where the index r refers to the aggregation system (LIN. I 2 . UNCERTAINTY AND SENSITIVITY ANALYSIS Sensitivity analysis is considered a necessary requirement in econometric practice (Kennedy.STEP 7.ws . good modelling practice requires that the modeller provide an evaluation of the confidence in the model. sensitivity analysis is the study of how the variation in the output can be apportioned..M.1 .. and of how the given composite indicator depends upon the information fed into it. Let CI be the index value for country c.Q ) (34) according to the weighting model f rs . BOD). The most frequently used normalisation methods for the individual indicators are based on the MinMax (35) standardised (36).. qualitatively or quantitatively. the weights of the indicators. the treatment of missing values. together with the information provided by the numbers themselves.3. to identify which countries are favoured or weakened under certain assumptions and to help frame a debate around the index.. 2005a. HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . 2005b) .c . assessing the uncertainties associated with the modelling process and the subjective choices taken. s = 1.. different weighting schemes and different aggregation schemes.…. Since the quality of a model also depends on the soundness of its assumptions. Below is described how to apply uncertainty and sensitivity analysis to composite indicators. 2003) and has been defined as the modeller’s equivalent of orthopaedists' Xrays.c .. ws .. c=1. or on the raw indicator values (37).. Composite indicator development involves stages where subjective judgements have to be made: the selection of individual indicators. A combination of uncertainty and sensitivity analysis can help to gauge the robustness of the composite indicator ranking. different normalisation methods. In the TAI case study we focus on five main uncertainties/assumptions: inclusion/exclusion of one indicator at a time.Q for the individual indicators. Saltelli et al.c . to different sources of variation in the assumptions.
It can be calculated as the average of the absolute differences in countries’ ranks with respect to a reference ranking over the M countries: RS = 1 M M c =1 Rank ref ( CI c ) Rank ( CI c ) (38) The reference ranking for the TAI analysis is the original rank given to the country by the original version of the index. AHP) for aggregation systems (GME. by exploring all uncertainty sources simultaneously to capture all possible synergy effects among uncertain input factors. 7. the editing scheme. NCMC). RS . which can take integer values between 1 and 3. the normalisation scheme and so on. c = x q . i. NCMC). A discrete uncertain factor.e.c where I q . until a full set of input variables is available to compute Rank (CI c ). GME.c x q . General framework The analysis is conducted as a single Monte Carlo experiment.1. is used for the aggregation system and similarly for the weighting scheme. Note that the MinMax method (35) can be used in conjunction with all the weighting schemes (BAP. The average shift in country rankings is also explored.I q . The uncertainties are transferred into a set of 118 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . The standardised value (36) can be used with weighting schemes (BAP.c is the raw value of the individual indicator x q for country c . The investigation of Rank (CI c ) and R S is the scope of the uncertainty and sensitivity analysis. e.c is the normalised and x q . Rank (CI c ) is an output of the uncertainty/sensitivity analysis.c = x q .2.g. the use of uncertain input factors to decide which aggregation system and weighting scheme to adopt. e. Other trigger factors are generated to select those indicators to be omitted. AHP and BOD) and for all aggregation systems (LIN. Uncertainty analysis (UA) Various components of the CI construction process can introduce uncertainty into the output variables. Rank (CI c ) and RS . The rank assigned by the composite indicator to a given country. NCMC).41 7.© OECD 2008 .c = I q . AHP) for aggregation systems (LIN. The UA is essentially based on simulations that are carried out on various equations that constitute the underlying model. This latter statistic captures the relative shift in the position of the entire system of countries in a single number. And the raw indicator value (37)can be used with weighting schemes (BAP.c min( x q ) mean( x q ) std ( x q ) (35) (36) (37) range( x q ) I q . This involves the use of triggers.g.
© OECD 2008 119 .5) and 2 if [0. the Q +1 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . The following is the Monte Carlo approach. The first input factor. for X 1 . X2 1 2 3 Normalisation MinMax (equation (35)) Standardisation (equation (36)) None (equation (37)) Both X 1 and X 2 are discrete random variables.1] . 1 ) Q +1 None ( X are used) 3 = 0 ) all indicators [ 1 2 . if any. which is based on multiple evaluations of the model with k randomly selected model input factors. e. uniformly distributed between [0. is used for the selection of the editing scheme (for the second TAI analysis only): X1 1 2 Estimation of missing data Use bivariate correlation to impute missing data Assign zero to missing datum The second input factor. X 1 . no individual indicator will be excluded. Uncertain factor X 3 is generated to select which individual indicator. select 1 if [0. one of the Q individual indicators will be excluded with equal probability. should be omitted. and applying the socalled Russian roulette algorithm.1].Assign a pdf to each input factor X i .1] Q +1 1 That is. such that the resulting Rank (CI c ) and RS are nonlinear functions of the uncertain input factors.2.0. i = 1. Clearly. ) Q +1 Q +1 X3 =1 … Q X3 = Q . X 2 .g. with probability ..5. and the estimated probability distribution (pdf) of Rank (CI c ) and RS . Various methods are available for evaluating output uncertainty. The procedure has three steps: . excluded individual indicator [0. X 3 . is the trigger to select the normalisation method. while with probability [1Q +1 [ … 1 ]. In practice they are generated by drawing a random number .scalar input factors..k .
the number of random 120 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . The constructive dimension of the Monte Carlo experiment.Q Q +1 could have been sampled with equal probability. the weights assigned by that expert (either for the BAP or AHP schemes) are assigned to the data.e.c (39) while when GME is selected they are: CI c = Q q =1 (I ) q . X 6 .© OECD 2008 . they will nevertheless be generated by the random sample generation algorithm. given that the row dimension of the Monte Carlo sample (constructive dimension) should be fixed in a Monte Carlo experiment. the weights of the other factors are scaled to unity sum to make the composite index comparable with either BAP or AHP. In this experiment. even if some of the sampled factors are active in a particular run. is used to select the expert.probability of X 3 = 0 could have been made larger or smaller than 1 and the values X 3 = 1.. Trigger X 4 is used to select the aggregation system: X4 1 2 3 Aggregation Scheme LIN GME NCMC Note that when LIN is selected the composite indicators are computed as: CI c = Q q =1 wsq I q . there are 20 experts. this uncertain factor would be generated in each individual Monte Carlo simulation.. However. X 5 is the trigger to select the weighting scheme: X5 1 2 3 Weighting Scheme BAP AHP BOD The last uncertain factor. When BOD is selected the exclusion of individual indicators leads to a reexecution of the optimisation algorithm. i. Clearly the selection of the expert has no bearing when BOD is used ( X 5 = 3 ).. Once an expert has been selected at runtime via the trigger X 6 . A scatter plot based sensitivity analysis would be used to track which indicator affects the output the most when excluded.c wsq (40) When NCMC is selected the countries are ranked directly from the outscoring matrix. Recall also that whenever an indicator is excluded.2.
• They can be justified in terms of rigorous settings for sensitivity analysis. X kl of input factors is called a sample). Close the loop over l.2. To compute a variancebased sensitivity measure for a given input factor X i . stratified sampling. the value of the rank assigned by the composite indicator to each country. When several layers of uncertainty are present simultaneously. R S .. with nonlinear models. Sensitivity analysis using variancebased techniques are modelfree and display additional properties convenient in the present analysis.. N. possibly nonadditive model.N (a set l X l = X 1l . the variance of Y . 2008). 2000. . generating values for the scalar output variable Y l . The characteristics of this pdf. It has been noted earlier that composite indicators may be considered as models. due to the uncertainty in X i : HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . X 2 . Saltelli et al. such as the variance and higher order moments.3.© OECD 2008 121 . Note that alternative arrangements of the analysis would have been possible... The generation of samples can be performed using various procedures. . EPA. start from the fractional contribution to the model output variance. As argued by practitioners (Chan et al. robust. instead of just sampling factors over a limited number of values. e. For each trial sample X l the computational model can be evaluated. 2008. and analyse the resulting output vector Yl . where Y l is either Rank (CI c ) .numbers to be generated for each trial.e.. the averaged shift in countries’ ranks. . in fractional factorial design (Box et al.. Saltelli et al. i. quasirandom sampling or others (Saltelli et al. is hence k = 6 . can be estimated with an arbitrary level of precision related to the size of the simulation N . where Y is either a country’s rank. a composite indicator could become a nonlinear.g. and can distinguish main effects (first order) from interaction effects (higher order). such as the following: • They allow an exploration of the whole range of variation of the input factors. l = 1. 7. • They are quantitative.Generate randomly N combinations of independent input factors X l . 2004). “modelfree” techniques should be used for sensitivity analysis.... • They allow for a sensitivity analysis whereby uncertain input factors are treated in groups instead of individually. such as simple random sampling. with l = 1. Rank (CI c ) . or the overall shift in countries ranking with respect to a reference ranking. 2004. 1978).. . • They are easy to interpret and to explain. . Ideally these should be relevant to the issue addressed by the model.. The sequence of Yl gives the pdf of the output Y. Sensitivity analysis using variancebased techniques A necessary step when designing a sensitivity analysis is to identify the output variables of interest.. or R S .
and compute the mean of the output Y averaging over all factors but factor X i : E X i (Y X i = xi* ) . Rewrite this as VX i (Y X i = xi* ) . A model without interactions k among its input factors is said to be additive.g.© OECD 2008 . X j )) .g. When all k factors are independent from one another. the residual.k (45) Terms above the first order in equation (45) are known as interactions. e. i =1 Vi = V (Y ) . the unconditional variance of Y when all factors other than X i are noninfluential at any order. a small value of E X i (VX i (Y X i )) . In this case. the sensitivity indices can be computed using the following decomposition formula for the total output variance V(Y): V(Y ) = i Vi + i j >i Vij + i j >i l > j j >i Vijl +. to a specific value xi* in its range.. e. Vi is a number between 0 (when X i does not make a contribution to Y at the first V X i ( EX i (Y X i )) + E X i (VX i (Y X i )) = V (Y ) (42) where the first term of equation (42) is called a main effect.. X j )) V X i ( E X i (Y X i )) V X j ( E X j (Y X j )) (44) where clearly Vij is different from zero only if V X i X j ( E X ij (Y X i . The result is given by equation (41) where the dependence on order). for two factors X i and X j . This is intuitive as the residual measures the expected reduction in variance that would be achieved if X i were fixed..g. and the variance contribution of the secondorder term would become: Vij = V X i X j ( E X ij (Y X i . + V12. X j )) is larger than the sum of the firstorder term relative to factors X i and X j . e.. averaged over all possible values of xi* .Vi = V X i ( EX i (Y X i )) (41) Fix factor X i . An important factor should have a small residual. Then the residual E X i (VX i (Y X i )) is the expected value of such conditional variance. k i =1 S i = 1 and the firstorder 122 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . This would be small if X i were influential. Note that the following is always true: xi* has been dropped. a variance conditional on xi* . the conditional variance would be V X i X j ( EX ij (Y X i . and V (Y ) . Then take the variance of the resulting function of xi* over all possible xi* values. A firstorder sensitivity index is obtained through normalising the firstorder term by the unconditional variance: Si = V X i ( E X i (Y X i )) V (Y ) = Vi V (Y ) (43) One can compute conditional variances corresponding to more than one factor. and the second.
involving a given factor Xi. The total effect sensitivity index concentrates on a single term for all the interactions. in the improved version of Saltelli (2002). where n represents the sample size required to approximate the multidimensional integration implicit in the E and V operators above to a plain sum. 1996). In general. When the uncertain input factors Xi are dependent. STi) are provided by a variety of methods reviewed in Chan et al. for a model of k=3 independent factors. STi indices. The pair (Si. For a nonadditive model. (2000).e. The S i . the three total sensitivity indices would be: ST 1 = V (Y ) V X 2 X 3 ( E X1 (Y X 2 . have to be computed. Highlighting interactions among input factors helps to improve our understanding of the model structure.. X 3 )) V (Y ) = S1 + S12 + S13 + S123 (46) And analogously: ST2=S2+S12+S23+S123 ST3=S3+S13+S23+S123 The conditional variance V X 2 X 3 ( E X1 (Y X 2 . S i could carry over the effects of other factors which may be positively or negatively correlated to X i (see Saltelli & Tarantola. The total effect sensitivity index can also be written as: S Ti = V (Y ) VX i ( E X i (Y X i )) V (Y ) = E X i (V X i (Y X i )) V (Y ) (48) For a given factor Xi a significant difference between STi and Si signals an important interaction role for that factor in Y. the total number of indices (including the Si’s) to be estimated would be as high as 2 k 1 . This is the total contribution to the variance of Y due to non. to the k1 remaining factors.X i . n can vary in the hundredtothousand range. is used. 123 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . though their interpretation has changed. Here the method of Sobol’ (1993). which for the improved Sobol’ method is of n(k+2) model evaluations. 2002).g. X 3 )) in equation (46) can be written in general terms as (47) VX i ( E X i (Y X i )) (Homma & Saltelli. such that V (Y ) VX i ( E X i (Y X i )) includes all terms. responsible for interaction effects among sets of input factors. could also be interpreted as “settings” for sensitivity analysis. in the case of nonindependent input factors. the output variance cannot be decomposed. STi) gives a fairly good description of the model sensitivities.© OECD 2008 . e. STi . higher order sensitivity indices. The method of Sobol’ uses quasirandom sampling of the input factors. higher order sensitivity indices are usually not estimated. Estimators for both (Si. For example. while STi can no longer be meaningfully decomposed into main effect and interaction effects. as in equation (45) The S i . Instead a more compact sensitivity measure is used.conditional variances of equation (41) are all needed to decompose the model output variance. k i =1 STi 1. defined by (43) and (48) are still valid sensitivity measures for X i . However. since in a model with k factors. i.
For several countries. United Kingdom or Belgium. Analysis 1 The first analysis is run without imputation. for both dependent and independent input factors. would reduce V(Y) the most. 2004). The width of the 5th – 95th percentile bounds and the ordering of the medians (black hyphen) are often at odds with the ordering of the original TAI (grey hyphen). however.1. are implemented in the freely distributed software SIMLAB (Saltelli et al. e. ranging from Finland (rank=1) to Slovenia (rank=23). once “discovered” in its true value and then fixed. Although the difference between the groups of leaders and laggards can still be observed. it would have to be concluded that TAI is not a robust measure of countries’ technology achievement. 7. STi is discussed below. Note that the choice of ranks.. are unknown. The best choice would be the factor with the highest S i . the median rank is equal to the original TAI rank (overlap of black and grey hyphen in Figure 18).© OECD 2008 . 124 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 .e. with countries ordered by their original TAI position. i. Hong Kong.42 Factor Prioritisation (FP) Setting. there are considerable differences between the new and the original TAI. instead of composite indicator values. The extended variancebased methods. in theory. Factor Fixing (FF) Setting. If the uncertainty within the system were a true reflection of the status of knowledge and the (lack of) consensus among experts on how TAI should be built. The true values for the factors. The analysis is restricted to the set of countries whose rank is not altered by the omission of missing records. Suppose a factor that. As a result. is dictated by the use of the NCMC aggregation system. only 34 countries. as this is the first country with missing data. The uncertainty analysis for the remaining 23 countries is given in Figure 18 for the ranks.3.g. including the improved version of Sobol’. by censoring all countries with missing data. regardless of whether the model is additive or the factors are independent. may be analysed. Other countries from rank 24 onwards (in the original TAI) are also dropped.A description of two settings linked to S i . e. Can one fix a factor [or a subset of input factors] at any given value over their range of uncertainty without significantly reducing the variance of the output? Only those (sets of) factors whose STi is zero can be fixed.g.
is the most influential input factors. Korea. The countries with the highest total variance in ranks are the middleofthetable countries. the median (black mark) and the corresponding 5th and 95th percentiles (bounds) of the distribution of the MCTAI for 23 countries.© OECD 2008 125 Slovenia Ireland Italy . followed by the inclusion/exclusion of individual indicators and expert selection. Rep. while for most countries it exceeds 50%. Uncertain input factors: normalisation method. inclusion/exclusion of a individual indicator. This underlines the necessity of computing higher order sensitivity indices that capture the interaction effect among the input factors. Figure 19 shows the sensitivity analysis based on the firstorder indices. The nonadditive. while the leaders and laggards in technology achievement have low total variance. weighting scheme. Countries are ordered according to the original TAI values. nonlinear part of the variance that is not explained by the firstorder sensitivity indices ranges from 35% for the Netherlands to 73% for the United Kingdom. The aggregation system. The total variance in each country’s rank is presented along with the part that can be decomposed according to the firstorder conditional variances. aggregation system. of HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . expert selection. 25 Uncertainty analysis of TAI country rankings Rank 0 5 10 15 20 Netherlands Norway Germany Czech Republic Canada United Kingdom Australia New Zealand Singapore Hungary Belgium Japan Austria Finland Sweden France Spain Israel United States Note: Results show the country rankings according to the original TAI 2001 (light grey marks).Figure 18.
Indepth analysis of the output data reveals that.© OECD 2008 . This is a clear interaction effect. The total effect sensitivity indices concentrate on one single term for all the interactions involving each input factor. Yet the sensitivity indices show the high degree of nonlinearity and additivity for the TAI model and the importance of the interactions. the firstorder sensitivity indices would have summed to 1. If the TAI model were additive with no interactions between the input factors. is further explored. In other words. the nonadditive part of the variance in Figure 19 would have been zero. it is the exclusion of the individual indicator royalties which leads to a deterioration in the Netherlands' rank under any aggregation system. and the sum of the total effect sensitivity indices would have been 1.Figure 19. The indices add up to a number greater than 1 due to the interactions which seem to exist among the identified influential factors. Figure 20 shows the total effect sensitivity indices for the variance of each country’s rank. of United Kingdom United States Netherlands Australia Sweden Austria France Italy Hungary Germany Canada New Zealand Norway Finland Israel Ireland Note: Results based on firstorder indices. Figure 21 shows that the Netherlands is favoured by the combination of “geometric mean system” with “BAP weighting”. 126 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . Aggregation system. Countries are ordered in ascending order of total variance. as far as inclusion/exclusion is concerned. which also has a large percentile bound. and not favoured by the combination of “Multicriteria system” with “AHP weighting”. are the most influential input factors. followed by the inclusion/exclusion of individual indicator and expert selection. The high effect of interactions for the Netherlands. Rep. 40 Sobol' sensitivity measures of firstorder TAI results 35 Nonadditive 30 Expert selection Weighting Aggregation Variance of country rank 25 Exclusion/Inclusion Normalisation 20 15 10 5 0 Singapore Slovenia Czech Republic Belgium Spain Japan Korea. The part of the variance that is not explained by the firstorder indices is noted as nonadditive. Decomposition of country variance according to the firstorder conditional variances.
0 Total effect sensitivity index 1. Netherlands' ranking by aggregation and weighting systems Rank in [49] BoD 8 Rank in [1015] Rank in [1623] AHP 11 8 16 BAP 8 6 13 Linear Aggregation Geometric mean Multicriteria HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . of United States Belgium Hungary Germany Finland France Italy New Zealand Netherlands Norway Ireland .5 Sobol' sensitivity measures of TAI total effect indices Expert selection Weighting Aggregation Exclusion/Inclusion Normalisation 2. 2.5 1.© OECD 2008 127 Korea.0 0. Rep.Figure 20.0 United Kingdom Singapore Austria Slovenia Australia Spain Sweden Canada Japan Israel Czech Republic Figure 21.5 0.
Sobol' sensitivity measures of first order and total effects on TAI results Input Factors Normalisation Exclusion/Inclusion of an indicator Aggregation system Weighting Scheme Expert selection Sum First order ( S i ) 0. This effect can be seen in Figure 23. In some cases the average shift in country’s rank when using NCMC can be as great as nine places. Figure 22. Uncertainty analysis for TAI output variable 1800 1600 Frequency of occurence 1400 1200 1000 800 600 400 200 0 0.402 1.© OECD 2008 . Table 39.288 0.5 Average shift in countries' rank with respect to the original TAI Note: Average shift in countries’ ranks with respect to the original TAI.597 0.245 0.000 0.148 0.5 5.286 0.425 0.5 1.008 0.435 0. Significant values are underlined.5 2. The mean value is almost three positions. expert selection.327 0. with a standard deviation slightly above one position. weighting scheme. The input factors – the aggregation system plus inclusion/exclusion at the first order – affect this variable the most (Table 39). When the interactions are considered. both weighting scheme and expert choice become important.5 4.180 0. aggregation system. 128 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 .5 3. Uncertain input factors: normalisation method.068 0. inclusionexclusion of an indicator.038 0.334 Note: Average shift in countries’ rank with respect to the original TAI.008 0.5 6.5 8.499 Total effect ( S T ) i S Ti Si 0.5 9.Figure 22 shows the histogram of values for the average shift in the rank of the output variable (equation (38)) with respect to the original TAI rank.5 7.
44 Linear Aggregation Geometric mean Multicriteria Note: Average shift in countries’ rank with respect to the original TAI for different combinations of aggregation system and weighting scheme.86 3.87 3. imputation by bivariate approach leads to an unrealistic number of patents being imputed for this country (234 patents granted to residents per million people).2. Eventually.44 2. with fewer inversions of rankings. this would lead on average to a mediumtogood performance. In fact. With regard to sensitivity. the uncertainty in its rank is still insensitive to imputation.3. 7. which is worth more to a country than a performance which is very good on some individual indicators and bad in others. NCMC would be adopted.85 BAP 2. Analysis 2 In this analysis it is assumed that the TAI stakeholders have agreed on a linear aggregation system. inclusion/exclusion and expert selection. HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . when medianTAI and original TAI are compared. Average shift in TAI country rankings by aggregation and weighting combinations Shift less than 3 places BoD 1.Figure 23.59 Shift greater than 3 places AHP 2. Given these considerations. as in the case of Malaysia. A GME approach would follow the progress of the index over time in a scaleindependent fashion. it might be argued that the choice of the aggregation system is to some extent dictated by the use of the index and by the expectation of its stakeholders. Average value per case is indicated in the box. Interactions are now between expert selection and weighting. the second analysis is based on the LIN system. For instance. the uncertainty arising from imputation does not seem to make a significant contribution to the output uncertainties. as in the original TAI. which are also dominated by weighting. The sensitivity analysis results for the average shift in rank output variable (equation (38)) is shown in Table 40. The uncertainty analysis plot (Figure 24) shows much more robust behaviour in the index.01 2. if stakeholders believe that the system should be noncompensatory.© OECD 2008 129 . and considerably less with inclusion/exclusion. Even when.
390 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . Uncertain input factors: imputation.410 0.001 0.078 0.021 0. Rank 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 Imputation Normalisation Exclusion/Inclusion of an indicator Weighting Scheme Expert selection Sum Note: Significant values are underlined. Uncertainty analysis of TAI country rankings Rank 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 Note: Uncertainty analysis results showing country ranks according to the original TAI 2001 (light grey marks).214 0.135 0.000 0.212 0. A linear aggregation system is used. the median (black mark) and the corresponding 5th and 95th percentiles (bounds) of the distribution of the MCTAI for 72 countries.005 0.021 0.550 Total effect ( S T ) i S Ti Si 0.623 0. normalisation method. inclusion/exclusion of an individual indicator. Sobol' sensitivity measures and average shift in TAI rankings Input Factors First order ( S i ) 0.592 1. weighting scheme.202 0.Figure 24. 130 Chile Uruguay South Africa Thailand Trinidad and Tobago Panama Brazil Philippines China Bolivia Colombia Peru Jamaica Iran Tunisia Paraguay Ecuador El Salvador Dominican Republic Syrian Arab Republic Egypt Algeria Zimbabwe Indonesia Honduras Sri Lanka India Nicaragua Pakistan Senegal Ghana Kenya Nepal Tanzania Sudan Mozambique Finland United States Sweden Japan Korea Netherlands United Kingdom Canada Australia Singapore Germany Norway Ireland Belgium New Zealand Austria France Israel Spain Italy Czech Republic Hungary Slovenia Hong Kong Slovakia Greece Portugal Bulgaria Poland Malaysia Croatia Mexico Cyprus Argentina Romania Costa Rica Table 40. Countries are ordered according to the original TAI values. expert selection.© OECD 2008 .453 0.004 0.
the resulting country rankings could be fairly robust in spite of the uncertainties. Neither imputation nor normalisation significantly affect countries’ rankings when uncertainties of higher order are present. the composite indicator model is strongly nonadditive. depending on the severity of the uncertainties. when the weights are uncertain.g. note that even in the second analysis. it is unlikely that normalisation and editing will affect the country ranks. If uncertainties exist in the context of a wellestablished theoretical framework.© OECD 2008 131 . In other words. which reinforces the case for the use of the quantitative. if the constructors of the index disagree on the aggregation system. It is recommended that indicator developers agree on a common approach. However. Monte Carlo based approach to robustness analysis. Once the system is fixed. when the aggregation system is fixed. it is the choice of aggregation methods and of experts which – together with indicator inclusion/exclusion – dominate the uncertainty in the country ranks. A fortiori normalisation does not affect output when the very aggregation system is uncertain (first analysis). The aggregation system is of paramount importance. As shown by the preceding analyses. if a participatory approach within a linear aggregation scheme is favoured.The use of one strategy versus another in indicator building might lead to a biased picture of country performance. the uncertainties of higher order are expert selection and weighting scheme (second analysis). it is highly unlikely that a robust index will emerge. In the current setup. e. HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 .
whether the correlation between A and B represents a causal effect of A on B. of B on A. given its confirmatory nature: the causal relationship has to be modelled in advance. 1998. Consider the following example in Figure 25. In this latter case causality can be tested using tools such as the Granger test (see e. 2002). (ii) the absence of interaction effects between variables (called additivity. B (see Box 7 for a definition of correlation coefficient). which in turn has a direct effect on D.e. In this case the equations to estimate would be: D = p AD A + p BD B + pCD C + C = p BC B + 2 1 Therefore. see also the preferential independence of the multicriteria methodology). or some mixture of these.g. Greene. However. p AD is the path coefficient relating A to D whereas r BA is the correlation coefficient of the pair of variables A. Note that the arrows in a path analysis reflect an hypothesis about causality. or mutual dependence on another variable C. Path analysis cannot be used to infer causality. whereas a low value would point to the absence of a linear relationship (at least as far the data analysed are concerned). For a comprehensive list see Pedhazur (1982). Variable B also has a direct effect on variable C. the coefficients of the model in which the variables are expressed as zscores) will be used as path coefficients. the resulting path coefficients or correlations only reflect the pattern of correlation found in the data.© OECD 2008 . Practically. Path analysis. Wright in the 1920s. a distinction should be made between spatial data (as in the case of TAI) and data which also have a time dimension (e.STEP 8. GDP of EU countries from 1970 to 2005). This technique is based on a number of assumptions (those usually made in regression analysis). the seminal article on path analysis is Wright (1934). the widely accepted statement “correlation does not mean causality” has to be borne in mind. The case of spatial data is more complicated. A high value of rAD corroborates the relationship between A and D. conceived by the biologist S. BACK TO THE DETAILS Establishing a relationship between cause and effect is notoriously difficult. However. Therefore the effect of B on D is caused directly by B but also by the effect of B on C. including: (i) the linearity of the relationship between variables. 1934). (iii) recursivity (all arrows flow one way with no feedback looping). the standardized regression coefficients emerging from this estimation (i. in the absence of a genuine theory on “what causes what”.g. the correlation structure of the data set can be of some help in at least excluding causal relationships between variables (but not necessarily between the theoretical constructs of which the variable is a manifestation). 132 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . is an extension of regression analysis in which many endogenous and exogenous variables can be analysed simultaneously (Wright. Variables A and B have a direct effect on variable D. but tools such as Path Analysis and Bayesian Networks (the probabilistic version of path analysis) could be of some help in studying the many possible causal structures and removing those which are strongly incompatible with the observed correlations. path analysis cannot tell us which of two distinct path diagrams is to be preferred.43 In other terms. however. and (iv) an adequate sample size (Kline. Path analysis consists in a set of multiple regressions. recommends 10 to 20 times as many cases as parameters to estimate). The total effect of A on D will be the sum of the direct effect represented by the path coefficient relating A to D and of the indirect effect through its correlation with B: rAD = p AD + (rBA p BD ) .
01.Figure 25. appear not to be influential on the variance in the TAI scores.35). Two indicators. Simple example of path analysis A pAD rBA D pBD B PCD pBC C The standardised regression coefficients (beta values) for the TAI example reveal that Internet and patents have by far the strongest influence on the variance in the TAI scores (beta > 0.4 All standardised regression coefficients are significant (p<0. telephones and electricity. followed by royalties.1 0. n = 23) HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . Figure 26.2 0.3 0. R2 = 0.9996. Standardised regression coefficients for the TAI INTERNET PATENTS RECEIPTS UNIVERSITY EXPORTS SCHOOLING LOG_ELECTRICITY LOG_TELEPHONE 0 0. exports and schooling (Figure 26).© OECD 2008 133 . university.
Although this type of analysis cannot determine the TAI’s capacity to capture the concept of technological achievement. while others (e. the indicators on telephones and electricity would be excluded. Even in this scenario. which is reflected in the inferiority of the indicator telephones and electricity. it is fair to say that the TAI encompasses distinct and important dimensions. are shown in Table 42. However. which excludes telephones and electricity. one could exclude the two least influential indicators from the TAI data set. Impact of eliminating two indicators from the TAI example TAI (Original.Table 41. as they do not have an impact on either the variance of the TAI scores or on the TAI ranking. not every indicator adds a crucial component to the index. in a parsimonious approach. The path analysis results. 134 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . TAI6. Australia (1 position shift) and Singapore. produces a ranking that is identical to the original TAI for 18 of the 23 countries. based on the standardised regression coefficients and the bivariate correlations between the indicators as explained above. Minor shifts are observed for Canada. Table 41 shows that the TAI6 version. Thereafter. Italy and Hungary (2 positions). Internet and patents) are highly influential on the variance of the TAI scores. 8 indicators) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 TAI 6 (Excluding telephones and electricity) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 22 21 20 23 Absolute Difference (TAITAI6) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 0 Finland United States Sweden Japan Korea Netherlands United Kingdom Canada Australia Singapore Germany Norway Ireland Belgium New Zealand Austria France Israel Spain Italy Czech Republic Hungary Slovenia To test the implications of these findings.g. the indicators are weighted equally.© OECD 2008 .
1% 10. However. SEM is an extension of the general linear model that simultaneously estimates relationships between multiple independent. dependent and latent variables. 1998). as seven of the eight indicators contribute more than 10% each to the overall TAI scores. SEM can be viewed as a confirmatory procedure making it possible to (i) determine that the pattern of covariances in the data is consistent with the model specified.6% 13.9% 6. If SEM stems from the classical (or frequentist) approach based on sampling distributions.ca/CCL/Reports/CLI/). SEM cannot itself draw causal arrows in models or resolve causal ambiguities”. The prior distribution. B.8% There appears to be no dominance issue in the TAI example. given that in most cases the available indicators only imperfectly measure theoretical concepts. The prior density function of the graph reflects the odds the analyst would give to the structure of nodes and arrows. Bayesian networks rely on a subjective concept of probability. for example. In the Composite Learning Index developed by the Canadian Council of Learning (http://www. Note that this complex architecture is used to estimate (recursively) the weights used to compute the Composite Learning Index. (iii) use SEM results to change the structure of the model.1% 15. Path analysis results for TAI: total effect impact of the indicators on the TAI scores Patents Royalties Internet Tech exports Telephones (logarithm) Electricity (logarithm) Schooling University 13.Table 42. is the output of HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . whereas the disaggregation of learning into socialeconomic outcomes takes the form of a measurement model. see Kline. This posterior.8% 10. (ii) specify and test alternative models and determine which has the best fit. SEM combines measurement and regression techniques. Yet this indicator was found to be influential on the variance of the TAI scores. whereas regression techniques are used to relate indicators. C and D in our example above) are not restricted to random variables (as in path analysis) and can represent any kind of variable: a measured parameter or a latent variable. as David Garson has remarked: “Regardless of the approach. This is particularly useful when working with composite indicators. when combined with the data via Bayes’ theorem. In the Composite Learning Index the aggregation of subindices into a composite and the dependence of socioeconomic benefits on learning is captured by the multivariate regression. Nodes (A.2% 13. In the 1970s factor analysis and latent variables enriched path analysis. the social and economic benefits of learning are considered a latent variable since they can be only imperfectly measured by indicators such as crime rate. population health or unemployment rate. Bayesian networks are graphical models encoding probabilistic relationships between variables. giving rise to the field of Structural Equation Modelling (SEM. The idea is again that interrelations in a set of linear relationships can be examined using the variance and covariance of the variables.cclcca.5% 16. but the advantages of SEM are its generality (it includes path analysis and multivariate regression as special cases) and the possibility of including latent variables or factors as nodes. The indicator on exports makes the smallest contribution (6. produces a posterior distribution. Measurement techniques such as factor analysis and item response theory are used to relate latent variables to the observed indicators (the measurement model).© OECD 2008 135 . More generally.1%).44 Bayesian networks can also give some indication of which path diagram is more likely to be supported by the data. in short a weighted average of the prior density and of the conditional density (conditional on the data).
(ii) to see how the different evidence (the data available) modifies the probability of each given node.) Bayesian networks can be used for several purposes: (i) to explore all possible combinations of a given set of nodes in order to find the most likely structure.Bayesian analysis. (iii) to lean the probability distribution of the parameters of the model.© OECD 2008 . (Note that the output of classical analysis is rather a point estimate. their theoretical complexity and the amount of computer power required to perform relatively simple graph searches make them difficult to implement in a convenient manner.45 however. the use of Bayesian networks is becoming increasingly common in bioinformatics. given the graph structure. 136 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . artificial intelligence and decisionsupport systems.
This suggests that a given constituency may come to accept an aggregate measure (and reach compromise on weighting) on an index to be used to benchmark best practice. and the testing of the robustness of the composite using uncertainty and sensitivity analysis. e. The present work is perhaps timely. such as the OECD’s PISA (2004) or the World Economic Forum’s HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . In this case [the construction of CIs]. the methodologies for weighting and aggregation.800 ~ 2 million Scholar Google 992 1. it might be argued that the construction of CIs is driven by the need for advocacy.000 We alluded in the introduction to the controversy surrounding the use of these measures. 2007).70 and following. 2004. while an aggregate index might be useful to make a argument for action. when this is of use in political discourse. are worse. and to draft a stylised “checklist” for the practitioner to follow in the construction process. economists are trying to count what . The table below shows the number of hits obtained by searching for “composite indicators” through Google (taken here as a proxy of overall diffusion of the concept) and Scholar Google (taken as a proxy of academic interest). a composite indicator of countries’ scholastic achievement or competitiveness.g. costbenefit.” (12 July. At the same time.© OECD 2008 137 . The authors of this Handbook believe that individual variables and quantitative analyses (e. which we do not review here (see Rifkin. The alternatives. pitting aggregators against nonaggregators. On the other hand. Also reviewed were the tools available for imputation of missing observations. justly.440 167. It involves assumptions which have to be assessed carefully to avoid resulting in a product of dubious analytic rigour. We have emphasised the need for an explicit conceptual framework for the index and the usefulness of multivariate analysis prior to the aggregation of the individual indicators. positioning relation to the relative performance of a country. 2007). multicriteria) might be more relevant than aggregate measures for policy formulation. As pointed out in The Financial Times: “[…] Economists are often accused. Distilling the “pros” described in Section I to their essence. as it seems to respond to an increasing interest in these measures. for a discussion). for which the rationale can mainly be identified in the generation of narratives to support the subject of the advocacy (Saltelli. This literature hardly seems to dent the rather universal acceptance of GDP.CONCLUDING REMARKS COMPOSITE INDICATORS: BETWEEN NARRATIVE AND ANALYSIS The construction of a composite indicator is not a straightforward process. In the present work an attempt has been made to map the effect of each assumption on the quality of the aggregation.many would say cannot be counted. of thinking that what cannot be counted does not count. there is abundant literature on the analytic problems associated with even well established statistical indices such as GDP. Either we ignore this fact or we make subjective guesses. p. but such acceptance cannot be taken for granted. October 2005 June 2006 September 2007 Google ~ 35. however.g.500 ~ 80.
World Competitiveness Index. 2005) While the interplay between composite indicators and narratives is clear.” (Haq. Mahbub ul Haq (the pioneer of the Human Development Index) states that “For any useful policy index.© OECD 2008 . in making the case for a taxonomy of EU economic models among Mediterranean. an unaggregated list of the same variables. versus unemployment benefits. product market regulation in OECD countries (Nicoletti et al. is evidently on the rise (see also the table above). Nicoletti and others make use of factor analysis in the analysis of. A telling remark along these lines comes from from PisaniFerry and Sapir: […] civil societies learn from the experience of others. The point of these considerations is that subjectivity and fitness need not be antithetical. 1995. If a composite indicator were to exacerbate disagreement among stakeholders. such as the implementation of singlemarket legislation or stateaid controls. not to mention more specialised measures such as Transparency International’s Corruption Index or the Center for Global Development’s Commitment to Development Index. 1989) in the UN Human Development Index. Thus these apparently conflicting properties might underpin the suitability of CIs for advocacy purposes.have been dropped.. The media coverage of events such as the publishing of the World Economic Forum’s World Competitiveness Index and Environmental Sustainability Index. In fact. AngloSaxon and Continental.such as the “naming and shaming” of laggards . It might be contended that we are witnessing an growing appetite in the economically literate press for statisticbased narratives. This is perhaps the opinion of Mario Monti. who would otherwise have been willing to accept a scoreboard. Such policy learning can be enhanced by initiatives that facilitate cross country comparison and benchmarking. When questioned on the data reliability/quality of the HDI. the OECD’s PISA study. where intersubjectivity may be at the core of the exercise. may lead to a valuable soulsearching exercise within constituencies of countries. In other areas. Nordic. (Monti. some compromises must be made. among many others. i.’ Sen. the former EU Commissioner for Competition. On the same grounds a composite indicator may prove unfit to further a given cause. p. Similarly. The HDI estimates and ranking have persuaded many countries to invest more resources and effort in preparing better statistical series. without progressing to a composite indicator. “scoreboards” have played a useful role in bringing peer pressure to bear on national decisionmakers. Haq said that it should be used to improve data quality. makes use of a plot of “strictness of employment protection legislation” (a composite). They are in fact both at play when constructing and adopting a composite indicator. for example. A telling example in this respect is […] PISA. such as when participative approaches to weight negotiations are adopted.e. who. notes: […] it is a pity that attempts to use even comparatively bland measures . all the debate on development and public policy and media attention would not have been possible if the idea had been aborted at the level of indicators. To illustrate. 138 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . Sapir (2005). Sen was initially opposed to composite indicators but was eventually convinced by their ability to represent his concept of ‘Capabilities’ (‘the range of things that a person could do and be in her life. Another example can be found in the work of Amartya Sen. 2000). the usefulness of composite indicators for analytic purposes should not be discounted. rather than to abandon the exercise. Acknowledging the limitations of composite indicators but focusing on their potentiality. even if disagreement exists over the measures themselves. in describing the internal market scoreboard and indices developed by the European Commission. then there would be little point in insisting on aggregation. 59).
© OECD 2008 139 . HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 .[…] peer pressure and benchmarking should be integral parts of the political process that underpins Lisbon 2. Transparency benefits the democratic process as it empowers national electorates to review the performance of their own governments and it helps focus the debate on key areas of underperformance. and thus the development of the educational sector may have foundational connections with the capabilitybased approach. The use of league tables facilitates this process. It is also evident that analysisbased narratives such as those supported by composite indicators would gain in effectiveness if citizens’ statistical and economic literacy could be increased. to a considerable extent. Amartya Sen remarks that: […] the ability to exercise freedom may. be directly dependent on the education we have received.
.
PLoS Medicine.W.B. (2000). Social choice and multicriterion decision making.A. Center for Global Development’s Commitment to development index. Variance based methods.cgdev. available at http://www. Compassion Fatigue following the September 11 Terrorist Attacks: A Study of Secondary Trauma among New York City Social Workers. and Seiford L. (1973). Charnes A. Vol. Boscarino J. Comparative Analysis of Alcohol Control Policies in 30 Countries. In Sensitivity Analysis (eds. 6. New York: John Wiley & Sons.. (2007). (1995).© OECD 2008 141 .R.R. www. and Hunter J. Wiley.org Bryant F... (1995). Vol.thenewpublicfinance. Data Envelopment Analysis: Theory. Suchindran C. Methodology and Applications.Y.. Lowenfels A. Brand D. 0759 April 2007.. Arrow K.. Cooper W. United Nations Development Programme – Office of Development Studies. M. (1978). SAS OnlineDocTM: Version 8. 2nd edition.. Saltelli A.. Press. 4. Pennoni F.B. de (1784).. Rynn L. Saisana M. e151: 07520759. Biometrika. Boston:Kluwer.E.pdf Binder D.REFERENCES Anderberg M. 4.org/ Chan K. and Raynaud H.) 167197.. American Psychological Association Books.org/background/Measuring%20country%20performance_nov200 6%20update. (1963). http://www. and Adams R.R. International Journal of Emergency Mental Health. Box G.I. in Histoire de l’ Académie Royale des Sciences. New York: John Wiley and Sons. Bayesian Cluster Analysis.. A Survey of Composite Indices Measuring Country Performance: 2006 Update. Chantala K. Borda J. Cluster Analysis for Applications. 2: 110.T. (2003) Multiple Imputation for Missing Data.. Reading and understanding multivariate analysis.A. Chan K. Arrow K. Lewin A. Mémoire sur les élections au scrutin. Hunter W. Cambridge.. (2006).M. 65: 3138. In Grimm and Yarnold. and Yarnold P. (1986). Statistics for experimenters. Figley C.. Scott M. Social choice and individual values. Principal components analysis and exploratory and confirmatory factor analysis. (2004). Saltelli A. New York: Academic Press.J. and Sobol' I. (1978). HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 .M.. Tarantola S.J. Inc.plosmedicine.A. Bandura R.. New York. Paris.C.A.
. (2004). Psychometrika 58. A latent class unfolding model for analyzing single stimulus preference ratings. Efron. A. G. Heiser.. (1989). Cherchye. What is coefficient alpha? An examination of theory and applications. De l’ Imprimerie Royale. Amer.. Better bootstrap confidence intervals (with discussion). W.M. L. and Rubin D. (2001). Meaningful environmental indices: a social choice approach. van Puyenbroeck. (1980). Introduction to Multivariate Analysis.) Mathematical methods in social sciences. Assoc. (1987). and Van Puyenbroeck T. (1992). Paris. and Welsch H. 16: 297334. Tarantola. Journal of the Operational Research Society. (1986). Rogge. B.J. J. Stanford University Press.B. R. (2008). (1991). Toronto.. Rethinking environmental economics: missing links between economic theory and environmental policy.G. Collins. Using data envelopment analysis to assess macroeconomic policy performance. Liska. Statistics and Data Analysis in Geology. Olkin I. 390395. Marquis de (1785). 1: 98104 Cronbach L. Principal components analysis. J. M. Stanford. and Rubin D. (2002). (1993). N.Chatfield. Journal of Common Market Studies.. Moesen W. 545565. Dempster A. 142 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 .. Statist. in Arrow K..J. and Kuosmanen T. (2004).1: 2751. Applied Economics. Vol. Journal of Applied Psychology. EconWPA Working Papers. Thousand Oaks..J.B. B.J. eds. Legitimately Diverse. L. No. Statistical data analysis in the computer age.. 47: 270283.H. Vol. W. 239251. 42: 919955. Psychometrika. Cherchye. and van der Straaten J.© OECD 2008 . 59. Cortina J. 78.. Cherchye L. Introduction (pp.) New York: Academic Press. Davis J. John Wiley & Sons. Dunteman G. Dietz F. Chapman and Hall.310). Journal of Environmental Economics and Management. De Soete. 33: 407416 Cherchye L. Journal of Economic Issues. (1983). in Incomplete Data in Sample Surveys (vol. Science 253. Debreu G. Quantitative Applications in the Social Sciences Series.. (1993). Condorcet. and Suppes P. Tibshirani. C. Yet Comparable: on Synthesising Social Inclusion Performance in the EU.. (1951). CA: Sage Publications. Efron. Moesen.. Benchmarking sustainable development: a synthetic metaindex approach. Saisana. A. (1960). Topological methods in cardinal utility theory. 69.P. 2): Theory and Bibliography (Madow W. Ebert U. 171200. Essai sur l’application de l’analyse à la probabilité des décisions rendues à la probabilité des voix. R. (eds. Creating composite indicators with DEA and robustness analysis: the case of the Technology Achievement Index.. S. T. Saltelli. Coefficient alpha and the internal structure of tests. Karlin S. XXVI. 82.
int/comm/economy_finance/index_en. 1(4): 35336. Fishburn P. Council for Regulatory Environmental Modeling (CREM).1: 93103. Brussels. HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . “Draft Guidance on the Development.pdf.S. (1993). Härdle W. Discrete mathematics in voting and group choice. FukudaParr K. Vol.J. Oxford..) (2004): Handbook of Computational Statistics: Concepts and Methods. Environmetrics. OECD. Princeton University Press. Paris... Brussels. Gentle J.O. (2003). 11.eu. Department of Geography. Gall M. Funtowicz S.. Feldt L. Proceedings of the IEEE Computer society. Economic Sentiment Indicator. PhD dissertation. Oxford University Press. 35: 169181. Forman E. Biometrics. SIAM Journal of Algebraic and Discrete Methods.H. Fishburn P. Woodruffe D. (2001). Unresolved Problems in Cluster Analysis. DG ECFIN.gov/osp/crem/library/CREM%20Guidance%20Draft%2012_03. European Innovation Scoreboard. R. Oxford Press. B. (2007) Indices of social vulnerability to natural hazards: A comparative evaluation. 5: 263275.© OECD 2008 143 . European Commission (2004a). and Archibugi D.Efron. (1990). Brussels. and Mori. Springer. European Commission (2001c).A. DG ENTR. (1973).C. European Commission (2001b). Boca Raton EPA. Composite indicators of country performance: a critical assessment. Paruccini M. (2003) Readings in Human Development.epa.) Europe at the crossroads: The challenge from innovationbased growth in the Globalising Learning Economy. Applied Psychological Measurement. Composite Indicator on ebusiness readiness.. Evaluation. Brussels. Munda G. in Lundvall B.htm European Commission (2004b). DG JRC. The aggregation of environmental data using multicriteria methods. Everitt B. European Commission (2000). The theory of social choice. (1983). and Salih F. Brussels.S. Fagerberg J..S. DG ECFIN. http://www. Summary Innovation Index. Business Climate Indicator. An Introduction to the Bootstrap. (1979). (1987). Brussels. DG ENTR. University of South Carolina. Internal Market Scoreboard. Yuichi (eds.E. Tibshirani. http://europa. European Commission (2001a). CHAPMAN & HALL/CRC. Statistical Inference for Coefficient Alpha. DG MARKT. (eds. Environmental Protection Agency (2004). (1984). The analytic hierarchy process as a decision support system. Princeton. Freudenberg M.C. and Application of Regulatory Environmental Models”.
Smith P. The multivariate social scientist: Introductory statistics using generalized linear models. Lausen. and Klar. Berlin. Hutcheson G. Haq M. Heiser.. and Srinivasan V. L.B.. Ecology 74 (1993). (1995). Focus on the CALIS procedure.A.A. A stepbystep approach to using the SAS system for factor analysis and structural equation modeling. Green P... fourth ed. 289(3): 30512. Stopping rules in principal component analysis a comparison of heuristical and statistical approaches. NJ. Hair J. (1978). R. (2004). H. New York: John Wiley & Sons. Huff E. 1993. 19981999 to 20002001. Academic Press. Editors. Jacobs R. Springer.Tatham (2006). (1996). CA: Sage Publications. and R. Eigenvalue computation in the 20th century.. and Sofroniou N.L.H. 37: 827838. D. (1975). Information and Classification. Importance measures in global sensitivity analysis of model output. Pearson Prentice Hall.J.F. Technical Paper Series 29. Englewood Cliffs..... and Saltelli A. (2003). In: Opitz. 9.L. Reflections on Human Development. sixth edition..E. Greenacre.E. William H.J. B. Hatcher L.. Green S. Reliability Engineering and System Safety. Econometric Analysis. 52(1). Lissitz R. NJ.F. Homma T. 162173. Black W. Journal of Computational and Applied Mathematics. Educational and Psychological Measurement. Greenacre.© OECD 2008 .Golub G. (1995). Limitations of coefficient alpha as an index of test unidimensionality. Journal of the American Medical Association. Clustering Algorithms. Journal of Consumer Research 5: 103123.(1977). (2002). 123 (12).. (2000). Cary. Multivariate data analysis with readings. J. Prentice Hall. NC: SAS Institute. (1993). Theory and applications of correspondence analysis.C.C. (1983). and Cuerdon T. 117. and Mulaik S. Anderson R. NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. Babin. and Goddard M.A.. ed. Hartigan J. Clustering in lowdimensional space. Methodology Review: Assessing unidimensionality of tests and items. Orig. Change in the quality of care delivered to Medicare beneficiaries. (1985). Upper Saddle River. New York..E. M.W. W. M.(1999). Vol. 144 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . Hattie J. Applied Psychological Measurement. O.A. Hillsdale. Oxford University Press. Jencks S.D.. Centre for Health Economics. (1994).J. 2: 139164. London.. 5th Edition. (1984). Hair J. and van der Vorst.. Anderson R. (1993). 2204–2214.F. and Black W. Greene. Factor Analysis. Jackson. Academic Press. 1974. (1993). Prentice Hall. Conjoint analysis in consumer research: issues and outlook. Thousand Oaks. Tatham R. Multivariate data analysis. Measuring performance: an examination of composite performance indicators. B. London. Gorsuch R. Inc. Correspondence analysis in practice.
Wichern D. Kaufmann D. Krantz D. MIT Press. King’s Fund (2001).. NY: Guilford Press.worldbank.W. (1971).© OECD 2008 145 . Kahn J. 5th edition.B. and Wallenius J.. 1317. Decision with multiple objectives: preferences and value tradeoffs. Foundations of measurement.. A guide to Econometrics. N. vol. and Raiffa H. and Maxwell A. (1986). Suppes P. New York: Springer. Jolliffe I. (2003). (1971). New York. Linkoping. See esp..Johnson R. C. The sick list 2000. 130: 121132. Karlsson J. 7.F. Applied Multivariate Statistical Analysis. Value efficiency analysis of academic research. 5th edition. Principal component analysis. Dissertation n. 88: 571591. Sage Publications. and J. T. paper presented at the American Economic Association. Kraay A. American Educational Research Journal. Academic Press. Luce R. the NHS from best to worst. Wiley. Kennedy P. H. mark IV.org/wbi/governance/working_papers. Some empirical results concerning the power of Bartlett's test of the significance of a correlation matrix. New York.html Kaufmann D. Keeney R. (1959). and Tversky A.H. (1998).W. University of Tennessee. Methods for aggregating performance indicators. Additive and polynomial representations.fulcrumtv. Rice. Lawley D. Conjoint Analysis as a Method of Measuring Use and NonUse Values of Environmental Goods. pp. (1995). 526. (2001). R. Factor analysis as a statistical method.. A systematic approach for prioritizing software requirements. Kim. http://www. and ZoidoLobatón P. Aggregating Governance Indicators. Knapp..(1974). Kahn J. Policy Research Working Papers. World Bank.. Covers confirmatory factor analysis using SEM techniques... Kemeny J. Swoyer. Beverly Hills. E.88. Daedalus. Tainio R. (1967). (1978). 1.Mueller. (1976). (2002). California. 4. Little jiffy. Prentice Hall. and ZoidoLobatón P. World Bank.R and Maynard P..com/sick%20list. http://www. J. London: Butterworth and Co. PhD. mimeo. Korhonen P. Kaiser H. (1998). European Journal of Operational Research. 111117. (2003). V.T. Ch. mimeo.htm Kline R.D. Factor analysis: Statistical methods and practical issues. Governance matters III: governance Indicators for 19962002.R (1998). Mathematics without numbers. Educational and Psychological Measurement 34. HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . Kraay A. (1999). Sverige. Principles and practice of structural equation modelling...
W. Manly B. Interim report IR01069. and Moesen W. Austria. Cincinnati.. West Publishing.. Wiley Interscience.A. Axioms of cooperative decision making. Greco S. 50: 159179. in Figueira J. Missing Data. and Schenker N. Multiplecriteria decision analysis. Psychometrika. Monti M. Mahlberg B. Towards a synthetic indicator of macroeconomic performance: unequal weighting when limited information is available.A (1997).. OH. and Obersteiner M. Milligan G. Munda G. in Armitage P. Sustainability Indicators: Report of the Project on Indicators of Sustainable Development. pp. New York: Plenum. (1995).L. Statistical Analysis with Missing Data. Public Economic research Paper 17. Cambridge.3975.B.B.(eds.) Encyclopaedia of Biostatistics. (2005). New York. (2002). (2005a). New York: John Wiley & Sons. MultiCriteria Decision Analysis and Sustainable Development. Coefficient Alpha: a basic introduction from the perspectives of classical test theory and structural equation modelling. and Colton T. 953986. 146 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 .J. Laxenburg. McDaniel C. Discriminant Analysis and Statistical Pattern Recognition. (2004).C.. and Kaufman L. (1985). and Ehrgott M. (eds. Multicriteria evaluation in a fuzzy environment.W. Billharz S. Clogg C. (1983). Moulin H.A. Econometric Society Monographs. Multivariate statistical methods. The Interpretation of Analytical Chemical Data by the Use of Cluster Analysis. Structural Equation Modelling. and Rubin D. Cambridge University Press. London: Wiley. Little R.E. Toughen up EU reform agenda and make it count.J. Wiley & Sons. Biostatistical Analysis with Missing Data. 3: 255273. Inc. (1997). (1998). Contemporary Marketing Research. An Examination of Procedures for Determining the Number of Clusters in a Data Set. (eds. (1994). Published: March 21 2005. Heidelberg. Chapman & Hall. KU Leuven. (1988). McLachlan G. NY: WileyInterscience.) Handbook for Statistical Modeling in the Social and Behavioral Sciences.C. and Matravers R. Remeasuring the HDI by data Envelopment analysis. Wiley Series in Probability and Statistics. (1995). PhysicaVerlag. and Sobel M. in Arminger G. and Cooper M. and Gates R. Hoboken. Massart D. (1991). State of the art surveys. Moldan B. Financial Times. Little R. UK. Munda G. Contributions to Economics Series..© OECD 2008 . New Jersey. CES. (1994). Chichester and New York: John Wiley & Sons. Miller M.). Melyn W. 2. SCOPE 58. pp. International Institute for Applied System Analysis. J.J. (2001).Little R. Springer International Series in Operations Research and Management Science.
(1978). Tarantola S. HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 .V. http://www. Ispra. An Introduction to Copulas (ISBN 0387986235).htm Podinovskii V. Development and Sustainability. Munda G.org/eco/eco. http://www. Summary indicators of product market regulation with an extension to employment protection legislation. OECD.pisa. Noncompensatory/NonLinear composite indicators for ranking countries: a defensible setting. Joint Research Centre.oecd.. (2007). SpringerVerlag. OECD (2003). Scarpetta S.oecd. Criteria importance theory. “Measuring sustainability”: a multicriterion framework.. Kaplas M. New York. Forthcoming in Applied Economics.org/dataoecd/46/17/37671574. Economics department working papers No. and Noel F. Psychometric theory. Andropoulos C. (1982).First Results from PISA 2003. Parker J. Cambridge. Heidelberg. PhD Dissertation. 2nd edition. Index of Environmental Friendliness. Quality Framework and Guidelines for OECD Statistical Activities. Nilsson R. A methodological study. OECD (1999). The ebusiness readiness composite indicator for 2003: a pilot study. (2004). Nelsen R. Economics Series. (2007).pre. Nicoletti G. Environmental reporting and environmental indices.© OECD 2008 147 . Karageorgos G. (1991). (1999).pdf ). Paris. (2000).org/statistics. Munda G.org/dataoecd/1/60/34002216.. (1996). and Nardo M. Nardo M. Learning for Tomorrow’s World . and Boylaud O. Programme for International Student Assessment. Multiple regression in behavioral research. 22: 375385. NY Holt. (2005).oecd. (1998). Constructing Consistent Composite Indicators: the Issue of Weights.. Buescher R. J. http://www. Applied Psychological Measurement. EUR 21834 EN. 7 (1): 117134. Paris. (2000).B. Vol. and Nardo M. Pré Consultants (2000). New York: McGrawHill. Pedhazur E. www. 27: 237252. Raykov T. EUR 21294.oecd. Data and Metadata Reporting and Presentation Handbook. 1014 October 2000 Nunnaly J. Confidence Indicators and Composite Indicator”. Puolamaa M. and Reinikainen T. available at http://www. 226.. Environment.nl/ecoindicator99/ei99reports. Saltelli A. A damage oriented method for life cycle impact assessment..Munda G. UK. Employment Outlook. (2005b).pdf. Mathematical Social Sciences. OECD (2007). The Ecoindicator 99... Munda G. (1994).. Latvala A. CIRET conference. Cronbach’s Alpha and Reliability of Composite with Interrelated Nonhomogenous Items. ECO/WKP(99)18. Social multicriteria evaluation. Eurostat. OECD (2004).
and Saltelli A. Social Indicators Research. 9: 161176. L. The Primer. Uncertainty and sensitivity techniques as tools for the analysis and validation of composite indicators. 148 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . Columbia University Press. Making best use of model valuations to compute sensitivity indices. Saaty T. (2007) Composite indicators between analysis and advocacy. Development as Capabilities Expansion. Nardo M. European CommissionJRC: Italy. Sen A. and Tarantola S. (2002).. Saaty R. New Haven: Yale Center for Environmental Law and Policy. (1989). Journal of American Statistical Association. Andres T. Sensitivity Analysis in practice. 145: 280297. Saisana M. The analytic hierarchy process: what it is and how it is used. Campolongo F. TarcherPenguin. pp. in Esty D.asp. and de Sherbinin A. (2004).7578. (2004).. 168(2). New York. (2005a). 81: 6577.Rifkin J. Rosen R. (1980).europa. EUR 20408 EN. Roberts F..ec. Journal of the Royal Statistical Society A. New York: John Wiley & Sons. Software for sensitivity analysis is available at http://www.. Saltelli A.. Saltelli A.. Literature Review of Frameworks for Macroindicators.org/. (2005b). (1979). and Ratto M. The Analytic Hierarchy Process. The European Dream. Ottawa. Globalisation and the Reform of European Social Models. Centre for the Study of Living Standards. 19: 4158. 307323. Cariboni J..© OECD 2008 . and Saltelli A. and Tarantola S. Campolongo F. Srebotnjak T.bruegel. and Fabrication of Life. Uncertainty and Sensitivity Analysis of the 2005 Environmental Sustainability Index. Computer Physics Communications. 97 (459): 702709. http://www. Mathematical Modelling.. Saltelli A. Origin. Multicriteria methodology for decision analysis. London. Global Sensitivity Analysis.. Measurement theory with applications to decision making.. On the relative importance of input factors in mathematical models: safety assessment for nuclear waste disposal. Gatelli D. (2005) Environmental Sustainability Index: Benchmarking National Environmental Stewardship. (2004).. (2002). Sapir A. (2008). John Wiley & Sons. Saisana M. Kluwer.eu/uasa/prjsasoft. Roy B. Tarantola S. (2005).jrc. (1991). New York: McGrawHill. Dordrecht.W. CAN. Saisana M. Sharpe A. Saltelli A. (1996). Stateoftheart report on current methodologies and practices for composite indicator development. Life Itself: A Comprehensive Inquiry into Nature. a guide to assessing scientific models. utility and the social sciences. (2002).. Journal of Development Planning. AddisonWesley. Levy M. Saltelli A. S. Saisana M. Ratto M. (1987). Tarantola S. and Tarantola S.
In Saltelli A. Spath H.org U. 2000. SpringerVerlag. Cluster Analysis Algorithms. (1989).html#cpi2004 Trufte E. Vansnick J. Ülengin B. eWisdom.A. and Güvenç Ü. European Commission: JRCItaly Ting H.. Tarantola S. USA.. (2001). Schmiedel F. Storrie D. Fidell L.http://www. Global sensitivity analysis: a quality assurance tool in environmental policy modelling. (eds. 1999. Connecticut..transparency.Sicherl P. Saisana M. European Journal of Operational Research. Time Distance as a Dynamic Measure of Disparities in Social and Economic Development.K. New York: John Wiley & Sons. (1999). (2001).). and Leapman N. Grant C. (2000).M. XXVI. A multidimensional approach to urban quality of life: the case of Istanbul. United Kingdom: Oxford University Press. Saltelli A. 130: 361374. (ed. pp..746. Harper & Row Publishers. 2nd edition (first edition 1981). Using Multivariate Statistics.R. in Bana e Costa C. Mathematical Modelling & Computational Experiment 1: 407414. Leapman N. Tarantola S. The Visual Display of Quantitative Information. Government (2004). European Commission: JRCItaly. Benchmarking European labour market performance with efficiency frontier technique. Operations Research Center. 66.org/cpi/2004/cpi2004.. Chichester. B. 3.) Sensitivity Analysis.. Jesinghaus J. Storrie D.. Ülengin F. 81100. (1973). Tarantola S. MIT Cambridge Mass. Tabachnick.. (2004)... (1971). pp. Chan K. Kyklos. EUR 21274 EN. 385397. and Bjurek H.. Journal for Comparative Research.. (2004). http://www. Time distance – a missing perspective in comparative analysis. United Nations (1992. and Puolamaa M. Sustainable Development Indicators in Your Pocket 2004. New York. (2000). P. Aggregation of attributes for multiattributed utility assessment. 2a: 1130 Sobol’ I. Benchmarking the basic performance indicators using efficiency frontier techniques. DG employment and social affairs. (1993). Liska R. Measurement theory and decision aid. (1990).© OECD 2008 149 .en. Technical report n.. Sensitivity analysis for nonlinear mathematical models.M. Graphic Press. Transparency International’s Corruption Index.undp.. (2002). pp. (1980). Sicherl. Readings in multiple criteria decision aid. C. 2001). Discussion Paper FS I 002011. The Internal Market Index 2004. and Bjurek H. Scott M. EUR 20547 EN. England: Ellis Horwood. Berlin. Human Development Report. Report presented to the European commission. Statistical techniques and participatory approaches for the composition of the European Internal Market Index 19922001. Saltelli A. HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 .
Van der Ark.. The method of path coefficients Annals of Mathematical Statistics. Fuzzy Sets and Systems.J. Information theoretical analysis of multivariate correlation.P.int/whr2001/2001/archives/2000/en/contents. M. (2005). http://www.H (1963). Willmott C. Klink K.J. 37(1): 4964.M. Multicriteria decision aid. (1978).G.. A consistent extension of Condorcet’s election principle. Willmott C. (1983).. and Rowe C. and Levenglick A.© OECD 2008 . Some comments on the evaluation of model performance. Feddema J. (1982).Vermunt J.A. Wiley.J. Young H. Mahwah: Erlbaum.M. Decisions and evaluations by hierarchical aggregation of information. 236244. 10: 243260 150 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . In A. IBM Journal of Research and Development 4: 6682. WHO (2000). and Kiers H. J.J. New Developments in Categorical Data Analysis for the Social and Behavioral Sciences. Croon and K.. Ward. Ackleson S. SIAM Journal of Applied Mathematics.htm Wright S. Zimmermann H.uvt. (1960).R.E. and Zysno P. Davis R. (1992).. Watanabe S. (1985). 58(301). and Magidson J.nl/~vermunt/vanderark2004. (1934). 4162. Journal of American Statistical Association. Factor Analysis with categorical indicators: A comparison between traditional and latent class approaches. Overall Health System attainment. Legates D. (2001). 35: 285300.K.) Available at http://spitswww. Computational Statistics and Data Analysis.pdf Vichi M. Vol. Vincke P. O’Donnel J.. Hierarchical Grouping to optimize an objective function. Journal of Geophisical Research 90: 89959005. Sijtsma (eds).who.. Statistics for the evaluation and comparison of models. Bulletin of the American Meteorological Society 63: 13091313. Factorial kmeans analysis for twoway data. 5: 161215. New York.
1 List of individual indicators of the Technology Achievement Index Indicator Unit Definition CREATION OF TECHNOLOGY Patents granted per 1 000 000 people US $ per 1 000 people Number of patents granted to residents.APPENDIX: TECHNOLOGY ACHIEVEMENT INDEX Table A. which is indispensable to participation in the network age (2000) Exports of high and medium technology products as a share of total goods exports (1999) EXPORTS DIFFUSION OF OLD INNOVATIONS Telephone lines per 1 000 people (log) kWh per capita (log) Number of telephone lines (mainline and cellular). so as to reflect the stock of successful innovations of the past that are still useful and hence have market value (1999) PATENTS ROYALTIES DIFFUSION OF RECENT INNOVATIONS INTERNET Internet hosts per 1 000 people % Diffusion of the Internet. which represents the basic education needed to develop cognitive skills (2000) Gross enrolment ratio of tertiary students enrolled in science. which reflects the human skills needed to create and absorb innovations (19951997) UNIVERSITY % HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . which represents old innovation needed to use newer technologies and is also pervasive input to a multitude of human activities (1999) Electricity consumption. which represents old innovation needed to use newer technologies and is also pervasive input to a multitude of human activities (1998) TELEPHONES ELECTRICITY HUMAN SKILLS SCHOOLING Years Mean years of schooling (age 15 and above). mathematics and engineering. to reflect the current level of invention activities (1998) Receipts of royalty and license fees from abroad per capita.© OECD 2008 151 .
13 3.4 11.9 64.1 6.4 9.7 0.25 3.75 4.32 3.7 4.18 3.86 2.9 146.00 3.16 3.92 2.8 20.1 10.3 13.7 11.2 110.7 9.77 3.7 80.2 3.1 6.7 50.3 8.2 36.6 47.5 14.8 9.5 9.3 SCHOOLING ROYALTIES INTERNET EXPORTS PATENTS .4 108 125.8 9.15 4.9 14.8 6.86 3.4 43.7 66.2 25.2 16.4 4.4 17.5 36.73 4.00 2.96 2.68 3.6 13.09 2.7 2.08 3.6 12.8 4.2 Raw data for the individual indicators of the Technology Achievement Index TELEPHONES (log) ELECTRICITY (log) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 Finland United States Sweden Japan Korea.59 3.8 49 4.2 25.56 2.8 136 57.71 3.2 5.7 17.7 8.54 10 12 11.7 2.3 33.6 8.9 7.6 200.14 3.2 7.9 45 53.75 2.6 1.8 151.21 3.53 3.02 3.7 16.© OECD 2008 UNIVERSITY 27.3 52.8 6.4 11.6 20.9 13 14.6 6.3 2 1 152 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 .6 10.6 130 156.7 13.1 125.6 58.54 3.9 48.3 41.57 3.91 3.79 3.53 2.2 48.65 3.3 6.58 3.3 23 19 25.08 2.62 3.6 11 15.3 3.9 8.56 2.5 7.95 2.1 13.6 8.6 64.07 4.2 16.86 3.60 2.7 0.3 6.9 9.2 134 38.63 2.6 13 8.6 7.7 84.6 5 4 12 7.5 10.2 14.2 74.3 73.72 3.3 7. China (SAR) Slovakia Greece Portugal Bulgaria Poland Malaysia Croatia Mexico Cyprus Argentina Romania Costa Rica Chile Uruguay South Africa Thailand Trinidad and Tobago 187 289 271 994 779 189 82 31 75 8 235 103 106 72 103 165 205 74 42 13 28 26 105 6 24 6 23 30 9 1 8 71 125.12 2.80 3.2 19 53.91 2.68 2.4 7.73 2.43 2.39 3.2 9.50 3.6 48.3 30.8 33.4 9.94 3.97 3.39 3.2 19.2 21 30.4 6.97 2.83 3.9 15.36 2.8 66.3 10.7 10.2 12.4 41.4 13.2 67.94 2.7 66.39 4.2 59.7 5.1 7.28 2.3 10 23.39 3.2 0.38 2.5 49.7 30 36.1 9.6 15.00 2.4 9.6 9.6 3.2 179.51 2.10 3.68 3.84 3.41 3.3 58.2 11.4 2.5 33.5 0.95 2.4 9.6 48.18 3.4 0. Rep.3 7.1 13.2 9.87 2.9 14.5 9.6 43.94 2.1 7.4 1.55 2.9 9.4 51 51.6 10.2 193.28 3.2 6.6 18.99 2.6 9.46 3.6 7.8 9.3 24.2 7.9 40.86 3.2 9.9 72.6 6. of Netherlands United Kingdom Canada Australia Singapore Germany Norway Ireland Belgium New Zealand Austria France Israel Spain Italy Czech Republic Hungary Slovenia Hong Kong.9 61.Table A.6 3.3 11.65 3.9 9.5 17.5 6.2 8.97 2.2 12 10.6 9.7 63.2 4 2.7 50.6 7.4 50.7 3.4 25 21.74 3.02 2.94 3.8 0.
Rep.7 2 3.2 6.1 32.8 2.8 6.40 2.9 5.1 35.5 0.6 6.60 1.4 5 4.46 2.5 0.9 4. HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 .2 1.76 1.4 5.2 7.2 0.2 19.5 4.01 1.37 2.5 5.7 5. Units are given in Table A.9 1.56 1.1 0.1 3 1.7 1.13 2.1 0.43 1.1 0.3 1.89 1.5 2 19.6 7.69 1.4 1 0.58 2.2 6.2 2.2 0.6 3.1 7.3 5.4 1.6 5. of Sudan Mozambique 2 1 1 1 0.87 2.4 1.7 0.4 0.6 3.11 1.2 0.35 3. U.65 2.73 1.1 0.08 2.2 0.6 3.2 SCHOOLING ROYALTIES INTERNET EXPORTS PATENTS .53 2.5 3.45 1.2 0.9 8.6 5.03 2.95 2.1 0. of Tunisia Paraguay Ecuador El Salvador Dominican Republic Syrian Arab Republic Egypt Algeria Zimbabwe Indonesia Honduras Sri Lanka India Nicaragua Pakistan Senegal Ghana Kenya Nepal Tanzania.67 1.2 0.08 0.09 2.1 Note: The first 23 countries are used as case study in the Handbook.2 4.4 0.61 2.98 2.70 3.2 5.41 2.2 7.8 5.3 0.67 1.05 2.3 1.1 0.73 1.4 5.75 2.3 5 6.89 2.1 0.6 5.14 2.17 2.2 2.81 3.7 0.14 2.2 0.45 2.94 2.6 2.2 6 3.7 3.12 1.2 1.4 12.38 1.7 1 5.7 2.05 2.9 5.94 2.38 1.39 2.88 2.78 0.5 3.6 3.4 2.9 8.59 1.2 8. Islamic Rep.4 0.2 5.5 0.4 0.9 0.95 0.73 8.3 7.4 5.1 4.9 32.TELEPHONES (log) ELECTRICITY (log) 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 Panama Brazil Philippines China Bolivia Colombia Peru Jamaica Iran.1.7 0.8 1.1 1.6 4.92 2.9 6.08 3.2 0.80 2.7 0.2 2.9 28.3 0.8 1 12 17.25 2.92 2.51 2.7 0.2 16.9 6 1.08 1.9 2.8 0.7 4.© OECD 2008 153 UNIVERSITY 8.75 2.5 1.4 5.65 2.2 3.9 7.7 2.80 2.04 1.3 0.8 39 26 13.
.
Econometrica vol. Chapter 4). p. Caution is prudent. by and large. where k is the number of coefficients in the regression and (Mr) the ( ˆ ih x h ) 2 and C k = ( SSE k / MSE ) ( M r ) + 2 k x number of observations. 13291376) notes. … The unattractive alternative to measurement is to make unsubstantiated assumptions” (p. Another common method (called imputing means within adjustment cells) is to classify the data for the individual indicator with some missing values in classes and to impute provisionally the missing values of that class with the sample mean of the class. 1994. however: “Economists have long been hostile to subjective data. The empirical evidence cited in this article shows that. then R 2 = 1 ( SSE / SST ) .1370). Measuring Expectations. pp. 12 Define SSE = i ( xih r ˆ ih )2 . The regression approach is one possible method. SST = x i ( xih x h ) 2 . persons respond informatively to questions eliciting probabilistic expectations for personally significant events.© OECD 2008 MSE = SSE /( M 155 . 241). The mode is the value with the highest frequency. 72. In decision theory literature. The label “composite indicators” has not of universal acceptance. this concept of weights as importance coefficients is usually referred to as symmetrical importance. The sample mean (across all classes) is then calculated and substituted as final imputation value.ENDNOTES 1 Mansky (2004. A variant of unconditional mean imputation is the fillin via conditional mean. then the prediction 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ˆ xih are respondent means within classes defined by the variable and the method reduces to that of imputing means with adjustment cells. Sometimes CI are known as composite indexes while in the measurement literature the term indicator is reserved for observable or directly measurable variables. but hostility is not warranted. This Section is heavily based on Munda (2007.” (Podinovskii. then aPc. Colours need to be chosen (1) so that graphics communicate for colourblind persons. k ) . RMS = i HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . and (2) so that graphics continue to communicate when they are printed in black and white. The median is the value that divides in two equal parts the distribution of the random variable. it is also the default behaviour of the Dashboard of Sustainability. then it is preferable to place the greatest number in the position corresponding to the most important criterion. The Human Development Index uses MinMax normalisation method. that is "… if we have two nonequal numbers to construct a vector in R2. The transitive property states that if aPb and bPc. If the observed variables are dummies for a categorical variable.
Golub. 12. 5th edition. Journal of Computational and Applied Mathematics. Wolfgang.223).…Q with the indexing i=1. James E. Weights are normalized squared factor loadings. Härdle. As a result these algorithms often require algebraic manipulations and complex programming. which is the portion of the variance of the first factor explained by the variable Internet. Iss.. Henk A. p. see Jolliffe (1986). DEA has also been used in production theory (for a review see Charnes et al. e.© OECD 2008 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 . 1990. Numerical estimation of this matrix is also possible but careful computation is needed.H.where the SSEk is computed from a model with only k coefficients and MSE is computed using all available regressors.eu. The technique of PCA was first described by Karl Pearson in 1901. Such values are called outliers (F. http://europa. 0.. 156 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . A dictionary of statistical terms.C.g. 1995). Ch. Note that these methods usually supply very different weights especially when the sample size of FA is small.gov/div898/handbook/eda/section3/eda357. The Bartlett test is valid under the assumption that data are a random sample from a multivariate normal distribution. & van der Vorst. Vol. For a detailed discussion on the PCA.pdf Other methods are available.…. Yuichi (Eds.Q and j=1. For NMAR mechanisms one needs to make assumptions on the missingdata mechanism and to include them in the model (see Little & Rubin. A different version of the Bartlett test is also used to test that k samples have equal variance. for complex patterns of incomplete data. Eurostat employs this definition of outlier. (2004) and Cherchye & Kuosmanen (2002). Gene H.int/comm/economy_finance/publications/european_economy/2001/b2001_0809_en. or that the sampling technique is at fault. For details see http://www. (2000): Eigenvalue computation in the 20th century. For reasons of clarity in this section we substitute the indexing q=1. the Maximum Likelihood or the Principal Factor centroids. Euclidean distances can be greatly influenced by variables that have the largest values. To preserve comparability final weights could be rescaled to sum up to one. Both involve a calculation of the matrix of second derivatives of the likelihood. One way around this problem is to standardise the variables. 15).79^2)/2. as in most American cities it is not possible to go directly between two points.24 = (0. Longman Scientific & Technical. which.) (2004): Handbook of Computational Statistics: Concepts and Methods. Springer. Social scientists may also find the shorter monograph by Dunteman (1989) helpful.g.itl. and Gentle. The name is based on the route that follows the grid of roads.64.nist. Mori.…. can be a very complicated function of . A description of practical computing methods came much later from Hotelling in 1933. 13 Other iterative methods include the NewtonRaphson algorithm and the scoring method. 2002. Jackson (1991) and Manly (1994). We present the method as it has been used in Cherchye et al.htm In a sample of n observations it is possible for a limited number to be so far separated in value from the remainder that they give rise to the suspicion that they may be from a different population. 123. e.Q. Marriott.
Note that constraints should not be given to the absolute value of weights but should be placed on the relative weights. the higher the degree of compensation between operators (in our case individual 36 This section is heavily based on Chapter 6 of Munda (2007). In decision theory literature. l j . 29 30 31 32 33 34 S x . For a discussion of the method and its applicability see Kaufmann et al. 1994. r . In 1991. in Moldan & Billharz. x j ( b ) = x j ( a ) 1 . in the multiplicative aggregation it is proportional to the relative score of the indicator with respect to the others. The exercise was carried out at the JRC through interviewing experts in the field. remain the same.. x. then the substitution rate at a of individual indicator j with respect to individual indicator r (taken as a reference) is the amount evaluations are: xl ( a ) = 37 38 S jr ( a ) such that country b. Therefore. and x r ( b ) = x r ( a ) + S jr ( a ) is S jr ( a ) is the amount which must be added to the reference indifferent to country a. p. 39 Data are not normalized.. holding all elements of Yc fixed. xQ are mutually preferentially independent if every subset Y of these variables is preferentially independent of its complementary set of evaluators. The results were consistent. x2. (1999). regardless of the levels at which Yc are held.28 Additional constraints could be imposed. individual indicator in order to compensate the loss of one unit on individual indicator j. 157 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 . While for additive aggregations the substitution rate is constant. The variables x1.. A subset of indicators Y is preferentially independent of Yc (the complement of Y) only if any conditional preference among elements of Y. 35 Compensability of aggregations is widely studied in fuzzy set theory. In our example we imposed the requirement that each individual indicator should take at least 10% and no more than 15% of the total weight. Countryspecific restrictions to reflect prior information can also be added. 241). Without this assumption a method of moments can be applied.. keeping the others constant. y Y . Normalization does not change the result of the multicriteria method whenever it does not change the ordinal information of the data matrix. 1997). whose xl ( b ). "… if we have two nonequal numbers to construct a vector in R2. Suppose that country a is evaluated according to some criteria/individual indicators ( x1 ( a ). 400 German experts were asked to allocate a budget to several environmental indicators related to an air pollution problem.© OECD 2008 . xQ ( a )) . The result of this approach is therefore relative weights or tradeoffs to be legitimately used in linear and geometric aggregations.. that is. see the note above.” (Podinovskii. z Y C . although the experts came from opposing social spheres like the industrial and the environmental sectors (Jesinghaus. ( q I q )( 1 ) (1 q ( 1 I q )) where is a parameter of compensation: . then it is preferable to place the greatest number in the position corresponding to the most important criterion. Maximum likelihood estimation requires the normality assumption... for example Zimmermann & Zysno (1983) use the geometric operator the larger indicators).y z =0.. this concept of weights is usually referred to as symmetrical importance.
AMOS and EQS are statistical packages performing SEM. Introductory information on Bayesian Networks can be found in Jensen (1996. more precision comes at the expenses of ad hoc threshold and weighting values. Garson. This webpage also contains a useful bibliography for Structural Equation Models. LISREL. Introduction to Bayesian Networks. and Neapolitan (2001. If the difference is less than x%. Structural Equation Modeling. Springer). see Saltelli et al. Learning Bayesian networks. However.ncsu.chass. http://www2. 2004. then give to the country with the highest score a much higher weight.. Furthermore. give nearly the same weight. The focus of the analysis thus is Rank (CI c ) rather than the raw value of the index CI c .© OECD 2008 . The multicriteria approach MCA produces ranks for countries.edu/garson/pa765/structur. For proof. no programme can take into account variables that are not included in an analysis.htm. Chapmann and Hall).40 To prevent this problem it is possible to set thresholds of this type: if the difference between two countries in the indicator I is more than x%. 41 42 43 44 45 158 HANDBOOK ON CONSTRUCTING COMPOSITE INDICATORS: METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE – ISBN 9789264043459 .
2.OECD PUBLICATIONS. 56327 2008 . rue AndréPascal. 75775 PARIS CEDEX 16 PRINTED IN FRANCE (30 2008 25 1 P) ISBN 9789264043459 – No.
AVAILABLE ON LINE Handbook on Constructing Composite Indicators METHODOLOGY AND USER GUIDE This Handbook is a guide for constructing and using composite indicators for policy makers. While there are several types of composite indicators. globalisation and innovation. send an email to SourceOECD@oecd. contact your librarian or. it contains a set of technical guidelines that can help constructors of composite indicators to improve the quality of their outputs. ISBN 9789264043459 30 2008 25 1 P ����������������������� :HSTCQE=UYXYZ^: . if you subscribe personally. this Handbook is concerned with those which compare and rank country performance in areas such as industrial competitiveness. sustainable development.org. If you do not yet have online access via your institution’s network. the media and other interested parties. In particular. Subscribers to this printed periodical are entitled to free online access. academics. The Handbook aims to contribute to a better understanding of the complexity of composite indicators and to an improvement of the techniques currently used to build them.
This action might not be possible to undo. Are you sure you want to continue?